TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual TM8000/TM8100 8200 Issue 4/MMA 00005 04 TM8100 4 MMA

TM8000/TM8100-8200 Service Manual Issue 4/MMA-00005-04 TM8100-8200 Service Manual Issue 4 MMA-00005-04 TM8100-8200 Service Manual Issue 4

User Manual: Pdf TM8000/TM8100-8200 Service Manual Issue 4/MMA-00005-04 TM8100-8200 Service Manual Issue 4

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 578

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

TM8100 mobiles
TM8200 mobiles

Service Manual

MMA-00005-04
Issue 4
June 2006

Contact Information

Intellectual Property Rights

Tait Radio Communications
Corporate Head Office
Tait Electronics Limited
P.O. Box 1645
Christchurch
New Zealand
For the address and telephone number of regional
offices, refer to the TaitWorld website:
Website: http://www.taitworld.com

This product may be protected by one or more patents
of Tait Electronics Limited together with their
international equivalents, pending patent applications
and registered trade marks: NZ338097, NZ508054,
NZ508340, NZ508806, NZ508807, NZ509242,
NZ509640, NZ509959, NZ510496, NZ511155,
NZ511421, NZ516280/519742, NZ519118,
NZ519344, NZ520650/537902, NZ521450,
NZ524509, NZ524537, NZ524630, NZ530819,
NZ534475, NZ534692, NZ535471, NZ536945,
NZ537434, NZ534369, NZ522236, NZ524378,
AU2003281447, AU2002235062, AU2004216984,
CA2439018, EU03784706.8, EU02701829.0,
EU04714053.8, GB23865476, GB2386010,
GB0516094.0, GB0516092.4, US09/847322, US60/
613748, US60/539617, US10/520827, US10/468740,
US5,745,840, US10/520827.

Technical Support
For assistance with specific technical issues, contact
Technical Support:
E-mail: support@taitworld.com
Website: http://support.taitworld.com

Copyright and Trademarks
All information contained in this manual is the property
of Tait Electronics Limited. All rights reserved.
This manual may not, in whole or in part, be copied,
photocopied, reproduced, translated, stored, or reduced
to any electronic medium or machine-readable form,
without prior written permission from Tait Electronics
Limited.
The word TAIT and the TAIT logo are trademarks of
Tait Electronics Limited.
All trade names referenced are the service mark,
trademark or registered trademark of the respective
manufacturers.

To Our European Customers
Tait Electronics Limited is an
environmentally responsible company
which supports waste minimization and
material recovery. The European Union’s
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
Directive requires that this product be disposed of
separately from the general waste stream when its
service life is over. Please be environmentally
responsible and dispose through the original supplier,
your local municipal waste “separate collection” service,
or contact Tait Electronics Limited.

Disclaimer
There are no warranties extended or granted by this
manual. Tait Electronics Limited accepts no
responsibility for damage arising from use of the
information contained in the manual or of the
equipment and software it describes. It is the
responsibility of the user to ensure that use of such
information, equipment and software complies with the
laws, rules and regulations of the applicable
jurisdictions.

Enquiries and Comments
If you have any enquiries regarding this manual, or any
comments, suggestions and notifications of errors,
please contact Technical Support.

Updates of Manual and Equipment
In the interests of improving the performance, reliability
or servicing of the equipment, Tait Electronics Limited
reserves the right to update the equipment or this
manual or both without prior notice.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Scope of Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Hardware and Software Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Associated Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Publication Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Alert Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Chapter 1 Description of the Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3 Circuit Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Chapter 2 Servicing the Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
4 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5 Disassembly and Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6 Servicing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
7 Power Supply Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
8 Interface Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
9 Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
10 Receiver Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
11 Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
12 Transmitter Fault Finding (25W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
13 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
14 Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display . . . . . . . . . . . 405
15 Fault Finding of Control Head with 1- 2- or 3-Digit Display . . . . . . 429
16 Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Chapter 3 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
17 TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
18 TMAA01-02 RS-232 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
19 TMAA01-05 Options-Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
20 TMAA02-02 DTMF Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
21 TMAA02-06 Support Kit for Concealed & Dynamic Microphones. . 493
22 TMAA02-07 Concealed Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
23 TMAA02-08 Keypad Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
24 TMAA03-02 Security Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
25 Installing a Remote Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
26 Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
27 TMAA04-04 Crossband Linking Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

28
29
30
31
32
33
34

TMAA04-05 Ignition Sense Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMAA10-01 Desktop Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMAA10-02 Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TMAA10-03 and TMAA10-06 High-Power Remote Speakers . . . .
TMAA10-04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10-05 Hands-Free Kit . .
TMAA10-07 Desktop Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

549
551
555
559
561
569
571

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Preface
Scope of Manual
This manual contains information to service technicians for carrying out
level-1 and level-2 repairs of TM8100 and TM8200 radios and accessories.
Level-1 repairs entail the replacement of faulty parts and circuit boards;
level-2 repairs entail the repair of circuit boards, with the exception of
certain special items on the boards. The manual does not cover level-3
repairs, which entail the repair of the special items.

Hardware and Software Versions
This manual describes the following hardware and software versions.
The IPNs (internal part numbers) of the boards are listed below; the last two
digits in the IPN represent the issue of the board. The board information in
this manual covers all production-issue boards up to the issue listed below.
■

Main board (A4 band) 25W

: 220-02074-04

■

Main board (B1 band) 25W

: 220-01700-11

■

Main board (B1 band) 50W

: 220-01723-02

■

Main board (C0 band) 25W

: 220-01742-04

■

Main board (D1 band) 25W

: 220-01717-02

■

Main board (H5 and H6 bands) 25W

: 220-01697-11

■

Main board (H5 and H7 bands) 40W

: 220-01722-02

■

Control-head board (1-digit display)

: 220-02070-01

■

Control-head board (2-digit display)

: 220-01699-03

■

Control-head board (3-digit display)

: 220-02151-02

■

Control-head board (graphical display)

: 220-01718-01

■

Control-head board (RJ45)

: 220-01720-05

■

Programming application (TM8100)

: version 2.92

■

Programming application (TM8200)

: version 2.1

■

Calibration application

: version 2.71

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Associated Documentation
The following associated documentation is available for this product:
Manuals

■
■
■
■
■
■

PCB Information

■
■

■

■
■

■

■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■

MMA-00002-xx
MMA-00003-xx
MMA-00051-xx
MMA-00028-xx
MMA-00006-xx
MMA-00004-xx

TM8100 User’s Guide
TM8200 User’s Guide
TM8235 User’s Guide
TM8100/TM8200 Installation Guide
TM8100 Operator’s Guide
TM8200 Operator’s Guide

MMA-00016-xx TM8100/TM8200 Main Board (A4) 25W
MMAB12-B1-00-814TM8100/TM8200 Main Board (B1) 25W
(board IPN 220-01700-05)
MMA-00031-xx TM8100/TM8200 Main Board (B1) 25W
(boards after IPN 220-01700-05)
MMA-00032-xx TM8100/TM8200 Main Board (D1) 25W
MMAB12-H5-00-814TM8100/TM8200 Main Board (H5/H6) 25W
(board IPN 220-01697-05)
MMA-00033-xx TM8100/TM8200 Main Board (H5/H6) 25W
(boards after IPN 220-01697-05)
MMA-00020-xx TM8100/TM8200 Main Board (B1) 50W
MMA-00021-xx TM8100/TM8200 Main Board (H5/H7) 40W
MMA-00035-xx TM8100 Control-Head Board (2-Digit Display)
MMA-00036-xx TM8100 Control-Head Board (1-Digit Display)
MMA-00015-xx TM8200 Control-head Board (Graphical Display)
MMA-00058-xx TM8200 Control-Head Board (3-Digit Display)
MMA-00034-xx TM8200 Control-Head Board (RJ45)
MMA-00037-xx
TM8100/TM8200 PCB Information
(printed, pre-punched and shrink wrapped;
comprises MMA-00015-xx, MMA-00016-xx,
MMA-00020-xx, MMA-00021-xx, MMA-00031xx, MMA-00032-xx, MMA-00033-xx, MMA00034-xx, MMA-00035-xx, MMA-00050-xx and
MMA-00058-xx).

The characters xx represent the issue number of the documentation.
All available documentation is provided on the
TM8100/TM8200 Service CD, product code TMAA20-01.
Updates may also be published on the Tait support website.
3DK Manuals

The following manuals are mainly of concern to third-party developers.
The manuals are supplied on the 3DK (third-party developer’s kit)
resource CD.
■

MMA-00011-xx

TM8100/TM8200 3DK Hardware Developer’s
Kit Application Manual

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

■

MMA-00014-xx

TMAA30-02 TM8000 3DK Application Board
Software Programmer’s Manual

■

MMA-00013-xx

TMAA30-02 TM8000 3DK Application Board
Service Manual

■

MMA-00038-xx

TM8100/TM8200 Computer-controlled Data
Interface Protocol Definition

Publication Record
Issue

Publication Date

Description

March 2005

first release

May 2005

update for 40W/50W radios

August 2005

update to board issue 10 (B1, H5 and H6 bands)
of 25W radios, incorporation of accessories
manual

June 2006

include TM8200 3-digit-display control head, A4
and C0 bands, and information on issue -05 main
board for B1, H5 and H6 bands

Alert Notices
Within this manual, four types of alerts are given to the reader: warning,
caution, important and note. The following paragraphs illustrate each type
of alert and its associated symbol.

Warning!!

This alert is used when there is a potential risk
of death or serious injury.

Caution

This alert is used when there is the risk of minor or
moderate injury to people.

Important

This alert is used to warn about the risk of equipment damage or malfunction.

Note

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

This alert is used to highlight information that is required to
ensure that procedures are performed correctly.

Abbreviations
Abbreviation

Description

ACP

Adjacent Channel Power

ADC

Analog-to-Digital Converter

AGC

Automatic Gain Control

ALC

Automatic Level Control

ASC

Accredited Service Centre

C4FM

Compatible Four-level Frequency Modulation

CCTM

Computer-Controlled Test Mode

CODEC

Coder-Decoder

CSO

Customer Service Organisation

CTCSS

Continuous-Tone-Controlled Subaudible Signaling

DAC

Digital-to-Analog Converter

Direct Current

DSP

Digital Signal Processor

DTMF

Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency

EPTT

External PTT (Press-To-Talk)

ESD

Electrostatic Discharge

FCL

Frequency Control Loop

Front-End

FEC

Forward Error Correction

FPGA

Field-Programmable Gate Array

GPIO

General Purpose Input/Output

GPS

Global Positioning System

GUI

Graphical User Interface

Integrated Circuit

IPN

Internal Part Number

Intermediate Frequency

In-Phase and Quadrature

ISC

International Service Centre

LCD

Liquid-Crystal Display

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Abbreviation

Description

LED

Light-Emitting Diode

LNA

Low-Noise Amplifier

Local Oscillator

LPF

Low-Pass Filter

NPN

Negative-Positive-Negative

Power Amplifier

PCB

Printed Circuit Board

PLL

Phase-Locked Loop

PNP

Positive-Negative-Positive

PSU

Power Supply Unit

PTT

Press-To-Talk

RISC

Reduced Instruction Set Computing

RSSI

Received Signal Strength Indication

SFE

Software Feature Enabler

SMA

Sub Miniature Version A

SMD

Surface-Mount Device

SMT

Surface-Mount Technology

SMPS

Switch-Mode Power Supply

SPI

Serial Peripheral Interface

TCXO

Temperature-Compensated Crystal Oscillator

TEL

Tait Electronics Limited

UHF

Ultra High Frequency

VCO

Voltage-Controlled Oscillator

VCXO

Voltage-Controlled Crystal Oscillator

VHF

Very High Frequency

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

TM8100 mobiles
TM8200 mobiles

Chapter 1
Description of the Radio

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Chapter 1 – Description of the Radio
1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.1

Frequency Bands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1.2

RF Output Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1.3

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

1.4

Product Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

1.5

Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

1.6

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.1

Mechanical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.2

User Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

2.3

Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

2.4

Hardware and Software Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

2.5

Operation in Receive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

2.6

Operation in Transmit Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Circuit Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.1

Transmitter Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

3.2

Receiver Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

3.3

Frequency Synthesizer Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

3.4

Frequency Control Loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

3.5

CODEC and Audio Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

3.6

Power Supply Circuitry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

3.7

Interface Circuitry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

3.8

Digital Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

3.9

Control-Head Board with Graphical Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

3.10 Control-Head Board with 1-, 2- or 3-Digit Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3.11 RJ45 Control Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Introduction
The TM8100 and TM8200 series is a range of high-performance
microprocessor-controlled radios for analog voice and data communication.
The radios are designed for installation in vehicles but can also be used in
desktop, remote-monitoring and similar applications.
This manual includes the information required for servicing the radio and
its accessories.
This section describes the different options available for:
■ frequency bands
■ RF output power
■ accessories
■ product codes.
This section also gives an overview of the labels on the product and the
specifications.

Figure 1.1

TM8200 mobile radios

TM8235 radio with 3-digit-display control head

TM8250 or TM8255 radio with graphical-display control head

TM8252 radio with RJ45 control head

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Introduction

Figure 1.2

TM8100 mobile radios

TM8115 radio with 2-digit-display control head

TM8110 radio with 1-digit-display control head

TM8105 radio with blank control head

rear view (25W radio)

Introduction

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

1.1

Frequency Bands
The radios are available in the following frequency bands:
■

66 to 88MHz (A4)

■

136 to 174MHz (B1)

■

174 to 225MHz (C0)

■

216 to 266MHz (D1)

■

400 to 470MHz (H5)

■

450 to 530MHz (H6)

■

450 to 520MHz (H7)

The frequency bands are implemented by different main boards in the radio
body. The control heads are identical for all frequency bands.

1.2

RF Output Power
The radio bodies are available with 40W/50W and 25W RF output power.
The two RF output power options are implemented by different main
boards in the radio body, mechanically different radio bodies, and different
power connectors. The control heads are identical for all RF output
power options.
The 40W/50W radio is available in the following frequency bands:
■

B1 (50W)

■

H5 (40W)

■

H7 (40W)

The 25W radio is available in the following frequency bands:
■

■

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Introduction

1.3

Accessories
Tait offers a large variety of audio accessories, installation kits, internal
options boards and other accessories such as a desktop power supply.
For more information on these accessories refer to “Chapter 3 Accessories”
on page 447.

Audio Accessories

Installation Kits

The radios allow for the connection of a comprehensive range of audio
accessories:
■

rugged microphone (standard)

■

DTMF microphone

■

keypad microphone

■

handset

■

concealed microphone (TM8200) and concealed microphone kit
(TM8100)

■

high-power remote speaker

■

remote PTT kit and hands-free kit.

The radio is delivered with a vehicle installation kit, including a U-bracket.
Installation of the radio is described in the user’s guide or the installation
guide.
Optional installation kits are:

Internal Options
Boards

■

remote control-head kit for remote installation of the control head

■

security bracket for secure and quick-release installation

■

ignition-sense kit.

The radio provides space for an internal options board inside the radio body
connecting to an internal options connector. An aperture for an external
options connector is also provided.
Tait offers the following internal options boards:
■

line-interface board

■

RS-232 board

■

options-extender board.

Control-Head
Options Boards

The radio provides space for a control-head options board inside the blank
control head of the TM8105 and TM8252 radios.

Desktop Power
Supply

A desktop power supply including the parts for mounting the radio is
available for desktop installations.

Introduction

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

1.4

Product Codes
This section describes the product codes used to identify products of the
TM8100 and TM8200 mobile radio product lines.

General

The product codes of the TM8100 and TM8200 mobile radio product lines
have the format:
TMAabc–ddee
where:

Radio Bodies

■

a identifies the product category:
A=accessory, B=radio body, C=control head, S=software feature

■

b, c, dd and ee identify specific product features.

The product codes of the radio bodies have the format:
TMABbc–ddee
where:

Control Heads

■

b identifies the architecture of the digital board:
1=conventional analog
2=conventional analog (dual-mode capability)
3 identifies the digital boards of the digital TM9100 product line.

■

c identifies the RF output power:
2=25W, 3=25W (trigger-base), 4=30 to 59W,
5=30 to 59W (trigger-base).

■

dd identifies the frequency band:
A4=66 to 88MHz, B1=136 to 174MHz, C0=174 to 225MHz,
D1=216 to 266MHz, H5=400 to 470MHz, H6=450 to 530MHz,
H7=450 to 520MHz.

■

ee identifies any radio options:
00=BNC RF connector, 01=mini-UHF RF connector

The product code of the control heads has the format:
TMACbc–dd
where:
■

b identifies the control-head type:
1=blank control head, 2=2-digit-display control head,
3=RJ45 control head, 4=graphical-display control head,
5=1-digit-display control head, 6=3-digit-display control head.

■

c identifies the control-head configuration:
0=no options, 4=RS-485 option
1 identifies the control-head configuration of the digital TM9100
product line.

■

dd identifies label and branding options:
0T=Tait, 0U=unbranded.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Introduction

1.5

Labels
Four external labels are attached to the bottom of the radio body:
■

compliance information

■

serial number and product code

■

hot surface safety warning

■

RF exposure safety warning.

1.6

TMAH6C

TAIT

Made in
New Zealand

Figure 1.3

Labels of the TM8100 and TM8200 product lines

N46

IC: 737A-TMAH6C
FCC ID: CASTMAH6C
Contains intellectual property licenced
by Digital Voice Systems Inc, Motorola
Inc and Tait Electronics Ltd.
Details in user documentation.

S/N 19061964
TMAB22-H600
450-530 MHz

Tait Electronics Ltd, NZ

Specifications
For up-to-date specifications, refer to the area on the TaitWorld website
reserved for TM8100 and TM8200 products.

Introduction

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Description
This section describes the mechanical design and architecture of the radio,
explains the operation of the transceiver and the control head, and gives
pinouts of the radio connectors.

2.1
Overview

Mechanical Design
The radio consists of the following main components:
■

control head B

■

radio body C.

Figure 2.1

Components of the radio

D
E

3068z_01

The control head B clips firmly to the front face of the radio body C,
where a seal E provides IP54 class protection. A control-head loom D
connects the control head to the radio body. Two dot-dash-dot marks at the
bottom of the radio body indicate the positions where a screwdriver is
applied to separate the control head from the radio body.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Description

2.1.1

Radio Body

Overview

The radio body consists of the following main components (see Figure 2.2
on page 21):
■

cover B

■

lid D

■

internal options board (optional)

■

chassis G

■

main-board assembly F.

Cover

The black plastic cover B wraps over the top and sides of the radio body.
Apertures in the sides of the cover allow access to the four external screw
bosses of the radio body used for mounting the radio to the U-bracket.

Lid

The aluminium lid D is attached to the chassis G with four M4x16 Torxhead screws C. A seal fitted inside a groove at the underside of the lid
provides for IP54 class protection. The rear of the lid has an aperture for an
external options connector, which may be fitted if an internal options board
is used. If no external options connector is used, the aperture is sealed with
a bung for IP54 class protection. The lid contains two of the four screw
bosses to attach the radio to the U-bracket of the installation kit.

Internal Options
Board (Optional)

On the inside of the lid, nine screw points are provided for mounting an
internal options board, which can be sized and shaped as required.
The internal options board connects to the internal options connector of
the main board. Tait offers a range of internal options board, which are
described in the accessories section of this manual. For more information on
how to create your own internal options board, contact Tait Electronics
Limited.

Chassis

The aluminium chassis g is different for the 40W/50W radio and the 25W
radio.
The chassis G houses the main-board assembly F, which is attached with
five screws E to screw bosses inside the chassis and with two screws I
through the rear of the chassis to the heat-transfer block.
The rear of the chassis has apertures for the RF, power and auxiliary
connectors of the main board. If the auxiliary connector is not used, the
aperture is sealed with a rubber bung J for IP54 class protection.
The RF connector has a rubber seal H which is fitted inside the aperture
for the RF connector.

Description

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 2.2

Components of the radio body

Cx4
D

Ex5
F

1)
thermal
paste

G
H
Ix2

J
3630z_01

B
C
D
E
F

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

cover
screw M4x16 (x4)
lid assembly
screw M3x10 (x5)
main-board assembly

G
H
I
J
1)

chassis
auxiliary connector bung
screws M4x16 (x2)
seal
gap pad (50W/40W radio only)

Description

The front of the chassis has an aperture for the control-head connector.
The control-head seal is fitted inside a groove around the flange at the front
face of the chassis and provides for IP54 class protection when the control
head is fitted. Two dot-dash-dot marks at the underside side of the chassis
indicate the leverage points for removing the control head from the
radio body.
The sides of the chassis contain two of the four screw bosses to attach the
radio to the U-bracket of the installation kit.
For heat dissipation, the chassis has heat fins at the rear, grooves at the
bottom, and holes in the front.
The heat fins at the rear of the 40W/50W radio are longer than those of the
25W radio. The grooves at the bottom of the 40W/50W radio are deeper
than those of the 25W radio.
For additional heat dissipation, the 40W/50W radio has an additional
L-shaped gap pad 1) between the chassis and the main board.

Description

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Main-Board
Assembly

The main-board assembly consists of the following components
(see Figure 2.3):
■

main board 1^ with SMT components, digital board D, shielding cans,
and connectors

■

heat-transfer block H

■

mounting and sealing elements for the connectors at the rear of the
radio body.

Figure 2.3

Components of the main-board assembly

Cx2
E

Bx3

D
1&

F
G
H
I
1!
1@

1^
1%

J
1)

thermal
paste

1$
1#
B
C

M3x10 screw (x3)
50W/40W radios:
M2.2x10 PT screw (x2)
25W radios:
K30x8 PT screw (x2)

D
E
F
G
H
I

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

digital board
internal options connector
auxiliary connector
inner foam D-range seal
heat-transfer block

3631z_01

J
1)
1!
1@
1#
1$
1%
1^
1&

D-range screwlock fastener (x2)
power connector seal
power connector
gap pad (50W/40W radio only)
hexagonal nut
lock washer
RF connector
main board
control-head connector

outer foam seal

Description

The main board 1^ is attached to the heat-transfer block H with three
M3x10 Torx-head screws B and the fastening elements J, 1# and 1$ of the
auxiliary and RF connectors.
The inner foam D-range seal G seals the auxiliary connector against the
heat-transfer block. The power connector seal 1) seals the power connector
against the heat-transfer block.
The power connector seal 1) of the 40W/50W radio (blue) is different to
the seal of the 25W radio (black).
Main Board

The main board 1^ is a printed circuit board in SMT design with
components on the top and bottom sides. A digital board D is reflowsoldered to the main board. Most components are shielded by metal cans.
There are different main boards for each frequency band and each RF
output power configuration.
The internal options connector E for connecting an internal options board
and the factory connector (not illustrated) for factory use are soldered to the
top side of the main board. The control-head connector 1& (facing the front
of the radio) and the auxiliary F, power 1! and RF 1% connectors (facing
the rear of the radio) are located on the bottom side of the main board.
The 40W/50W radio has a black power connector 1! and the 25W radio
has a white power connector.
For more information on the connectors, refer to “Connectors” on
page 36.
For heat dissipation, one of the screw bosses inside the chassis is in contact
with the underside of the main board. A larger copper plate at the underside
of the main board connects to the body of the heat-transfer block.
The 40W/50W radio has an additional gap pad between the heat-transfer
block and the main board 1^ which connects to an additional copper plate
at the bottom side of the main board.

Heat-Transfer Block

The aluminium heat-transfer block H dissipates heat from the main board
to the heat fins of the chassis. The heat-transfer block has a contact surface
to the larger copper plate at the underside of the main board 1^, and a
contact surface to the rear of the chassis. All contact surfaces are coated with
thermal paste.
Two self-adhesive foam seals G and I around the aperture of the auxiliary
connector on either side of the heat-transfer block and the power connector
seal 1) inside the aperture of the power connector are fitted to the heattransfer block.

Description

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

2.1.2

Control Head with Graphical Display

Overview

The control head can be divided into the following main areas:
■

front panel with control elements, indicators, LCD, speaker, and
concealed microphone (optional)

■

space-frame and seals

■

control-head board with SMT components, shielding cans, connectors,
and volume potentiometer

■

control-head loom with female-female adapter

■

adapter flange.

The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 2.4 on
page 27.
Front Panel
Assembly

The front panel assembly 1^ consists of an injection-moulded plastic part
with an integrated transparent light pipe element for the radio STATUS LEDs,
a transparent lens which cannot be replaced, a cloth membrane which is
fixed to the speaker grille, and a foam seal inside a rectangular LCD recess
behind the lens. A label 1* with the radio model number is attached to the
front panel assembly with self-adhesive coating and can be replaced for
rebranding purposes.
Three clips on the rear side of the front panel assembly snap onto the spaceframe to hold the keypads 1# and 1#, the LCD assembly 1@ and the speaker
1! in place. The rear side of the front panel assembly also has four screw
bosses to fasten the control-head board F.

Knob for
Volume-Control
Potentiometer

The knob for the volume-control potentiometer 1& is fitted to the shaft of
the volume-control potentiometer, which is soldered to the control-head
board F.

Keypads

The main keypad 1# (for the function, selection, and scroll keys) and the
power keypad 1$ protrude through apertures in the front panel assembly 1^.
The rear sides of these keypads connect directly to the relevant contacts on
the control-head board F.

LCD Assembly

The graphical-display LCD assembly 1@ sits on a foam seal inside a
rectangular recess of the front panel assembly 1^. Another foam seal is
attached to the rear of the LCD with self-adhesive coating. The LCD
assembly has a loom, which runs through a slot in the space-frame J and
connects to a connector on the rear side of the control-head board F.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Description

Speaker

The speaker 1! sits inside a round recess of the front panel assembly, where
a cloth membrane is fixed to the speaker grille. The speaker clamp 1) holds
the speaker in position. The speaker cable plugs into the speaker connector
on the rear side of the control-head board F.
Note

In some configurations the speaker may be disconnected.

Concealed
Microphone
(Optional)

A concealed microphone 1% consisting of the microphone capsule and a
rubber seal can be fitted in a round recess inside the front panel assembly 1^.
The microphone leads are soldered to two pads on the top side of the
control-head board. Before the microphone is fitted, a small hole is drilled
in the recess to provide an acoustic path to the microphone. The hole is
covered by the rubber seal to ensure that the control head remains sealed to
IP54 standards. For more information refer to “TMAA02-07 Concealed
Microphone” on page 501.

Space-Frame

The aluminium space-frame J snaps into the three clips of the front panel
assembly 1^. The front side of the space-frame holds the keypads, the LCD
assembly, and the speaker in place and at the same time allows access to their
electrical contacts. The rear side of the space-frame has four through-holes
for the screws E of the control-head board F and two screw bosses to fit
the adapter flange C. Two light pipes H and I are fitted in recesses in the
space-frame and direct light from LEDs on the control-head board to the
front panel. A slot at the top edge of the space-frame allows the loom of the
LCD assembly 1@ to run to the control-head board.

Seals

Two identical ring seals G fitted to grooves around the perimeter of the
space-frame provide for IP54 class protection.

Description

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 2.4

Components of the control head with graphical display

Bx2

D
Ex4

H
I

B
C

M4 x 12 Taptite screw (x2)

control-head loom assembly with
female-female adapter

E
F
G
H
I
J
1)
1!
1@
1#
1$
1%
1^
1&

3 x 10 PT screw (x4)

adapter flange

control-head board
space-frame seal (x2)
short light pipe
long light pipe
space-frame
speaker clamp
speaker
LCD assembly
main keypad
power keypad
concealed microphone (optional)
front panel assembly
knob for volume-control potentiometer

1%
1#
1$

3451z_02

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Description

Control-Head Board

The control-head board F is a printed circuit board in SMT design with
components on the top and bottom sides. Some SMT components are
shielded by metal cans.
The control-head board is fitted to the front panel assembly 1^ through the
space-frame J with four 3x10 PT screws E.
The side facing the radio body has the connectors for the connection of the
control-head loom, the LCD loom, the speaker, an optional control-head
options board, and pads for the leads of the optional concealed microphone.
Figure 2.5

Connectors of the control-head board

pads for leads of
concealed microphone

connector for speaker

connector for
loom of LCD assembly

connector for control-head
options board

connector for
control-head loom

The side facing the front panel has the volume-control potentiometer, the
microphone connector, the indicator and backlight LEDS, and the contacts
for the keypads.
Control-Head Loom

The control-head loom D connects the connector on the control-head
board to the control-head connector of the radio body. For more
information refer to “Control-Head Connectors” on page 42.

Adapter Flange

The adapter flange C is an injection-moulded plastic part, which is fitted to
the space-frame with two M4x12 Taptite screws B.

Description

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

2.1.3

Control Heads with 1-, 2- or 3-Digit Display

Overview

The control heads with 1-, 2- or 3-digit display can be divided into the
following main areas:
■

front panel with control elements, indicators, speaker, and optional
concealed microphone

■

space-frame

■

control-head board with SMT components, shielding cans, connectors,
and volume potentiometer

■

control-head loom with female-female adapter.

The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 2.6 on
page 31.
Front Panel
Assembly

The front panel assembly H consists of an injection-moulded plastic part
with an integrated transparent light pipe element for the radio STATUS LEDs,
a transparent lens which cannot be replaced, and a cloth membrane which
is fixed to the speaker grille. Depending on the type of control head, the
aperture on the lens is sized to display either one, two or three characters.
A label with the radio model number is attached to the front panel assembly
with self-adhesive coating and can be replaced for rebranding purposes.
Six clips on the space-frame G snap into corresponding locations on the
inside of the front panel assembly to hold the keypad 1@, the LCD 1!, and
the speaker J in place.

Knob for
Volume-Control
Potentiometer

The knob for the volume-control potentiometer I is fitted to the shaft of
the volume-control potentiometer, which is soldered to the control-head
board F.

Keypad

The keypad 1@ protrudes through apertures in the front panel assembly H.
The rear side of each key connects directly to the relevant contact on the
control-head board E. Four light pipes 1# and 1$ are fitted in the
appropriate recesses in the keypad and direct light from LEDs on the
control-head board to the front panel.

LCD

The LCD 1! sits inside a rectangular recess of the front panel assembly H
and is held in place by the space-frame G. Electrical contact between the
LCD and the control-head board is ensured by two elastomeric strips F
held in place by the space-frame.

Speaker

The speaker J sits inside a round recess of the front panel assembly, where
a cloth membrane is fixed to the speaker grille. The space-frame G holds
the speaker in position. The speaker cable plugs into the speaker connector
on the rear side of the control-head board E.
Note

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

In some configurations the speaker may be disconnected.

Description

Concealed
Microphone
(Optional)

A concealed microphone 1) consisting of the microphone capsule and a
rubber seal can be fitted in a round recess inside the front panel assembly H.
The microphone leads are soldered to two pads on the top side of the
control-head board E. Before the microphone is fitted a small hole is drilled
in the recess to provide an acoustic path to the microphone. The hole is
covered by the rubber seal to ensure that the control head remains sealed to
IP54 standards. For more information refer to “TMAA02-06 Support Kit
for Concealed & Dynamic Microphones” on page 493.

Space-Frame

The plastic space-frame G clips into the six recesses inside the front panel
assembly H. The front side of the space-frame holds the keypad (with the
four light pipes), the LCD, and the speaker in place and at the same time
allows access to their electrical contacts. The rear side of the space-frame has
three holes for the screws D of the control-head board E.

Control-Head Board

The control-head board E is a printed circuit board in SMT design with
components on the top and bottom sides. There are different boards for the
control heads with 1-, 2- and 3-digit display.s
The control-head board is clipped and then fitted to the space-frame G with
three 3x8 PT screws D.
The side facing the radio body has the connectors for the connection of the
control-head loom B, the speaker, an optional control-head options board
C, and pads for the leads of the optional concealed microphone 1).
The side facing the front panel has the volume-control potentiometer, the
microphone connector, the indicator and backlight LEDs, the contacts for
the keypads, and the LCD.

Control-Head Loom

Description

The control-head loom B with the female-female adapter connects the
connector on the control-head board E to the control-head connector of
the radio body. For more information refer to “Control-Head Connectors”
on page 42.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 2.6

Components of the control head (1-, 2- or 3-digit display)

B
B
Dx3

H
I

E
1!
x2

F
J

J
1)

1$
1#

3828z_01

B
C
D
E
F
G
H

control-head loom with female-female adapter
control-head options board (optional)
3 x 8 PT screw (x3)
control-head board
elastomeric strip (x2)
space-frame
front panel assembly

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

I
I
J
1)
1!
1@
1#
1$

knob for volume-control potentiometer
speaker
concealed microphone (optional)
LCD
keypad
short light pipe
long light pipe

Description

2.1.4

RJ45 Control Head
The RJ45 control head consists of the following parts:
■

front panel

■

control-head loom with female-female adaptor

■

control-head board

■

PCB bracket.

The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 2.7 on
page 33.
Front Panel

The front panel F is an injection-moulded plastic part with two apertures
for the fitted programming connector and a second optional RJ45
connector. When not in use, the apertures are sealed with two RJ45 bungs
F to ensure that the control head is sealed to IP54 standards. There is also a
hole for the POWER ON/OFF LED which illuminates through the label.
A label with the model number is attached to the front panel with selfadhesive coating and can be replaced for rebranding purposes.
The rear side of the front panel has four screw bosses to fasten the PCB
bracket E.

Control-Head Loom

The control-head loom C with the female-female adapter connects the
connector on the control-head board B to the control-head connector of
the radio body. For more information refer to “Control-Head Connectors”
on page 42.

Control-Head Board

The control-head board B is a printed circuit board in SMT design with
some hand-soldered parts.
All components are placed on the top side, including the programming
connector, the connector for the control-head loom C, and the
POWER ON/OFF LED.
The control-head board slides into a slot in the front panel and slots in the
PCB bracket E, and is held in place by two clips of the PCB bracket E.

PCB Bracket

Description

The PCB bracket E is an injection-moulded plastic part which is fitted to
the front panel F with four 3x8 PT screws D.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 2.7

Components of the RJ45 control head

C
Dx4
E

G x2
B
C
D

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

control-head board
control-head loom with female-female adapter
3 x 8 PT screw (x4)

E
F
G

PCB bracket
front panel
RJ45 bung (x2)

Description

2.1.5

Blank Control Head
The blank control head consists of the following parts:
■

front panel

■

control-head loom with programming connector

■

seals.

The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 2.8 on
page 34.
Front Panel

The front panel E is an injection-moulded plastic part with an aperture for
fitting the programming connector, which is part of the control-head loom
G. A label with the model number is attached to the front panel with selfadhesive coating and can be replaced for rebranding purposes.

Control-Head Loom

The programming connector at one end of the control-head loom and a
foam seal F are screwed to the front panel with a pair of lock-nuts D.
When the programming connector is not in use, the seal C is fitted with
two screws B to ensure that the control head is sealed to IP54 standards.
The control-head loom with the female-female adapter connects to the
control-head connector of the radio body. For more information refer to
“Control-Head Connectors” on page 42.
There is provision in the blank control head for the fitting of a custom circuit
board.

Figure 2.8

Components of the blank control head
x2

B
G

x2 D

3/16 inch (5mm)
4lb·in (0.45N·m)

E
3829z_01

B
C
D

UNX 4-40 x 3/16-inch pan Pozi screw (x2)
cover seal
lock-nut (pair)

Description

E
F
G

front panel
foam seal
control-head loom with female-female adapter

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

2.2

User Interfaces
Figure 2.9 shows the controls and indicators of the user interfaces. For more
information refer to the following user’s guides:
■

TM8100 (1-digit and 2-digit-display control head)

■

TM8250/TM8255 (graphical-display control head)

■

TM8235 (3-digit-display control head).

Some keys have functions assigned to both short and long key presses.
A short key press is less than one second, and a long key press is more than
one second.
Figure 2.9

User interfaces

press-to-talk
(PTT) key
radio status LEDs

microphone

green
red amber
speaker

display
on/off key
volume
control

microphone
socket

function keys
1 to 4

scroll keys
left
selection key

right
selection key

display

radio status LEDs
green
speaker
red amber

on/off key
volume
control
microphone
socket

1- and 2-digit-display
control head:
function keys 1to 4
3-digit-display
control head: function key 1

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

scroll keys

clear key

shift key function key 2

Description

2.3

Connectors
This section describes the specifications and pinouts of the connectors of the
radio body and the control head.

Overview

Figure 2.10 provides an overview of the connectors:
Figure 2.10

Connectors (radio with graphical-display control head)

Volume
Control

Control-Head
Options Connector
RF Connector

Microphone
Connector

Control-Head
Options Board

Control-Head
Loom
Keys

Control-Head
Connector

Control-Head
Board

Main Board

Internal
Options
Connector

Power
Connector

LCD

LEDs

Internal
Options
Loom

Pads for
Concealed
Microphone
Speaker
Connector
Factory
Connector
(Factory Only)

Speaker

Auxiliary
Connector

Internal
Options
Board

External
Options
Connector

Speaker
Leads

Figure 2.11 shows the connectors of the radio body.
Figure 2.12 shows the connectors of the control head.
For information on the factory connector of the main board and the internal
connectors of the control head, refer to the PCB information of the main
boards and the control-head board.

Description

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 2.11

Connectors of the radio body (25W radio)

front view
control-head
connector
provision for
external options
connector

provision for
additional
connector

rear view
auxiliary
connector

power
connector

RF
connector
internal options
connector

top view

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Description

Figure 2.12

Connectors of the control head with graphical display

front view
microphone
connector

control-head
connector

rear view without adapter flange

Figure 2.13

Connectors of the control head with 1-, 2- or 3-digit display

microphone
connector

front view
connector for speaker

control-head
connector

rear view
pads for leads of
concealed microphone

Description

connectors for
optional circuit board

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

2.3.1

RF Connector
The RF connector is the primary RF interface to the antenna. The RF
connector is a BNC connector or a mini-UHF connector with an
impedance of 50Ω.
Important

Table 2.1

The maximum RF input level is +27dBm. Higher levels
may damage the radio.

RF connector - pins and signals

Pinout

Signal Type

RF analog

GND

RF ground

rear view

2.3.2

Signal Name

Power Connector
The power connector is the interface for the primary 13.8V power source
and the external speaker. The primary power source can be the vehicle
battery or a mains-fed DC power supply. There are different power
connectors for the 40W/50W and 25W radios.
Important

Table 2.2

The speaker load configuration is balanced; the speaker
output lines must not be connected to ground. Connecting
a speaker output line to ground will cause audio power
amplifier shutdown

Power connector (radio) – pins and signals

Pinout

Signal name
AGND

Earth return for radio body power
source.

Ground

SPK–

External speaker output. Balanced load
configuration.

Analog

SPK+

External speaker output. Balanced load
configuration.

Analog

13V8_BATT

DC power input for radio body and
control head.

Power

25W radio
1

Signal type

50W/40W radio

rear view

Description

rear view

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Description

2.3.3

Auxiliary Connector
The auxiliary connector is the standard interface for external devices that are
typically connected to a radio. The auxiliary connector is a 15-way
standard-density D-range socket. The auxiliary connector provides a serial
port, three programmable input lines, four programmable digital I/O lines
and audio I/O.
The I/O lines can be programmed for a variety of functions, logic levels,
and in some cases, direction. Audio lines can also be programmed to tap
into, or out of, different points in the audio processing chain. For more
information refer to the online help of the programming application.

Table 2.3

Auxiliary connector – pins and signals

Pinout

B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I

J
1)
1!
1@
1#
1$
1%

rear view

Signal name

Description

Signal type

AUX_GPI1

General purpose digital input.
Programmable function.

Digital, 3V3 CMOS

AUX_GPI2

General purpose digital input.
Programmable function.
With LK3 fitted, GPI2 is an
emergency power sense input.a

Digital, 3V3 CMOS

AUX_GPI3

General purpose digital input.
Programmable function.
With LK2 fitted, GPI3 is a power
sense input.a

Digital, 3V3 CMOS

AUX_GPIO4

AUX_GPIO5

AUX_GPIO6

Programmable function and
direction.
Pads available to fit a higher power
driver transistor on GPIO4 line

Digital, 3V3 CMOS
input; open collector
output with pullup

AUX_GPIO7

AUX_TXD

Asynchronous serial port Transmit data

Digital, 3V3 CMOS

AUX_RXD

Asynchronous serial port Receive data

Digital, 3V3 CMOS

AUD_TAP_IN

Programmable tap point into the Rx
or Tx audio chain. DC-coupled.

Analog

AUD_TAP_OUT

Programmable tap point out of the
Rx or Tx audio chain. DC-coupled.

Analog

AUX_MIC_AUD Auxiliary microphone input.
Electret microphone biasing
provided. Dynamic microphones are
not supported.

Analog

RSSI

Analog RSSI output.

Analog

+13V8_SWb

Switched 13.8V supply. Supply is
switched off when radio body is
switched off.

Power

AGND

Analog ground

Ground

a. For more information on hardware links refer to “Power-Sense Options” on page 83.
b. Can be switched or unswitched. For more information refer to “Connector Power Supply Options” on page 86.

Description

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

2.3.4

Internal Options Connector
When installing an internal options board, the internal options connector is
the electrical interface to the main board of the radio body.
The internal options connector provides similar I/O to the auxiliary
connector. The internal options connector is an 18-pin 0.1 inch pitch
Micro-MaTch connector.
Important

Table 2.4

The digital I/O signals are intended to interface directly
with compatible logic signals only. Do not connect these
signals to external devices without appropriate signal conditioning and ESD protection.

Internal options connector – pins and signals

Pinout

CB
ED
GF
IH
1)J
1@1!
1$1#
1^1%
1*1&
top view

Signal

Description

Signal type

13V8_SWa

Switched 13V8 supply. Supply is switched Power
off when the Radio Body is switched off.

AUD_TAP_OUT

Programmable tap point out of the Rx or
Tx audio chain. DC-coupled.

Analog

AGND

Analog ground.

Ground

AUX_MIC_AUD Auxiliary microphone input.
Analog
Electret microphone biasing provided.
Dynamic microphones are not supported.

RX_BEEP_IN

Receive sidetone input. AC-coupled.

AUD_TAP_IN

Programmable tap point into the Rx or Tx Analog
audio chain. DC-coupled.

RX_AUD

Receive audio output. Post volume
control. AC-coupled.

Analog

RSSI

Analog RSSI output.

Analog

9…15 IOP_GPIO1…7

Analog

General-purpose port for input and
Digital.
output of data. Programmable function
3V3 CMOS
and direction. With LK4 fitted, GPIO7 is a
power sense inputb.

DGND

Digital ground.

Ground

IOP_RXD

Asynchronous serial port - Receive data.

Digital.
3V3 CMOS

IOP_TXD

Asynchronous serial port - Transmit data.

Digital.
3V3 CMOS

a. Can be switched or unswitched. For more information refer to “Connector Power Supply Options” on page 86.
b. For more information on hardware links refer to“Power-Sense Options” on page 83.

2.3.5

Provision for External Options Connector
The radio has a mechanical interface for the external connector of an
internal options board. This external options connector can be a 9-way
standard-density or 15-way high-density D-range connector. If no internal
options board is installed (standard configuration), the hole for the external
options connector is sealed by a bung.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Description

2.3.6

Control-Head Connectors
The control-head loom connects the connector on the front of the radio
body to the connector on the rear of the control head.
The connector on the front of the radio body is an 18-way two-row rightangled IDC (insulation displacement connector) SMD header socket.
The connector on the rear of the control head is an 18-way 0.1 inch pitch
Micro-MaTch SMD socket.

Table 2.5

Control-head connectors – pins and signals

Pinout

Signal

RX_AUD

Analog

CEGI1)1@1$1^1*
BDFHJ1!1#1%1&

Receive audio output. Post volume
control. AC-coupled.

+13V8a

Power

front view
of radio body

Power supply output from radio body
power source.

CH_TXD

Asynchronous serial port Transmit data.

Digital. 3V3 CMOS.

CH_PTT

PTT input from microphone.
Also carries the hookswitch signal.

Digital

CH_MIC_AUD Fist microphone audio input.

Analog

AGND

Analog ground.

Ground

CH_RXD

Asynchronous serial port - Receive data. Digital. 3V3 CMOS.

DGND

Digital ground.

Ground

CH_ON_OFF

Hardware power on/softwarecontrolled power off input. Active low.

Digital

VOL_WIP_DC

DC signal from volume pot wiper
(grounded for graphical display).

Analog

CH_SPI_DO

Data output signal to control head.

Digital. 3V3 CMOS.

CH_LE

Latch enable output to control head.

Digital. 3V3 CMOS.

CH_GPIO1

General purpose digital input/output.

Digital. 3V3 CMOS
input.
Open collector
output with pullup.

+3V3

Power supply to control head digital
circuits.

Power

CH_SPI_DI

Data input from control head.

Digital. 3V3 CMOS.

CH_SPI_CLK

Clock output to control head.

Digital. 3V3 CMOS.

SPK–

Speaker audio output for non-remote
control head. Balanced load
configuration.

Analog

SPK+

Speaker audio output for non-remote
control head. Balanced load
configuration.

Analog

CB
ED
GF
IH
1)J
1@1!
1$1#
1^1%
1*1&
top view of
control-head
board

Description

Signal type

a. Can be switched or unswitched. For more information refer to “Connector Power Supply Options” on page 86.

Description

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

2.3.7

Microphone Connector
The microphone connector of the control head is an RJ45 socket.
When the control head is connected to the control-head connector of the
radio body using the loom provided, the microphone connector uses the
following eight control-head connector signals:

Table 2.6

Microphone connector – pins and signals

Pinout

Signal name

Description

Signal type

MIC_RX_AUD Receive audio output.

Analog

+13V8a

Power supply output. Switched off
when radio body is switched off.

Power

MIC_TXD

Asynchronous serial port Transmit data.

3.3V CMOS

MIC_PTT

PTT input from microphone. Also carries Digital
hookswitch signal.

MIC_AUD

Fist microphone audio input.

Analog

AGND

Analog ground.

Analog ground

MIC_RXD

Asynchronous serial port - Receive data. 3.3V CMOS

MIC_GPIO1

General purpose digital input/output.

front view

Open collector out
3.3V CMOS in

a. Can be switched or unswitched. For more information refer to “Connector Power Supply Options” on page 86.

2.3.8

Programming Connector (RJ45 Control Head)
The programming connector of the RJ45 control head is an RJ45 socket.
When the RJ45 control head is connected to the radio body, the
programming connector uses the following signals.

Table 2.7

Programming connector – pins and signals

Pinout

Signal name

Signal type

PRG_RX_AUD

Receive audio output.

Analog

+13V8a

Power supply output. Switched off
when radio body is switched off.

Power

PRG_TXD

Asynchronous serial port Transmit data.

3.3V CMOS

PRG_PTT

PTT input from microphone.
Also carries hookswitch signal.

Digital

PRG_MIC_AUD

Fist microphone audio input.

Analog

AGND

Analog ground

Ground

PRG_RXD

Asynchronous serial port Receive data.

3.3V CMOS

PRG_ON_OFF

Hardware power on/software-power Digital
off input. Active low.

front view

Description

a. Can be switched or unswitched. For more information refer to “Connector Power Supply Options” on page 86.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Description

2.3.9

Programming Connector (Blank Control Head)
The programming connector of the blank control head is a 9-way standarddensity D-range plug.
When the blank control head is connected to the radio body, the
programming connector uses the following signals.

Table 2.8

Programming connector – pins and signals

Pinout

front view

Signal name

Description

Signal type

PRG_RX_AUD

Receive audio output.

Analog

PRG_TXD

Asynchronous serial port Transmit data.

3.3V CMOS

PRG_MIC_AUD

Fist microphone audio input.

Analog

PRG_RXD

Asynchronous serial port Receive data.

3.3V CMOS

PRG_ON_OFF

Hardware power on/software-power Digital
off input. Active low.

+13V8a

Power supply output. Switched off
when radio body is switched off.

Power

PRG_PTT

PTT input from microphone.
Also carries hookswitch signal.

Digital

AGND

Analog ground

Ground

DGND

Digital ground

Ground

a. Can be switched or unswitched. For more information refer to “Connector Power Supply Options” on page 86.

Description

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

2.4

Hardware and Software Architecture
This section describes the hardware and software modules of the radio and
their interaction in the functioning of the radio.

Overview

2.4.1

Hardware Architecture
The electrical hardware of the radio is implemented on a main board inside
the radio body and a control-head board inside the control head.
For a detailed description and block diagrams of individual circuits, refer to
“Circuit Descriptions” on page 19.

Main Board

The main board inside the radio body includes the following circuitry:
■

transmitter

■

receiver

■

frequency synthesizer

■

digital board with a RISC processor and custom logic (implemented on
an FPGA), memory, and a DSP

■

CODEC and audio

■

interface

■

power supply.

The main board has an internal options connector which allows internal
options boards to access a variety of discrete and programmable signals.
For more information refer to “Internal Options Connector” on page 41.
For a basic block diagram of the main board, refer to Figure 2.14 on
page 46.
For a more detailed block diagram of the transceiver, refer to Figure 2.16 on
page 51.
Control-Head Board

The control-head board of the control head with graphical display includes:
■

the circuitry needed for the controls and indicators on the front panel

■

with a RISC processor and custom logic (implemented on an FPGA),
and memory.

For a block diagram of this control-head board, refer to Figure 3.14 on
page 93.
The control head with graphical display may have a concealed microphone
inside the control head and also has provision for a separate circuit board that
may be designed to perform a variety of tasks including—but not limited
to—Bluetooth connectivity. No separate circuit board is required for a
dynamic microphone.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Description

RF Connector

Receiver

part of transmitter circuitry

part of CODEC and audio circuitry

digital-to-analog converter

Transmitter

PIN
1)
Switch

analog-to-digital converter

LPF

Main Board

RF
analog
digital
asynchronous serial data
synchronous serial data

Frequency
Synthesizer
Custom
Logic

RISC
Proc.

FPGA

DSP

Flash
Memory

SRAM

Serial
Flash

Digital Board

Power Supply

CODEC
and Audio

Interface

Internal Options
Connector

Auxiliary
Connector

Control-Head
Connector

Power
Connector

Figure 2.14
Hardware architecture of the main board

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

2.4.2

Software Architecture

Overview

Software plays an important role in the functioning of the radio. Some radio
functions such as the graphical user interface, processing of the analog and
digital signals, and the implementation of radio applications are completely
implemented by software.
For a block diagram of the software architecture, refer to Figure 2.15 on
page 48.

Software Modules

The following software modules are stored on the digital board of the main
board:
■

FPGA image, which includes the software-implemented RISC processor
and the custom logic (the custom logic executes additional digital signal
processing)

■

boot code

■

radio application code

■

digital signal processing

■

radio application database and radio calibration database.

The following software modules are stored on the control-head board with
graphical display:
■

FPGA image, which includes the software-implemented RISC processor

■

boot code

■

control-head application code

■

control-head application database.

Hardware and interface drivers are part of the boot code, the RISC code,
and—in the case of the main board—the DSP code.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Description

Database

Flash
Memory

Boot Code

Serial
Flash

Application Code

Software architecture (radio with graphical-display control head shown)

FPGA Image

Figure 2.15

FPGA

Serial Flash

FPGA Image

RISC Processor
Flash Memory

Control-Head Application Code

Boot Code

Boot Code
Radio Application
Code

Boot Code
Radio Application Code
Database
DSP Code

Custom Logic

DSP
DSP Code

Additional Digital
Signal Processing

RISC Proc.

SRAM

FPGA Image

SRAM

FPGA

Dynamic Memory
Dynamic
Memory

Software Start-Up

When the radio is turned on, the following processes are carried out on the
main board:
Note

Description

This process describes the software start-up into normal radio
operation mode.

The FPGA image, which includes the RISC processor and the custom logic, is loaded from the serial flash to the FPGA.

The RISC processor executes the boot code, which carries out an
initialization and auto-calibration, and—in the case of a fault—
generates an error code for display on the control head.

Normal radio operation starts with:
■

the RISC processor executing the radio application code,
including application software

■

the DSP executing the DSP code for processing of digital signals

■

the custom logic executing additional digital signal processing.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

When the radio is turned on, the following processes are carried out on the
control-head board of the control head with graphical display:
1.

The FPGA image, which includes the RISC processor, is loaded from
the serial flash to the FPGA.

The RISC processor executes the boot code, which carries out an
initialization, and—in the case of a fault—generates an error code for
display on the control head.

Normal radio operation starts with the RISC processor executing
■

the graphical user interface

■

the I/O processing

■

the user interface processing.

During normal radio operation the radio body and control head
communicate via interface software, which is part of the radio and controlhead application software.
Software Shutdown

On shutdown, the programming and calibration data is stored in the
database, and power is removed from the radio.
Important

On power loss, any changes made to the programming or
calibration data may be lost.

Programming and
Calibration Files

One of the servicing tasks is the downloading and uploading of
programming and calibration files to the database. For more information,
refer to “Servicing Procedures” on page 149 and the online help of the
programming and calibration applications.

Software Upgrades

During servicing it may become necessary to upload software to a
replacement main board, control head, or control head board using the
Tools > Options > Download command of the programming application.
For more information, refer to the online help of the programming
application and to the technical notes accompanying the software files.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Description

2.5

Operation in Receive Mode

Overview

This section describes the functioning of the transceiver in receive mode.
The operation of the transceiver is illustrated in Figure 2.16 on page 51.
These block diagrams show the hardware modules integrated with the
software modules:
■

hardware (transmitter, receiver, CODEC and audio)

■

RISC processor (on FPGA of digital board)

■

custom logic (on FPGA of digital board)

■

DSP (on digital board).

The receive path consists of three major functional parts:

Description

■

RF hardware

■

digital baseband processing

■

audio processing and signalling.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Antenna

LPF

Dir.
Coup.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Fin

Pwr
Ctrl

Bias

Front
End

PLL

VCXO

Loop
Filter

Digital
Downconverter

RX
AGC

2nd IF:
64 kHz
Second LO
UHF: 90.328 MHz
VHF: 42.928 MHz

VCO*

Quad
Demod

TCXO:
13.000 MHz

Hardware

Drv
/Ex

Phase
locked to
TCXO

1st
IF

IF:
UHF: 45.1 MHz
VHF: 21.4 MHz
FM
Demod

Ramp
Control

Frequency
Control

Triple-point
Equalization

Custom
Logic

Channel
LPF

Mag.

Deemphasis

Preemphasis

Key

System interface

Mic
FGA

Audio
PA

Power

Control
Head

Auxiliary

Control
Head

For UHF there are separate VCOs for RX and TX

(2) VHF configuration shown*

Mic
PGA

Hardware

Secondary
Volume
Control

(1) Noise blanker not shown

Notes

ALC

Side
Tones

Primary
Volume
Control

Digital-to-analog conversion

Tx
Interface

Optional
Processing

DSP

Optional
Processing

Rx
Interface

Analog-to-digital conversion

RISC Processor

Data and Signaling
Encoders

Audio
Filtering

Squelch

Data and Signaling
Decoders

Audio
Filtering

RSSI

RISC Processor

Figure 2.16
Transceiver operation

Description

2.5.1

RF Hardware

PIN Switch

The RF PIN switch circuitry selects the RF path to and from the antenna
to either the Tx or Rx circuitry of the radio. In addition to the switching
functionality, the PIN switch is used to provide attenuation to the Rx front
end in high signal-strength locations.

Front End and
First IF

The front-end hardware amplifies and image-filters the received RF
spectrum, then down-converts the desired channel frequency to a first
intermediate frequency (IF1) of 21.4MHz (VHF) or 45.1MHz (UHF)
where coarse channel filtering is performed. The first LO signal is obtained
from the frequency synthesizer and is injected on the low side of the desired
channel frequency for all bands. In receive mode, the modulation to the
frequency synthesizer is muted. See “Frequency Synthesizer” on page 57 for
a description of the frequency synthesizer. The output of the first IF is then
down-converted using an image-reject mixer to a low IF of 64kHz.

Quadrature
Demodulator

The LO for the image-reject mixer (quadrature demodulator) is synthesized
and uses the TCXO as a reference. This ensures good centring of the IF
filters and more consistent group-delay performance. The quadrature
demodulator device has an internal frequency division of 2 so the second
LO operates at 2 x (IF1+64kHz). The quadrature output from this mixer is
fed to a pair of ADCs with high dynamic range where it is oversampled at
256kHz and fed to the custom logic device.

Automatic Gain
Control

The AGC is used to limit the maximum signal level applied to the imagereject mixer and ADCs in order to meet the requirements for
intermodulation and selectivity performance. Hardware gain control is
performed by a variable gain amplifier within the quadrature demodulator
device driven by a 10-bit DAC. Information about the signal level is
obtained from the IQ data output stream from the ADCs. The control loop
is completed within the custom logic. The AGC will begin to reduce gain
when the combined signal power of the wanted signal and first adjacent
channels is greater than about -70dBm. In the presence of a strong adjacentchannel signal it is therefore possible that the AGC may start acting when
the wanted signal is well below -70dBm.

Noise Blanking
(A4, B1 bands only)

With frequency bands between 66 and 174MHz, a noise blanker can be
selected to remove common sources of electrical interference such as vehicle
ignition noise. The noise blanker functions by sampling the RF input to the
receiver for impulse noise and momentarily disconnecting the first LO for
the duration of the impulse. The response time of the noise blanker is very
fast (tens of nanoseconds) and is quicker than the time taken for the RF
signal to pass through the front-end hardware, so that the LO is disabled
before the impulse reaches the IF stage where it could cause crystal
filter ring.

Description

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

2.5.2

Digital Baseband Processing

Custom Logic

The remainder of the receiver processing up to demodulation is performed
by custom logic. The digitized quadrature signal from the RF hardware is
digitally down-converted to a zero IF and channel filtering is performed at
baseband. Different filter shapes are possible to accommodate the various
channel spacings and data requirements. These filters provide the bulk of
adjacent channel selectivity for narrow-band operation. The filters have
linear phase response so that good group-delay performance for data is
achieved. The filters also decimate the sample rate down to 48kHz.
Custom logic also performs demodulation, which is multiplexed along with
AGC and amplitude data and fed via a single synchronous serial port to the
DSP. The stream is demultiplexed and the demodulation data used as an
input for further audio processing.

Noise Squelch

The noise squelch process resides in the DSP. The noise content above and
adjacent to the voice band is measured and compared with a preset
threshold. When a wanted signal is present, out-of-band noise content is
reduced and, if below the preset threshold, is indicated as a valid wanted
signal.

RSSI

Receive signal strength is measured by a process resident in the DSP.
This process obtains its input from the demodulator (RF signal magnitude
value) and from the AGC (present gain value). With these two inputs and a
calibration factor, the RF signal strength at the antenna can be accurately
calculated.

Calibration

The following items within the receiver path are factory-calibrated:
■

front-end tuning

■

AGC

■

noise squelch

■

RSSI.

Information on the calibration of these items is given in the on-line help
facility of the calibration application.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Description

2.5.3

Audio Processing and Signalling

Audio Processing

Raw demodulated data from the receiver is processed within the DSP.
The sample rate at this point is 48kHz with signal bandwidth limited only
by the IF filtering. Scaling (dependent on the bandwidth of the RF channel)
is then applied to normalize the signal level for the remaining audio
processing. The sample rate is decimated to 8kHz and 0.3 to 3kHz bandpass
audio filtering is applied. De-emphasis is then applied to cancel out the
receive signals pre-emphasized response and improve signal to noise
performance. Optional processing such as decryption or companding is then
applied if applicable.

Data and Signalling
Decoders

The data and signalling decoders obtain their signals from various points
within the audio processing chain. The point used depends on the decoders’
bandwidth and whether de-emphasis is required. Several decoders may be
active simultaneously.

Side Tones

Side tones are summed in at the end of the audio processing chain. These are
tones that provide some form of alert or give the user confidence an action
has been performed. The confidence tones may be generated in receive or
transmit mode. The sidetone level is a fixed proportion (in the order of
-10dB) relative to full scale in the receive path.

CODEC

The combined audio and side-tone signal is converted to analog form by a
16-bit DAC with integral anti-alias filtering. This is followed by a
programmable-gain amplifier with 45dB range in 1.5dB steps, that performs
primary volume control and muting. The DAC and primary volume control
are part of the same CODEC device (AD6521).

Output to Speakers

The output of the CODEC is fed to an audio power amplifier via a
secondary volume control (not TM8100 radios) and to the control head via
a buffer amplifier. The output configuration of the audio power amplifier is
balanced and drives an internal speaker in non-remote control-head
configuration and, optionally, an external speaker. The speaker loads are
connected in parallel rather than being switched. The power delivered to
each speaker is limited by its impedance. The internal speaker has 16Ω
impedance whereas the external speaker can be as low as 4Ω.

Volume Control
Configurations

There are two volume controls in the TM8200 radio but only one is active
at any time when audio is being output to the speaker(s). The inactive
volume control is set to maximum. For non-remote control-head
configuration, the primary volume control is active. For remote controlhead configuration, the secondary volume control is active. This enables
fixed level audio feed to the remote control head, and independent volume
control of the external speaker and the speaker of the remote control head.

Description

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

2.6
Overview

Operation in Transmit Mode
This section describes the functioning of the transceiver in transmit mode.
The operation of the transceiver is illustrated in Figure 2.16 on page 51.
These block diagrams show the hardware modules integrated with the
software modules:
■

hardware (transmitter, receiver, CODEC and audio)

■

RISC processor (on FPGA of digital board)

■

custom logic (on FPGA of digital board)

■

DSP block (on digital board).

The transmit path consists of three major functional parts:
■

audio processing and signalling

■

frequency synthesizer

■

RF transmitter.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Description

2.6.1

Audio Processing and Signalling

Microphone Input

The input to the transmitter path begins at the microphone input. There are
two microphone sources: a fist microphone connected to the control head
and an auxiliary microphone connected via the auxiliary or external options
connector. Only electret-type microphones are supported. Support for
optional dynamic fist microphones is facilitated by a hardware amplifier and
filter in the control head, and must be activated in the programming
software.

Analog Processing
of the Microphone
Input

The CODEC (AD6521) performs microphone selection and amplification.
The microphone amplifier consists of a fixed gain amplifier of 16dB
followed by a programmable-gain amplifier with 0 to 22dB gain.
The amplified microphone signal is converted to a digital stream by a 16-bit
ADC with integral anti-alias filtering (0.1 to 3.2kHz). The digital stream is
transported to the DSP for further audio processing.

Automatic Level
Control

The ALC follows and is used to effectively increase dynamic range by
boosting the gain of the microphone pre-amplifier under quiet conditions
and reducing the gain under noisy acoustic conditions. The ALC function
resides in the DSP and controls the microphone-programmable gain
amplifier in the CODEC. The ALC has a fast-attack (about 10ms) and
slow-decay (up to 2s) gain characteristic. This characteristic ensures that the
peak signal level is regulated near full scale to maximize dynamic range.

DSP Audio
Processing

The output of the automatic level control provides the input to the DSP
audio processing chain at a sample rate of 8kHz. Optional processing such
as encryption or companding is done first if applicable. Pre-emphasis, if
required, is then applied. The pre-emphasized signal is hard limited to
prevent overdeviation and filtered to remove high frequency components.
The sample rate is then interpolated up to 48kHz and scaled to be suitable
for the frequency synthesizer.

Data and Signalling
Encoders

The data and signalling encoders inject their signals into various points
within the audio processing chain. The injection point depends on the
encoders bandwidth and whether pre-emphasis is required.

Description

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

2.6.2

Frequency Synthesizer

Introduction

Frequency Control
Loop

As shown in Figure 2.16, the frequency synthesizer consists of two main
parts:
■

FCL (frequency control loop)

■

RF PLL, comprising RF PLL device, loop filter, VCO, and VCO output
switch.

The FCL consists of the following:
■

TCXO

■

mixer

■

loop filter

■

VCXO

■

frequency control block.

The FCL provides the reference frequency for the RF PLL. The FCL
generates a high-stability reference frequency that can be both modulated
and offset in fine resolution steps.
RF PLL

■

The RF PLL consists of the following:

■

RF PLL device

■

loop filter

■

VCO

■

VCO output switch.

The RF PLL has fast-locking capability but coarse frequency resolution.
This combination of control loops creates improved frequency generation
and acquisition capabilities.
Note that patents are pending for several aspects of the synthesizer design.
Operation of
Control Loop

The RF PLL is a conventional integer-N-type design with frequency
resolution of 25kHz. In transmit mode, the loop locks to the transmit
frequency, whereas in receive mode, it locks to the receive frequency minus
the first IF frequency.
Initially, the VCO generates an unregulated frequency in the required range.
This is fed to the PLL device (ADF4111) and divided down by a
programmed ratio to approximately 25kHz. The reference frequency input
from the FCL is also divided down to approximately 25kHz. The phase of
the two signals is compared and the error translated into a DC voltage by a
programmable charge pump and dual-bandwidth loop filter. This DC signal
is used to control the VCO frequency and reduce the initial error. The loop
eventually settles to a point that minimizes the phase error between divided
down reference and VCO frequencies. The net result is that the loop
“locks” to a programmed multiple of the reference frequency.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Description

The FCL generates an output of 13.012MHz±4kHz. Initially, a VCXO
(voltage controlled crystal oscillator) produces a quasi-regulated frequency in
the required range. The VCXO output is fed to a mixer where it is mixed
with the 13.000MHz TCXO frequency. The mixer, after low-pass filtering
to remove unwanted products, produces a frequency of 12kHz nominally.
This is converted to digital form and transported to the frequency control
block in the custom logic.
The frequency control block compares the mixer output frequency to a
reference generated by the digital clock and creates a DC error signal.
A programmed offset is also added. This error signal is converted to analog
form and used to control the VCXO frequency and reduce the initial error.
Once settled, the loop “locks” to the TCXO frequency with a programmed
offset frequency. The FCL output therefore acquires the TCXO's
frequency stability.
Modulation

The full bandwidth modulation signal is obtained from the DSP in digital
form at a sample rate of 48kHz. In traditional dual-point modulation
systems the modulation is applied, in analog form, to both the frequency
reference and the VCO in the RF PLL, combining to produce a flat
modulation response down to DC. Reference modulation is usually applied
directly to the TCXO.
In the system employed in the radio, the frequency reference is generated by
the FCL, which itself requires dual-point modulation injection to allow
modulation down to DC. With another modulation point required in the
RF PLL, this system therefore requires triple-point modulation.
The modulation signals applied to the FCL are in digital form while for the
RF PLL (VCO) the modulation signal is applied in analog form.
The modulation cross-over points occur at approximately 30 and 300Hz as
determined by the closed loop bandwidths of the FCL and RF PLL
respectively.

Frequency
Generation

The RF PLL has a frequency resolution of 25kHz. Higher resolution
cannot be achieved owing to acquisition-time requirements and so for any
given frequency the error could be as high as ±12.5kHz. This error is
corrected by altering the reference frequency to the RF PLL. The FCL
supplies the reference frequency and is able to adjust it up to ±300ppm with
better than 0.1ppm resolution (equivalent to better than 50Hz resolution at
the RF frequency). The FCL offset will usually be different for receive and
transmit modes.

Fast Frequency
Settling

Both the FCL and RF PLL employ frequency-acquisition speed-up
techniques to achieve fast frequency settling. The frequency-acquisition
process of the FCL and RF PLL is able to occur concurrently with minimal
loop interaction owing to the very large difference in frequency step size
between the loops.

Description

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency
Acquisition of
RF PLL

In the RF PLL the loop bandwidth is initially set to high by increasing the
charge-pump current and reducing time constants in the loop filter.
As a result, settling to within 1kHz of the final value occurs in under 4ms.
In order to meet noise performance requirements the loop parameters are
then switched to reduce the loop bandwidth. There is a small frequency kick
as the loop bandwidth is reduced. Total settling time is under 4.5ms.

Frequency
Acquisition of FCL

The FCL utilizes self-calibration techniques that enable it to rapidly settle
close to the final value while the loop is open. The loop is then closed and
settling to the final value occurs with an associated reduction in noise.
The total settling time is typically less than 4ms.

Calibration

The following items are calibrated in the frequency synthesizer:
■

nominal frequency

■

KVCO

■

KVCXO

■

VCO deviation.

Calibration of the nominal frequency is achieved by adding a fixed offset to
the FCL nominal frequency; the TCXO frequency itself is not adjusted.
The items KVCO and KVCXO are the control sensitivities of the RF VCO
(in MHz/V) and VCXO (in kHz/V) respectively. The latter has
temperature compensation.

2.6.3

RF Transmitter

RF Power Amplifier
and Switching
(50W/40W Radio)

The RF power amplifier and exciter of the 40W/50W radio is a five-stage
line-up with approximately 40dB of power gain. The output of the
frequency synthesizer is first buffered to reduce kick during power ramping.
The buffer output goes to a discrete exciter that produces approximately 300
to 400mW output. This is followed by an LDMOS driver producing up to
8W output that is power-controlled. The final stage consists of two parallel
LDMOS devices producing enough power to provide 40 to 50W at
the antenna.

RF Power Amplifier
and Switching
(25W Radio)

The RF power amplifier of the 25W radio is a four-stage line-up with
approximately 37dB of power gain. The output of the frequency synthesizer
is first buffered to reduce kick during power ramping. The buffer output
goes to a broad-band exciter IC that produces approximately 200mW
output. This is followed by an LDMOS driver producing up to 2W output
that is power-controlled. The final stage consists of two parallel LDMOS
devices producing enough power to provide 25W at the antenna.

Output of RF Power
Amplifier

The output of the RF power amplifier passes through a dual-directional
coupler, used for power control and monitoring, to the PIN switch.
The PIN switch toggles the antenna path between the receiver and
transmitter in receive and transmit modes respectively. Finally, the output is
low-pass-filtered to bring harmonic levels within specification.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Description

Power Control

The steady-state power output of the transmitter is regulated using a
hardware control loop. With the 40W/50W radio, the sum of the forward
power output from the RF power amplifier and reverse power reflected from
the load is sensed by the directional coupler and fed back to the power
control loop. With the 25W radio, the forward power output from the RF
power amplifier is sensed by the directional coupler and fed back to the
power control loop. The PA output power is controlled by varying driver
gate bias voltage that has a calibrated maximum limit to prevent overdrive.
The power control signal is supplied by a 13-bit DAC driven by
custom logic.

Ramping

Power ramp-up consists of two stages:
■

bias

■

power ramping.

The timing between these two stages is critical to achieving the correct
overall wave shape in order to meet the specification for transient ACP
(adjacent channel power). A typical ramping waveform is shown in
Figure 2.17.
Figure 2.17

Typical ramping waveforms
Power
Bias Power
ramp ramp

Power Bias
ramp ramp
High power
Low power

Time

Bias Ramp-Up

The steady-state final-stage bias level is supplied by an 8-bit DAC
programmed prior to ramp-up but held to zero by a switch on the DAC
output under the control of a TX INHIBIT signal. Bias ramp-up begins upon
release by the TX INHIBIT signal with the ramping shape being determined by
a low-pass filter. Owing to power leakage through the PA chain, ramping
the bias takes the PA output power from less than –20dBm for the
40W/50W or –10dBm for the 25W radio to approximately 25dB below
steady-state power.

Power Ramp-Up

The power ramp signal is supplied by a 13-bit DAC that is controlled by
custom logic. The ramp is generated using a look-up table in custom logic
memory that is played back at the correct rate to the DAC to produce the
desired waveform. The ramp-up and ramp-down waveforms are produced
by playing back the look-up table in forward and reverse order respectively.
For a given power level the look-up table values are scaled by a steady-state

Description

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

power constant so that the ramp waveform shape remains the same for all
power levels.
PIN Switch

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Description

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Circuit Descriptions

Introduction

This section describes and illustrates the circuitry of the main board and the
control-head boards.
The main board is divided into the following circuitry modules:
■

transmitter

■

receiver

■

frequency synthesizer (including FCL)

■

CODEC and audio

■

power supply

■

interface

■

digital board.

Figure 3.1 gives an overview of the of the circuitry modules of the main
board and shows how they are interconnected.
Sample Schematics

For up-to-date schematics refer to the relevant PCB information (refer to
“Associated Documentation” on page 6).

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Circuit Descriptions

RF Connector

Circuit Descriptions
Receiver

part of transmitter circuitry

part of CODEC and audio circuitry

digital-to-analog converter

Transmitter

PIN
1)
Switch

analog-to-digital converter

LPF

Main Board

RF
analog
digital
asynchronous serial data
synchronous serial data

Frequency
Synthesizer
Custom
Logic

RISC
Proc.

FPGA

DSP

Flash
Memory

SRAM

Serial
Flash

Digital Board

Power Supply

CODEC
and Audio

Interface

Internal Options
Connector

Auxiliary
Connector

Control-Head
Connector

Power
Connector

Figure 3.1
Main board hardware architecture

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

3.1

Transmitter Circuitry

Introduction

For a block diagram of the transmitter circuitry, refer to Figure 3.2.
The transmitter circuitry is different for the 40W/50W radios and the 25W
radios, and the different bands.

Exciter

With the 40W/50W radio, the discrete-component exciter is designed for
specific bands (UHF or VHF). It is made up of Q3501, Q3502, and Q3505,
which amplify the signal provided by the frequency synthesizer from its level
of 7 to 10dBm up to 24dBm for the frequency bands 136 to 174MHz and
400 to 520MHz.
With the 25W radio, the broadband exciter is a common element in all the
bands, as it operates across all frequencies from 66 to 530MHz. It is made
up of Q300 and Q303, which amplify the signal provided by the frequency
synthesizer from its level of 7 to 10dBm up to 24.5dBm for the frequency
band from 66 to 530MHz.
The exciter operates in full saturation, thereby maintaining a constant
output power independent of the varying input power level supplied by the
synthesizer.

Power Amplifier

The power amplifier comprises the driver amplifier Q306 and two paralleled
final devices Q309 and Q310.
With the 40W/50W radio, the signal from the exciter is amplified by Q306
to a power level of approximately 2W (VHF) using a PD55003 and about
3W (UHF) using a PD55008. The resulting signal is then amplified by
Q309 and Q310 to produce a typical output power of 90W at 155MHz and
65W across the UHF band, when measured after the series capacitors
(C348, C349, C350) at the start of the directional coupler.
With the 25W radio, the 24.5dBm signal from the exciter is reduced by a
band-dependent pi-attenuator and is amplified by Q306. The resulting
signal is then amplified a second time by Q309 and Q310 to produce a
typical output power of 40W when measured after the series capacitors
(C348, C349, C350) at the start of the directional coupler.
The high-level RF signal passes via the directional coupler, the transmitreceive PIN switch, and the LPF, through to the antenna. The LPF is used
to attenuate unwanted harmonic frequencies.

Power Control Loop

Calibration is used to adjust the power control loop, thus setting the output
of the transmitter to one of four preferred power levels:
■

10, 15, 25, and 50 watts (VHF), and
10, 15, 20, and 40 watts (UHF) for 40W/50W radios

■

1, 5, 12 and 25 watts (all bands) for 25W radios.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Circuit Descriptions

Receiver

RF
Connector

Interface

AGND

PIN
Switch

synchronous serial data

asynchronous serial data

digital

clock

analog

Signal Types:

TX RX RF

LPF

Transmitter

Reverse Power
Buffer Amplifier
(40W/50W only)

Forward Power
Buffer Amplifier

Directional
Coupler

Buffer Amplifier

Power
Control

Temperature
Sensor

Thermal
Coupling

Driver

Shaper
and Level
Shifter

Bias
Limiter

Exciter

Crowbar

TX INH

Switch

Shaping
Filter

OR Gate

TX REV PWR

TX FWD PWR

TX TEMP

CDC TX PWR CTL

CDC TX FIN BIAS2

CDC TX FIN BIAS1

CDC TX DRV BIAS

SYN TX LO

SYN LOCK

DIG SYN EN

DIG TX INH

+13V8 BATT

+9V0 TX

CODEC
and
Audio

Frequency
Synthesizer

Digital
Board

Power
Supply

Figure 3.2
Block diagram of the transmitter circuitry

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

The loop maintains these power settings under changing environmental
conditions. The control mechanism for this loop is via the DAC IC204 and
one of the operational amplifiers making up IC301. The power control loop
will be inhibited if for any reason an out-of-lock signal is detected from the
synthesizer. This ensures that no erroneous signals are transmitted at
any time.
With the 40W/50W radio, the power control loop processes the voltages
from the forward and reverse power sensors in the directional coupler.
This signal is fed to the buffer and a band-limited operational amplifier back
to the gate of Q306. In this way, the transmitter is protected against bad
mismatches.
With the 25W radio, the power control loop senses the forward power by
means of the diode D304. This signal is fed to the buffer and a band-limited
operational amplifier back to the gate of Q306.
A voltage clamp (one of the operational amplifiers of IC301) for Q306 limits
the maximum control-loop voltage applied to its gate.
Directional
Coupler

With the 40W/50W radio, the directional coupler actively senses the
forward power and the reverse power, and feeds them back to the powercontrol circuit.
With the 25W radio, the directional coupler actively senses the forward
power and feeds it back to the power-control circuit. If the directional
coupler detects too much reverse power, indicating a badly matched
antenna, the transmitter will be reduced to the lowest power setting.

Temperature Sensor

For added protection, a temperature sensor ensures that the transmitter
power is reduced to very low levels should a temperature threshold be
exceeded. If the temperature does not decrease, the transmitter is
switched off.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Circuit Descriptions

3.2

Receiver Circuitry

Introduction

For a block diagram of the receiver circuitry, refer to Figure 3.3 (B1, H5,
H6 bands, 05 issue PCBs) and Figure 3.4 (other bands and later issue PCBs).
The receiver is of the triple-conversion superheterodyne type. The first two
IF stages are implemented in hardware; the third stage is implemented in the
FPGA (Field-Programmable Gate Array) of the digital board. The FPGA
also carries out the demodulation of the received signals.

Front-End Circuitry

The front-end circuitry is a standard varicap-tuned singlet (band-pass filter),
followed by an LNA (low-noise amplifier), and then a varicap-tuned
doublet (image filter). The varicap tuning voltage CDC RX FE TUNE is provided
by a DAC, with voltages calculated from a calibration table stored in nonvolatile memory. The two varicap-tuned filters need to be calibrated to
ensure that maximum sensitivity is achieved.

First Mixer

The first mixer is a standard diode-ring mixer with SMD (surface-mount
device) baluns and a quadruple SMD diode. For the bands between 66 and
174MHz, the receiver includes a circuit for suppressing ignition noise.
This circuit momentarily removes the LO signal from the mixer when an
ignition noise pulse is detected. The ignition-noise suppressor is selectable
on a per-channel basis when the radio is programmed.

First IF Stage and
Second Mixer

The first IF stage consists of a crystal channel filter (BPF1), followed by an
IF amplifier, and then another crystal filter (BPF2). The second mixer is an
IC quadrature mixer with an internal AGC amplifier. This IC has a divideby-two function on the LO input in order to provide the quadrature LO
frequencies required internally. The second LO frequency is synthesized by
an integer PLL (IC403), which uses the TCXO frequency SYN RX OSC
(13.0000 MHz) as its reference.

Frequencies
of IF Stages

The frequency of the first IF stage depends as follows on the frequency band
of the radio:
■

VHF bands: 21.400029MHz

■

UHF bands: 45.100134MHz.

The above are nominal values; the actual frequency will differ by a small
amount depending on the exact initial frequency of the TCXO.
The frequency of the second IF stage will always be precisely 64.000kHz
once the TCXO calibration has been completed. (The TCXO calibration
does not adjust the TCXO frequency, but instead adjusts the VCXO
frequency, which in turn adjusts the VCO or first LO frequency as well as
the frequency of the first IF stage. The second LO frequency remains fixed.)
The third IF stage is completely within the FPGA and is not accessible.
Demodulation

Demodulation takes place within the FPGA. Demodulated audio is passed
to the DSP of the digital board for processing of the receiver audio signal.
Raw demodulated audio can be tapped out from the DSP for use with an
external modem. The modem may be connected to the auxiliary connector
or to the external options connector when an internal options board
is fitted.

Circuit Descriptions

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

TRANSMITTER

BPF

ASYNCHRONOUS
SERIAL DATA
SYNCHRONOUS
SERIAL DATA

DIGITAL

CLOCK

ANALOGUE

SIGNAL TYPES

TX RX RF

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

LNA

IMAGE FILTER

MIXER

SYN RX OSC

FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER

RECEIVER

SYN RX LO1

PLL

FIRST IF STAGE
BPF 1

LOOP FILTER

IF AMPLIFIER

FIRST IF STAGE
BPF 2

VCO

QUADRATURE
DEMODULATOR

BIAS NETWORK

(NOT USED)

DIG RX NB EN

DIG SYN SPI CLK

DIG SYN SPI DO

RX DIG LD

DIG RX LE

DIG RX EN

AGND

CDC RX FE TUNE

CDC RX AGC

RX CDC QN

RX CDC QP

RX CDC IN

RX CDC IP

CDC RX VREF

+3V0 AN

+3V0 RX

DIGITAL BOARD

INTERFACE
CIRCUITRY

CODEC
AND AUDIO
CIRCUITRY

POWER SUPPLY

Figure 3.3
Block diagram of the receiver circuitry (05 issue boards, B1, H5, H6 bands)

Circuit Descriptions

Attenuator

Image Filter

Transmitter

(66-174 MHz only)

Noise
Blanker

LNA

synchronous serial data

asynchronous serial data

clock
digital

analog

Signal Types:

TX RX RF

Image Filter

Mixer

(66-225 MHz
only)

Switch

Receiver

SYN RX OSC

Frequency
Synthesizer

SYN RX LO1

PLL

First IF
BPF 1

Loop Filter

IF Amplifier

First IF
BPF 2

VCO

Quadrature
Demodulator

Bias
Network

DIG RX NB EN

DIG SYN SPI CLK

DIG SYN SPI DO

RX DIG LD

DIG RX LE

DIG RX EN

AGND

CDC RX PIN AGC

CDC RX FE TUNE

CDC RX AGC

RX CDC QN

RX CDC QP

RX CDC IN

RX CDC IP

CDC RX VREF

+3V0 AN

+3V0 RX

Digital
Board

Interface

CODEC
and
Audio

Power
Supply

Figure 3.4
Block diagram of the receiver circuitry (B1, H5, H6 bands after PCB issue 05 & other bands)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Automatic Gain
Control

The receiver has an AGC circuit to enable it to cover a large signal range.
Most of the circuit functions are implemented in the FPGA. The FPGA
passes the AGC signal to the CODEC IC204 for output from pin 14
(IDACOUT) and then via IC201 as the signal CDC RX AGC to pin 23 of the
quadrature mixer IC400. As the antenna signal increases, the AGC voltage
decreases.

Channel Filtering

The channel filtering is split between the first and third IF stages.
The channel filtering circuit in the first IF stage comprises a pair of two-pole
crystal filters. The first filter has a 3dB bandwidth of 12kHz, and the second
a 3dB bandwidth of 15kHz. Most of the channel filtering, however, is
implemented in the FPGA. When the radio is programmed, the different
filters are selected as assigned by the channel programming. The selectable
filters plus the fixed crystal filters result in the following total IF 3dB
bandwidths:
■

wide channel spacing

: 12.6kHz

■

medium channel spacing: 12.0kHz

■

narrow channel spacing : 7.8kHz.

(The FPGA runs from the DIG SYS CLK signal, which has a frequency of
12.288MHz.) The receiver requires the TCXO calibration to be completed
to ensure that the channel filtering is centred, thereby minimizing
distortion.
Received Signal
Strength Indication

The RSSI is calculated in the FPGA and DSP, and can be passed as an analog
voltage to the internal options interface and the external auxiliary interface.
To obtain an accurate estimate of the RSSI (over the signal level and
frequency), it is necessary to calibrate the AGC characteristic of the receiver
and the front-end gain versus the receive frequency.

Front-End AGC
Control

The receiver has a front-end AGC circuit to enable it to handle large
receiver signals with minimal receiver distortion. This is very important for
the correct operation of the THSD modem (Tait High-Speed Data). It
enables THSD to maintain residual BER of < 10-4. The front-end AGC is
controlled by an algorithm which monitors the RSSI and configures the
DAC to turn on the front-end attenuation via the receive pin diode of the
PIN switch.

Noise Blanker (A4,
B1 bands only)

If the frequency band is between 66 and 174MHz, a noise blanker can be
selected to remove common sources of electrical interference such as vehicle
ignition noise. The noise blanker functions by sampling the RF input to the
receiver for impulse noise and momentarily disconnecting the first LO for
the duration of the impulse. The response time of the noise blanker is very
fast (tens of nanoseconds) and is quicker than the time taken for the RF
signal to pass through the front-end hardware, so that the LO is disabled
before the impulse reaches the IF stage where it could cause crystal
filter ring.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Circuit Descriptions

3.3

Frequency Synthesizer Circuitry

Introduction

For a block diagram of the frequency synthesizer circuitry, refer to
Figure 3.5 and Figure 3.6 (FCL for the A4 band).
The frequency synthesizer includes an active loop filter, one or two VCOs
and buffer amplifiers, and a PLL IC. The last-named uses conventional
integer-N frequency division and includes a built-in charge pump. Speedup techniques ensure a transmit-receive settling time of less than 4.5ms
while retaining low noise characteristics in static operation.

Power Supplies

Several power supplies are used by the frequency synthesizer owing to a
combination of performance requirements and the availability of suitable
components. The PLL IC includes analog and digital circuitry and uses
separate power supplies for each section. The digital section is run on 3V,
while the analog section is run on approximately 5V. The VCOs and buffer
amplifiers run off a supply of about 5.3V. The active loop filter requires a
supply of 14 to 15V, and a reference voltage of approximately 2.5V.

Performance
Requirements

Low noise and good regulation of the power supply are essential to the
performance of the synthesizer. A 6V regulator IC provides good line
regulation of the 9V supply and good load regulation. Good regulation of
the power-supply line and load is essential for meeting the transient ACP
requirements. The regulator output voltage is electrically noisy, however,
and filtering is essential. Filtering of the power supply is achieved with two
capacitance multipliers (Q508 and C585 for the VCO supply, and Q512 and
C579 for the PLL and loop-filter supply). The VCO (or VCOs) use a
separate capacitance multiplier because these multipliers have poor load
regulation and the VCOs impart sufficient load transients to warrant a
separate supply.

Effect of Tuning
Range

For reasons of noise performance, the VCOs are designed to be tuned
within a range of 2 to 12V. Active tuning circuitry is required. An active
loop filter incorporating an IC operational amplifier achieves this range with
a suitable power supply voltage. Normal synthesizer switching behaviour
involves overshoot, which dictates that the tuning voltage range must extend
above and below the range of 2 to 12V. The 14V limit is a result of limits
on the working supply voltage of the IC operational amplifier.

Switch-mode Power
Supply

The power supply VCL SUPPLY for the active loop filter is provided by a
SMPS, which is in turn powered by 9V. The SMPS consists of an oscillator
(switching circuit) and a detector. The output voltage is monitored by a
feedback circuit that controls the DC bias of the switching circuit to
maintain a constant output voltage.

Synthesizer
Circuitry

The essential function of the PLL frequency synthesizer is to multiply a
25kHz reference frequency (30kHz for A4 band) to give any desired
frequency that is an integer multiple of 25kHz (30kHz for A4 band). There
are some constraints imposed by the capabilities of the synthesizer hardware,
especially the tuning range of the VCOs.

Circuit Descriptions

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Digital
Board

Receiver

Transmitter

SYN RX OSC

SYN RX LO1

SYN TX LO

synchronous serial data

asynchronous serial data

digital

clock

analog

Signal Types:

VCO 1

SYN DIG FREF

SYN LOCK

DIG SYN LATCH

DIG SYN FAST

DIG SYN EN

DIG SYN TR SW

DIG SYN SPI CLK

DIG SYN SPI DO

VCO (UHF only)

Buffer
Amplifiers
and
Coupler

TR Switch

VCO 2

5 V SWITCH

VCO (VHF only)

PLL

MOD

Coupler

DIG SYN TR SW

SYN RX LO1

SYN TX LO

TR SWITCH

MOD

PLL

Summer

+5 V DEC

5 V Switch

VCO
Supply
Filter

Loop
Filter

14 V
SMPS

Inverter

VCL SUPPLY

PLL

+5 V
VP

5V
VP SUPPLY

LPF

Modulator
Buffer Amplifier

Frequency Control Loop
(FCL)

Mixer

Buffer Amplifier

TCXO

VCXO

Frequency Synthesizer

AGND

CDC VCO MOD

SYN CDC LFV

SYN CDC FCL

CDC VCXO MOD

+3V0 AN

+6V0
+9V0

Interface

CODEC
and
Audio

Power
Supply

Figure 3.5
Block diagram of the frequency synthesizer circuitry

Circuit Descriptions

Figure 3.6

Block diagram of the frequency control loop circuitry—A4 band

Buffer
Amplifier
÷4

FCL

Reference
Frequency

The approximately 25kHz (30kHz for A4) reference is obtained by dividing
the approximately 13MHz (2.612kHz for A4) output of the FCL. Any error
in the FCL output frequency will be multiplied by the synthesizer.
Therefore, if the synthesizer is locked but not the FCL, then the synthesizer
output frequency will be wrong. The FCL frequency division is performed
by a digital counter inside the PLL IC. The divider setting is constant.

VCO Frequency and
Output Power

The output frequency from the synthesizer is generated by a VCO.
The VCO frequency is tuned across the frequency range of the radio by
means of a DC control voltage, typically between 2V and 12V. The VCO
output power is amplified by a buffer amplifier. The power is low and varies
from band to band. The buffer output power depends on which mode—
receive or transmit—is used. In receive mode the output power should be
about 7dBm, whereas in transmit mode it should be about 9dBm.

Dual VCOs

Some variants of the synthesizer use two VCOs: one for receive and one for
transmit. Synthesizers with two VCOs share the same tuning signal.
Only one VCO is switched on at a time, and so the PLL IC will see only
one output frequency to tune. A portion of the RF output from the VCOs
is fed to the RF input of the PLL IC. The RF signal is divided by an integer
that gives 25kHz (30kHz for A4) if the output frequency is correct.

Phase-locked Loop

The PLL IC compares the 25kHz reference (30kHz for A4) and the divided
VCO signal, and the error is used to control the internal charge pump.
The charge pump is a current source that can sink or source current in
proportion to the frequency or phase error. The output is a series of 25kHz
pulses (30kHz for A4) with a width that is dependent on the phase error.
When the output frequency of the synthesizer is correct, there is no error
and the charge pump output will become open circuit.

Circuit Descriptions

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Active Loop Filter

The loop filter continuously integrates the current pulses from the charge
pump and produces a steady DC output voltage that tunes the VCO
(or VCOs). When the VCO frequency is correct, there is no frequency
error and therefore no charge-pump output, and so the loop filter’s output
voltage remains constant. If the frequency is too high or too low, the error
will result in the output of charge-pump current pulses (negative or positive
depending on the sign of the error). The loop filter’s output voltage will
change accordingly, causing the VCO frequency to change in proportion.
The synthesizer design is such that normally the VCO frequency will be
automatically corrected.

Re-tuning of VCO
Frequency

When the radio changes channels or switches between receive and transmit,
the VCO frequency must be changed. The rate at which the VCO is retuned is dependent on many factors, of which the loop filter is the main
factor. The loop filter is an integrator built around an operational amplifier.
The resistors and capacitors of the filter affect both the switching time and
the stability of the synthesizer; the values of these components have been
carefully selected to give optimum control characteristics.

Speed-up
Techniques

To reduce the change-over time between transmit and receive, part-time
speed-up techniques have been implemented. Speed-up involves changing
some resistor values while simultaneously changing the PLL IC settings.
This process is implemented in hardware under software control in
conjunction with use of the synthesized reference input. The result is a
transmit-receive settling time of less than 4.5ms. (The switching time is
measured for a frequency change equal to the first IF plus 10MHz or 1MHz,
depending on the repeater offsets used for the band. This implies a
synthesizer transmit-receive change-over plus an offset of 1MHz or 10MHz
in less than 4.5ms. The ramp-up and ramp-down of the transmitter, which
totals 1ms, extends this change-over time to 5.5ms.)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Circuit Descriptions

3.4

Frequency Control Loop

Introduction

The FCL is included in the block diagram of the frequency synthesizer
(see Figure 3.5 and Figure 3.6).
The FCL forms part of the frequency-synthesizer module. The basis of the
FCL is a VCXO, which generates the reference frequency required by the
main PLL of the synthesizer.

Elements of
FCL Circuitry

The FCL is a simple frequency-locked loop. The circuitry consists of the
following elements:
■

VCXO (XL501, Q501, Q503)

■

TCXO (XL500)

■

buffer amplifier (IC500)

■

mixer (IC501)

■

low-pass filter (IC502, pins 5 to 7)

■

modulator buffer amplifier (IC502, pins 1 to 3).

The A4 band has additional circuitry:
■

2.612MHz mixer (IC506)

■

amplifiers (Q504, IC509)

■

TCXO divide by 4 (IC508)

The TCXO supplies a reference frequency of 13.0000MHz (10.4MHz for
the A4 band), which is extremely stable, regardless of the temperature.
The VCXO runs at a nominal frequency of 13.0120MHz, and is frequencylocked to the TCXO reference frequency.
Circuit Operation

The VCXO is mixed with the TCXO output to create a nominal difference
(or offset) frequency of 12kHz SYN CDC FCL. In A4 band radios, there is
additional circuitry and the VCXO is mixed with the TCXO to produce
2.612MHz. This is then mixed with 2.6MHz (TCXO divided by 4) to
produce the 12kHz SYN CDC FCL.
The signal SYN CDC FCL is fed via the CODEC IC502 in the CODEC
circuitry to the FPGA on the digital board. The FPGA detects the offset
frequency, compares it with the programmed offset frequency, and outputs
a corresponding feedback signal CDC VCXO MOD via IC205. The feedback
signal is amplified and inverted by the modulator buffer amplifier and output
as the loop voltage for the VCXO. With this design the VCXO frequency
can be adjusted by very small precise amounts, and because the loop is
locked, the VCXO inherits the temperature stability of the TCXO.

Modulation

The FCL modulation is implemented within the FPGA and appears at the
output of IC205, and therefore on the VCXO loop voltage. Consequently,
the VCXO is frequency modulated directly by the relevant modulation
information. The latter may be the microphone audio, an audio tap-in
signal, internal modem signals, or any combination of these.

Circuit Descriptions

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

3.5

CODEC and Audio Circuitry

Introduction

For a block diagram of the CODEC and audio circuitry, refer to Figure 3.7.

A/D and D/A
Conversion

The analog-to-digital conversion and digital-to-analog conversion is
performed by the devices IC203, IC204 and IC205.

Device IC203

IC203 is an eight-channel DAC that provides control of transmitter biasing,
front-end AGC, front-end tuning, and the output of analog RSSI signals.
The digital input data are fed to IC203 in synchronous serial form. Three of
the DAC channels are not used.

Device IC205

IC205 contains two CODECs. One is used by the FCL. The second is used
for auxiliary audio (input) and VCO modulation (output). The digital
section communicates with this device via a four-wire synchronous serial
interface.

Device IC204

IC204 contains base-band, voice-band and auxiliary CODECs and some
analog signal conditioning. The reference voltage (nominally 1.2V) for
these CODECs is provided internally by IC204 but is decoupled externally
by C228.

Base-band CODEC

The base-band CODEC handles the I and Q outputs (IRXP, IRXN, QRXP and
QRXN balls) of the receiver’s second IF stage. The analog signals are
differential and biased at 1.2V nominally. The digital section communicates
with this CODEC via a two-wire synchronous serial interface (BSDO and
BSOFS balls). The digital-to-analog conversion section of the base-band
CODEC is not used.

Voice-band CODEC

The voice-band CODEC handles the microphone and speaker signals.
The digital section communicates with this CODEC via a three-wire
synchronous serial interface (VSFS, VSDO and VSDI balls). IC204 also contains
voice-band filtering, pre-amplification and volume control.

Auxiliary CODEC

The auxiliary CODEC handles transmitter power control, receiver gain
control, auxiliary audio output and general analog monitoring functions.
The digital section communicates with this CODEC via a three-wire
synchronous serial interface (ASFS, ASDI and ASDO balls). The DAC used for
receiver gain control (IDACOUT ball) is a current output type. Current-tovoltage conversion is performed by R238. The full-scale output of 1.2V is
amplified by IC201 to approximately 3V as required by the receiver.

Audio Circuitry

The audio circuitry performs four functions:
■

output of audio signal for speaker

■

input of microphone audio signal

■

input of auxiliary audio signal

■

output of auxiliary audio signal.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Circuit Descriptions

Frequency
Synthesizer

Transmitter

SYN CDC FCL

CDC VCXO MOD

CDC VCO MOD

SYN CDC LFV

TX REV PWR

TX FWD PWR

TX TEMP

CDC TX PWR CTL

CDC TX DRV BIAS

CDC TX FIN BIAS2

CDC TX FIN BIAS1

CDC RX FE TUNE

DAC

CODEC 2

DIG CDC2 SDTI

CDC RX PIN AGC

DIG CDC2 SCLK

CDC RX AGC

DIG CDC2 LRCK

DIG RX EN

Level
Shifter

DIG DAC SPI DO

RX CDC QN

DIG DAC SPI CLK

RX CDC QP

CDC DIG VSDO

DIG CDC ARSM
CDC DIG VSFS

+1V8

Digital Board

CODEC 1

DIG CDC VSDI

Receiver

CDC DIG BSDO

RX CDC IN

CDC DIG BSOFS

RX CDC IP

LPF

Bias
Network

+2V3 FIL

2V3
Supply

Summer

Volume
Control

Audio PA

CODEC and Audio

Buffer
Amplifier

Voltage
Divider

DIG AUD CS

CDC RX VREF

DIG AUD UD

Circuit Descriptions
DIG AUD PA EN1

78
DIG AUD PA EN2

synchronous serial data

Interface

Power
Supply

asynchronous serial data

digital

DIG RX EN

clock

PSU SYS RST

analog

Signal Types:

ITF AUD TAP IN

CDC RSSI

CDC AUD TAP OUT

ITF VOL WIP DC

ITF AUX MIC AUD

ITF CH MIC AUD

ITF RX BEEP IN

AUD ITF SPK–

AUD ITF SPK+

AGND

CDC RX AUD

+13V8 BATT

+2V5 CDC

+9V0

+3V3

+3V0 AN

Figure 3.7
Block diagram of the CODEC and audio circuitry

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006
CDC DIG ASDO
PSU SYS RST

DIG CDC ASFS

DIG CDC ASDI

DIG DAC LATCH

DIG SYS CLK

CDC2 DIG SDTO

DIG RX EN

The sections of the circuitry concerned with these functions are described
below.
Audio Signal
for Speaker

The audio signal for the speaker is generated by IC204 (VOUTAUXP ball).
This signal is post-volume-control and has a pre-emphasized frequency
response. The signal is then processed by R218, R217 and C231 (C205) to
restore a flat frequency response and reduce the signal level to that required
by the audio power amplifier.

Summing Circuit

The top of C231 (C205) is where side tones are summed in and the CDC RX
AUD signal is obtained. C201 and R211 pre-emphasize and attenuate the
side-tone signal to give a flat side-tone frequency response and reduce the
input to an appropriate level.

Buffer Amplifier

IC201 (pins 8 to 10) amplifies the signal at the top of C231 (C205) by 19dB
and drives the CDC RX AUD system interface line via C212 and R225.
The capacitor C212 provides AC output coupling and R225 ensures
stability. The DC bias for this amplifier is derived from IC204.

Audio Power
Amplifier

The signal at the top of C231 (C205) is fed via C204 to the audio power
amplifier IC202. IC202 has 46dB of gain and a differential output
configuration. C209, C211, R252 and R253 ensure stability of the amplifier
at high frequencies. When operational, the output bias voltage for IC202 is
approximately half the radio supply voltage. When not operational, the
output becomes high impedance.

Control of Audio
Power Amplifier

Power up, power down, and muting of IC202 is controlled by two signals
from the digital section, DIG AUD PA EN1 and DIG AUD PA EN2. The network
consisting of Q200, Q201, R200 to R206, R210 and R250 converts the
two digital signals to the single three-level analog signal required by IC202.

Microphone Signals

There are two microphone source signals:
■

ITF AUX MIC AUD

■

ITF CH MIC AUD

from auxiliary or internal options connector

from control head.

The biasing for electret microphones is provided by a filtered 3.0V supply
via R226 and R227. The components R209 and C202 provide the supply
filtering. The microphone inputs to IC204 (VINAUXP, VINAUXN, VINNORP, and
VINNORN balls) are differential. The negative inputs are decoupled to the
filtered 3.0V supply by C215 and C216. The positive inputs are biased to
approximately 1.5 V by R229, R232, R230 and R233. AC coupling and
DC input protection is provided by C213 and C214.
Auxiliary Audio
Input

The auxiliary audio input signal ITF AUD TAP IN is DC-coupled to the ADC
input of IC205. R241 combined with internal clamping diodes in IC205
provide DC protection for the ADC input. IC205 provides the input biasing
of approximately 1.5V.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Circuit Descriptions

Auxiliary Audio
Output

The source for the auxiliary audio output signal CDC AUD TAP OUT is provided
by IC204 (RAMPDAC ball). The DAC output of IC204 is low-pass filtered to
remove high-frequency artefacts. The low-pass filter, formed by IC201
(pins 1 to 3), R219, R220, R221, R224, C206, C208 and C210, is a thirdorder Butterworth type with a cut frequency of approximately 12kHz.
The output of the low-pass filter is amplified by 6dB by a buffer amplifier,
IC201 (pins 5 to 7), and fed via R207 and R208 to drive the CDC AUD TAP
OUT interface line. The DC bias for this signal path is provided by IC204 and
is approximately 1.2V when operational. The offset at CDC AUD TAP OUT is
approximately 2.4V owing to the gain of the buffer amplifier.

Circuit Descriptions

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

3.6

Power Supply Circuitry

Introduction

For a block diagram of the power supply circuitry, refer to Figure 3.8.
The power-supply circuitry consists of the following main sections:
■

supply protection

■

supervisory circuit

■

internal power supplies

■

control of internal power supplies

■

control of external power supply.

Supply Protection

Electrical protection to the radio is provided by the clamping diode D600
and by 20A fuses (for the 40W/50W radios) and 10A fuses (for the 25W
radios) in the positive and negative leads of the power cable. This provides
protection from reverse voltages, positive transients greater than 30V, and all
negative transients. An ADC monitors the supply and is responsible for the
protection of internal devices, which have an operating voltage of less than
30V. The ADC also ensures protection if the radio operates outside its
specified voltage range of 10.8V to 16V.

Supervisory Circuit

The supervisory circuit comprises a reset and watchdog timer. The circuit
provides the reset signal PSU SYS RST to the digital section, which in turn
provides the watchdog signal DIG WD KICK required by the supervisory circuit.

Internal Power
Supplies

There are eight internal power supplies:
■

one SMPS (+3V3)

■

four linear regulators (+9V0, +6V0, +3V0 AN, +2V5 CDC)

■

three switched supplies (+9V0 TX, +3V0 RX, +13V8 SW).

The SMPS is used to regulate to 3.3V from the external supply +13V8 BATT.
The four lower voltages required are then further stepped down with linear
regulators. These all take advantage of the efficiency gain of the SMPS.
The 9V regulator and the 13.8V switched supply are connected to +13V8
BATT. The two remaining switched supplies (9V and 3V) use P-channel
MOSFETs.
Control of Internal
Power Supplies

The radio can be switched on using the ON/OFF key on the control head or
by means of external signals. For the latter case hardware links are required
and there are several power-sense options; these are discussed below. Some
internal power supplies can be controlled by means of digital lines
depending on the mode in which the radio is operating.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Circuit Descriptions

Figure 3.8

Block diagram of the power supply circuitry

+13V8 BATT

9V
Regulator

+9V0

+9V0 TX

9 V Tx Switch
+3V3

SMPS

3V
Regulator

Transmitter

+9V0
+3V0 AN
+6V0

Frequency
Synthesizer

+13V8 BATT
+3V0 AN
+9V0
+3V3

+2V5 CDC

2V5
Regulator

CODEC
and
Audio

Power Supply
+3V0 AN

+3V0 RX

6V0
Regulator
3 V Rx
Switch

Receiver

DIG RX EN
DIG TX EN
DIG SLP EN
+3V3
DIG PSU LATCH

IOP PWR SENSE

OR Gate

Digital
Board

IGNITION SENSE
EMERGENCY

Hardware
Links
13V8 PWR
SENSE

PSU
Supervisor

DIG WD KICK
PSU SYS RST

+3V3

Signal Types:

Debug
Connector

AGND

RF
analog

CH ON OFF
ITF IOP GPIO7
AUX GPI3
AUX GPI2
+3V3

clock
digital
asynchronous serial data
synchronous serial data

+13V8 SW

Interface

13V8 Switch
Reverse
Polarity
Protection

Circuit Descriptions

+13V8 BATT

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Power-Sense
Options

The radio allows the configuration of different power-sense options to
control how the radio is powered up and down:
■

battery power sense

■

auxiliary power sense (ignition sense)

■

internal-options power sense

■

no power sense

■

emergency power sense.

The emergency power-sense option can be used in conjunction with any of
the other four options.
The different power-sense options have to be facilitated by hardware means,
as the software cannot act before it is powered up. The radio provides four
hardware links (LK1 to LK4) on the top-side of the main board which can
be configured to attain the power-sense option desired.
Figure 3.9 shows a block diagram of the hardware links LK1 to LK4.
Figure 3.9

Block diagram of hardware links LK1 to LK4

ON/OFF Key
13V8 BATT

LK1
13.8V Battery
Power Sense
AUX GPI3

AUX GPI2

IOP GPIO7

LK2
Auxiliary Power Sense 13V8 BATT
(Ignition Sense)

Power-up
Circuit

LK3
Emergency
Sense
LK4
Internal Options
Power Sense

The radio can be programmed to be either on, or to return to its previous
state when the power sense signal is removed. For information on
programming the power-on mode refer to the online help of the
programming software.
The ON/OFF key can be used with any of the of the power-sense options to
turn the radio on and off.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Circuit Descriptions

Table 3.1 shows the configuration of the hardware links LK1, LK2 and LK4
for the individual power-sense options. It also lists the dependence of the
power-sense options with respect to the GPI lines, which can or cannot be
used.
Table 3.1

Configuration of hardware links and GPI lines for power-sense options

Power-sense option
13.8V battery power
sense

Links
required
LK1 in

Configuration of remaining links and
use of AUX GPI3 and IOP GPIO7
LK2 in:
AUX GPI3 must be left floating.

Voltages
required
10.8V ≤ supply ≤ 16V

LK2 out:
AUX GPI3 can be used as GPIa.
auxiliary power sense
(ignition sense)

LK4 out

IOP GPIO7 can be used as GPIO.

LK2 in

LK1 in:
Input line must sink >1mA from
AUX GPI3 (which is pulled to 13.8V by a
33kΩ resistor). The impedance between
the vehicle ignition signal and ground
must be ≤1kΩ.

AUX GPI3 ≤ 0.7V off
AUX GPI3 ≥ 2.6V high (active)
ignition-sense tolerant to
3.3V, 5V and 12V

LK1 out:
Input line must be active highb.
internal power sense

LK4 out

IOP GPIO7 can be used as GPIO.

LK1 out

IOP GPIO7 ≤ 0.7V off
IOP GPIO7 ≥ 2.6V high
AUX GPI3 can be used as GPI.
(active)
With LK4 in, the input line must be active ignition-sense tolerant to
highc.
3.3V and 5V only

LK2 out
LK4 in
no power sense

10.8V ≤ supply ≤ 16V

LK1 out
LK2 out

AUX GPI3 can be used as GPI.

LK4 out

IOP GPIO7 can be used as GPIO.

a. If LK2 is out and AUX GPIO is not used, R775 (33k) should be placed to ensure that AUX GPI3 does not float
(R775 is not placed by factory default).
b. If LK1 is out and R775 is placed, AUX GPI3 should be driven low as well.
c. If LK 4 is in and R723 is placed, IOP GPIO7 should be driven low as well. (R723 is placed by factory default.)

Table 3.2 shows the configuration of ‘emergency power sense’. ‘Emergency
power sense’ can be configured with any of the above power sense options.
Table 3.2

Configuration of hardware link LK3 and AUX GPI2 for ‘emergency power sense’

External push-button
or toggle switch
required to enter
emergency mode
Yes

Links
required

Implications on AUX GPI2

LK3 in

AUX GPI2 must be connected to an
external (hidden) push-button or toggle
switch, which connects it to ground.

LK3 in

AUX GPI2 must be left floating

LK3 out

AUX GPI2 can be used as GPI.

Circuit Descriptions

Voltages required

≤ 0.7V active,
floating inactive

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Battery Power
Sense

With this option, link LK1 connects +13V8 BATT of the power connector to
the power-up circuitry. With this option, when a 13.8V supply is connected
to the radio, the radio enters the programmed power-on mode. The ON/OFF
key can then be used to switch the radio on and off. This option has the
disadvantage that the radio still draws about 50mA after being switched off
using the ON/OFF key. The reason is that the radio enters the stand-by mode
and does not shut down completely.

Auxiliary Power
Sense
(Ignition Sense)

This option uses the digital input line AUX GPI3 of the auxiliary connector to
power the radio up and down. Link LK2 is required to connect the line to
the power-up circuitry. The line is active high; it is on when the level
exceeds 2.6V and off when the level falls below 0.7V; the line tolerates
maximum inputs equal to the radio supply voltage. When the line becomes
active, the radio enters the programmed power-on mode. The ON/OFF key
can then be used to switch the radio on and off. With the radio off and the
line active, the radio draws about 50mA. When the line becomes inactive,
the radio is shut down completely regardless of whether it was on or in
stand-by mode. With the line inactive the radio draws less than 1mA.
In a vehicle installation this avoids flattening the battery when the ignition
key is off.

Internal-Options
Power Sense

This option is similar to the auxiliary power-sense option, except that the
IOP GPIO7 line of the internal options connector is used. Link LK4 is required
to connect the line to the power-up circuitry. This line is active high; it is
on when the level exceeds 2.6V and off when the level falls below 0.7V;
the line tolerates maximum inputs of 5V. The behaviour of the ON/OFF key
is the same as with the auxiliary power-sense option.

No Power Sense

If no power-sense option is selected, the radio can only be powered up and
powered down by means of the ON/OFF key. For this option, the links LK1,
LK2 and LK4 must be removed. The advantage of this option over the
battery power-sense option is that the radio draws less than 1mA when it is
switched off.

Emergency
Power Sense

This option uses the AUX GPI2 line of the auxiliary connector. Externally, this
line is typically connected to a hidden switch. Internally, link LK3 is
required to connect the line to the power-up circuitry. The line is active low
and has an internal pull-up resistor to the external supply voltage. The line
is on when the level falls below 0.7V. When the line becomes active (when
the hidden switch is pressed for two seconds) the radio enters the emergency
mode. This mode can also be activated by making an emergency call or by
pressing a key that has been programmed appropriately. The concealed
microphone is typically fitted when the emergency power-sense option is
selected.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Circuit Descriptions

Operation in
Emergency Mode

If the radio is off when the emergency mode is activated, the radio is
powered up but the display on the control head is not switched on. If the
radio is on when the mode is activated, the display is frozen. In the latter
case, if the ON/OFF key is pressed, the display is switched off but the radio
remains in the emergency mode. While in this mode the radio cycles
between transmit and receive. To exit the emergency mode, the ON/OFF key
needs to be pressed again.

Connector Power
Supply Options

Power from the radio’s primary power source is fed to the auxiliary, internal
options, control head and microphone connectors. Whether power to these
connectors is unswitched, switched or not supplied is determined by
hardware links LK5 to LK8 on the top side of the main board, as shown in
Figure 3.10 and Table 3.3.
Unswitched power means that power will always be supplied to the
connector while the primary power source is connected to the radio and is
alive. The supply to the connector is not affected by the state of the radio.
Switched power means that when the radio is off or in standby mode, the
power to the connector is switched off. The power will also be switched off
if the primary power source voltage is outside the radio’s operating range.
The combined switched current drawn by the internal options connector,
the auxiliary connector and the control-head connector must not exceed
1A.
Note

Figure 3.10

The switched output is protected. Short-circuiting the switched
power on any connector will not damage the radio. In the event
of a short circuit, the current folds back to protect the switch
device and connectors.

Connector power supply options

LK8
(R786)

LK7
(R787)

Primary
Power
Source

Power
Connector

LK5

Circuit Descriptions

+13V8
2

LK6

Note

+13V8 BATT

Internal
Options
Connector

Auxiliary
Connector

ControlHead
Connector

Microphone
Connector

The links LK7 and LK8 have the alternative designations R787
and R786 respectively. The factory-default setting is with LK5
and LK7 inserted and LK6 and LK8 omitted.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Table 3.3

Connector power supply options

Link state
LK5

Connector power state
LK7
(R787)

LK6

LK8
(R786)

Auxiliary

Internal
options

Control head

Microphone

out

switched

no power

out

switched

out

switched

unswitched

out

switched

unswitched

switched

out

switched

unswitched

in/out

unswitched

3.7

Interface Circuitry

Introduction

For a block diagram of the interfaces circuitry, refer to Figure 3.11.
For more on the connector pinouts, refer to “Connectors” on page 36.

Bi-directional Lines

Bi-directional lines are provided on four pins of the auxiliary connector,
(AUX GPIO4 to AUX GPIO7) one on the control-head connector (CH GPIO1), and
seven on the internal options connector (IOP GPIO1 to IOP GPIO7). Those on
the auxiliary and control-head connectors are formed by combining two
uni-directional lines. For example, the line AUX GPIO4 at pin 10 of the
auxiliary connector is formed from ITF AUX GPI4 and DIG AUX GPO4.
The circuitry is the same in all five cases and is explained below for the case
of AUX GPIO4.

Output Signals
(e.g. AUX GPIO4)

An output on the line AUX GPIO4 originates as the 3.3V signal DIG AUX GPO4
from the digital section. The signal is first inverted by Q703 (pins 3 to 5) and
the output divided down to 1.6V by R748 and R753 to drive the base of
Q703 (pins 1, 2 and 6). When the latter’s collector current is low, the base
current is a maximum and creates a small voltage drop across R761, causing
the collector emitter to saturate. As the collector current increases, the base
current decreases proportionally until the voltage across R761 reaches 1V.
At this point the base-emitter begins to turn off and the base current
diminishes rapidly. The net effect is a current-limiting action. The current
limit value is approximately 18mA (the inverse of the value of R761).
The output configuration is open-collector with a pull-up to 3.3V by
default. Pull-up options to 5V and 13.8V are also available. On AUX GPIO4
only, the optional MOSFET Q707, which has a high current drive, may be
fitted. If Q707 is fitted, R768 must be removed.

5-Volt Regulator

The 5V supply mentioned above is provided by a simple buffered zener
regulator formed by Q702, D721, R721 and R722. The resistor R722
limits the current to about 25mA under short-circuit conditions.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Circuit Descriptions

Figure 3.11

Block diagram of the interface circuitry

+13V8 BATT
AGND

+13V8 BATT

AGND
SPK+
SPK–

Interface
Power
Supply

EMC
Filters

+3V3
+13V8 SW
AUX GPI2
AUX GPI3
CH ON OFF
ITF IOP GPIO7

EMC
Filters

ITF CH MIC AUD
CDC RX AUD
ITF RX BEEP IN
CDCAUDTAP OUT
ITF AUD TAP IN
ITF AUX MIC AUD
CDC RSSI

RX AUD

ESD and
EMC
Filters

ITF CH HOOK

PTT and
Hookswitch
Decode

ITF CH PTT

ITF CH GPI1
DIG CH GPO1

ESD and
EMC
Filters

I/O
Combine

EMC
Filters

ITF IOP GPIO1-6
ITF IOP GPIO7
ITF IOP RXD
DIG IOP TXD

+3V3
Clamp

+3V3 CL

Clamps
and
Pull-up
Resistors

ITF AUX RXD
DIG AUX TXD
ITF AUX GPI1
ITF AUX GPI2
ITF AUX GPI3

CH GPIO1

CH SPI DI
CH SPI DO
CH SPI CLK
CH LE

IOP GPIO1-6
IOP GPIO7
IOP RXD
IOP TXD
AGND
DGND

Internal
Options
Connector

AUX RXD
AUX TXD
AUX GPI1
AUX GPI2
AUX GPI3

DGND

I/O
Combine
and
Pull-up
Resistors

ITF AUX GPI4-7
DIG AUX GPO4-7

+5V

CH ON OFF
CH RXD
CH TXD

RX AUD
RX BEEP IN
AUD TAP OUT
AUD TAP IN
AUX MIC AUD
RSSI
+13V8 SW

Digital
Board

Receiver
and
Transmitter

ControlHead
Connector

CH PTT

ITF CH SPI DI
DIG CH SPI DO
DIG CH SPI CLK
DIG CH LE

Frequency
Synthesizer

SPK+
SPK–
VOL WIP DC

CH MIC AUD

ITF ON OFF
ITF CH RXD
DIG CH TXD

Debug
Connector

+13V8 BATT
+3V3
AGND
DGND

AUD ITF SPK+
AUD ITF SPKITF VOL WIP DC
AGND

CODEC
and
Audio

Power
Connector

AGND

Clamps,
ESD
Filters,
and
EMC
Filters

AGND
+13V8 SW

AUX GPIO4-7

Auxiliary
Connector

5V
Regulator
AUD TAP OUT
AUD TAP IN
AUX MIC AUD
RSSI

AGND

Signal Types:

AGND

Circuit Descriptions

digital

analog

asynchronous serial data

clock

synchronous serial data

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Input Signals
(e.g. AUX GPIO4)

An input signal applied to AUX GPIO4 is coupled via R757 to ITF AUX GPI4 and
fed to the digital section. As the input signal may exceed the maximum
allowed by the digital section, it is clamped by D711 and a shunt regulator.
The shunt regulator consists of Q708, R719 and R720 and begins to turn
on at approximately 2.7V. In combination with D711, the input to
ITF AUX GPI4 is therefore clamped to 3.3V nominally. The value of R757 is
made large to minimize the loading effect on the output pull-up resistors.

Input Signals
(AUX GPI1 to AUX GPI3)

Dedicated inputs are provided on three pins of the auxiliary connector
(AUX GPI1 to AUX GPI3). AUX GPI1 is a general-purpose input with strong
protection of the same type used for AUX GPIO4. AUX GPI2 is normally a
dedicated emergency input but can be made a general-purpose input like
AUX GPI1 by removing the link LK3 in the power supply area. AUX GPI3 is
normally a dedicated ignition-sense input but can be made a generalpurpose input like AUX GPI1 by removing the link LK2 in the power supply
area and fitting the 33kΩ resistor R775.

ESD Protection

On exposed inputs of the auxiliary and control-head connectors ESD
(electrostatic discharge) protection is provided by a 470pF capacitor and by
clamping diodes to ground and to 13.8V. For example, on AUX GPIO4 this
consists of D713 and C725. The lines IOP GPIO1 to IOP GPIO7 are intended for
connection to internal digital devices and so these have relatively light
protection.

Hookswitch
Detection

Hookswitch detection is performed by Q700, R709, R706 and R712.
When the resistance to ground on the PTT line is less than 13.2kΩ, Q700
will turn on and drive the ITF CH HOOK line high; this indicates either that the
microphone is on hook or that the PTT (press-to-talk) switch is pressed.

3.8

Digital Board

Introduction

Different digital boards are used for the TM8200 and TM8100 radios.
For a block diagram of the digital board of the TM8200 radios, refer to
Figure 3.12. For a block diagram of the digital board of the TM8100 radios,
refer to Figure 3.13.
The digital board is not serviceable at level-2 and is not described in this
manual.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Circuit Descriptions

Figure 3.12

Block diagram of the digital board (TM8200 radios)

+3V3

Transmitter

DGND

+1V8

DIG TX INH

Serial
Flash

AGND

DIG CH SPI CLK

DIG SYN EN

DIG CH SPI DO

SYN LOCK

ITF CH SPI DI
DIG CH LE

Frequency
Synthesizer

DIG SYN TR SW

ITF CH GPI1

DIG SYN FAST

DIG CH GPO1

DIG SYN LATCH

ITF CH PTT

SYN DIG FREF

ITF CH HOOK

Interface

ITF ON OFF
ITF IOP GPIO1-7
DIG SYN SPI DO

DIG IOP TXD

DIG SYN SPI CLK

ITF IOP RXD
ITF AUX GPI1-7
DIG AUX GPO4-7

Receiver

DIG RX LE

DIG AUX TXD

RX DIG LD

ITF AUX RXD

DIG RX NB EN

DIG CH TXD
ITF CH RXD

Digital Board

DIG RX EN

DIG PSU LATCH
DIG WD KICK

FPGA

CDC2 DIG SDTO

DIG TX EN
DIG SLP EN

DIG CDC2 SDTI
DIG CDC2 CLK
DIG CDC2 LRCK
DIG DAC SPI DO

SRAM

DIG CDC ARSM
CDC DIG VSFS

DATA

CONTROL

DIG DAC LATCH

ADDRESS

DIG DAC SPI CLK

CDC DIG VSDO
PSU SYS RST

Flash
Memory

DIG CDC VSDI
CDC DIG BSOFS
CDC DIG BSDO
DIG CDC ASFS

+3V3

DIG CDC ASDI

CODEC
and
Audio

+1V8

CDC DIG ASDO
DIG AUD PA EN1

RESET
IO

DIG AUD PA EN2
DIG SYS CLK

McBSP0

DIG CDC RST

McBSP1

4
4

Power
Supply

DSP

BIRDIE

System
Clock
FPGA CLOCK

+1V5

+1V8

+1V5

1V5
Regulator

+1V8

1V8
Regulator

+3V3

PSU SYS RST

analog
clock

FPGA JTAG Signals:
JTAG FPGA TCK
JTAG FPGA TMS
FPGA JTAG TDO
JTAG FPGA TDI

DSP JTAG Signals:
JTAG DSP TCK
JTAG DSP TMS
DSP JTAG TDO
JTAG DSP TDI

JTAG DSP TRST
DSP JTAG EMU0
DSP JTAG EMU1

+3V3

digital
asynchronous serial data

DSP JTAG (x7)

FPGA JTAG (x4)

DIG RX EN

Signal Types:

Factory Connector

AGND

synchronous serial data

Circuit Descriptions

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 3.13

Block diagram of the digital board (TM8100 radios)

DGND

Transmitter

DIG EE CS

DIG TX INH

Serial
EEPROM

EE DIG SPI DI

AGND

DIG SYN EN

DIG CH SPI CLK

SYN LOCK

DIG CH SPI DO
ITF CH SPI DI
DIG CH LE

Frequency
Synthesizer

DIG SYN TR SW

ITF CH GPI1

DIG SYN FAST

DIG CH GPO1

DIG SYN LATCH

ITF CH PTT

SYN DIG FREF

ITF CH HOOK

Interface

ITF ON OFF
ITF IOP GPIO1-7
DIG SYN SPI DO

DIG IOP TXD

DIG SYN SPI CLK

ITF IOP RXD
ITF AUX GPI1-7
DIG AUX GPO4-7

Receiver

DIG RX LE

DIG AUX TXD

RX DIG LD

ITF AUX RXD

DIG RX NB EN

DIG CH TXD
ITF CH RXD

Digital Board

DIG RX EN

DIG TX EN

FPGA

CDC2 DIG SDTO
DIG CDC2 SDTI

RAM

DIG CDC2 SCLK

DIG DAC SPI CLK

DATA

DIG DAC SPI DO

ADDRESS

CONTROL

DIG CDC2 LRCK

DIG DAC LATCH

ITF CH RXD

CDC DIG VSDO
DIG CDC VSDI
CDC DIG BSOFS

DIG CH TXD

CDC DIG VSFS

PSU SYS RST

Flash
Memory

DIG CDC ARSM

CDC DIG BSDO
DIG CDC ASFS
DIG CDC ASDI

CODEC
and
Audio

DIG PSU LATCH

CDC DIG ASDO

DIG WD KICK

DIG CDC RST

DIG SLP EN

McBSP0 (x4)
McBSP1 (x4)

System
Clock

BIRDIE

FPGA CLK

+1V5

DSP and
Address
Decoder

Power
Supply

1V5
Regulator

DIG SYS CLK
DIG AUD PA EN1

1V8
Regulator

DIG AUD PA EN2

+1V8

+3V3

PSU SYS RST

RF
analog

FPGA JTAG TCK
FPGA JTAG TMS
FPGA JTAG TDO
JTAG FPGA TDI

clock
digital
asynchronous serial data

DSP JTAG (x7)

Signal Types:

FPGA JTAG (x4)

DIG RX EN
FPGA JTAG Signals:

DSP JTAG Signals:
DSP JTAG TCK
DSP JTAG TMS
DSP JTAG TDO
JTAG DSP TDI

DSP JTAG TRST
DSP JTAG EMU0
DSP JTAG EMU1

+3V3

Factory Connector

AGND

synchronous serial data

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Circuit Descriptions

3.9

Control-Head Board with Graphical Display

Introduction

This section describes the control-head board for the control head with
graphical display.
For a block diagram of the digital circuitry, refer to Figure 3.14.
Most signals (except power on/off, speaker and microphone) to and from
the radio body are processed by a RISC processor, which is implemented on
an FPGA on the control-head board. For more information on the RISC
processor and the FPGA, refer to “Software Architecture” on page 47.

User Interface

Connectors

The control-head board includes the circuitry for the following control
elements:
■

ON/OFF

■

volume potentiometer

■

main keypad (with four functions keys, two scroll keys and
two selection keys)

■

LCD module (with backlighting and optional heating element)

■

three status LEDs

■

two function key LEDs (for function keys F1 and F4)

■

keypad backlighting LEDs

■

speaker.

key

The control-head board includes the circuitry for the following connectors:
■

microphone connector (RJ45 socket)

■

control-head connector (18-way MicroMaTch socket)

■

LCD connector (for internal connection of LCD module)

■

speaker connector (2 leads)

■

soldering pads (2 leads) for an optional concealed microphone

■

control-head options connector (for optional circuit board).

Protection circuitry is provided for the microphone connector. For pinouts
of the control-head connector and the microphone connector, refer to
“Connectors” on page 36. For more information on the control-head
options connector, please contact Tait Electronics Limited.
ON/OFF Key

When battery power (13.8V) is applied to the radio, a press of the ON/OFF key
will create an active low signal (CH ON OFF) back to the radio body to initiate
the power-on or power-off sequence. This key-press will also be detected
by the FPGA of the control head through Q611 as an active high signal.
For more information on the start-up process, refer to “Software
Architecture” on page 47.

Circuit Descriptions

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Block diagram of the control-head board with graphical display

Contact made
when key
pressed

On/Off Key

CH ON OFF

On/Off
Keypad

CH ON OFF

+13V8

POWER ON/OFF SENSE
+1V5

+3V3

+13V8

Figure 3.14

+1V5

+3V3

Volume
Potentiometer

+3V3

VOL WIP DC
AGND

Power
Supply

WATCHDOG TRIGGER

Analog/
Digital
Converter

+3V3

RESET

TEMP SENSOR
LCD Loom

LCD

DISPLAY CONTROL

LCD
Connector

BIRDIE
BACKLIGHT

BACKLIGHT

Power
Switches

HEATER

System
Clock

HEATER
FPGA CLOCK

AGND
ENABLE

Contact made
when key
pressed

Function/
Scroll/
Selection
Keys

ConstantCurrent
Drivers

BRIGHT

SRAM

BRIGHT

DATA

Keypad
Backlighting
LEDs

BRIGHT

ADDRESS

Function
Key and
Status LEDs

CONTROL

Light Pipes

LED
Lenses

ROW

Main
Keypad

FPGA
COL

+3V3

Flash
Memory

RESET

ControlHead
Connector

+13V8

Boot
Flash
FPGA JTAG Signals:
FPGA JTAG TCK
FPGA JTAG TMS
FPGA JTAG TDO
JTAG FPGA TDI

ASYNC UART

ControlHead
Options
Connector

DEBUG
DGND
JTAG

AGND

DGND
AGND
CH SPI DO

+3V3 SENSE

+13.8 V

Signal Types:
MIC RXD

analog

MIC TXD

clock

MIC GPIO1

digital
asynchronous
serial data
synchronous
serial data

Microphone
Connector

CH RXD
CH TXD

Protection
Circuitry

CH GPIO1
CH PTT

MIC PTT

MIC RX AUD

CH RX AUD
CONTROL

MIC AUD IN
AGND

Concealed
Microphone

Microphone
Leads

Speaker Leads

Soldering
Pads

Speaker
Connector

MIC+
MIC–

Microphone
Pre-amplifier
and Audio
Switching

CH MIC AUD

Control-Head Board

SPK+

SPK–

Speaker

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Circuit Descriptions

Power Supply

A 3.3V regulator (U1) converts the switched 13.8V supply from the radio
body to 3.3V. A 1.5V regulator (U203) converts the 3.3V to 1.5V.
A power-sense module (U202) verifies the outputs of the voltage regulators
and—in the case of a fault—creates a power reset signal which is processed
by the FPGA.

Volume Control

The voltage level of the volume control potentiometer is converted to a
digital signal by an analog/digital converter (U601), processed by the FPGA
and transmitted to the radio body.

Main Keypad

The eight keys of the main keypad (function, scroll and selection keys) are
connected to the FPGA by an array of 3 columns and 3 rows. During idle
operation, the KEY ROW signals are driven low by the FPGA and the KEY COL
signals (pulled high by an external resistor) are monitored for activity by the
FPGA. A key-press will generate a high-to-low transition on the associated
column KEY COL signal. This, in turn, will initiate a sequence of high output
levels on the KEY ROW signals to identify which key was pressed.

LCD Module

The LCD module is connected to the control-head board via the LCD
connector. The LCD module display is controlled by a serial data link to the
FPGA. The backlighting and the optional heating element incorporated in
the LCD module are controlled by a data line each from the FPGA, which
switch two transistors on MOSFET Q102. A temperature signal from the
LCD module is converted to a digital signal by an analog/digital converter
(U601) and processed by the FPGA.

Function Key LEDs
and Status LEDs

The function key LEDs (F1 and F4) and the red, green and amber status
LEDs each are controlled by an FPGA signal and a transistor (Q604 to
Q608). The brightness level is controlled by two FPGA signals, resulting in
four intensity levels (off, low, medium and high).

Keypad
Backlighting

The keypad backlighting LEDs are controlled by two FPGA signals and two
transistors (Q2), resulting in four intensity levels (off, low, medium and
high). The keypad backlighting LEDs are arranged in two groups for the
main keypad and one group for the power button keypad, each group
consisting of three LEDs.

Speaker

The two speaker lines (SPK+ and SPK–) are connected to the speaker
connector (J104) which is joined to the control-head connector (J103)
through two ferrite beads (L105 and L106).

Microphone and
Concealed
Microphone
(Optional)

The audio signals from the microphone connector or the soldering pads of
the optional concealed microphone are routed to a switching and preamplifier circuit. If a dynamic microphone is required, the pre-amplifier is
engaged. The switching logic is used to select either the standard
microphone input or the concealed microphone signal. The dynamic
microphone must be activated in the programming software.

PTT

The PTT signal from the microphone connector is connected to the FPGA
via a resistor (R25) and relayed to the radio as a digital command.

Circuit Descriptions

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

3.10

Control-Head Board with 1-, 2- or 3-Digit Display

Introduction

This section describes the circuitry of the control-head boards for the
control heads with 1-, 2- or 3-digit display. The boards differ in their layouts
but the components are virtually identical. The circuit description given
below is sufficiently general to be applicable to all boards.

User Interface

The control-head board includes the circuitry for the following control
elements:

Connectors

■

ON/OFF

■

volume potentiometer

■

keypad (with four functions keys and two scroll keys)

■

LCD

■

three status LEDs

■

four function key LEDs (for function keys F1 to F4)

■

keypad backlighting LEDs

■

speaker.

key

The control-head board includes the circuitry for the following connectors:
■

microphone connector (RJ45 socket)

■

control-head connector (18-way MicroMaTch socket)

■

speaker connector (2 leads)

■

soldering pads (2 leads) for an optional concealed microphone

■

two control-head options connectors (for optional circuit board).

The LCD driver is based on IC2, IC5 and IC7. Electrical contact between
the control head and the LCD itself is via two elastomeric strips as described
in “Control Heads with 1-, 2- or 3-Digit Display” on page 29. There are
pads on the board for the seven keys—four function keys, two channelselection keys, and the ON/OFF key. The device IC4 reads the status of the
function and channel-selection keys. Of the 18 LEDs, there are red, orange
and green STATUS LEDs, and four green LEDs for the function keys, as well
as 11 green LEDs for back-lighting—one for each key and four for the LCD.
The four dual switching transistors Q1 to Q4 control the switching of the
LEDs; the transistors are driven by IC3.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Circuit Descriptions

Figure 3.15

Block diagram of the control-head board with 1-, 2- or 3-digit display

Signal Types:
analog

RXD

CH RXD

TXD

CH TXD

clock
CH GPIO1

CH GPIO1

digital
asynchronous
serial data
synchronous
serial data

Microphone
Connector

CH PTT

PTT
RX AUD
MIC AUD IN

R52

Protection
Circuitry

MIC AUD OUT
R11

+13V8 SW
GND

RX AUD

GND

CH SPI DO

CH SPI DO
+3V3
CH SPI CLK
Elastomeric Strips

LCD

LCD Driver

CH LE
OE
RST
DGND

D1 D2
RST
OE
CH LE

LED Lenses

Light Pipes

LEDs

LED Drivers

CH SPI CLK
+3V3
+13V8 SW
DGND

Q7
D2 D3
RST

ControlHead
Options
Board
(optional)

Control-head
options board
attached via
connector

CH LE

ControlHead
Connector

CH SPI CLK

ControlHead
Options
Connector

+3V3
+13V8 SW
MIC AUD IN P1
MIC AUD OUT
DGND
AGND
MIC+

Soldering
Pads
Concealed
Microphone
(optional)

On/Off Key

Control-Head
Board

MIC+
AGND

VOL WIP DC

Volume
Control

Contact made
when key
pressed

+3V3
AGND

+13V8 SW

Switch Pads

(not implemented)
R50

+13V8 SW

CH ON OFF
DGND

CH ON OFF
R51

DGND

LINK

ChannelSelection
Keys

CH SPI DI

Switch Pads

CH SPI DI

CH LE

CH SPI CLK
Contact made
when key
pressed

Speaker Leads

Key Drivers
Switch Pads

Speaker
Connector

CH SPI CLK

+3V3

DGND

+3V3

(not implemented)

Function
Keys

Contact made
when key
pressed

AGND

C50

R53

SPK+

SPK–

Speaker

Circuit Descriptions

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Serial Peripheral
Interface

The control-head board uses an SPI (serial peripheral interface) to control
the display on the LCD, turn back-lighting on and off, control the STATUS
LEDs, and read the status of the keys. The interface consists of the following
four lines at the control-head connector:
■

pin 11: data out CH SPI DO

■

pin 12: latch line CH LE

■

pin 15: data in CH SPI DI

■

pin 16: clock CH SPI CLK.

Data Input and
Output

Data that are input to the control head are clocked through the LCD driver
and daisy-chained to a shift register. Once all the data have been clocked in,
the latch line is driven low. On this falling edge all the outputs (LEDs and
LCD segments) are driven to their new state. When the latch line is driven
high, the state of each key is latched into another shift register. The data are
then clocked out back to the radio body so that the radio can respond
accordingly.

LCD Driver

An oscillator is used to run the LCD. It oscillates at about 60Hz and employs
a Schmitt trigger and D flip-flop to ensure a 50% duty cycle to the LCD.
A reset circuit is required because the reset from the main board is not routed
to the control head. The reset circuit also employs a Schmitt trigger.

Volume Control

The volume-control potentiometer is linear and passes the DC voltage signal
VOL WIP DC to the radio body. The signal is read by an ADC on the main
board, and the volume is adjusted accordingly.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Circuit Descriptions

3.11

RJ45 Control Head

Introduction

This section describes the circuitry of the control-head board for the RJ45
control head.

User Interface

The control-head board includes a POWER ON/OFF LED which indicates
whether the radio is switched on or off1.

Connectors

The control-head board includes the circuitry for the following connectors:
■

programming connector (RJ45 socket)

■

control-head connector (18-way MicroMaTch socket).

For pinouts of the connectors, refer to “Connectors” on page 36.
Basic Circuitry

Figure 3.16

The signals of the control-head connector are directly connected to the
telemetry connector. The POWER ON/OFF LED is supplied by the +13V8
voltage.

Block diagram of the control-head board of the RJ45 control-head

PRG ON OFF
+13V8

Programming
Connector

CH ON OFF
+13V8

PRG TXD

CH TXD

PRG RXD

CH RXD

PRG RX AUD
PRG MIC AUD
PRG PTT
AGND

CH RX AUD

Control-Head
Connector

CH MIC AUD
CH PTT
AGND

Signal types:
analog

Power On/Off
LED

+13V8

digital
asynchronous
serial data

Control-Head Board of
RJ45 Control Head

1. The signal supplying the LED can be switched or unswitched. For more information refer to
“Connector Power Supply Options” on page 86.

Circuit Descriptions

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

TM8100 mobiles
TM8200 mobiles

Chapter 2
Servicing the Radio

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Chapter 2 – Servicing the Radio

100

General
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Repair Levels and Website Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Tools, Equipment and Spares. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Servicing Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Test Equipment Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Replacing Board Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Shielding Cans and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
SMT Repair Techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Computer-Controlled Test Mode (CCTM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Defining Frequency Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Visual and Audible Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Disassembly and Reassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
5.1 Removing and Mounting the Control Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
5.2 Disassembling the Radio Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.3 Reassembling the Radio Body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
5.4 Disassembling and Reassembling the Control Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Servicing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
6.1 Initial Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
6.2 Final Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Power Supply Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

Interface Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
9.1 Initial Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
9.2 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
9.3 Phase-locked Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
9.4 Loop Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
9.5 Receive VCO and Related Circuitry (UHF Radios) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
9.6 Transmit VCO and Related Circuitry (UHF Radios) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
9.7 VCO and Related Circuitry (VHF Radios) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
9.8 Power Supply for FCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
9.9 VCXO and TCXO Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
9.10 Signals at TP501 and TP502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
9.11 VCXO and CODEC Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

10 Receiver Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
10.1 Faulty Receiver Sensitivity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
10.2 Excessive Loss of Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
10.3 Moderate or Slight Loss of Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
10.4 Incorrect RSSI Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
10.5 Faulty Radio Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
10.6 High Receiver Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
11 Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
11.1 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
11.2 Transmitter RF Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
11.3 Biasing of PA Driver and PAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
11.4 RF Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
12 Transmitter Fault Finding (25W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
12.1 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
12.2 Transmitter RF Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
12.3 Biasing of PA Driver and PAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
12.4 RF Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
13 CODEC and Audio Fault Finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
13.1 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
13.2 Faulty Speaker Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
13.3 No Speaker Audio at Auxiliary Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
13.4 Faulty Receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
13.5 Faulty Modulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
13.6 Faulty Modulation Using Auxiliary Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
14 Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
14.1 CCTM Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
14.2 Power Supply Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
14.3 LCD Display Faulty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
14.4 LCD Backlighting Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
14.5 LCD Heating Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
14.6 Function Key LEDs or Status LEDs Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
14.7 Keypad Backlighting Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
14.8 On/Off Key Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
14.9 Function, Scroll, or Selection Keys Faulty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
14.10 Speaker Faulty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
14.11 Volume Control Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
14.12 PTT Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

101

15 Fault Finding of Control Head with 1- 2- or 3-Digit Display . . . . . . . . .429
15.1 Display Faulty but not LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
15.2 Some LEDs Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
15.3 All LEDs Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
15.4 Display and All LEDs Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
15.5 Some but not All Keys Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
15.6 All Keys Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
15.7 Speaker Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
15.8 Volume Control Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
16 Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437

102

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

General Information

Scope of Section

4.1

This section discusses the two repair levels covered by the service manual,
details concerning website access, the tools, equipment and spares required,
and the setting up of the necessary test equipment. General servicing
precautions are also given, as well as details of certain non-standard SMT
techniques required for level-2 repairs.

Repair Levels and Website Access

Repair Levels

This manual covers level-1 and level-2 repairs of the radios. Level-1 repairs
comprise the replacement of control-head boards, main-board assemblies,
and other parts of the radio; level-2 repairs comprise repairs of controlhead boards and, except for special items, main-board assemblies.
The special items are:
■

digital board

■

RF PAs (Q309 and Q310)

■

CODEC 1 (IC204)

■

copper plate.

Replacements of the connectors and volume-control potentiometer on the
control-head board are level-1 repairs. Replacements of the connectors on
the main-board assembly, however, are level-2 repairs because these repairs
entail the disassembly of the main-board assembly.
Important

Accreditation of
Service Centres

The circuit boards in the radio are complex. They should
be serviced only by accredited service centres (ASC).
Repairs attempted without the necessary equipment and
tools or by untrained personnel might result in permanent
damage to the radio and void the warranty.

Service centres that wish to achieve ASC status should contact Technical
Support. They will need to provide evidence that they meet the criteria
required for accreditation; Technical Support will supply details of these
criteria. These centres must then make available suitable staff for training by
TEL personnel, allow their service facilities to be assessed, and provide
adequate documentation of their processes. They will be accorded ASC
status and endorsed for repairs of the radios after their staff have been trained
and their facilities confirmed as suitable. Existing ASCs need to apply for and
be granted an endorsement for repairs of the radios. All ASCs with the
necessary endorsements may carry out level-1 and level-2 repairs of these
radios, whether under warranty or not.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

General Information

103

Skills and Resources
for Level-1 Repairs

For level-1 repairs basic electronic repair skills are sufficient. Apart from the
standard tools and equipment of any service centre, certain torque drivers
are required as well as a service kit and, for diagnostic purposes, a spare
control head.

Skills and Resources
for Level-2 Repairs

For level-2 repairs expertise is required in SMT repairs of circuit boards with
a very high complexity and extreme component density. Apart from the
tools and equipment needed for level-1 repairs, the standard SMT repair
tools are required. A can-removal tool is strongly recommended but not
mandatory.

Website Access

To carry out level-1 and level-2 repairs, service centres need access to the
secured portion of the Technical Support website. There are different access
levels; those required for level-1 and level-2 repairs are:
■

level-1 repairs: associate access

■

level-2 repairs: ASC and Tait-only access.

Log-in passwords are needed for associate and Tait-only access; Technical
Support supplies service centres with the necessary log-in information.
(The unsecured portion of the Technical Support website is accessible to the
general public. This type of access is called public access, and no log-in
password is required.)
Items Available
on Website

Table 4.1

The information available at the different access levels is summarized in
Table 4.1. The technical notes mentioned are of different types. Associate
technical notes relate to the repair of the radio but not the downloading of
firmware; Tait-only technical notes relate to the firmware. The PCB
information is discussed in more detail below.

Items relating to the radios that are available on the Technical Support website

Item
User’s guide
Installation guide
Public technical notes
Product release notes
Specifications
Calibration software
Programming software
Programming user manuals
Fitting instructions
Service manual
Associate technical notes
Software release information
Firmware
Tait-only technical notes
PCB information

104

General Information

Public
access

Associate
access

ASC
access

Tait-only
access

•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•

•
•
•
•

•

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

PCB Information

PCB information for a particular circuit board consists of the relevant parts
lists, grid reference indexes, PCB layouts, and circuit diagrams. (The grid
reference indexes give the locations of components on the PCB layouts and
circuit diagrams.) PCB information is compiled whenever there is a major
change in the layout of the board. All PCB information is published on the
Technical Support website.

Tait FOCUS
Database

An additional source of information to service centres is the Tait FOCUS
call-logging database. (This is accessible on the Technical Support website
also.) All Customer-related technical issues regarding the radios are recorded
on this database. These issues may be raised by both Customers and service
centres. Technical Support resolves the issues and informs the Customer or
service centre concerned of the outcome. All issues and their solutions are
available for review by all service centres.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

General Information

105

4.2

Tools, Equipment and Spares

Torque-drivers

For level-1 and level-2 repairs, excluding SMT repairs of the circuit boards,
the following torque-drivers are required.
■

For level-1 repairs Torx T6, Torx T10, and Torx T20 driver bits are
necessary.

■

For level-1 repairs, 3/16 inch and 14mm long-reach sockets are
required.

Refer to the illustrations in “Reassembling the Radio Body” on page 137
for the corresponding torque values.
Tools for SMT
Repairs

In general only the standard tools for SMT work are required for level-2
repairs of the circuit boards. In addition, a can-removal tool is recommended
but if none is available, a hot-air tool may be used instead. However, it
should be noted that a hot-air tool affords little control. Even in skilled
hands, use of a hot-air tool to remove cans will result in rapid uncontrolled
rises in the temperature of components under the can being removed as well
as under any adjacent cans. The circuit board might suffer damage as a result.

Test Equipment

The following test equipment is required for servicing the radio:
■

test PC (with programming and calibration applications loaded)

■

RF communications test set (audio bandwidth of at least 10kHz)

■

oscilloscope

■

digital current meter (capable of measuring up to 20A)

■

multimeter.

■

DC power supply (capable of 13.8V and 20A for the 40W/50W radios,
and 10A for the 25W radios)

■

spare control head

■

service kit.

Separate instruments may be used in place of the RF communications test
set. These are an RF signal generator, audio signal generator, audio analyser,
RF power meter, and modulation meter.

106

General Information

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

The service kit contains all the items needed for connecting the radio to the
test equipment. The setting up of the equipment is described in “Test
Equipment Setup” on page 111. The service kit also includes a product
support CD and a folder with the necessary service documentation,
including this manual. The CD contains the programming application,
calibration application, and soft-copies of the service and related
documentation. The contents of the service kit are listed in Table 4.2. Note
that the TMAA20-04 cable listed is required only if the test PC is to be
connected directly to the radio for programming purposes.

Service Kit

Note

Table 4.2

The characters xx below stand for the issue number of the manual.
Only the latest issue of each manual will normally be available for
ordering.

Contents of service kit (TMAA21-00)

Product code

Item

TMAA20-02

Cable (RJ45 socket to DB9 socket)

TMAA20-03

Cable (25W power connector to banana plugs plus speaker connector)

TMAA20-04

Cable (RJ12 socket to RJ45 plug)

TMAA21-01

Cable (DB15 socket to RJ45 plug plus speaker connector)

TMAA23-02

Cable (50W/40W power connector to banana plugs plus speaker connector)

T2000-A19

Cable (DB9 socket to RJ12 plug)

TOPA-SV-024

Test unit

MMA-00005-xx

Service manual

MMA-00037-xx

PCB information

TMAA20-01

Product support CD

406-00046-xx

Programming CD

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

General Information

107

4.3

Servicing Precautions

Introduction

This section discusses the precautions that need to be taken when servicing
the radios. These precautions fall into the following categories:
■

mechanical issues

■

compliance issues

■

anti-static precautions

■

transmitter issues.

Service technicians should familiarize themselves with these precautions
before attempting repairs of the radios.
Use of Torquedrivers

Apply the correct torque when using a torque-driver to tighten a screw or
nut in the radio. Under-torquing can cause problems with microphonics and
heat transfer. Over-torquing can damage the radio. The illustrations in
“Disassembly and Reassembly” on page 129 show the correct torque values
for the different screws and nuts.

Non-scratch Bench
Tops

Use workbenches with non-scratch bench tops so that the mechanical parts
of the radio are not damaged during disassembly and re-assembly.
(The workbench must also satisfy the anti-static requirements specified
below.) In addition, use a clear area of the bench when disassembling and reassembling the radio.

Compliance
Issues

Note

Sealing of Radio

To maintain the sealing of the radio to IP54 standards, ensure that all bungs
and seals are fitted after servicing the radio. These are for the auxiliary, RF,
external options, and programming connectors:

The radio is designed to satisfy the applicable compliance regulations. Do not make modifications or changes to the radio not
expressly approved by TEL. Failure to do so could invalidate compliance requirements and void the Customer’s authority to operate
the radio.

■

bung for auxiliary connector

■

rubber seal for RF connector

■

bung for aperture for options connector (connector not fitted)

■

cover seal for options connector (connector fitted).

In addition, ensure that the grommet sealing the aperture to the microphone
connector of the control head is properly fitted.
ESD Precautions

Important

This equipment contains devices which are susceptible to
damage from static discharges. You must handle these
devices carefully and according to the procedures described
in the manufacturers’ data books.

Purchase an antistatic bench kit from a reputable manufacturer and install
and test it according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Figure 4.1 shows a
typical antistatic bench set-up.

108

General Information

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

You can obtain further information on antistatic precautions and the dangers
of electrostatic discharge (ESD) from standards such as ESD S4.1-1997
(revised) or EN 100015-4 1994. The Electrostatic Discharge Association
website is http://www.esda.org/.
Figure 4.1

Typical antistatic bench set-up
conductive wrist strap

dissipative rubber
bench mat

to building ground or
mains ground via
1MΩ series resistor

Storage and
Transport
of Items

Always observe anti-static precautions when storing, shipping or carrying
the circuit boards and their components. Use anti-static bags for circuit
boards and anti-static bags or tubes for components that are to be stored or
shipped. Use anti-static bags or trays for carrying circuit boards, and foil or
anti-static bags, trays, or tubes for carrying components.

Anti-static
Workbenches

Use an anti-static workbench installed and tested according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. A typical installation is shown in Figure 4.1.
These benches have a dissipative rubber bench top, a conductive wrist strap,
and a connection to the building earth. The material of the bench top must
satisfy not only anti-static requirements but also the non-scratch
requirements mentioned above.

Transmitter Issues

The following issues relate to the operation of the transmitter:
■

RF and thermal burns

■

antenna loading

■

test transmissions

■

accidental transmissions

■

distress beacons.

The precautions required in each case are given below.
Caution

Avoid thermal burns. Do not touch the cooling fins
or underside of the radio body when the transmitter
is or has been operating. Avoid RF burns. Do not
touch the antenna while the transmitter is operating.

Important

The radio has been designed to operate with a 50Ω
termination impedance. Do not operate the transmitter

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

General Information

109

without a suitable load. Failure to do so might result in
damage to the power output stage of the transmitter.
Important

While servicing the main board, avoid overheating the
radio during test transmissions. The following is good
practice: Secure the main-board assembly in the chassis
with the two external screws and one of the internal screws.
The heat-transfer block must be secured to the main board.
The lid of the radio body may be left off. After completing
any measurement or test requiring activation of the
transmitter, immediately return the radio to the receive
mode.

Important

Under certain circumstances the microprocessor can key on
the transmitter. Ensure that all instruments are protected at
all times from such accidental transmissions.

Note

110

General Information

The frequency ranges 156.8MHz±375kHz, 243MHz±5kHz,
and 406.0 to 406.1MHz are reserved worldwide for use as maritime emergency frequencies or by distress beacons. Do not program transmitters to operate in any of these frequency bands.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

4.4

Test Equipment Setup

Introduction

This section covers the setting up of the test equipment for servicing the
radios, as well as related aspects:
■

setting up of test equipment, including test unit

■

basic programming and calibration tasks

■

invoking CCTM (computer-controlled test mode)

■

summary tables of CCTM commands and error codes

■

visual and audible indications provided by radio

The last-named aspect applies to control heads with UI, and concerns the
LEDs and LCD screen, and the various alerts and confidence tones
emitted from the speaker.
STATUS

Connect Equipment

Connect the test equipment to the radio as shown in Figure 4.2. Use the test
unit, cables and adaptor of the service kit. Refer to “Tools, Equipment and
Spares” on page 106 for details of the test equipment and service kit.
The test unit is described in “TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit” on page 571.
For testing receive and transmit functions respectively, the switches of the
test unit must be set as described below. (When programming or calibrating
radios the switches have no effect, although it is good practice to set the
MODE switch to “RX”.)

Settings for
Receive Tests

For receive tests set the switches on the test unit as follows:
■

HOOK

switch

: “OFF HOOK”

■

MODE

switch

: “RX”

■

AUDIO IN

■

AUDIO OUT

switch : “OFF ”
switch: “SPEAKER” or “LOAD”.

In the last-named case, with the switch in the “SPEAKER” position, the
received audio is output from the test unit’s speaker. In the “LOAD” position a
16Ω load is switched into the circuit in place of the test unit’s speaker.
Note, however, that the AUDIO OUT switch has no effect on the radio’s speaker.
Settings for
Transmit Tests

For transmit tests set the switches on the test unit as follows:
■

HOOK

switch

: “OFF HOOK”

■

MODE

switch

: “RX” initially

■

AUDIO IN

■

AUDIO OUT

switch : “MIC AUDIO”
switch: (immaterial).

When ready to transmit, set the MODE switch to the “TX/PTT” position.
This switch functions in the same way as the PTT switch on the
microphone.
Product Support CD

Install the programming and calibration applications on the test PC.
These applications are included on the product support CD supplied with
the service kit.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

General Information

111

Figure 4.2

Test setup

Test PC

serial port
(DB9)
RF comms set

T950-001
USB1.1 to serial
DB9 adapter
(optional)

TOPA-SV-024

computer
connector
(RJ12)

TPA-SV-006
cable

RF in/out
(N-type)

transmit audio
connector (BNC)

AUDIO
OUT
(BNC)

AUDIO
IN HI
(BNC)

audio
monitor
out (BNC)

receive audio /
SINAD connector
(BNC)
radio connector
(DB15)
speaker
connector

Oscilloscope
TMAA21-01 cable

microphone
connector (RJ45)

AC input
(BNC)

TM9100 radio

power
connector

auxiliary
connector
(DB15)

TMAA23-02 cable
(50W/40W radios)
TMAA20-03 cable
(25W radios)

RF connector
(mini UHF or
BNC)

DC power supply

banana plugs

112

General Information

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

4.5

Replacing Board Components
This section describes the procedure for obtaining the correct replacement
for any faulty component on the boards.
■

identify version of PCB information applicable to board

■

identify replacement component in the parts list of the PCB information

■

consult technical notes

■

obtain replacement component

The technical notes will indicate whether there have been any changes
affecting the component in question.
Identify
PCB Information

Identify the IPN of the PCB and compare the issue number with that in the
PCB information supplied with the service documentation.
Note

The IPN is the ten-digit number printed at one corner of the
board. The last two digits in the IPN represent the issue number
of the PCB.

If the issue numbers match, consult the parts list, as described below. If the
issue number indicates that the board is either an earlier or a later version,
obtain the PCB information for the board under repair from the Technical
Support website (support.taitworld.com).
Tip

Print and store a copy of every PCB information published on the
Technical Support website.

Identify
Replacement
Component

After locating the correct PCB information for the board, consult the parts
list for the board. Identify the component in question in the parts list.
Note, however, that a new PCB information is published only whenever
there is a major change in the design of the board. A major change normally
involves a change in the layout of the PCB, which requires that the issue
number in the IPN be incremented. Any minor changes following a major
change (and preceding the next major change) normally involve only
changes in the components on the board. Such minor changes might affect
the component in question. To determine if this is the case, consult any
technical notes that might apply to the board as described below.

Consult Technical
Notes

A technical note about each major change is published on the Technical
Support website (support.taitworld.com). Technical notes giving details of
any intervening minor but important changes are also published. It is
advisable to print and store a copy of every technical note published.

Obtain
Replacement
Component

Determine if the required replacement component is included in one of the
spares kits. (Check with TEL regarding the availability of the kit.)
If the required component is not included in a kit, order the component
from a CSO or, in the case of a CSO, from TEL. Always ensure that the
replacement component has the identical specification to that given in the
parts list. It is particularly important for the tolerances to be the same.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

General Information

113

4.6

Shielding Cans and Connectors
The shielding cans on the top- and bottom-side of the main-board assembly
are identified in Figure 4.3 and Figure 4.4. The figures also show the
locations of the connectors on the board.

Figure 4.3

Shielding cans and connectors (top side of main-board assembly)

PIN TOP

LPF TOP

DIRC TOP
FE TOP

PAF TOP
VCO TOP
(UHF only)
IF TOP

SYN TOP

PAD TOP
FCL TOP
CDC TOP

PL101
Factory
Connector

Digital Board

114

General Information

SK102
Internal-Options Connector

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 4.4

Shielding cans and connectors (bottom side of main-board assembly)

Can Removal
and Installation

Cans are best removed and installed using a can-removal tool. If this tool is
available, technicians should refer to the documentation supplied with the
tool for the correct procedures. If the tool is not available, a hot-air tool may
be used instead. However, technicians require training in the best techniques
to employ in the absence of a can-removal tool. Such training is part of the
accreditation process for service centres.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

General Information

115

It is good practice to discard any can that has been removed and replace it
with a spare can. If this is not done, special precautions are needed when reinstalling the original can. These precautions are discussed as part of the
training for accreditation.

Spare Cans

4.7

SMT Repair Techniques

Standard
Procedures

Service centres carrying out level-2 repairs are expected to be familiar with
the standard techniques for the replacement of SMT components. However,
certain components on the main board require non-standard techniques and
these are discussed below. Another issue of concern is the procedure for
removing and installing cans. A discussion of the issue concludes this section.

Non-standard
Procedures

Do not use the standard SMT repair techniques when replacing the
capacitors C548 and C565 and the inductors L601 and L602. The standard
techniques tend to produce excessive heat, which will damage these
components. Do not use a hot-air tool or heat gun. Instead use solder paste
and a standard soldering iron with an iron tip with a specified temperature
of 600°F (315°C). The capacitors are part of the frequency-synthesizer
circuitry under the SYN TOP can. The inductors are part of the SMPS of the
power-supply circuitry on the bottom-side of the board. Figure 4.5 on
page 117 shows the locations of the components.

116

General Information

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 4.5

Locations of the capacitors C548 and C565 and the inductors L601 and L602

top side
(VHF board. UHF board similar)
Note that other components may be
fitted for C548 (such as C5085 and
C5086 for UHF radios)

bottom side
(UHF board. VHF board similar)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

General Information

117

4.8

Computer-Controlled Test Mode (CCTM)
The servicing procedures require a radio to be placed in the computercontrolled test mode. In this mode CCTM commands can be entered at the
test PC. These commands are then relayed via the test unit to the radio.
Certain CCTM commands cause the radio to carry out particular functions;
others read particular settings and parameter values in the radio. The CCTM
commands of use in servicing radios are listed in Table 4.3 to Table 4.7,
grouped according to category.

Terminal Program
for CCTM

Use the calibration application to place the radio in CCTM. To do this, run
the calibration application, select Tools > CCTM, and click the CCTM Mode
button. For more information, refer to the online help of the calibration
application.
You can also use the HyperTerminal utility which is supplied with Microsoft
Windows. As a preliminary, first select the settings for the communications
port as follows:

Invoking CCTM

118

Open the terminal program. (In the case of HyperTerminal, click
Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > HyperTerminal.)

In the terminal program first select the COM port to which the radio
is connected. Then select the following settings for the port:
■

bits per second : 19 200

■

data bits

■

parity

: none

■

stop bits

■

flow control

: none.

Click the OK button (or equivalent).

Save the file with the port settings under a suitable name.
For subsequent sessions requiring the terminal program, open
this file.

Using the terminal program, place the radio in CCTM as follows:
1.

Enter the character ^ to reset the radio.

As soon as the radio is reset, the letter v is displayed. (If an uppercase
letter V appears, this implies a fault.)

Immediately the letter v is displayed, enter the character%.
(The character% must be entered within half a second of the letter v
appearing.)

If the character% is accepted, the character – is displayed in response,
and the message Test Mode appears on the radio display. This implies
that the radio has entered CCTM. If the attempt fails, repeat
Steps 1 to 3.

General Information

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Table 4.3

CCTM commands in the audio category
Usage

Command
Entry at keyboard

Response on screen

Audio category
20 – Mute received audio
Forces muting of the received
audio signal

None

21 – Unmute received audio
Forces unmuting of the received
audio signal

None

22 – Mute microphone
Mutes transmit modulation
(effectively mutes microphone
audio)

None

23 – Unmute microphone
Unmutes transmit modulation
(effectively unmutes microphone
audio)

None

74 – Audio PA
Controls the state of the audio PA
(and hence enables or disables the
speaker)

74 x
where x is the required state
(0=stand-by, 1=on, 2=mute)

None

110 – Audio volume
Sets the level of the audio volume

110 x
where x defines the required level
(any integer from 0 to 255)

None

138 – Select microphone
Selects the microphone required

138 x
None
where x is the required microphone
(0=control-head microphone;
1=auxiliary microphone)

323 – Audio tap in
323 x y
None
Generates the audio tone AUD TAP IN where x specifies the tap point
at the specified tap point
(r2, r5, t1 or t5) and y the tap type
(A=bypass in, B=combine, E=splice)
(the default is A when y is omitted)
324 – Audio tap out
Outputs the audio signal at the
specified tap point to AUD TAP OUT

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

324 x y
None
where x specifies the tap point
(r1, r2, r3, r4, r5, t1, t2, t3 or t7)
and y the tap type
(C=bypass out, D=split, E=splice)
(the default is D when y is omitted)

General Information

119

Table 4.4

CCTM commands in the radio-information, radio-control and system categories
Usage

Command
Entry at keyboard

Response on screen

Radio-information category
94 – Radio serial number
Reads the serial number of the
radio

x
where x is the serial number
(an eight-digit number)

96 – Firmware version
Reads the version number of the
radio firmware

QMA1F_x_y
where x is a three-character
identifier and y is an eight-digit
version number

97 – Boot-code version
Reads the version number of the
boot code

QMA1B_x_y
where x is a three-character
identifier and y is an eight-digit
version number

98 – FPGA version
Reads the version number of the
FPGA

QMA1G_x_y
where x is a three-character
identifier and y is an eight-digit
version number

133 – Hardware version
Reads the product code of the
radio body and the hardware
version number

133

x
y
where x is the product code
and y is the version number
(a four-digit number)

134 – FLASH serial number
Reads the serial number of the
FLASH memory

134

x
where x is the serial number
(a 16-digit hexadecimal number)

400 x (alternatively *x )
where x is a valid channel number

None

46 – Supply voltage
Reads the supply voltage

x
where x is the supply voltage in
millivolts

203 – Clear system error
Clears the last recorded system
error

203

None

204 – Read system error
Reads the last recorded system
error and the associated data

204

SysErr: x
y
where x is the error number and
y represents the associated data

205 – Erase persistent data
Effectively resets the calibration
parameters to their default values

205

None

Radio-control category
400 – Select channel
Changes the current channel to
that specified
System category

120

General Information

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Table 4.5

CCTM commands in the frequency-synthesizer and receiver categories
Usage

Command
Entry at keyboard

Response on screen

Frequency-synthesizer category
72 – Lock status
72
Reads the lock status of the RF PLL,
FCL and LO2 respectively

xyz
where x is the RF PLL, y the FCL,
and z the LO2 lock status
(0=not in lock, 1=in lock)

101 – Radio frequencies
Sets the transmit and receive
frequencies to specified values

101 x y 0
where x is the transmit and y the
receive frequency in hertz
(any integer from 50 000 000 to
1000 000 000)

None

301 – Calibrate VCXO
Calibrates the VCXO of the FCL

301 0 10

Four KVCXO control sensitivity
values, followed by message with
results of calibration attempt

302 – Calibrate VCO(s)
Calibrates the VCO(s) of the
frequency synthesizer

302 0 10

Eight KVCO control sensitivity
values, followed by message with
results of calibration attempt

334 x
334 – Synthesizer power
Switches the frequency synthesizer where x is the required state
(0=off, 1=on)
on or off via the DIG SYN EN line

None

335 – Synthesizer switch
335 x
Switches the transmit-receive
where x is the required state
switch of the frequency synthesizer (0=off, 1=on)
on or off via the DIG SYN TR SW line

None

389 – Synthesizer mode
Sets the mode of the frequency
synthesizer to fast or slow

389 x
where x is the required mode
(0=slow, 1=fast)

None

32 – Receive mode
Sets the radio in the receive mode

None

63 – RSSI level
Reads the averaged RSSI level

x
where x is the averaged level in
multiples of 0.1 dBm

Receiver category

376 – Front-end tuning
376 (to read voltage)
Sets or reads the tuning voltage for
the front-end circuitry of the
receiver
376 x (to set voltage)
where x is the front-end tuning
voltage in millivolts
(any integer from 0 to 3000)
378 – Receiver output level
Reads the signal power at the
output of the channel filter
(the square of the amplitude)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

378

x
where x is the front-end tuning
voltage in millivolts
None

x
where x is the signal power

General Information

121

Table 4.6

CCTM commands in the transmitter category (part 1)
Usage

Command
Entry at keyboard

Response on screen

Transmitter category
33 – Transmit mode
33
Sets the radio in the transmit mode

None

47 – Temperature
Reads the temperature in the
vicinity of the PAs

x
y
where x is the temperature in
degrees celsius, and y is the
corresponding voltage in millivolts
(a value from 0 to 1200 mV)

114 – Transmitter power
114 (to read value)
Sets or reads the transmitter power
setting (compare command 326)

x
where x is the current power
setting (an integer from 0 to 1023)

114 x (to set value)
None
where x is the required power
setting (an integer from 0 to 1023)
304 – Driver bias
Sets or reads the clamp current at
the gate of the PA driver

304 (to read value)

x
where x is the DAC value of the
clamp current (an integer from 0 to
255)

304 x (to set value)
where x is the required DAC value
of the clamp current
(an integer from 0 to 255)

None

318 – Forward power
Reads the forward-power level

318

x
where x is the voltage in millivolts
corresponding to the power level
(a value from 0 to 1100 mV)

319 – Reverse power
Reads the reverse-power level

319

x
where x is the voltage in millivolts
corresponding to the power level
(a value from 0 to 1100 mV)

326 – Transmitter power
Sets the power level of the
transmitter

326 x
where x specifies the level
(0=off, 1=very low, 2=low,
3=medium, 4=high, 5=maximum)

None

122

General Information

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Table 4.7

CCTM commands in the transmitter category (part 2)
Usage

Command
Entry at keyboard

Response on screen

Transmitter category
331 – Final bias 1
Sets or reads the bias voltage for
the first PA

332 – Final bias 2
Sets or reads the bias voltage for
the second PA

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

331 (to read value)

x
where x is the DAC value of the
bias voltage (an integer from 0 to
255)

331 x (to set value)
where x is the DAC value of the
required bias voltage
(any integer from 0 to 255)

None

332 (to read value)

x
where x is the DAC value of the
bias voltage (an integer from 0 to
255)

332 x (to set value)
where x is the DAC value of the
required bias voltage
(any integer from 0 to 255)

None

General Information

123

Table 4.8

CCTM commands for the control head (graphical display)
Usage

Command
Entry at keyboard
1000 – Switch all LEDs
Switches all the function-key and
STATUS LEDs on or off
1001 – Switch selected LED
Switches a selected function-key or
STATUS LED on or off

1000 x
where x is the required state
(0=off, 1=on)
1001 x y
where x identifies the LED
(0=F1, 1=F4, 2=yellow, 3=green,
4=red) and y is the state
(0=off, 1=on)
1002 – LED intensity
1002 x
Sets the LED intensity
where x is the intensity level
(0=off, 1=low, 2=medium, 3=high)
1003 – Keypad back-lighting
1003 x
Activates the keypad back-lighting where x is the intensity level
at a specified intensity
(0=off, 1=low, 2=medium, 3=high)
1004 – LCD back-lighting
1004 x
Activates the LCD back-lighting at where x is the intensity level
a specified intensity
(0=off, 1=low, 2=medium, 3=high)
1005 – Display contrast
1005 x
Sets the contrast of the display to a where x is the contrast level
specified level
(any integer from 0 to 15)
1006 – Display elements
1006 x
where x is the required state
Switches all the elements of the
(0=off, 1=on)
display on or off
1007 – LCD temperature sensor 1007
Reads the output of the LCD
temperature sensor
1008 – LCD heating
1008 x
Switches the LCD heating on or off where x is the required state
(0=off, 1=on)
1009 – Key press
1009 x
Switches on or off the facility for
where x is the required state
detecting if any key is pressed or
(0=off, 1=on)
released
1010 – Volume control
1010
Reads the setting of the volumecontrol potentiometer
1011 – Microphone source
Selects the microphone input
source

Table 4.9

1011 x
where x is the required source
(0=microphone connector,
1=concealed microphone)

Response on screen
None

None

x
where x corresponds to the
temperature reading
(an integer between 00 and FF)
None

x
where x is the serial output from
the detection facility
x
where x is the potentiometer
setting
(an integer between 00 and FF)
None

CCTM commands of the remote control-head kit

CCTM command

Entry at keyboard

Response on screen

1012 – Remote kit
turns the audio amplifier on and off

1012 0 = off
1012 1 = on

none

1013 – Mute audio amplifier
mutes and unmutes the audio amplifier

1012 0 = mute
1012 1 =unmute

none

1014 – Digital potentiometer
reads the digital potentiometer

1014

value between 0 and
255

1017 – Audio amplifier gain
sets the audio amplifier gain (4 levels)

1017 x
where x is the gain (0 to 3)

none

124

General Information

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

CCTM Error Codes

Table 4.10
Error code

Once the radio is in CCTM, the CCTM commands may be entered as
shown in Table 4.3 to Table 4.7. Depending on the command, a response
might or might not be displayed. If an error occurs, an error code will be
displayed. Possible error codes are listed in Table 4.10.

CCTM error codes
Description

C01

An invalid CCTM command has been received. Enter a valid CCTM command.

C02

A valid CCTM command with invalid parameters has been received. Re-enter the CCTM
command with valid parameters.

C03

A valid CCTM command has been received but cannot be processed at this time. Enter the
CCTM command again. If the error persists, power the radio down and up again, and re-enter
the CCTM command.

C04

An error occurred on entry into CCTM. Power the radio down and up again, and place the
radio in CCTM again.

C05

The radio has not responded within the specified time. Re-enter the CCTM command.

X04

The DSP is not responding. Check the DSP pin connections. If the error persists, replace the
DSP.

X05

The version of the DSP is incompatible with the version of the radio firmware. Replace the DSP
with a later version.

X06

The internal configuration of the MCU is incorrect. Adjust the configuration.

X31

There is an error in the checksum for the model configuration.

X32

There is an error in the checksum for the radio’s database.

X35

The radio temperature is above the T1 threshold and a reduction in the transmit power is
impending. To avoid damaging the radio, stop transmitting until the radio has cooled down
sufficiently.

X36

The radio temperature is above the T2 threshold and the inhibiting of transmissions is
imminent.

X37

The supply voltage is less than the V1 threshold.

X38

The supply voltage is less than the V2 threshold and the radio has powered itself down.
The radio will not respond to the reset command character ^ .

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

General Information

125

4.9

Defining Frequency Bands
Where test procedures or figures differ according to the frequency band of
the radio, the frequency band is given in brackets. The frequency band may
be referred to as either ‘VHF’ (very high frequency) or ‘UHF’ (ultra-high
frequency) or identified by the frequency sub-band, such as ‘B1’ or ‘H7’.
For example:
RF output power: > 60W (VHF), > 52W (UHF)
current: < 15A (VHF), < 12A (UHF)

The frequency bands for TM8100/TM8200 radios are listed in Table 4.11.
The relevant frequencies for the different bands are listed in this table.
Table 4.11

Defining frequency bands
Frequency identification

VHF

UHF

126

General Information

Frequency sub-band

A band

A4 = 66MHz to 88MHz

B band

B1 = 136MHz to 174MHz

C band

C0 = 174MHz to 225MHz

D band

D1 = 216MHz to 266MHz

H band

H5 = 400MHz to 470MHz
H6 = 450MHz to 530MHz
H7 = 450MHz to 520MHz

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

4.10

Visual and Audible Indications
Visual and audible indicators give information about the state of the radio.
Visual indications are provided by the STATUS LEDs, function-key LEDs, and
LCD display. The information conveyed by the STATUS LEDs is listed in
Table 4.12. The behaviour of the function-key LEDs depends on the way
the function keys are programmed. The LCD display normally displays
channel and user information, or error messages. For more information on
the LCD display during normal operation, refer to the user’s guide.
The error messages are listed in Table 6.1 on page 154. Audible indications
are provided in the form of different tones emitted from the speaker.
The information conveyed by the tones is given in Table 4.13 on page 128.

Table 4.12
LED color
Red

Green

Amber

Visual indications provided by the STATUS LEDs
LED name
Transmit

Receive and
monitor

Scanning

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Indications

Meanings

LED is on

The radio is transmitting

LED flashes

(1) The transmit timer is about to expire
(2) The radio has been stunned

LED is on

There is activity on the current channel, although it might
not be audible

LED flashes

(1) The radio has received a call with valid special signaling
(2) The monitor has been activated
(3) The squelch override has been activated

LED is on

The radio is scanning a group of channels for activity

LED flashes

The radio has detected activity on a certain channel and
scanning has halted on this channel

General Information

127

Table 4.13

Audible indications

Type of tone
One short beep

Meanings
(1) After power-up — Radio is locked; PIN is required
(2) On power-down — Radio is off
(3) On pressing key — Key-press is valid
(4) On pressing function key — Function has been initiated

One short low-pitched beep On pressing function key again — Function has been terminated
One short high-pitched beep While powered up — Radio has been stunned
One long low-pitched beep

(1) On pressing key — Key-press is invalid
(2) On entry of PIN — PIN is invalid
(3) On pressing PTT switch — Transmission is inhibited

Two short beeps

(1) On power-up — Radio is ready to use
(2) On entry of PIN — PIN has been accepted and radio is ready to use
(3) After radio has been stunned — Radio has been revived and is ready to use

Two low-pitched beeps

While powered up — Temperature of radio is high

Two high-pitched beeps

While powered up — Temperature of radio is very high and all transmissions
will be at low power; if temperature rises further, transmissions will be inhibited

Three short beeps

While powered up — Previously busy channel is now free

Three beeps

During transmission — Transmit time-out is imminent; transmission will be
terminated in 10 seconds

Warble

While powered up — Frequency synthesizer is out of lock on current channel;
LCD will usually display Out of Lock (graphical display), OL (2- or 3-digit display),
or L (1-digit display).

Continuous low-pitched
tone

While powered up — System error has occurred and radio might be inoperable;
LCD usually displays System Error (graphical display), E1 or E2 (2- or 3-digit
display), or E (1-digit display).

128

General Information

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Disassembly and Reassembly
This section describes how to:

General

■

remove and mount the control head

■

disassemble and reassemble the radio body

■

disassemble and reassemble the control heads.

Important

Before disassembling the radio, disconnect the radio from
any test equipment or power supply.

Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts.
Inspect all disassembled parts for damage and replace them, if necessary.
Observe the torque settings indicated in the relevant figures.
For information on spare parts, refer to “Spare Parts” on page 437.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Disassembly and Reassembly

129

5.1

Removing and Mounting the Control Head
Important

Removing the
Control Head

Before removing the control head, disconnect the radio
from any test equipment or power supply.

Note which way up the control head is attached to the radio body in
order to return the radio to the customer in its original configuration.

On the underside of the radio body, two lever points are indicated on
the radio body by a dot-dash-dot pattern (
).
The lever point is between the control-head seal and the plastic of the
control head.

Figure 5.1

Disconnecting the control head from the radio body
control head
lever point
control-head
seal
indication of
lever point

Important

Mounting the
Control Head

130

When inserting the flat-bladed screwdriver, take care not to
damage the control-head seal.

At either of the lever points, insert a 3/16 inch (5mm) flat-bladed
screwdriver between the control head and the control-head seal.

Use the screwdriver to lift the edge of the control head up and off the
clip, then repeat in the other position. The control head can now be
removed.

Disconnect the control-head loom.

Inspect the control-head seal for damage, and replace if necessary.

Plug the control-head loom onto the control-head connector.

Insert the bottom edge of the control head onto the two clips in the
front of the radio body, then snap into place.

Disassembly and Reassembly

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

5.2

Disassembling the Radio Body
Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts.
For reassembly instructions, refer to “Reassembling the Radio Body” on
page 137.

Removing the Cover

At the upper edge of the lower screw bosses on both sides of the radio
body, insert a 1/8 inch (3mm) flat-bladed screwdriver.

Push the screwdriver under the cover towards the upper screw boss to
release the cover from the upper screw boss.

Remove the cover.

Figure 5.2

Removing the cover

upper
screw boss
insertion
point

lower
screw boss
cover

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Disassembly and Reassembly

131

Opening the
Radio Body

The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5.3 on
page 133.
1.

Use a Torx T20 screwdriver to remove the four screws c.

Important

Removing the
Main-Board
Assembly

Carefully remove the lid assembly d.

Inspect the main seal in the lid for damage, and replace if necessary.

The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5.3 on
page 133.
1.

Remove the auxiliary connector bung h (if fitted).

Remove the RF connector seal j using one of the tabs located at the
bottom of the seal—preferably by hand. If necessary, lift up the tap
using the blade of a small flat-bladed screwdriver. Do not damage the
seal with the screwdriver.

Use a Torx T10 screwdriver to remove the screws e connecting the
main board to the chassis.

Use a Torx T20 screwdriver to remove the screws i connecting the
heat-transfer block to the rear of the chassis.

Note

132

If an options board is fitted inside the lid, an options loom
will connect the options board to the internal options connector on the main board. In this case, carefully fold over
the lid and disconnect the loom.

Make sure not to touch the thermal paste on the chassis, the heattransfer block, and the underside of the main board. If the thermal
paste is contaminated, you must re-apply thermal paste as
described in “Fitting the Main-Board Assembly to the Chassis” on
page 139.

Holding a hand over the chassis to catch the main-board assembly,
turn the chassis upside down and tap its fins on the edge of the
workbench. This will release the heat-transfer block from the chassis.

With the 40W/50W radio, the gap pad 1) on the L-shaped ridge
must be replaced each time the main board is removed.

Disassembly and Reassembly

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 5.3

Components of the radio body

Torx T20
22lb·in (2.5N·m)

Cx4
D

Torx T10
15lb·in (1.7N·m)

Ex5
F

1)
thermal
paste

G
H
Ix2
Torx T20
22lb·in (2.5N·m)

B
C
D
E
F

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

cover
screw M4x16 (x4)
lid assembly
screw M3x10 (x5)
main-board assembly

J
3630z_01

G
H
I
J
1)

chassis
auxiliary connector bung
screws M4x16 (x2)
RF connector seal
gap pad (50W/40W radio only)

Disassembly and Reassembly

133

Disassembling the
Main-Board
Assembly

The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5.4 on
page 135. This figure shows the 40W/50W configuration.
1.

Remove the power connector seal I.

Use a torque-driver with a 3/16 inch (5mm) socket to remove the
D-range screwlock fasteners H.

Use a torque-driver with a 9/16 inch (14mm) long-reach socket to
remove the RF connector nut 1!. Also remove the lock washer 1@.

Use a Torx T10 screwdriver to remove the three screws b securing
the main board 1$ to the heat-transfer block F.

Note

134

Make sure not to touch the thermal paste on the heat-transfer
block and the underside side of the main board. If the thermal
paste is contaminated, you must re-apply thermal paste as
described in “Reassembling the Main-Board Assembly” on
page 137.

Separate the main board 1$ from the heat-transfer block F.

Inspect the inner foam D-range seal E and the outer foam seal G,
and replace if necessary.

The gap pad 1) (40W/50W radio only) must be replaced each time
the heat-transfer block is separated from the main board.

To replace the power connector J:
■

With the 40W/50W radio, use a Torx T6 screwdriver to undo the
two screws C.

■

With the 25W radio, use a Torx T10 screwdriver to undo the two
screws C.

Disassembly and Reassembly

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 5.4

Components of the main-board assembly
Torx T6
1lb·in (0.11N·m)
Torx T10
3lb·in (0.34N·m)

Cx2

Torx T10
15lb·in (1.7N·m)

D
E
F
G
J
1)

1#
thermal
paste

3/16 inch (5mm)
8lb·in (0.9N·m)

1@
1!

B
C

M3x10 screw (x3)
50W/40W radios:
M2.2x10 PT screw (x2)
25W radios:
K30x8 PT screw (x2)

D
E
F
G

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

auxiliary connector
inner foam D-range seal
heat-transfer block
outer foam seal

3631z_01

9/16 inch (14mm)
15lb·in (1.7N·m)

H
I
J
1)
1!
1@
1#
1$

D-range screwlock fastener (2x)
power connector seal
power connector
gap pad (50W/40W radio only)
RF connector nut
RF connector lock washer
RF connector
main board

Disassembly and Reassembly

135

Removing an
Options Board
(Optional)

The radio may be fitted with an options board in the lid assembly, which
may or may not have an external options connector fitted in a provision in
the lid assembly.
The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5.5.
1.

If an external options connector is fitted:
■

Undo the two screws b and remove the protective rubber cap c
(if fitted).

■

Undo the two D-range screwlock fasteners d.

Undo up to nine screws h and remove the options board G from the
lid assembly E.

If an external options connector is fitted, a foam seal for the D-range
connector f is fitted to the inside of the lid. Remove the foam seal
only if it is damaged.

Reassembly is carried out in reverse order of the disassembly.
Figure 5.5

Removing an options board

3/16 inch (5mm)
8lb·in (0.9N·m)

b
c
e
f
g
h
Torx T10
17lb·in (1.9N·m)

B
C
D
E

136

screw 4-40x3/15 (x2)
protective rubber cap
D-range screwlock fastener 4-40 (x2)

3614z_01

F
G
H

foam seal for D-range connector
options board (example)
screw M3x10, self-tapping (x9)

lid assembly

Disassembly and Reassembly

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

5.3

Reassembling the Radio Body
Inspect all disassembled parts for damage and replace them, if necessary.

Reassembling the
Main-Board
Assembly

The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5.4 on
page 135. This figure shows the 40W/50W configuration.
1.

If the power connector has been replaced:
■

With the 40W/50W radio, use a Torx T6 torque-driver to
tighten the two screws C to 1lb·in (0.11N·m).

■

With the 25W radio, use a Torx T10 torque-driver to tighten the
two screws C to 3lb·in (0.34N·m).

If the outer foam seal E or the inner foam D-range seal G have been
removed, fit new seals to the heat-transfer block F.

With the 40W/50W radio, the rectangular gap pad 1) must be
replaced each time the heat-transfer block F is separated from the
main board 1$:
■

Remove any residue of the old rectangular gap pad from the
underside of main board and the heat-transfer block.

■

Peel off the transparent film on one side of the gap pad and evenly
press the gap pad on the contact surface of main board (refer to
Figure 5.6).

■

Peel off the transparent film on other of the gap pad.

Figure 5.6

Contact surfaces on the bottom side of the main board
contact surface of L-shaped gap pad

contact surface
of rectangular
gap pad

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

tin-plated
copper plate

Audio-PA area

Disassembly and Reassembly

137

If the thermal paste on the heat-transfer block F or the tin-plated
cooper plate of the main board 1$ has been contaminated, new
thermal paste must be applied:
■

Remove any residue of the old thermal paste from both contact
surfaces.

■

Use Dow Corning 340 silicone heat-sink compound
(IPN 937-00000-55).

Important

■

Use a stiff brush to apply 0.1cm3 of thermal paste over the
complete contact surface on the tin-plated copper plate (refer to
Figure 5.6 on page 137).

Place the main board 1$ in position on the heat-transfer block F, and
push them together to spread the thermal paste.

Important

138

Ensure that no bristles from the brush come loose and
remain embedded in the paste. The paste needs to be
completely free of contaminants.

You must observe the following order of assembly to ensure
that the main board and the connectors are not assembled
under stress.

Use a torque-driver with a 3/16 inch (5mm) socket to fasten the
D-range screwlock fasteners H to 8lb·in (0.9N·m).

Fit the RF connector lock washer 1@. Use a torque-driver with a
9/16 inch (14mm) long-reach socket to fasten the RF connector nut
1! to 15lb·in (1.7N·m).

Use a torque-driver with a Torx T10 bit to fasten the three screws b
to 15lb·in (1.7N·m).

Loosen both the D-range screwlock fasteners H and the
RF connector nut 1!.

10.

Re-tighten both the D-range screwlock fasteners H and the
RF connector nut 1! to the torques indicated in steps 7 and 8.

11.

Fit the power connector seal I.

Disassembly and Reassembly

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Fitting the MainBoard Assembly to
the Chassis

The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5.3 on
page 133. This figure shows the 40W/50W configuration.
1.

With the 40W/50W radio, the L-shaped gap pad 1) must be replaced
each time the main-board assembly F is removed from the chassis G:
■

Remove any residue of the old gap pad from the audio-PA area on
the underside of the main board (refer to Figure 5.6 on page 137)
and the L-shaped ridge of the chassis (refer to Figure 5.3 on
page 133).

■

Peel off the transparent film on one side of the gap pad and evenly
press the gap pad on the L-shaped ridge of the chassis.

■

Peel off the transparent film on other of the gap pad.

If the thermal paste on the heat-transfer block or the underside of the
main board has been contaminated, new thermal paste must be
applied:
■

Remove any residue of the old thermal paste from both contact
surfaces.

■

Use Dow Corning 340 silicone heat-sink compound
(IPN 937-00000-55).

Important

■

Ensure that no bristles from the brush come loose and
remain embedded in the paste. The paste needs to be
completely free of contaminants.

Use a stiff brush to apply 0.1cm3 of thermal paste on the heattransfer block (refer to Figure 5.3 on page 133).
Use a stiff brush to apply 0.01cm3 of thermal paste on the
audio-PA heat sink of the chassis (refer to Figure 5.3 on page 133)

Place the main-board assembly F in position in the chassis G.

Loosely screw in the two screws I through the heat-transfer block by
hand.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Disassembly and Reassembly

139

While pressing down firmly on the diagonal edge of the PAD TOP can
(refer to Figure 5.7), use a Torx T20 torque-driver to tighten the two
screws I to 22lb·in (2.5N·m). This will ensure that the main board
is seated correctly on the bosses for the five internal screws E.

Figure 5.7

PAD TOP can on the top side of the main board

PAD TOP can

Closing the
Radio Body

140

Clean off any excess thermal paste on the heat-transfer block.

Screw in the five screws E through the main board by hand as far as
possible. Use a Torx T10 torque-driver to tighten the screws to
17lbf·in (1.9N·m).

Fit the RF connector seal j. Ensure that the seal is properly seated
around its entire periphery.

If an auxiliary connector bung h was fitted, fit the bung.

The circled number in this section refer to the items in Figure 5.3 on
page 133.
1.

If an internal options board is fitted inside the lid, connect the loom
to the internal options connector.

Inspect the main seal in the lid for damage, and replace if necessary.

Place the lid assembly D on the chassis G.

Use a Torx T20 torque-driver to tighten the four screws c to 22lbf·in
(2.5N·m).

Slide the cover b over the radio body and snap holes in the side of
the cover over the screw bosses.

Inspect the control-head seal for damage, and replace if necessary.

Disassembly and Reassembly

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

5.4

Disassembling and Reassembling the Control Head

5.4.1

Control Head with Graphical Display
Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts.
Reassembly is carried out in reverse order of the disassembly.
The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5.9 on
page 143.
The connectors of the control-head board and the orientation of the speaker
and speaker clamp are illustrated in Figure 5.8.

Figure 5.8

With your fingers, pull off the volume control knob 1& .
Do not use any tools as this might cause damage.

Unscrew the two screws B and remove the adaptor flange C .

Disconnect the control-head loom D.

If an optional circuit board is fitted, unplug it from the control-head
board F (refer to Figure 5.8).

Note whether the speaker is connected or disconnected. If it is
connected, disconnect the speaker cable from the speaker connector
of the control-head board F (refer to Figure 5.8). Note that the radio
must be returned to the customer in its original configuration.

Release the lock of the LCD connector and unplug the loom of the
LCD assembly 1@ (refer to Figure 5.8). Note that the loom runs
through a slot in the space-frame J.

Speaker orientation and connectors of the control-head board (graphical display)

legs of the
speaker clamp

speaker terminals

pads for leads of
concealed microphone

connector for speaker

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

connector for
loom of LCD assembly

connectors for
optional circuit board

connector for
control-head loom

3470z_01

Disassembly and Reassembly

141

7.
8.

Unscrew the four screws E and remove the control-head board F.
If a concealed microphone is fitted, pull the concealed microphone

1% capsule out of its rubber seal when removing the control headboard F. If necessary, unsolder the leads from the pads on the controlhead board (refer to Figure 5.8).
9.

Remove the light pipes H and I.

10.

The space-frame J clips into three clips of the front panel.
Unclip the spaceframe and remove it along with the two seals G.
Check the seals G and replace them, if necessary.

11.

Remove the speaker 1! and speaker clamp 1).

Important

12.

Remove the LCD assembly 1@ , main keypad 1# , and power
keypad 1$ .

Important

142

When fitting the speaker and the speaker clamp, observe the
orientation of the speaker terminals. Make sure that the
larger of the three legs of the speaker clamp is placed
between the two clips of the front panel assembly as shown
in Figure 5.8 on page 141.

Disassembly and Reassembly

When replacing the LCD, carefully remove the protective
plastic film from the LCD. Take care not to scratch the soft
polarizer material on the top side of the LCD.
The LCD seal is replaced whenever the LCD is replaced.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 5.9

Components of the control head (graphical display)

Bx2

Torx T20
18lb·in (2.0N·m)

Torx T10
5.5lb·in (0.62N·m)

Ex4

H
I

B
C

M4 x 12 Taptite screw (x2)

control-head loom assembly with
female-female adapter

E
F
G
H
I
J
1)
1!
1@
1#
1$
1%
1^
1&

3 x 10 PT screw (x4)

adaptor flange

control-head board
space-frame seal (x2)
short light pipe
long light pipe
space-frame
speaker clamp
speaker
LCD assembly (including LCD seal)
main keypad
power keypad
concealed microphone (optional)
front panel assembly
knob for volume-control potentiometer

1%
1#
1$

3451z_02

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Disassembly and Reassembly

143

5.4.2

Control Head with 1-, 2- or 3-Digit Display
Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts.
Reassembly is carried out in reverse order of the disassembly.
The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5.11 on
page 145.

Figure 5.10

With your fingers, pull off the volume control knob I .
Do not use any tools as this might cause damage.

If an optional circuit board C for a concealed microphone is fitted,
unplug it from the control-head board E (refer to Figure 5.10).

If a concealed microphone 1) is fitted, unsolder the microphone leads
from the control-head board. The leads are soldered to pads on the
board as shown in Figure 5.10.

Note whether the speaker J is connected or disconnected. If it is
connected, disconnect the speaker cable from the speaker connector
of the control-head board (refer to Figure 5.10). Note that the radio
must be returned to the customer in its original configuration.

Use a Torx T10 screwdriver to unscrew the three screws D securing
the control-head board. The screws are labelled screw 1 to screw 3;
these numbers are also inscribed on the PCB. The control-head board
is now held down only by the clips labelled clip 1 to clip 3 in
Figure 5.10.

While pressing on the shaft of the volume-control potentiometer,
push clip 2, clip 1 and then clip 3 away from the control-head board.
The board will be freed from the space-frame. Remove the board.

Connectors and clips of the control-head board (1-, 2- or 3-digit display)
connector for speaker

clip 1

clip 2

connectors for
optional circuit board

clip 3

3830z_01

pads for leads of
concealed microphone

144

connector for
control-head loom

While pulling upwards on the space-frame G at the corner where the
microphone connector is situated, release the clips labelled B to G in
Figure 5.11 in the order: B and C, D and E, and then F and G.
To release each clip use a 3/16 inch (5mm) flat-bladed screwdriver to

Disassembly and Reassembly

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

lever the clip out of its recess. Pulling on the space-frame helps release
the clips.
When fitting the space-frame G, make sure that the clips
labelled B to G fully snap into the front panel assembly.
If necessary, use a flat-bladed screwdriver to push down the
clips until they snap into place.

Important

Remove the elastomeric strips F, speaker J, LCD 1!, keypad 1@,
lightpipes 1$ and 1%, and, if fitted, the concealed microphone 1).

Important

Figure 5.11

When replacing the LCD, carefully remove the protective
plastic film from the LCD. Take care not to scratch the soft
polarizer material on the top side of the LCD.

Components of the control head (1-, 2- or 3-digit display)

B
Torx T10
5lb·in (0.6N·m)

Dx3

H
I

E
1!

F
x2
J

B
GJ

1)
E

G
C1#

3828z_01

B
C
D
E
F
G
H

control-head loom with female-female adaptor
control-head options board (optional)
3 x 8 PT screw (x3)
control-head board
elastomeric strip (x2)
space-frame
front panel assembly

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

I
I
J
1)
1!
1@
1#
1$

knob for volume-control potentiometer
speaker
concealed microphone (optional)
LCD
keypad
short light pipe
long light pipe

Disassembly and Reassembly

145

5.4.3

RJ45 Control Head
Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts.
Reassembly is carried out in reverse order of the disassembly.
The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5.12.
Release the clip of the PCB bracket E and remove the control-head
board B .

Disconnect the control-head loom C from the control-head-board

B.
Use a Torx T10 screwdriver to unscrew the four screws D and
remove the PCB bracket E.

Figure 5.12

Components of the RJ45 control head

C
Torx T10
5lb·in (0.6N·m)

Dx4
E

G x2
B
C
D

146

control-head board
control-head loom with female-female adapter
3 x 8 PT screw (x4)

Disassembly and Reassembly

E
F
G

PCB bracket
front panel
RJ45 bung (x2)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

5.4.4

Blank Control Head
Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts.
Reassembly is carried out in reverse order of the disassembly.
The circled numbers in this section refer to the items in Figure 5.13.

Figure 5.13

Note whether the cover seal C is fitted or not. If it is fitted, remove
the two screws B and remove the cover seal. Note that the radio must
be returned to the customer in its original configuration.

Note whether an options board (not shown) is fitted inside the
control head. If a an options board is fitted, remove the screws and
remove the options board.

Remove the lock-nuts D and remove the foam seal F and the control
head loom G.

Components of the blank control head
x2

B
G

x2 D

3/16 inch (5mm)
4lb·in (0.45N·m)

E
3829z_01

B
C
D

UNX 4-40 x 3/16-inch pan Pozi screw (x2)
cover seal
lock-nut (pair)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

E
F
G

front panel
foam seal
control-head loom with female-female adapter

Disassembly and Reassembly

147

148

Disassembly and Reassembly

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Servicing Procedures

Scope of Section

This section gives the full sequence of tasks required when servicing a
particular radio. These tasks are:
■

initial inspection, visual inspection and fault diagnosis

■

repair, final inspection, test and administration.

For disassembly and reassembly instructions, refer to “Disassembly and
Reassembly” on page 129.

6.1

Initial Tasks

List of Tasks

The following tasks need to be carried out for all radios:
■

initial administration

■

visual inspection

■

powering up the radio

■

reading the programming file

■

obtaining the details of the Software Feature Enabler (SFE)

■

reading the calibration file

■

checking the user interface

■

checking any error messages.

The following tasks only need to be carried out if they relate to the fault
reported:
■

checking the transmit and transmit-audio functions

■

checking the receive and receive-audio functions.

Important

Observe the “General Information” on page 103.

Task 1 —
Initial
Administration

When a radio is received for repair, details of the Customer and the fault will
be recorded in a fault database. The fault reported by the Customer might
concern damage to or loss of a mechanical part, or the failure of a function
of the radio, or both.

Task 2 —
Visual Inspection

Check the radio for mechanical loss or damage, even if the fault concerns a
function failure only. Inspect the radio as follows:
■

knob for volume-control potentiometer

■

microphone grommet

■

rubber seal for RF connector

■

bung for auxiliary connector

■

bung for aperture for external options connector.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Servicing Procedures

149

The bung for aperture for external options connector should be replaced by
a cover seal if an external options connector is present. All the parts are
illustrated in “Spare Parts” on page 437. Except for the microphone
grommet, if any of these parts is missing or damaged, replace it as described
below. In the case of the microphone grommet, refer to the accessories
section for the repair procedure.
Replace Damaged
or Missing Knob

Remove the volume-control knob if it is damaged. Push the replacement
knob onto the shaft of the volume-control potentiometer. Ensure that the
knob turns freely.

Replace Damaged
or Missing Seals
and Bungs

Remove any damaged seal or bung. Obtain a replacement seal for the
RF connector or a replacement bung from Spares kit 2. Order a
replacement cover seal (and screws) from TEL; the IPNs of the parts are
listed in “Spare Parts” on page 437. In fitting a replacement bung, ensure
that it is not upside down and that it is properly seated. To fit the seal for the
RF connector, first fit the upper part of the seal and then press down around
the sides of the seal to the bottom. Ensure that the seal is properly seated
around its entire periphery.

Check for
Additional Damage

Also check for damage to exterior parts that can be replaced only by partly
disassembling the radio. These parts are:
■

cover assembly for radio body

■

keys, lens and LCD of control head

■

front panel of control head.

In the case of the front panel, inspect particularly the light pipes for the
STATUS LEDs and the membrane behind the speaker grille. If the radio is
reported to have a functional fault, continue with Task 3. Any additional
mechanical damage will be repaired during the course of rectifying the
functional fault. If the radio has no functional fault, repair any additional
damage as described below; conclude with the tasks of “Final Tasks” on
page 157.
Repair Damaged
Control Head

150

If the control head is damaged, detach it from the radio body as described
in “Removing and Mounting the Control Head” on page 130.
The procedure includes inspecting the interior of the control head for
evidence of other damage. Disassemble the control head and repair all
damage as described in “Disassembling and Reassembling the Control
Head” on page 141. Then re-assemble the control head and re-attach it to
the radio body.

Servicing Procedures

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 3 —
Power Up the Radio

With the radio connected to the test equipment as described in “Test
Equipment Setup” on page 111, attempt to power up the radio.
1.

Note

Apply power to the radio. If the radio is programmed not to start on
power-on, press the ON/OFF switch.
If the radio powers up but keeps resetting itself, check the powersensing circuitry. If the radio powers up but fails to enter usermode, or displays an error, refer to Table 6.1 on page 154.

If the radio powers up successfully, go to Task 4. If it does not, go to
Step 3.

Check the fuses, cables, and the power supply.

Check whether the control-head loom, the control head or the radio
body is faulty by first connecting a spare control-head loom and then
a spare control head.

If the control head is faulty, check the control-head connector
(pin 2: +13V8, pin 14: +3V3, pin 6: AGND), and repair or replace
the control-head board.

If the repair succeeded without the need for replacing the main-board
assembly, go to Task 4. Otherwise continue with Step 7.

If the main-board assembly was replaced or if the repair failed, reassemble the radio as described in “Disassembly and Reassembly” on
page 129. Conclude with the tasks of “Final Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Servicing Procedures

151

Task 4 —
Read the
Programming File

Given that the radio powers up, the next task is to read the radio’s
programming file or upload a default file.
1.

Use the programming application to read the programming file.

If the programming file can be read, save a copy on the test PC, and
go to Task 5. If not, go to Step 3.

If it seems that the file cannot be read, cycle the power to the radio
and again attempt to read the file. First cycling the power is essential
if the radio is programmed to power up in transparent-data mode
(both 1200 baud FFSK and Tait high-speed data) and if the selected
data port is the microphone connector (control head with user
interface) or programming connector (blank control head).

If the programming file cannot be read, check whether:
■

the radio is connected to the correct serial port of the test PC,

■

the Mode switch of the test unit is set to Rx,

■

the programming application is set-up correctly. Refer to the
troubleshooting section of the online help.

If the programming file can be read now, save a copy on the test PC,
and go to Task 5. If not, go to Step 6.

Check whether the control-head loom, the control head or the radio
body is faulty by first connecting a spare control-head loom and then
a spare control head.

If the control head is faulty, check:
■

the control-head connector (pin 3: TXD, pin 7: RXD),

■

the microphone or programming connector,

■

the path between the control-head connector and the microphone
or programming connector,

and repair or replace the control-head board.

152

If the repair succeeded without the need for replacing the main-board
assembly, go to Step 9. Otherwise continue with Step 10.

If the programming file can be read now, save a copy on the test PC,
and go to Task 5. If the file still cannot be read, go to Step 10.

10.

Set up a suitable default programming file and attempt to upload it to
the radio

11.

If the upload succeeds, go to Task 6. If the upload fails, continue with
Step 12.

12.

Servicing Procedures

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 5 —
Obtain the Details
of the Software
Feature Enabler
(SFE)

Use the programming application to obtain and record the details of any
software-enabled features (Tools > Optional Features).

Task 6 —
Read the
Calibration File

Use the calibration application to read the calibration file and save it on the
test PC. If the calibration file cannot be read, set up a suitable default
calibration file and load it to the radio

Task 7 —
Check the
User Interface

Check the user interface as follows (This task does not apply to the blank
control head):

For more information refer to the online help of the programming
application.

Use the programming application to activate backlighting, deactivate
silent and quiet modes, and view the programmed function keys,
channels and scan groups.

Turn on the radio, make sure that the volume control is not set to low,
and check the start-up sequence:

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

■

the LEDs light up red briefly

■

the speaker gives two short beeps

■

LCD and keypad backlighting activates

■

the LCD displays a power-up message then a channel number, or
an error message.

Check the following elements of the user interface:
■

volume control: With the graphical display, use CCTM command
1010 to read the volume potentiometer. The returned value
should be between 0 and 255.

■

LCD: Check visually or, with the graphical display, use CCTM
command 1006 1 to switch on all LCD elements. Power-cycle the
radio to reset the LCD to its original state.

■

PTT key: With the graphical display, while pressing the PTT key,
the transmit symbol
or should appear on the radio display
(unless transmit is inhibited on the selected channel).

■

scroll and selection keys: Scroll through all settings and observe the
radio display.

■

function keys: Check whether the programmed function is
activated.

■

keypad: With the graphical display, use CCTM command 1009 1
to turn on keypad notification. Check that each keypress returns
a different number. CCTM command 1009 1 turns keypad
notification off.

■

backlighting (if programmed): Any keypress should activate
backlighting.

Servicing Procedures

153

Task 8 —
Check
Error Messages
Table 6.1

If there is a fault in the user interface, repair the radio as described in
“Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display” on
page 405 or “Fault Finding of Control Head with 1- 2- or 3Digit Display” on page 429.

If there is no fault, go to Task 8.

The radio may display an error message. Carry out the corrective actions
described in Table 6.1.

Error messages

Error message

Corrective action

Error E0001
Unknown

Turn the radio off and then back on.

Error E0002
Unknown

Continue with servicing tasks to locate the problem.

Error E0003
Corrupt FW

Re-download the radio’s firmware.

Error E0008
System error
0xabcdefgh

Turn the radio off and then back on. If the system error persists, download new
radio firmware.
To capture details of the system error, use CCTM command 204.

Temperature threshold
exceeded

Wait until the radio has cooled down.

Cannot tx

Go to Task 9 on page 155.

Out of lock

Go to “Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding” on page 179.

Programming mode,
invalid radio ...

Re-program the radio with a new programming database. If the problem persists,
update or reload the radio’s firmware, and re-program the radio’s calibration
database.

154

Servicing Procedures

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 9 —
Check the Transmit
and Transmit-Audio
Functions

If the radio does not transmit, this can be caused by:
■

the synthesizer not being in lock

■

no or wrong carrier power

■

no modulation.

If the cause is already known, go directly to the relevant fault-finding
section.
Caution

Observe the servicing precautions for transmitter
issues listed on page 109.

Use CCTM command 101 x y 0 to set the transmit frequency to the
bottom of the band.

Use CCTM command 33 to set the radio to transmit mode.

Use CCTM command 72 to read the lock status.

If the synthesizer is in lock, go to Step 5. If the synthesizer is not in
lock, repair the radio as described in “Frequency Synthesizer Fault
Finding” on page 179.

Repeat Step 1 to Step 4 with the transmit frequency set to the top of
the band.

Use CCTM command 326 1 to set the power level to very low.

Connect a power meter and measure the transmit power.

If the carrier power is correct, go to Step 10. If the carrier power is
not correct, try to re-calibrate the radio.

If the re-calibration repairs the fault, go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.
If it does not, repair the radio as described in “Transmitter Fault
Finding (40W/50W)” on page 259 and “Transmitter Fault Finding
(25W)” on page 323.

10.

Repeat Step 6 to Step 9 with the power level set to high (326 4).

11.

Check whether the speaker is the source of the fault, as described in
“Speaker Faulty” on page 422 (graphical display) or “Speaker Faulty”
on page 436 (1-, 2- or 3-digit display).

12.

If the radio transmits audio now, the original speaker was faulty.
Reassemble the radio and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If the
radio still fails to transmit, reconnect the original speaker and go to
Step 13.

13.

After having eliminated the synthesizer, the transmitter circuitry, and
the speaker as cause for the fault, repair the radio as described in
“CODEC and Audio Fault Finding” on page 381.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Servicing Procedures

155

14.

Task 10 —
Check the Receive
and Receive-Audio
Functions

If the radio does not receive, this can be caused by:
■

the synthesizer not being in lock

■

no carrier detected

■

a faulty speaker or volume control

■

no modulation.

If the cause is already known, go directly to the relevant fault-finding
section.

156

Use CCTM command 101 x y 0 to set the receive frequency to the
bottom of the band.

Use CCTM command 72 to read the lock status.

If the synthesizer is in lock, go to Step 5. If the synthesizer is not in
lock, repair the radio as described in “Frequency Synthesizer Fault
Finding” on page 179.

Repeat Step 1 to Step 3 with the receive frequency set to the top of
the band

Feed a signal without modulation on the receive channel at –47dBm.
Check for maximum RSSI using:
■

the

indicator on the radio display (graphical display)

■

the green status LED

■

CCTM command 63 should return the fed signal strength
±1dBm.

Repeat the check in Step 5 with –117dBm. The RSSI indicator
should show as empty or close to empty (graphical display).

If the carrier is detected correctly, go to Step 9. If the carrier is not
detected correctly, try to re-calibrate the radio.

If the re-calibration repairs the fault, go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.
If it does not, repair the radio as described in “Receiver Fault
Finding” on page 239.

Check whether the speaker is the source of the fault, as described in
“Speaker Faulty” on page 422 (graphical display) or “Speaker Faulty”
on page 436 (1-, 2- or 3-digit display).

10.

If the radio receives audio now, the original speaker was faulty.
Reassemble the radio and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If the
radio still fails to receive, reconnect the original speaker and go to
Step 11.

11.

Use CCTM command 804 to read the status of the volume
potentiometer.

Servicing Procedures

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

6.2

If the volume potentiometer is faulty, repair it as described in
“Volume Control Faulty” on page 424 (graphical display) or
“Volume Control Faulty” on page 436 (1-, 2- or 3-digit display).
If it is not faulty, go to Step 13.

13.

After having eliminated the synthesizer, the receiver circuitry, the
speaker, and the volume potentiometer as cause for the fault, repair
the radio as described in “CODEC and Audio Fault Finding” on
page 381.

14.

Final Tasks

List of Tasks

Task 1 —
Repair

12.

The following tasks need to be carried out for all radios:
■

repair

■

enable software features (if applicable)

■

final inspection

■

final test

■

final administration.

The fault diagnosis will have resulted in the repair or replacement of the
main-board assembly. This section describes the steps after completion of
the fault diagnosis:
1.

Use the programming and calibration applications to load the programming and calibration files read or set-up in “Initial Tasks”.

Note

If the radio had to be reprogrammed with a default programming
file, the following additional actions are required: If the radio is to
be returned direct to a Customer who has no programming facilities, the appropriate programming file needs to be obtained and
uploaded (or the data obtained to create the file). If the radio is to
be returned to a Dealer or direct to a Customer who does have
programming facilities, the Dealer or Customer respectively need
to be informed so that they can program the radio appropriately.

Note

If the main-board assembly has been replaced, certain software
features may need to be enabled before the programming file can
be loaded. See Task 2 on page 158.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Test the radio as described in “Final Test” on page 159.
It may be necessary to also re-calibrate to make the radio functional,
in particular if the main-board assembly had to be replaced or if a
default calibration file had to be loaded. Refer to the online help of
the calibration application.

Servicing Procedures

157

If the main-board assembly has been replaced, level-1 service centres
should return the faulty board to the nearest ASC, and level-2 service
centres should return the board or assembly to the ISC, if deemed
necessary. Supply details of the fault and, if applicable, the attempted
repair. Go to step Step 6.
If the main-board assembly has not been replaced, go to Step 4.

Task 2 —
Enable Software
Features (SFE)

158

Replace any cans removed. Refer to “Shielding Cans and
Connectors” on page 114.

Re-test the radio as described in “Final Test” on page 159.

Reassemble the radio as described in “Disassembly and Reassembly”
on page 129.

Reconnect the radio to the test equipment and carry out a final
calibration of the radio. Refer to the online help of the calibration
application.

If the main-board assembly has been replaced, ensure that the correct
software features, if any, are enabled for the Customer. If software features
need to be enabled, a special licence file is required for the replacement
main-board assembly. The file must allow for the enabling of the same
software features as in the original assembly. Proceed as follows:
1.

If it was possible to read the software features in “Obtain the Details
of the Software Feature Enabler (SFE)” on page 153, go to Step 2.
If it was not possible, go to Step 3.

Reading the software features reveals if any software features are
enabled for the radio under repair. If there are, go to Step 3. If there
are none, go to Task 3.

Technicians not at a CSO should contact their CSO regarding the
radio’s software features. Technicians at CSOs should contact
Technical Support at TEL.

Supply the serial number of the radio under repair, and the serial
number of the replacement main-board assembly (located on a label
on the main-board assembly).

If it is known that the radio had software features enabled, go to
Step 6. Otherwise go to Step 7.

Ask the CSO (or TEL) for a licence file for the replacement mainboard assembly. The CSO will supply the required file. Go to Step 8.

Ask the CSO (or TEL) if the radio under repair had any software
features enabled, and if so, to send a licence file for the replacement
main-board assembly. The CSO (or TEL) will either indicate that the
radio had no software features enabled or supply the required file. If
the radio had no software features enabled, go to Task 3. If the
required file was supplied, go to Step 8.

Servicing Procedures

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

On receiving the licence file, run the programming application on the
test PC. On the menu bar click Tools > Optional Features.
The Software Feature Enabler dialog appears.

Use the licence file to enable the appropriate software features.
The procedure is given in the on-line help facility under the heading
Enabling a feature. Go to Task 3.

Task 3 —
Final Inspection

Make a final inspection of the exterior to check that no mechanical parts
have been damaged during the repair. Repeat the inspection given in
“Visual Inspection” on page 149. Rectify any damage.

Task 4 —
Final Test

Test the radio to confirm that it is fully functional again. The recommended
tests are listed in Table 6.2 to Table 6.4. (The calibration application can be
used for many of these tests.) It is good practice to record the test results on
a separate test sheet. A copy of the test sheet can be supplied to the Customer
as confirmation of the repair.

Task 5 —
Final
Administration

The final administration tasks are the standard workshop procedures for
updating the fault database and returning the repaired radio to the Customer
with confirmation of the repair.
If the radio could not be repaired for one of the following reasons:
■

fault not located

■

repair of fault failed

■

required repair is level-3 repair.

Level-1 service centres should return the faulty radio to the nearest ASC,
and level-2 service centres should return the radio to the ISC. Supply details
of the Customer, the fault and, if applicable, the attempted repair.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Servicing Procedures

159

Table 6.2

Final tests of transmitter function

Test

Limits

Error in transmit frequency

+100 Hz to –100 Hz

Transmit power:
• High
• Medium
• Low
• Very low

23.2 W to 29.2 W
11.1 W to 14.0 W
4.6 W to 5.8 W
0.9 W to 1.2 W

Current at high power:
• A4-band radios
• B1-band radios
• C0-band radios
• D1-band radios
• H5-band radios
• H6-band radios

< 5.5 A
< 5.5 A
< 5.5 A
< 5.5 A
< 6.5 A
< 6.5 A

Peak deviation (sweep tone of 300 Hz to 3 kHz):
• Narrow-band
• Medium-band
• Wide-band

< 2.5 kHz
< 4.0 kHz
< 5.0 kHz

Distortion:
• 1 kHz at 1.5 kHz deviation (narrow-band)
• 1 kHz at 3.0 kHz deviation (wide-band)

< 3%
< 3%

CTCSS (continuous-tone-controlled subaudible signaling) deviation:
• Narrow-band
• Medium-band
• Wide-band

250 to 350 Hz
500 to 560 Hz
580 to 680 Hz

Table 6.3

Final tests of receiver functions

Test

Limits

Receive sensitivity

<118 dBm for 12 dB SINAD

Mute opening:
• Country
• City
• Hard

>6 dB and <10 dB SINAD
>8 dB and <14 dB SINAD
>18 dB and <22 dB SINAD

Audio power (maximum volume at –47 dBm):
• At “RX AUDIO/SINAD” connector on test unit
• At pins 3 (SPK–) and 4 (SPK+) of power connector on radio

>500 mVrmsa
>5.00 Vrms

Distortion (at –47 dBm, 60% rated system deviation at 1kHz,
with volume set to give 3 W into 16 Ω load)

<3.00%

a. The RX AUDIO/SINAD output on the test unit has 10dB of attenuation switched in when the test unit PORTABLE/MOBILE switch is
set to MOBILE. Refer to “TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit” on page 571 for details.

160

Servicing Procedures

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Table 6.4

Final tests of general radio functions

Test

Description

PTT switch

Check that PTT switch functions.

Microphone

Check operation of microphone.
Check operation of hook-switch.

Data communications

Test 1200 baud data transmission (standard).
Test Tait high-speed data transmission (if feature is enabled).

Direct-connect GPS
(global positioning system)

Check that GPS poll returns correct position (if feature is enabled).

Selcall

Check that radio encodes selcall.
Check that radio decodes selcall.

Audio tap points and digital I/O

Check configuration of programmed options and test operation of
these lines to confirm that Customer requirements are satisfied.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Servicing Procedures

161

162

Servicing Procedures

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Power Supply Fault Finding

Fault-Diagnosis
Tasks

Types of Fault

Fault diagnosis of the power-supply circuitry is divided into the following
tasks:
■

Task 1: check inputs to SMPS

■

Task 2: check 3.3V supply

■

Task 3: check linear regulators (for 2.5V, 3V, 6V and 9V supplies)

■

Task 4: check power-up configuration

■

Task 5: check power-up options

■

Task 6: check provision of external power.

Which of the above tasks are applicable depends on the nature of the fault:
■

Radio fails to power up: The radio fails to power up immediately when
power is applied, or it fails to power up when power is applied and the
ON/OFF key is pressed. Carry out Task 1 to Task 3

■

Power-up option has failed: The radio powers up when the ON/OFF key is
pressed, but not for a power-up option for which it is configured.
Carry out Task 4 and Task 5.

■

External power at connector has failed: The external power required at
a particular connector is no longer present. Carry out Task 6.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Power Supply Fault Finding

163

Task 1 —
Check Inputs to
SMPS

The test equipment and radio should be set up as described in “Test
Equipment Setup” on page 111. If not already done, remove the board.
Connect the control head to the assembly. Then check the SMPS as follows:
1.

Use a multimeter to check the supply voltage at pin 7 of IC602
(see Figure 7.1) in the SMPS circuitry; the voltage should be:
pin 7 of IC602: 13.8 V DC

If it is, go to Step 5. If it is not, go to Step 2.
2.

Disconnect the 13.8V supply at the power connector PL100. Check
for continuity and shorts to ground in the path between the power
connector PL100 and pin 7 of IC602 (see Figure 7.1). Locate and
repair the fault.

Reconnect the 13.8V supply. Confirm the removal of the fault by
measuring the voltage at pin 7 of IC602. If the voltage is correct,
continue with Step 4. If it is not, the repair failed; replace the board
and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Press the ON/OFF key. If the radio powers up, return to “Initial Tasks”
on page 149. If it does not, go to Step 5.

Check the digital power-up signal at pin 5 of IC602
(see Figure 7.1); the signal is active high, namely, when the voltage
exceeds 2.0V DC. Measure the voltage at pin 5.
pin 5 of IC602: more than 2.0 V DC

If it exceeds 2.0V, go to Task 2. If it does not, go to Step 6.
6.

Keep the probe of the multimeter on pin 5 of IC602 and press the
key. The voltage should exceed 2.0V DC while the key is
depressed. If it does, go to Task 2. If it does not, go to Step 7.
ON/OFF

164

Disconnect the 13.8V supply at the power connector PL100. Check
for continuity and shorts to ground in the path from pin 5 of IC602,
via R600 and via Q709 in the interface circuitry (see Figure 8.4), to
pin 9 of the control-head connector SK100 (ITF PSU ON OFF line).
Locate and repair the fault. Go to Step 8.

Reconnect the 13.8V supply. Press the ON/OFF key. If the radio powers
up, return to “Initial Tasks” on page 149. If it does not, go to Step 9.

With the probe of the multimeter on pin 5 of IC602 (see Figure 7.1),
press the ON/OFF key again. The voltage should exceed 2.0V DC
while the key is depressed. If it does, go to Task 2. If it does not, the
repair failed; replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Power Supply Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 7.1

Important components of the power-supply circuitry (bottom side),
including 3.3V regulator IC602

C718

pin 7

pin 5
C603

C618
R199

D601

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

D604

Q709

Power Supply Fault Finding

165

Figure 7.2

Important components of the power-supply circuitry (top side),
including 9V regulator IC601
LK8 (R786)
LK7 (R787)

Q600

3V3 test point

Task 2 —
Check 3.3V Supply

If the inputs at pin 5 and pin 7 of IC602 in the SMPS circuitry are correct,
but the radio fails to power up, then the 3.3V DC supply needs to be
investigated.
1.

First determine as follows if a fault on the digital board is affecting the
supply or preventing the radio from powering up: While keeping the
ON/OFF key depressed, measure the supply at the 3V3 test point near
the corner of the digital board (see Figure 7.2). The voltage is 3.3V
when there is no fault.
3V3 test point: 3.3 ± 0.1 V DC

If the voltage is correct, the digital board is faulty; replace the board
and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If the voltage is not correct, go
to Step 2.

166

Power Supply Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Disconnect the 13.8V supply at the power connector. Remove R199
(see Figure 7.1). Reconnect the 13.8V supply.

With the probe of the multimeter on the 3V3 test point, press the
ON/OFF key. If the voltage is now 3.3 ± 0.1V, the digital board is faulty;
replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If the voltage
is still not correct, go to Step 4.

If the digital board is functional, the fault is on the main board.
Replace R199. Disconnect the 13.8V supply. Use the multimeter to
measure the resistance between the 3V3 test point and ground.
If there is a short circuit, continue with Step 5. If there is no short
circuit (but the voltage is wrong), go to Step 7.

Search for shorts to ground in the components C603, C612, C613,
C618, D606 of the SMPS circuitry (see Figure 7.1) as well as in the
CODEC and interface circuitry. Repair any fault and repeat the
resistance measurement of Step 4 to confirm the removal of the fault.
If there is no fault, go to Step 6. If the fault remains, the repair failed;
replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Reconnect the 13.8V supply. Press the ON/OFF key. If the radio powers
up, return to “Initial Tasks” on page 149. If the radio fails to power
up, disconnect the 13.8V supply and go to Step 7.

Measure the resistance of L601 (see Figure 7.1). The resistance
should be virtually zero. If it is, go to Step 8. If it is not, replace L601.
Reconnect the 13.8V supply and press the ON/OFF key. If the radio
powers up, return to “Initial Tasks” on page 149. If the radio fails to
power up, disconnect the 13.8V supply and go to Step 8.

Remove the CDC BOT can. Remove IC603 (3.0V regulator) and
IC604 (2.5V regulator) (see Figure 7.3). Reconnect the 13.8V
supply and press the ON/OFF key. If the 3.3V supply is restored, go to
Task 3 to check each regulator (3.0V and 2.5V) in turn. If the 3.3V
supply is not restored, continue with Step 9.

Suspect IC602. Disconnect the 13.8V supply. Replace IC602 with a
spare (see Figure 7.1). Resolder IC603 and IC604 in position
(see Figure 7.3). Reconnect the 13.8V supply and press the ON/OFF
key. If the radio powers up, return to “Initial Tasks” on page 149.
If the radio fails to power up, the repair failed; replace the board and
go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Power Supply Fault Finding

167

Figure 7.3

Power-supply circuitry under the CDC BOT can, including 3V regulator IC603 and 2.5V
regulator IC604

TP601

LO2 BOT CAN

CAN FOR
DIGITAL
BOARD

Task 3 —
Check Linear
Regulators

168

This task describes the general procedure for checking any linear regulator.
There are two possible faults: either the regulator has failed and prevents the
radio from powering up, or the regulator voltage is incorrect. (The regulator
IC might or might not have been removed during earlier checks.)
1.

Disconnect the 13.8 V supply. Check for continuity and shorts to
ground (if not already done) on the input, output and control line of
the relevant regulator IC. Repair any fault.

If the regulator IC has been removed, resolder it in position.

Reconnect the 13.8 V supply and press the ON/OFF key. If the radio
powers up or the correct regulator voltage is restored, return to
“Initial Tasks” on page 149. If the repair failed, go to Step 4.

Disconnect the 13.8 V supply. Replace the regulator IC with a spare.
Reconnect the 13.8 V supply and press the ON/OFF key. If the radio
powers up or the correct regulator voltage is restored, go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to
“Final Tasks” on page 157.

Power Supply Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 4 —
Check Power-up
Configuration

The radio may be configured for one or more of the following power-up
options:
■

battery power sense

■

auxiliary power sense

■

emergency power sense

■

internal-options power sense

A particular option is implemented by inserting the link mentioned in
Table 7.1. If there is a fault with a power-up option for which the radio is
configured, first confirm that the configuration is correct:

Table 7.1

Confirm that the correct link or links have been inserted for the
required power-up options (see Figure 7.2 and Table 7.1). For all
except the battery-power-sense option, also check the radio’s
programming as follows:

Open the “Programmable I/O” form.

Under the “Digital” tab, scroll to the relevant digital line listed in the
“Pin” field:
■

internal-options power sense:

IOP GPIO7

■

auxiliary power sense:

AUX GPI3

■

emergency power sense:

AUX GPI2

For the first two lines, confirm that the “Power Sense (Ignition)” option
has been selected in the “Action” field, and “High” or “Low” in the “Active”
field. For the third line, confirm that “Enter Emergency Mode” has been
selected.

If the link and programming settings are correct, go to Task 5. If they
are not, rectify the settings and check if the fault has been removed.
If it has, return to “Initial Tasks” on page 149. If it has not, go to
Task 5.

Implementation of the power-up options

Power-up
option

Link to
insert

Factory
default

Activation mechanism

Connector

Battery
power sense

LK1

Link in

Connection of 13.8V supply

Power connector

Auxiliary
power sense

LK2

Link in

AUX GPI3

line goes high
(If LK1 is in, line floats high;
if LK1 is out, line floats low)

Pin 4 of
auxiliary connector

Emergency
power sense

LK3

Link in

AUX GPI2

Internal-options
power sense

LK4

Link out

IOP GPIO7

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

line goes low

Pin 5 of
auxiliary connector

line goes high

Pin 15 of
internal-options connector

Power Supply Fault Finding

169

Task 5 —
Check Power-up
Options

The functioning of the power-up options may be checked as described in
Step 1 to Step 4 below. Carry out the procedure in the appropriate step or
steps. In all four cases the procedure involves checking the digital power-up
signal at pin 5 of IC602. For a particular option, the activation mechanism
is the condition that results in the power-up signal becoming active (the
signal is active high).
1.

For the battery power-sense option the link LK1 should be inserted
(see Figure 7.2). Check the power-up signal at pin 5 of IC602
(see Figure 7.1) while first disconnecting and then reconnecting the
13.8V DC supply at the power connector.
The power-up signal should go high when the power is reconnected.
If it does, conclude with Step 5. If it does not, check for continuity
and shorts to ground between the link LK1 and the +13V8 BATT input
at the power connector PL100. Repair any fault and go to Step 5.

For the auxiliary power-sense option the link LK2 should be inserted
(see Figure 7.2). Connect +3.3V DC (more than 2.6V to be
precise) from the power supply to the AUX GPI3 line (pin 4 of the
auxiliary connector SK101). Check that the power-up signal at pin 5
of IC602 (see Figure 7.1) is high.
Remove the +3.3V supply and ground the AUX GPI3 line (to be precise
the voltage on the line should be less than 0.6V). If the power-up
signal is now low, conclude with Step 5. If it is not, check for
continuity and shorts to ground between D601 (see Figure 7.1) and
pin 4 of the auxiliary connector SK101. Repair any fault and go to
Step 5.

For the emergency power-sense option the link LK3 should be
inserted (see Figure 7.2). Connect the AUX GPI2 line (pin 5 of the
auxiliary connector SK101) to ground. Check that the power-up
signal at pin 5 of IC602 (see Figure 7.1) is high.
Remove the connection to ground. If the power-up signal is now
low, conclude with Step 5. If it is not, check for continuity and shorts
to ground in the path from D601 (see Figure 7.1), via Q600
(see Figure 7.2), to pin 5 of the auxiliary connector SK101. Repair
any fault and go to Step 5.

170

Power Supply Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

For the internal-options power-sense option the link LK4 should be
inserted (see Figure 7.2). Connect +3.3V DC (more than 2.6V to
be precise) from the power supply to the IOP GPIO7 line (pin 15 of the
internal-options connector SK102). Check that the power-up signal
at pin 5 of IC602 (see Figure 7.1) is high.
Remove the +3.3V supply and ground the IOP GPIO7 line (to be
precise the voltage on the line should be less than 0.6V). If the powerup signal is now low, conclude with Step 5. If it is not, check for
continuity and shorts to ground between D604 (see Figure 7.1) and
pin 15 of the internal-options connector SK102. Repair any fault and
go to Step 5.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

After checking all the relevant power-up options, and if necessary
repairing any faults, go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If the fault
could not be found or repairs failed, replace the board and go to
“Final Tasks” on page 157.

Power Supply Fault Finding

171

Task 6 —
Check Provision of
External Power

External power is supplied to pin 8 of the auxiliary connector SK101.
The power is normally switched, but will be unswitched if all the links LK5
to LK8 are inserted. (With all the links inserted, the power at the other
connectors is also unswitched.)
External power, either switched or unswitched, is supplied to pin 2 of the
control-head connector SK100. The power is switched or not depending on
the links LK5 and LK6:
■

switched power: LK5 in, LK6 out

■

unswitched power: LK5 out, LK6 in

External power is also supplied to pin 1 of the internal-options connector
SK102. The power is switched or not depending on the links LK7 and LK8:
■

switched power: LK7 in, LK8 out

■

unswitched power: LK7 out, LK8 in

Note

In some boards, LK7 is R786 and LK8 is R787.

If there is a fault with the supply of external power to any of these
connectors, first confirm the link settings required and then carry out the
following procedure:

172

With the radio powered up, confirm that 13.8V DC is present at pin
3 of IC605 (see Figure 7.1) and more than 3V DC at pin 2.

Check that 13.8 V is present at pin 5 of IC605. If there is, go to
Step 3. If there is not, go to Step 4.

Check for an open circuit between pin 5 of IC605 and the relevant
pin of the connector in question. Repair any fault, confirm the
removal of the fault, and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If the
repair failed or the fault could not be found, replace the board and go
to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Check for continuity between pin 5 of IC605 and the relevant pin of
the connector in question. Check for shorts to ground, check C718
at the auxiliary connector (see Figure 7.1), and check C715 at the
internal-options connector (see Figure 8.2).

Repair any fault found in the above checks. If no fault could be
found, replace IC605.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

Power Supply Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Interface Fault Finding

Introduction

This section covers the diagnosis of faults involving signals output from or
input to the radio’s internal circuitry via the control-head, internal options,
power, or auxiliary connectors. For most inputs and outputs, filtering or
basic processing is applied between the internal circuitry and the connectors.

Internal and
Connector Signals

The signals at the internal circuitry and those at the connectors are
distinguished as internal signals and connector signals respectively. On the
circuit diagram for the internal circuitry, dashed lines enclose connector
signals. Internal signals are all named signals outside these enclosures. In
Figure 8.1, which shows part of the internal options connector as an
example, IOP GPIO7 is a connector signal and ITF IOP GPIO7 is an internal signal.

Figure 8.1

Example illustrating the convention for internal and connector signals

TO
INTERNAL
OPTIONS
CONNECTOR
+3V3_CL
3

+3V3

D705
BAV70W

R723
33K

ITF_IOP_GPO7

R731
1K0

+3V3_CL
3

D706
BAV70W

R724
33K
R732
1K0

+3V3_CL
3

ITF_IOP_GPO5

IOP_GPIO6
1B2

+3V3

D706
BAV70W

R725
33K
R733
1K0

Types of Signals

1B2
6B4

+3V3

ITF_IOP_GPO6

IOP_GPIO7

IOP_GPIO5
1B2

The connector and internal signals can be of three types:
■

output lines

■

input lines

■

bi-directional lines.

For diagnosing faults in these three cases, carry out Task 1, Task 2 or Task 3
respectively. Where components need to be replaced to rectify faults, refer
to Figure 8.2 to Figure 8.4 for the locations of the components. These
figures show the three areas of the main board where the components of the
interface circuitry are situated.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Interface Fault Finding

173

Figure 8.2

Components of the interface circuitry (top side near the CDC TOP and IF TOP cans)
IF TOP CAN

Figure 8.3

174

CDC TOP CAN

Components of the interface circuitry (top side at the corner)

Interface Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 1 —
Check Output Lines

For an output line suspected or reported to be faulty, compare actual and
expected signals as described below. If necessary, determine what an
expected signal should be by copying the faulty radio’s programming file
into a serviceable radio and measuring the relevant points on the latter.
1.

Check the electrical signal at the appropriate pin of a connector
mated to the radio connector in question. If the expected connector
signal is not present, go to Step 3. If it is, go to Step 2.

If the expected signal is present, there might be no fault on that line
or there could be an intermittent fault. Subject the radio to mild
mechanical shock or vibration, or to a temperature change. This
might expose any intermittent contact, in which case go to Step 3.

If the expected signal is not present, check whether the expected
internal signal is present. If it is, go to Step 5. If it is not, go to Step 4.

The fault lies with the radio’s internal circuitry. If the power-supply
circuitry or the CODEC and audio circuitry is suspect, continue with
the fault diagnosis as in “Power Supply Fault Finding” on page 163
and “CODEC and Audio Fault Finding” on page 381 respectively. If
the digital board is suspect, replace the board and go to “Final Tasks”
on page 157.

The fault lies in the filtering, basic processing, or connector for the
line under test. Re-solder components or replace damaged or faulty
components as necessary. Confirm the removal of the fault and go to
“Final Tasks” on page 157. If the fault could not be found, replace
the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Interface Fault Finding

175

Figure 8.4

176

Components of the interface circuitry (bottom side)

Interface Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 2 —
Check Input Lines

Task 3 —
Bi-directional Lines

For an input line suspected or reported to be faulty, proceed as follows:
1.

For a suspect CH ON OFF line, go to Step 4. For all other input lines go
to Step 2.

For the suspect line, apply a 3.3V DC test signal to a connector mated
to the radio connector in question.

Check the internal signal for the line under test. If 3.3V DC is
present, go to Step 7. If it is not, go to Step 8.

For the CH ON OFF line, apply a short to ground on pin 5 of a connector
mated to the control-head connector. Check that there is 3.9V DC
present on the ITF ON OFF line, and that PSU ON OFF is approximately
equal to the radio’s primary supply voltage, nominally 13.8V DC.

Remove the short on the connector. Check that, with CH ON OFF
open-circuit, both ITF ON OFF and ITF PSU ON OFF are close to 0.0V.

If the voltages given in Step 4 and Step 5 are observed, go to Step 7.
If they are not, go to Step 8.

The fault lies with the radio’s internal circuitry. If the power-supply
circuitry or the CODEC and audio circuitry is suspect, continue with
the fault diagnosis as in “Power Supply Fault Finding” on page 163
and “CODEC and Audio Fault Finding” on page 381, respectively.
If the digital board is suspect, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

The fault lies in the filtering, basic processing, or connector for the
line under test. Re-solder components or replace faulty components
as necessary. Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks”
on page 157. If the fault could not be found, replace the board and
go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

For a bi-directional line suspected or reported to be faulty, proceed as
described below. In the procedure the direction of the line will need to be
configured. For information on this topic consult the on-line help facility
on the programming application’s “Programmable I/O” page.
1.

Configure the suspect line as an output, and then carry out the
procedure given in Task 1.

Configure the suspect line as an input, and then carry out the
procedure given in Task 2.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Interface Fault Finding

177

178

Interface Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding
This section covers the diagnosis of faults in the frequency synthesizer.
The sections are divided into the following:

Introduction

■

Initial checks

■

Fault diagnosis of RF PLL circuitry

■

Fault diagnosis of FCL circuitry.

The initial checks will indicate whether it is the RF PLL or the FCL that is
suspect. Note that the synthesizer is a closed-loop control system. A fault in
one area can cause symptoms to appear elsewhere. Locating the fault can
therefore be difficult.
Measurement
Techniques

Table 9.1
Command

The radio must be in CCTM for all the fault-diagnosis procedures of this
section. The CCTM commands required are listed in Table 9.1. Full details
of the commands are given in “Computer-Controlled Test Mode
(CCTM)” on page 118. Use an oscilloscope with a x10 probe for all voltage
measurements required. The signals should appear stable and clean.
Consider any noise or unidentified oscillations as evidence of a fault
requiring investigation. Use a frequency counter for all measurements of
high frequencies. The RF power output from the frequency synthesizer will
not exceed 10mW. If a probe is used for frequency measurements, use the
x1 setting.

CCTM commands required for the diagnosis of faults in the frequency synthesizer
Description

Read lock status of RF PLL, FCL and LO2 — displays xyz (0=not in lock, 1=in lock)

101 x y 0

Set transmit frequency (x in hertz) and receive frequency (y in hertz) to specified values

205

Reset calibration parameters to their default values

301 0 10

Calibrate VCXO of FCL

302 0 10

Calibrate VCO(s) of RF PLL

334 x

Set synthesizer on (x=1) or off (x=0) via DIG SYN EN line

335 x

Set transmit-receive switch on (x=1) or off (x=0) via DIG SYN TR SW line

389 x

Set synthesizer mode to slow (x=0) or fast (x=1)

393 1 x

Write data x to FPGA

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

179

9.1

Initial Checks

Types of checks

There are two different types of initial checks, which are covered in the
following tasks:
■

Task 1: calibration checks

■

Task 2: lock status.

Which, if any, of these tasks needs to be carried out depends on the
symptoms of the fault.
Symptoms of Fault

The symptoms of the fault may be divided into three categories:
■

radio fails to power up and system error is displayed

■

lock error is displayed

■

radio is in lock but exhibits transmit or receive fault.

The nature of the display depends on the type of control head as shown in
Table 9.2.
Table 9.2

Format of error displays by different control heads

Control head

Type of error
Lock error

System error

1-digit-display control head

2-digit-display control head

3-digit-display control head

Graphical-display control head

Out of lock

System error

In the first two cases the checks of Task 1 and Task 2 respectively are
required. In the last case there are several symptoms; these are listed below.
Frequency Bands

Where test procedures or figures differ according to the frequency band of
the radio, the frequency band is given in brackets. The frequency band may
be referred to as either ‘VHF’ (very high frequency) or ‘UHF’ (ultra high
frequency) or identified by the frequency sub-band, such as ‘B1’ or ‘H7’.
The product-code label on the radio body will identify the frequency band
as described in “Product Codes” on page 17. A definition of frequency
bands is given in “Defining Frequency Bands” on page 126.

180

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmit and
Receive Faults

A transmit or receive fault will be implied by one of the following
consequences:
■

radio fails to receive or receive performance is degraded

■

radio fails to enter transmit mode

■

radio exits transmit mode unexpectedly

■

radio enters transmit mode but fails to transmit

■

radio enters transmit mode but transmit performance is degraded.

With a fault of this kind, neither of the initial tasks is required.
Fault diagnosis should begin with “Power Supplies” on page 183.
Summary

To summarize, given the nature of the fault, proceed to the task or section
indicated below:
■

Task 1: system error

■

Task 2: lock error

■

“Power Supplies”: transmit or receive fault.

The checks of Task 1 and Task 2 will indicate the section with which the
fault diagnosis should continue.
Task 1 —
System Error

A system error indicates a fault in the calibration of either the FCL or the
frequency synthesizer. To determine which is faulty, calibrate the VCXO
and the transmit VCO as described below. (Always calibrate the former first,
because the latter depends on the former.)
1.

Place the radio in CCTM.

Enter the CCTM command 301 0 10 to calibrate the VCXO.
The response will be one of the following three messages:
■

“passed sanity check. Cal’d values put into effect”

■

“failed sanity check. Cal’d values not in effect”

■

“Cal failed: lock error”.

The first two messages will be preceded by four calibration values.
3.

In the case of the first message (passed), go to Step 4. In the case of
the second and third messages (failed), the FCL is suspect; go to
“Power Supply for FCL” on page 227.

Enter the CCTM command 302 0 10 to calibrate the transmit VCO.
The response will be one of the three messages listed in Step 2.
The first two messages will be preceded by eight calibration values.
Reset the radio and re-enter CCTM.

If the calibration succeeded but the system error persists, replace the
board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. In the case of the second
message (failed sanity check), go to Step 6. In the case of the third
message (calibration failed), go to Step 8 (UHF radios) or “Power
Supplies” on page 183 (VHF radios).

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

181

Enter the CCTM command 205 to reset the calibration values to the
default values. Then enter the CCTM command 302 0 10 again to
calibrate the transmit VCO.

If the calibration succeeded, confirm the removal of the fault, and go
to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If the calibration failed, go to Step 8
(UHF radios) or “Power Supplies” on page 183 (VHF radios).

Program the radio with the maximum frequency in the radio’s
frequency band: Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the
frequency in hertz.

Enter the CCTM command 72 to determine the lock status in receive
mode. Note the response.
lock status=xyz (x=RF PLL; y=FCL; z=LO2) (0=not in lock; 1=in lock)

10.

Task 2 —
Lock Status

If the lock status is 111 or 110, the synthesizer is functioning in the
receive mode, and the power supplies and PLL are functioning
correctly. Go to “Loop Filter” on page 198 to check the loop filter,
VCOs, and buffer amplifiers. If the lock status is 011 or 010, the
synthesizer is faulty in the receive mode. Go to “Power Supplies” on
page 183.

A lock error indicates that the frequency synthesizer, FCL or second LO is
out of lock. To determine which is faulty, check the lock status as described
below.
1.

If not already done, place the radio in CCTM.

Program the radio with the receive frequency of a channel that is
known to be out of lock: Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0,
where x is the frequency in hertz.

Enter the CCTM command 72 to determine the lock status in receive
mode. Note the response. The action required depends on the lock
status as described in the following steps.
lock status=xyz (x=RF PLL; y=FCL; z=LO2) (0=not in lock; 1=in lock)

182

If the lock status is x0x, where x is 0 or 1, the FCL is suspect; go to
“Power Supply for FCL” on page 227.

If the lock status is 011, the synthesizer is suspect, although the power
supplies are functioning correctly; go to “Loop Filter” on page 198.

If the lock status is 010, the synthesizer and second LO are both out
of lock. First investigate the synthesizer, excluding the power supplies;
go to “Loop Filter” on page 198. If necessary, investigate the receiver
later.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

9.2

If the lock status is 110, the second LO is out of lock. Go to
“Receiver Fault Finding” on page 239.

If the lock status is 111, this implies normal operation. But if the lock
error persists, replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Power Supplies
First check that a power supply is not the cause of the fault. There are four
power supplies for the frequency synthesizer — two are supplied from the
PSU (power supply unit) module and two are produced in the synthesizer
circuitry itself:

Introduction

■

Task 3: 14 V DC supply from SMPS (VCL SUPPLY)

■

Task 4: 6 V DC supply from 6 V regulator in PSU module (+6V0)

■

Task 5: 5 V DC supply following filtering of 6 V supply (+5V DEC)

■

Task 6: 3 V DC supply from 3 V regulator in PSU module (+3V0 AN).

The measurement points for diagnosing faults in the power supplies are
summarized in Figure 9.1.
Figure 9.1

Measurement points for the frequency synthesizer power supply circuitry

PIN 4 OF
IC606

FREQUENCY
SYNTHESIZER

+6V0
Q500 AND
R533

FILTERING
OF SUPPLY
FOR VCO
CIRCUITRY

FILTERING
OF SUPPLY
FOR PLL
AND LOOP
FILTER

14 V
SMPS

+5V DEC

6V
SUPPLY
PIN 5 OF
IC606

+9V0

9V
SUPPLY

+3V0 AN

3V
SUPPLY

VCL SUPPLY
JUNCTION OF
C531 AND R530

PIN 4 OF
Q508

L506
SIGNAL TYPES
RF
ANALOG

PINS 7 AND 15
OF IC503

CLOCK
DIGITAL

VCO
CIRCUITRY

LOOP
FILTER
AND
SUMMER

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

INVERTER

PLL

AGND

INTERFACE
CIRCUITRY

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

183

Figure 9.2

Synthesizer circuitry under the SYN TOP can and the 6 V regulator IC606 (top side)

VHF bands

A4 band differences

Pin 5 (5-pin device)

(pin not used)

Q508

Q512

SMPS output (C531 and
R530 are on the bottom side
of the PCB)

Q508
Q5004

Measurement
point on L506

UHF bands

Q512

Q508
Q506
Q507

184

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 3 —
14V Power Supply

First check the output VCL SUPPLY from the SMPS, which is itself provided
with a 9V DC supply from a 9V regulator in the PSU module.
1.

Remove the board from the chassis.

Place the radio in CCTM.

Measure the SMPS output VCL SUPPLY at the via between C531 and
R530 (see Figure 9.2).
C531: 14.2 V ± 0.3 DC

Note

On A4 band radios, C531 and R530 are on the bottom side of the
PCB. Measure the VCL SUPPLY voltage on the via beside C5050.

If the SMPS output is correct, go to Task 4. If it is not, go to Step 5.

Check the 9 V supply at Q500 and R533 (see Figure 9.3).
Q500 and R533: 9.0 V ± 0.3 DC

If the voltage is correct, go to Step 7. If it is not, the 9V regulator
IC601 is suspect; go to Task 3 of “Power Supply Fault Finding” on
page 168.

Remove the FCL TOP can and check the SMPS circuit based on Q500,
Q502 and L502 (see Figure 9.3).

Note

On A4 band radios, these components are not located under the
FCL TOP can (see Figure 9.3).
Remove the SYN BOT can and check IC504 and IC505 for shorts
(see Figure 9.4); replace any suspect IC.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

If a fault is found, repair the circuit, confirm the removal of the fault,
and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If the repair failed or no fault
could be found, replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

185

Figure 9.3

Synthesizer circuitry under the FCL TOP can (top side)

A4 band

PAD TOP can
(top side PCB)

186

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

VCXO BOT can
(bottom side PCB)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 4 —
6V Power Supply

If the output of the SMPS is correct, check the 6V DC supply next.
1.

Measure the supply +6V0 at pin 4 of IC606 (see Figure 9.2).
pin 4 of IC606: 6.0 ± 0.3V DC

If the voltage is correct, go to Task 5. If it is not, measure the 9V
input at pin 5 of IC606 (see Figure 9.2).
pin 5 of IC606: 9.0 ± 0.3V DC

If the voltage is correct, go to Step 4. If it is not, the 9V regulator
IC601 is suspect; go to Task 3 of “Power Supply Fault Finding” on
page 168.

If the input to the regulator IC606 is correct but not the output,
check IC606 (see Figure 9.2) and the associated circuitry; if
necessary, replace IC606.
Remove the SYN TOP can and check the C-multipliers Q508 (pins 3,
4, 5) and Q512 for shorts (see Figure 9.2); replace any suspect
transistor.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

187

Figure 9.4

Synthesizer circuitry under the SYN BOT can (bottom side)

Q511

IC505

IC504

188

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

Q505

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 5 —
5V Power Supply

If the SMPS output and 6V DC supply are correct, check the +5V DEC
supply next.
1.

Remove the SYN TOP can.

Measure the supply +5V DEC at pin 4 of Q508 (see Figure 9.2).
pin 4 of Q508: 5.3 ± 0.3V DC

If the voltage is correct, go to Task 6. If it is not, go to Step 4 (UHF
radios) or Step 5 (VHF radios).

With a UHF radio check for faults in the C-multiplier Q508 (pins 3,
4, 5) and the 5V and transmit-receive switches based on Q506, Q507
and Q508 (pins 1, 2, 6) (see Figure 9.2). Replace any suspect
transistor. Conclude with Step 6.

With a VHF radio, check for faults in the C-multiplier and 5V switch
based on Q508 and Q5004 (see Figure 9.2). Remove the SYN TOP
can (A4 band only) and VCO BOT can, and check the transmit-receive
switch based on Q5002 and Q5003 (see Figure 9.5). Replace any
suspect transistor. Conclude with Step 6.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

189

Figure 9.5

Transmit-receive switch components — VHF bands

Q5002
Q5003

A4 band
Q5003

Q5002

SYN TOP

190

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 6 —
3V Power Supply

If the SMPS output and the 6V and 5V supplies are correct, the remaining
power supply to check is the 3V DC supply.
1.

Measure the supply +3V0 AN at pins 7 and 15 of IC503
(see Figure 9.2).
pins 7 and 15 of IC503: 2.9 ± 0.3V DC

If the voltage is correct, go to “Phase-locked Loop” on page 192.
If it is not, go to Step 3.

Check the supply at L506 (see Figure 9.2). The measurement point
is the via shown in the figure.
L506: 2.9 ± 0.3V DC

If the voltage is correct, go to Step 5. If it is not, the 3 V regulator
IC603 is suspect; go to Task 3 of “Power Supply Fault Finding” on
page 168.

Check the components in the path from L506 to IC503. Also check
IC503; if necessary, replace IC503 (see Figure 9.2).

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

191

9.3

Phase-locked Loop

Introduction

If there is no fault with the power supplies, check the critical output from,
and inputs to, the PLL:
■

Task 7: supply for charge pump

■

Task 8: reference frequency input

■

Task 9: DIG SYN EN line input

■

Task 10: SYN LOCK line output.

The measurement points for diagnosing faults concerning the PLL inputs
and output are summarized in Figure 9.6.
Task 7 —
Supply for
Charge Pump

First check the supply for the charge pump of the PLL.
1.

Measure the supply for the charge pump at pin 16 of IC503
(see Figure 9.2).
pin 16 of IC503: 5.0 ± 0.3 V DC

192

If the voltage is correct, go to Task 8. If it is not, go to Step 3.

Check the C-multiplier Q512 (see Figure 9.2) and check IC503
itself; if necessary, replace the transistor or IC.

If there is a fault, repair the circuit, confirm the removal of the fault,
and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If the repair failed or no fault
could be found, replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

DIGITAL
BOARD

L102

VIA TO CHECK
SYN LOCK

R105

VIA TO CHECK
DIG SYN FAST

R104

VIA TO CHECK
DIG SYN EN

SYN LOCK

DIG SYN FAST

DIG SYN EN

TP503
(JUNCTION OF
R566 AND R570)
INVERTER

COLLECTOR
OF Q505

OUTPUT

PLL

R542

PIN 10 OF
IC503

JUNCTION OF
C541 AND R547

PIN 16 OF
IC503

PLL

R549

SUPPLY FOR CHARGE PUMP

FEEDBACK
VOLTAGE
PIN 6 OF IC505

REFERENCE
VOLTAGE

LOOP
FILTER
AND
SUMMER

OUTPUT OF LOOP
FILTER AT C565

VCO
CIRCUITRY

LOOP
VOLTAGE

PIN 5 OF
IC505

PLL FEEDBACK

FILTERING
OF SUPPLY
FOR PLL
AND LOOP
FILTER

R568

R544

L506

FCL

DIGITAL

CLOCK

ANALOG

SIGNAL TYPES
RF

CDC VCO MOD

SYN CDC LFV

PIN 14 OF
IC503

PIN 8 OF
IC503

C536

REFERENCE
FREQUENCY

FREQUENCY
SYNTHESIZER

+3V0 AN

CODEC
AND AUDIO
CIRCUITRY

3V
SUPPLY

Figure 9.6
Test and measurement points for the synthesizer PLL and loop filter

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

193

Figure 9.7

Components between the digital board and the frequency synthesizer

FCL TOP CAN

VIAS FOR
MEASUREMENTS

Task 8 —
Reference
Frequency

If the supply for the charge pump is correct, check the reference frequency
input from the FCL to the PLL.
1.

Measure the reference frequency at pin 8 of IC503 (see Figure 9.2).
pin 8 of IC503: 13.012 ± 0.002 MHz and 1.1 ± 0.2 Vpp
A4 band: pin 8 of IC503: 2.612 ± 0.002 MHz and 1.1 ± 0.2 Vpp

194

If the signal is correct, go to Task 9. If it is not, go to Step 3.

Check IC503 (see Figure 9.2). Replace IC503 if it is suspect.

Determine if the fault has been removed. If it has, go to “Final Tasks”
on page 157. If it has not, the FCL is suspect; go to “Power Supply
for FCL” on page 227.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 9 —
DIG SYN EN

Line

If the supply for the charge pump and the reference frequency are correct,
check the DIG SYN EN line input.
1.

Check the DIG SYN EN line at pin 10 of IC503 (see Figure 9.2).
Enter the CCTM command 334 0 to switch off the synthesizer, and
measure the voltage at pin 10.
pin 10 of IC503: 0 V DC (after entry of CCTM 334 0)

Enter the command 334 1 to switch on the synthesizer, and measure
the voltage again.
pin 10 of IC503: 2.5 ± 0.3 V DC (after entry of CCTM 334 1)

If the voltages measured in Step 1 and Step 2 are correct, go to
Task 10. If they are not, go to Step 4.

Remove R104 (see Figure 9.7) and repeat the above measurements
as follows:

Enter the CCTM command 334 0 to switch off the synthesizer, and
measure the voltage at the via between R104 (see Figure 9.7) and
the digital board.
via at R104: 0 V DC (after entry of CCTM 334 0)

Enter the CCTM command 334 1 to switch on the synthesizer, and
measure the voltage at the via between R104 (see Figure 9.7) and
the digital board.
via at R104: 3.3 ± 0.3 V DC (after entry of CCTM 334 1)

If the voltages measured in Step 5 and Step 6 are still not correct, the
digital board is faulty; replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the voltages are correct, go to Step 8.

There is a fault between the digital board and IC503. Locate the fault.
Check and resolder R104 in position (see Figure 9.7), and check for
continuity between pin 10 of IC503 (see Figure 9.2) and the digital
board via R104.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

195

Task 10 —
Line

SYN LOCK

If all the critical inputs to the PLL are correct, check the SYN LOCK line
output.
1.

Enter the CCTM command 72 to determine the lock status in receive
mode. Note the status.
lock status=xyz (x=RF PLL; y=FCL; z=LO2) (0=not in lock; 1=in lock)

Check the SYN LOCK line by measuring the voltage at pin 14 of IC503
(see Figure 9.2). The voltage should depend on the lock status as
follows:
lock status 111 or 110: 3.0 ± 0.3 V DC at pin 14 of IC503
lock status 011 or 010: 0 V DC at pin 14 of IC503

196

If the voltage measured in Step 2 is correct, go to “Loop Filter” on
page 198. If it is not, go to Step 4.

Check for continuity between pin 14 of IC503 and the digital board
via R568 (see Figure 9.2) and L102 (see Figure 9.7).

If there is a fault, go to Step 6. If there is no fault, the digital board is
faulty; replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Repair the fault. Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157. If the repair failed or no fault could be found,
replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 9.8

Synthesizer circuitry under the SYN TOP can (top side)

VHF bands
Q512

Junction of
C541 and R547

TP503

UHF bands
Q512

Junction of
C541 and R547

TP503

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

197

9.4

Loop Filter

Introduction

If the power supplies for the frequency synthesizer are correct, and the PLL
is functioning properly, check the loop filter next:
■

Task 11: check loop voltage

■

Task 12: VCO fault

■

Task 13: check reference voltage

■

Task 14: check feedback voltage

■

Task 15: check DIG SYN FAST line

■

Task 16: check TP503 test point.

The test and measurement points for diagnosing faults concerning the loop
filter are summarized in Figure 9.6.
Task 11 —
Check Loop Voltage

Check whether the loop filter is functioning correctly by measuring the
loop voltage at the output of the filter at C565.
1.

If not already done, remove the board from the chassis, remove the
can, and place the radio in CCTM.

SYN TOP

Remove R542 (see Figure 9.8).

Using an oscilloscope, proceed as follows to observe the voltage at
C565 before and after grounding the junction between C541 and
R547 (see Figure 9.8):
While holding the oscilloscope probe at C565, use a pair of tweezers
to momentarily ground the junction. The voltage should change to
the following value (if it is not already at this value):
C565: 13.3 ± 0.3 V DC

If the loop voltage is correct, go to Step 5. If it is not, the loop-filter
circuitry is suspect; go to Task 13.

Proceed as follows to observe the voltage at C565 before and after
applying 3 V DC to the junction of C541 and R547; there is a
convenient 3 V level at R544 (see Figure 9.8):
While holding the probe at C565, use the tweezers to momentarily
apply 3 V DC to the junction; do not touch the board with your
hand, and do not allow the tweezers to touch any cans when you
remove them. The voltage should change to:
C565: < 0.5 V DC

198

If the loop voltage is correct, go to Task 12. If it is not, the loop-filter
circuitry is suspect; go to Task 13.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 12 —
VCO Faulty

If the loop voltage is correct, the loop filter is functioning properly.
The VCO and related circuitry is therefore suspect. The section to proceed
to depends on the type of the radio and the nature of the fault.
1.

With a UHF radio go to Step 2. With a VHF radio go to “VCO and
Related Circuitry (VHF Radios)” on page 217.

If a UHF radio exhibits a lock error or a receive fault. the receive
VCO is suspect; go to “Receive VCO and Related Circuitry (UHF
Radios)” on page 203.
If it exhibits a system error or a transmit fault, the transmit VCO is
suspect; go to “Transmit VCO and Related Circuitry (UHF
Radios)” on page 212.

Task 13 —
Check Reference
Voltage

If the loop-filter circuitry is suspect, first check the reference voltage for
the filter.
1.

Remove the SYN BOT can.

Measure the reference voltage at pin 5 of IC505 (see Figure 9.4).
The result should be:
IC505 pin 5:

2.8 ± 0.1 V DC

If the voltage is correct, go to Task 14. If it is not, the referencevoltage circuitry is suspect; go to Step 4.

Resolder R542 in position and check the C-multiplier Q512
(see Figure 9.8).

If a fault is found, repair the circuit, and confirm that the reference
voltage is now correct. If it is, go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If it
is not, or if no fault could be found, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

199

Task 14 —
Check Feedback
Voltage

If the loop filter is suspect but the reference voltage is correct, check the
feedback voltage.
1.

Measure the feedback voltage at pin 6 of IC505 (see Figure 9.4).
The result should be:
IC505 pin 6:

2.8 ± 0.1 V DC

If the voltage is not correct, the loop filter is faulty; go to Step 3.
If the voltage is correct, resolder R542 in position (see Figure 9.8)
and go to Task 15.

Check IC504, IC505, Q511 (see Figure 9.4) and associated
components.

Check the following components (see Figure 9.8):
A4 band: C5085 to C5089
B1 band:

C5085 to C5089

C0 band: C5085 to C5088
D1 band: C5085 to C5088
H5 band: C5085 and C5086
H6 band: C5085 and C5086
Note

200

On early issue boards, C548 is fitted instead of these components.

If a fault is found, repair the circuit, repeat the measurement of the
feedback voltage in Step 1, and resolder R542 in position
(see Figure 9.8).

If the feedback voltage is now correct, go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If it is not, or if no fault could be found, replace the board
and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 15 —
Check DIG SYN FAST
Line

If the loop filter is suspect but the reference and feedback voltages are
correct, check the DIG SYN FAST line, which is input to the inverter.
1.

Enter the CCTM command 389 1 to set the synthesizer mode to fast.

Measure the voltage at the collector of Q505 (see Figure 9.4).
The result should be:
Q505 collector: 14.2 ± 0.3 V DC (after entry of CCTM 389 1)

Enter the CCTM command 389 0 to set the mode to slow.

Measure the voltage at the collector of Q505 (see Figure 9.4).
The result should be:
Q505 collector: 0 V DC (after entry of CCTM 389 0)

If the voltages measured in Step 2 and Step 4 are correct, go to
Task 16. If they are not, go to Step 6.

Remove R105 (see Figure 9.7).

Enter the CCTM command 389 1 to set the mode to fast.

Measure the voltage at the via between R105 and the digital board
(see Figure 9.7). The result should be:
via at R105: 0 V DC (after entry of CCTM 389 1)

Enter the CCTM command 389 0 to set the mode to slow.

10.

Measure the voltage at the via between R105 and the digital board
(see Figure 9.7). The result should be:
via at R105: 3.3 ± 0.3 V DC (after entry of CCTM 389 0)

11.

If the voltages measured in Step 8 and Step 10 are correct, go to
Step 12. If they are not, the digital board is faulty; replace the board
and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

12.

Check and resolder R105 in position (see Figure 9.7), and check for
continuity between the collector of Q505 (see Figure 9.4) and the
digital board via R105.

13.

If a fault is found, repair the circuit, and confirm that the voltages are
now correct. If they are, go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If they are
not, or if no fault could be found, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

201

Task 16 —
Check TP503 Test
Point

If the reference voltage, feedback voltage, and DIG SYN FAST line are all
correct, check the voltage at the TP503 test point.
1.

Measure the voltage at the TP503 test point (see Figure 9.8).
The oscilloscope should show a DC level less than 3.0V with no sign
of noise or modulation.
TP503 test point: < 3.0 V DC

If the correct result is obtained, go to Step 3. If it is not, go to Step 5.

The loop filter is faulty but the above measurements do not provide
more specific information. Check IC504, IC505, Q511
(see Figure 9.4) and associated components.

Check the following components (see Figure 9.8), then conclude
with Step 9:
A4 band: C5085 to C5089
B1 band:

C5085 to C5089

C0 band: C5085 to C5088
D1 band: C5085 to C5088
H5 band: C5085 and C5086
H6 band: C5085 and C5086
Note

202

On early issue boards, C548 may be fitted instead of these
components.

Remove R566 and R570 (see Figure 9.8), which provide a
modulation path to the VCO(s).

Repeat the measurement of Step 1.

If the correct result is now obtained, go to Step 8. If the correct result
is still not obtained, the CODEC and audio circuitry is suspect;
resolder R566 and R570 in position (see Figure 9.8), and go to
“CODEC and Audio Fault Finding” on page 381.

Resolder R566 and R570 in position (see Figure 9.8).

Check IC504 (pins 6, 8, 9) (see Figure 9.4) and the associated
components in the loop filter.

10.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

9.5

Receive VCO and Related Circuitry (UHF Radios)
If there is no fault with the power supplies, the PLL inputs and output, and
the loop filter, check the VCO and related circuitry. The procedures in this
section apply only to UHF radios with a lock error or receive fault, and
therefore with suspect receive VCO and related circuitry. (The minimum
and maximum receive frequencies for the different UHF frequency bands
are defined in Table 9.3.) There are six aspects:

Introduction

■

Task 17: check receive VCO

■

Task 18: repair PLL feedback

■

Task 19: repair receive VCO

■

Task 20: check switching to receive mode

■

Task 21: repair switching network

■

Task 22: check receive buffer amplifier.

The measurement points for diagnosing faults in the VCO and related
circuitry are summarized in Figure 9.9.
Table 9.3

Minimum and maximum receive frequencies for the different UHF frequency bands

Frequency band

Receive frequency in MHz
Minimum

Maximum

337 ± 5

441 ± 5

H6/H7

378 ± 5

498 ± 5

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

203

204

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

RX PORT

SYN RX LO1

TX PORT

DIGITAL
BOARD

VIA TO CHECK
DIG SYN TR SW

RECEIVER

TRANSMITTER

SYN TX LO

DIGITAL

CLOCK

ANALOG

SIGNAL TYPES
RF

R103

PIN 4 OF
IC5100

BASE OF
Q5100

DIG SYN EN

DIG SYN TR SW

RECEIVE
BUFFER
AMPLIFIER
AND
COUPLER

TRANSMIT
BUFFER
AMPLIFIER
AND
COUPLER

PIN 6 OF
Q506

R585

R593

PIN 3 OF
Q506

LOOP
FILTER
AND
SUMMER

INVERTER

JUNCTION OF
C541 AND R547

5 V SWITCH

FILTERING
OF SUPPLY
FOR VCO
CIRCUITRY

Q508 AND
R593

+5V DEC

TR SWITCH

R577

RECEIVE
VCO

LOOP VOLTAGE

FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER

TRANSMIT VCO

PIN 6 OF
Q5001

PLL FEEDBACK

PLL

R544

L506

+3V0 AN
3V
SUPPLY

Figure 9.9
Measurement points for the VCO and related circuitry in UHF radios

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 17 —
Check Receive VCO

Check that the correct receive frequency is synthesized. This is the
frequency of the receive VCO output SYN RX LO1 at the RX port shown in
Figure 9.10.
1.

Enter the CCTM command 335 0 to set the transmit-receive switch
off (receive mode).

Using a frequency counter, proceed as follows to observe the receive
frequency at the RX port before and after grounding the junction
between C541 and R547 (see Figure 9.10):
While holding the probe from the counter on the RX port, use a pair
of tweezers to momentarily ground the junction. The frequency
should change to:
RX port: maximum receive frequency (see Table 9.3)

The loop filter will hold its output steady at 13.3 V. This should result
in a frequency equal to the maximum given in Table 9.3.
3.

If the receive frequency measured in Step 2 is correct, go to Step 4.
If it is incorrect, go to Task 19, but if no frequency is detected, go to
Task 20.

Proceed as follows to observe the receive frequency at the RX port
before and after applying 3 V DC to the junction of C541 and R547;
there is a convenient 3 V level at R544 (see Figure 9.10):
While holding the probe on the RX port, use the tweezers to
momentarily apply 3 V DC to the junction; do not touch the board
with your hand, and do not allow the tweezers to touch any cans
when you remove them. The frequency should change to:
RX port: minimum receive frequency (see Table 9.3)

The loop filter will hold its output steady at about 0V. This should
result in a frequency equal to the minimum given in Table 9.3.
5.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

If the receive frequency measured in Step 4 is correct, go to Task 18.
If it is incorrect, go to Task 19. If no frequency is detected, go to
Task 20.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

205

Figure 9.10

Synthesizer circuitry under the SYN TOP and VCO TOP cans (UHF radio, top side)
Q507

Q506

Tx port

Q508

Junction of
C541 and R547

Rx port

206

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 18 —
Repair PLL feedback

If both the minimum and maximum receive frequencies are correct, the
PLL feedback is suspect.
1.

Resolder R542 in position (see Figure 9.10).

Remove the VCO BOT can.

Replace the components C567, R574 (see Figure 9.11) and IC503
(see Figure 9.10).

Also check the second stage of the receive buffer amplifier based on
IC5100 (see Figure 9.11). Repair any fault.

Confirm that the fault in the radio has been removed. If it has, go to
“Final Tasks” on page 157. If it has not, replace the board and go to
“Final Tasks” on page 157.

Figure 9.11

Synthesizer circuitry under the VCO BOT can
(UHF radios, bottom side)
Q5001

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

207

Task 19 —
Repair Receive VCO

208

If either or both the minimum and maximum receive frequencies are
incorrect, the receive VCO circuitry is faulty.
1.

Remove the VCO TOP can.

Check the receive VCO. The circuitry is based on Q504
(see Figure 9.10).

If a fault is found, repair it and go to Step 4. If no fault is found, go
to Step 6.

Repeat the frequency measurements in Step 2 and Step 4 of Task 17.

If the frequencies are now correct, resolder R542 in position
(see Figure 9.10), and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If they are
still not correct, go to Step 6.

Resolder R542 in position (see Figure 9.10). Replace the board and
go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 20 —
Check Switching
to Receive Mode

If no receive frequency is detected in the check of the receive VCO, first
check that the transmit-receive switch is functioning correctly.
1.

Resolder R542 in position (see Figure 9.10).

Enter the CCTM command 335 0 to switch on the supply to the
receive VCO.

Measure the voltage at the first collector (pin 3) of Q506
(see Figure 9.10). The voltage should be:
pin 3 of Q506: 5.0 ± 0.3 V DC (after entry of CCTM 335 0)

Enter the CCTM command 335 1 to switch off the supply.

Again measure the voltage at the first collector of Q506.
pin 3 of Q506: 0 V DC (after entry of CCTM 335 1)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

If the voltages measured in Step 3 and Step 5 are correct, go to
Task 22. If they are not, the switching network is suspect; go to
Task 21.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

209

Task 21 —
Repair Switching
Network

If the transmit-receive switch is not functioning correctly, first check the DIG
SYN TR SW line to confirm that the digital board is not the cause. If the digital
board is not faulty, the switching network is suspect.
1.

Enter the CCTM command 335 0 to set the transmit-receive switch
off (receive mode). Measure the voltage on the DIG SYN TR SW line
between Q508 and R593 (see Figure 9.10).
R593: 0 V DC (after entry of CCTM 335 0)

Enter the CCTM command 335 1 to set the transmit-receive switch
on (transmit mode). Again measure the voltage at R593.
R593: 2.0 ± 0.5 V DC (after entry of CCTM 335 1)

If the voltages measured in Step 1 and Step 2 are correct, go to
Step 9. If they are not, remove R103 (see Figure 9.7) and go to
Step 4.

Enter the CCTM command 335 0 and measure the voltage at the via
between R103 and the digital board (see Figure 9.7).
via at R103: 0 V DC (after entry of CCTM 335 0)

Enter the CCTM command 335 1 and again measure the voltage at
the via between R103 and the digital board.
via at R103: 3.3 ± 0.3 V DC (after entry of CCTM 335 1)

210

If the voltages measured in Step 4 and Step 5 are correct, go to
Step 7. If they are not, the digital board is faulty; resolder R103 in
position (see Figure 9.7), replace the board and go to “Final Tasks”
on page 157.

Check and resolder R103 in position (see Figure 9.7), and check for
continuity between Q508 and the digital board via R593
(see Figure 9.10) and R103.

If no fault is found, go to Step 9. If a fault is found, repair the circuit,
confirm that the voltages are now correct, and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157 If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

Check the circuitry for the transmit-receive and 5V switches (based
on Q506, Q507 and Q508) (see Figure 9.10).

10.

If a fault is found, repair the circuit, confirm that the voltages are now
correct, and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If the repair failed or
the fault could not be found, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 22 —
Check Receive
Buffer Amplifier

If no receive frequency is detected but the switching network is not faulty,
check the receive buffer amplifier. If the amplifier is not faulty, there might
be a fault in the receive VCO that was not detected earlier.
1.

Remove the VCO BOT can.

Check the receive buffer amplifier in receive mode: Enter the CCTM
command 335 0 to set the transmit-receive switch off.

Measure the voltages at the base of Q5100 and at pin 4 of IC5100
(see Figure 9.11).
base of Q5100: 0.7 ± 0.1V DC (receive mode)
pin 4 of IC5100: 2.0 ± 0.5V DC (receive mode)

Then check the receive buffer amplifier in transmit mode: Enter the
CCTM command 335 1 to set the transmit-receive switch on.

Again measure the voltages of Q5100 and IC5100.
base of Q5100: 0V DC (transmit mode)
pin 4 of IC5100: 0V DC (transmit mode)

If the voltages are correct, the receive VCO is suspect; go to Step 7.
If they are not, the receive buffer amplifier is suspect; go to Step 9.

Remove the VCO TOP can.

Check the receive VCO circuitry based on Q504 (see Figure 9.10).
Conclude with Step 10.

Check the first buffer stage (based on Q5100) and the second stage
(based on IC5100) (see Figure 9.11).

10.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

211

9.6

Transmit VCO and Related Circuitry (UHF Radios)
If there is no fault with the power supplies, the PLL inputs and output, and
the loop filter, check the VCO and related circuitry. The procedures in this
section apply only to UHF radios with a system error or transmit fault, and
therefore with suspect transmit VCO and related circuitry. (The minimum
and maximum transmit frequencies for the different UHF frequency bands
are defined in Table 9.4.) There are five aspects:

Introduction

■

Task 23: check transmit VCO

■

Task 24: repair PLL feedback

■

Task 25: repair transmit VCO

■

Task 26: check switching to transmit mode

■

Task 27: check transmit buffer amplifier.

The measurement points for diagnosing faults in the VCO and related
circuitry are summarized in Figure 9.9.
Table 9.4

Minimum and maximum transmit frequencies for the different UHF frequency bands

Frequency band

Transmit frequency in MHz
Minimum

Maximum

371 ± 5

492 ± 5

H6/H7

419 ± 5

545 ± 5

212

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 23 —
Check Transmit VCO

Check that the correct transmit frequency is synthesized. This is the
frequency of the transmit VCO output SYN TX LO at the TX port shown in
Figure 9.10.
1.

Enter the CCTM command 335 1 to set the transmit-receive switch
on (transmit mode).

Using a frequency counter, proceed as follows to observe the transmit
frequency at the TX port before and after grounding the junction
between C541 and R547 (see Figure 9.10):
While holding the probe from the counter on the TX port, use a pair
of tweezers to momentarily ground the junction. The frequency
should change to:
TX port: maximum transmit frequency (see Table 9.4)

The loop filter will hold its output steady at 13.3 V. This should result
in a frequency equal to the maximum given in Table 9.4.
3.

If the transmit frequency measured in Step 2 is correct, go to Step 4.
If it is incorrect, go to Task 25. If no frequency is detected, go to
Task 26.

Proceed as follows to observe the transmit frequency at the TX port
before and after applying 3 V DC to the junction of C541 and R547;
there is a convenient 3 V level at R544 (see Figure 9.10):
While holding the probe on the TX port, use the tweezers to
momentarily apply 3 V DC to the junction; do not touch the board
with your hand, and do not allow the tweezers to touch any cans
when you remove them. The frequency should change to:
TX port: minimum transmit frequency (see Table 9.4)

The loop filter will hold its output steady at about 0V. This should
result in a frequency equal to the minimum given in Table 9.4.
5.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

If the transmit frequency measured in Step 4 is correct, go to Task 24.
If it is incorrect, go to Task 25. If no frequency is detected, go to
Task 26.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

213

Task 24 —
Repair PLL feedback

Task 25 —
Repair Transmit
VCO

214

If both the minimum and maximum transmit frequencies are correct, the
PLL feedback is suspect.
1.

Resolder R542 in position (see Figure 9.10).

Remove the VCO BOT can.

Replace the components C570, R578 (see Figure 9.11) and IC503
(see Figure 9.10).

Confirm that the fault in the radio has been removed. If it has, go to
“Final Tasks” on page 157. If it has not, replace the board and go to
“Final Tasks” on page 157.

If either or both the minimum and maximum transmit frequencies are
incorrect, the transmit VCO circuitry is faulty.
1.

Remove the VCO TOP can.

Check the transmit VCO. The circuitry is based on Q510
(see Figure 9.10).

If a fault is found, repair it and go to Step 4. If no fault is found, go
to Step 6.

Repeat the frequency measurements in Step 2 and Step 4 of Task 23.

If the frequencies are now correct, resolder R542 in position
(see Figure 9.10), and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If they are
still not correct, go to Step 6.

Resolder R542 in position (see Figure 9.10). Replace the board and
go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 26 —
Check Switching
to Transmit Mode

If no transmit frequency is detected in the check of the transmit VCO, first
check that the transmit-receive switch is functioning correctly.
1.

Resolder R542 in position (see Figure 9.10).

Enter the CCTM command 335 1 to switch on the supply to the
transmit VCO.

Measure the voltage at the second collector (pin 6) of Q506
(see Figure 9.10). The voltage should be:
pin 6 of Q506: 5.0 ± 0.3 V DC (after entry of CCTM 335 1)

Enter the CCTM command 335 0 to switch off the supply.

Again measure the voltage at the second collector of Q506.
pin 6 of Q506: 0 V DC (after entry of CCTM 335 0)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

If the voltages measured in Step 2 and Step 4 are correct, go to
Task 27. If they are not, the switching network is suspect; go to
Task 21.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

215

Task 27 —
Check Transmit
Buffer Amplifier

If no transmit frequency is detected but the switching network is not faulty,
check the transmit buffer amplifier. If the amplifier is not faulty, there might
be a fault in the transmit VCO that was not detected earlier.
1.

Remove the VCO BOT can.

Check the transmit buffer amplifier in receive mode: Enter the
CCTM command 335 0 to set the transmit-receive switch off.

Measure the voltage at pin 6 of Q5001 (see Figure 9.11).
pin 6 of Q5001: 0 V DC (receive mode)

Then check the transmit buffer amplifier in transmit mode: Enter the
CCTM command 335 1 to set the transmit-receive switch on.

Again measure the voltage at Q5001.
pin 6 of Q5001: 0.7 ± 0.1 V DC (transmit mode)

216

If the voltages are correct, the transmit VCO is suspect; go to Step 7.
If they are not, the transmit buffer amplifier is suspect; go to Step 9.

Remove the VCO TOP can.

Check the transmit VCO circuitry based on Q510
(see Figure 9.10). Conclude with Step 10.

Check the buffer circuitry based on Q5001 (see Figure 9.11).

10.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

9.7

VCO and Related Circuitry (VHF Radios)
If there is no fault with the power supplies, the PLL inputs and output, and
the loop filter, check the VCO and related circuitry. The procedures in this
section apply only to VHF radios; the VHF frequency bands are defined in
Table 9.5. There are six aspects:

Introduction

■

Task 28: check VCO

■

Task 29: repair PLL feedback

■

Task 30: repair VCO

■

Task 31: check transmit-receive switch

■

Task 32: repair switching network

■

Task 33: check buffer amplifier.

The measurement points for diagnosing faults in the VCO and related
circuitry are summarized in Figure 9.12.
Table 9.5

Minimum and maximum frequencies for the different VHF frequency bands

Frequency band

Frequency in MHz
Minimum

Maximum

55 ± 5

125 ± 5

84 ± 5

200 ± 5

137 ± 5

247 ± 5

167 ± 5

287 ± 5

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

217

218

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

DIGITAL
BOARD

SYN RX LO1

RECEIVER

VIA TO CHECK
DIG SYN TR SW

RX PORT

SYN TX LO

TRANSMITTER

TX PORT

R103

PIN 3 OF
Q5003

D5004

+5V DEC

BUFFER
AMPLIFIER
AND
COUPLER

PIN 2 OF
Q5001

VCO

FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER

PIN 2 OF
D5004

DIG SYN EN

DIG SYN TR SW

TR SWITCH

PIN 1 OF
D5004

PLL FEEDBACK

INVERTER

5 V SWITCH

FILTERING
OF SUPPLY
FOR VCO
CIRCUITRY

LOOP
FILTER
AND
SUMMER

JUNCTION OF
C541 AND R547

PLL

R544

3V
SUPPLY

DIGITAL

CLOCK

ANALOG

SIGNAL TYPES
RF

L506

+3V0 AN

Figure 9.12
Measurement points for the VCO and related circuitry in VHF radios

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 28 —
Check VCO

Check that the correct receive and transmit frequencies are synthesized.
The receive frequency is that of the VCO output SYN RX LO1 at the RX port
shown in Figure 9.13. The transmit frequency is that of the output SYN TX LO
at the TX port.
1.

Enter the CCTM command 335 1 to set the transmit-receive switch
on (transmit mode).

Using a frequency counter, proceed as follows to observe the transmit
frequency at the TX port before and after grounding the junction
between C541 and R547 (see Figure 9.13):
While holding the probe from the counter on the TX port, use a pair
of tweezers to momentarily ground the junction. The frequency
should change to:
TX port: maximum VCO frequency (see Table 9.5)

The loop filter will hold its output steady at 13.3 V. This should result
in a frequency equal to the maximum given in Table 9.5.
3.

If the maximum frequency measured in Step 2 is correct, go to
Step 4. If it is incorrect, go to Task 30, but if no frequency at all is
detected, go to Task 31.

Enter the CCTM command 335 0 to set the transmit-receive switch
off (receive mode).

The loop filter will hold its output steady at about 0V. This should
result in a frequency equal to the minimum given in Table 9.5.
6.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

If the minimum frequency measured in Step 5 is correct, go to
Task 29. If it is incorrect, go to Task 30. If no frequency is detected,
go to Task 31.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

219

Figure 9.13

Synthesizer circuitry under the SYN TOP can (VHF radios, top side)
Tx port

Junction of
C541 and R547

Rx port

220

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 29 —
Repair PLL feedback

If both the maximum and minimum VCO frequencies are correct, then the
PLL feedback is suspect.
1.

Resolder R542 in position (see Figure 9.13).

Remove the VCO BOT can.

Replace the components L510 (see Figure 9.14) and IC503
(see Figure 9.13).

Note
4.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

On A4 band radios there is no L510. Replace L5010 instead.
Confirm that the fault in the radio has been removed. If it has, go to
“Final Tasks” on page 157. If it has not, replace the board and go to
“Final Tasks” on page 157.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

221

Figure 9.14

Synthesizer circuitry under the VCO BOT can (VHF radios)

L510

Q5001

Q5000

D5004

Q5002
Q5003

A4 band
Q5003
Q5001

Q5000
D5004

Q5002

L5010

SYN TOP

222

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 30 —
Repair VCO

If either or both the maximum and minimum frequencies are incorrect, the
VCO circuitry is faulty.
1.

Remove the VCO BOT can.

Check the VCO. The circuitry is based on Q5000
(see Figure 9.14).

If a fault is found, repair it and go to Step 4. If no fault is found, go
to Step 7.

Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 of Task 28 to measure the maximum VCO
frequency.

Repeat Step 4 and Step 5 of Task 28 to measure the minimum VCO
frequency.

If the frequencies are now correct, resolder R542 in position
(see Figure 9.13), and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If they are
still not correct, go to Step 7.

Resolder R542 in position (see Figure 9.13). Replace the board and
go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

223

Task 31 —
Check TransmitReceive Switch

If no frequency is detected in the check of the VCO, first check that the
transmit-receive switch is functioning correctly.
1.

Resolder R542 in position (see Figure 9.13).

Remove the VCO BOT can.

Enter the CCTM command 335 0 to switch on the supply to the RX
port.

Measure the voltage at pin 2 of D5004 (see Figure 9.14). (Some RF
noise might be observed.) The voltage should be:
pin 2 of D5004: 5.0 ± 0.3 V DC (after entry of CCTM 335 0)

Enter the CCTM command 335 1 to switch off the supply.

Again measure the voltage at pin 2 of D5004.
pin 2 of D5004: 0 V DC (after entry of CCTM 335 1)

If the voltages measured in Step 4 and Step 6 are correct, go to
Step 8. If they are not, the switching network is suspect; go to
Task 32.

Enter the CCTM command 335 1 to switch on the supply to the TX
port.

Measure the voltage at pin 1 of D5004 (see Figure 9.14). (Some RF
noise might be observed.) The voltage should be:
pin 1 of D5004: 5.0 ± 0.3 V DC (after entry of CCTM 335 1)

10.

Enter the CCTM command 335 0 to switch off the supply.

11.

Again measure the voltage at pin 1 of D5004.
pin 1 of D5004: 2.1 ± 0.4 V DC (after entry of CCTM 335 0)

12.

224

If the voltages measured in Step 9 and Step 11 are correct, go to
Task 33. If they are not, the switching network is suspect; go to
Task 32.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 32 —
Repair Switching
Network

Enter the CCTM command 335 0 to set the transmit-receive switch
off (receive mode). Measure the voltage on the DIG SYN TR SW line at
pin 3 of Q5003 (see Figure 9.14).
pin 3 of Q5003: 5.0 ± 0.3 V DC (after entry of CCTM 335 0)

Enter the CCTM command 335 1 to set the transmit-receive switch
on (transmit mode). Again measure the voltage at Q5003.
pin 3 of Q5003: 0 V DC (after entry of CCTM 335 1)

If the voltages measured in Step 1 and Step 2 are correct, go to
Step 9. If they are not, remove R103 (see Figure 9.7) and go to
Step 4.

Enter the CCTM command 335 0 and measure the voltage at the via
between R103 and the digital board (see Figure 9.7).
via at R103: 3.3 ± 0.3 V DC (after entry of CCTM 335 0)

Enter the CCTM command 335 1 and again measure the voltage at
the via between R103 and the digital board.
via at R103: 0 V DC (after entry of CCTM 335 1)

Check and resolder R103 in position (see Figure 9.7), and check for
continuity between Q5003 (see Figure 9.14) and the digital board
via R103.

If no fault is found, go to Step 9. If a fault is found, repair the circuit,
confirm that the voltages are now correct, and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

Check the circuitry for the transmit-receive and 5V switches (based
on Q5002 and Q5003) (see Figure 9.14).

10.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

225

Task 33 —
Check Buffer
Amplifier

If no VCO frequency is detected but the switching network is not faulty,
check the buffer amplifier. If the amplifier is not faulty, there might be a fault
in the VCO that was not detected earlier.
1.

Enter the CCTM command 335 0 to set the transmit-receive switch
off.

Measure the voltage at pin 3 of D5004 (see Figure 9.14). (Some RF
noise might be observed.)
pin 3 of D5004: 4.2 ± 0.2 V DC

Measure the voltage at pin 1 of Q5001 (see Figure 9.14).
pin 1 of Q5001: 0.7 ± 0.2 V DC

226

If the voltages measured in Step 2 and Step 3 are not correct, go to
Step 5. If they are, check the VCO circuitry based on Q5000
(see Figure 9.14). Conclude with Step 6.

The buffer amplifier is suspect. Check the buffer circuitry (based on
Q5001) (see Figure 9.14).

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

9.8

Power Supply for FCL

Fault-Diagnosis
Stages

Indications of a fault in the FCL will have been revealed by the initial checks
in “Initial Checks” on page 180 and the PLL checks in “Phase-locked
Loop” on page 192. In the latter case a fault with the reference frequency
input from the FCL to the PLL will imply that the FCL is suspect. Fault
diagnosis of the FCL is divided into four stages:
■

check power supply

■

check VCXO and TCXO outputs

■

check signals at TP501 and TP502

■

check VCXO and CODEC circuitry.

The checking of the power supply is given in this section in Task 34 below.
The remaining three stages are covered in “VCXO and TCXO Outputs”
to “VCXO and CODEC Circuitry” respectively. The test and
measurement points for diagnosing faults in the FCL are summarized in
Figure 9.15.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

227

228

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

C536

SUPPLY

+3V0 AN

RECEIVER

SYN RX OSC

AGND

VCXO OUTPUT
AT C536

INTERFACE
CIRCUITRY

PLL

PSU

TP504

C510

TCXO OUTPUT

R541

VCXO OUTPUT
AT R522
(PIN 1 OF IC501)

TP500

LOOP
VOLTAGE

BUFFER AMPLIFIER

TCXO

VCXO

MIXER

FEEDBACK
SIGNAL

TP501

FCL CIRCUITRY

SYN DIG FREF

TP502
TP5

SYN CDC FCL

DIFFERENCE
FREQUENCY

CDC VCXO MOD

shaded
h d d area iis A
A4 b
band
d only
l

÷4

LPF

LO INPUT
AT R521
(PIN 4 OF IC501)

LPF

MODULATOR
BUFFER
AMPLIFIER

DIGITAL

CLOCK

ANALOG

SIGNAL TYPES

ADC

CODEC 2

DAC

DIGITAL
BOARD

Figure 9.15
Test and measurement points the FCL circuitry

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 34 —
Power Supply

If the FCL is suspect, first check that the 3V power supply is not the cause
of the fault.
1.

If not already done, remove the board from the chassis and place the
radio in CCTM.

Measure the supply +3V0 AN at the via shown in Figure 9.16. The via
is adjacent to the CDC TOP can.
via adjacent to CDC TOP can: 3.0 ± 0.3 V DC

Figure 9.16

If the voltage is correct, go to “VCXO and TCXO Outputs” on
page 230. If it is not, the 3V regulator IC603 is suspect; go to Task 3
of “Power Supply Fault Finding” on page 168.

TCXO circuitry under the CDC TOP can
VIA FOR MEASURING 3 V DC SUPPLY

IF TOP CAN

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

229

9.9

VCXO and TCXO Outputs

Task 35 —
VCXO Output

If the 3V power supply is not faulty, check the VCXO output as follows:
1.

Use an oscilloscope probe to check the VCXO output at the
following position:
C536 — probe the via next to C536 (see Figure 9.17). The signal
should be:
VCXO output at C536: sine wave of 1.1 ± 0.2 Vpp on 1.4 ± 0.2 V DC

A4 band: IC509, pin 4 — probe the via next to R5044
(see Figure 9.17). The signal should be:
VCXO output at pin 4 of IC509: square wave of 1.5 ± 0.2 Vpp

230

If the signal is correct, go to Task 36. If it is not, go to Step 3.

The VCXO circuitry under the VCXO BOT can is faulty. Remove the
VCXO BOT can.

Locate and repair the fault in the VCXO (Q501, Q503, XL501 and
associated components) (see Figure 9.18).

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Task 36. If the repair
failed, replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 9.17

FCL circuitry under and adjacent the FCL TOP can

Position R527
for Tasks 38
and 39

Via for
measuring
VCXO output

A4 band

R527

Position R527
here for Tasks 38
and 39

R520

FCL _TOP

IC506

Q504

R510

L501

IC509
Via for
measuring
VCXO output

R5044

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

231

Task 36 —
TCXO Output

If the VCXO output is correct, check the TCXO output as follows:
1.

Use the oscilloscope probe to check the TCXO output at the TP504
test point (see Figure 9.17). The signal is SYN RX OSC and should be:
TCXO output at TP504 test point: clipped sine wave of 1.0 ± 0.2 Vpp

Figure 9.18

If the signal is correct, go to “Signals at TP501 and TP502” on
page 233. If it is not, go to Step 3.

The TCXO circuitry under the CDC TOP can is faulty. Remove the
CDC TOP can.

Locate and repair the fault in the TCXO (XL500 and associated
components) (see Figure 9.16).

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Signals at TP501 and
TP502” on page 233. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to
“Final Tasks” on page 157.

FCL circuitry under the VCXO BOT can

SYN BOT CAN

CAN FOR
DIGITAL
BOARD

CDC BOT CAN

232

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

9.10

Signals at TP501 and TP502

Introduction

If the VCXO and TCXO outputs are correct, the next stage is to check the
signals at the TP501 and TP502 test points. The procedure is divided into
three tasks:
■

Task 37: check signal at TP502

■

Task 38: check signal at TP501 and ground TP501 if loop is oscillating

■

Task 39: check signal at TP502 with TP501 grounded.

These checks will reveal any faults in the mixer and LPF circuitry, and any
additional fault in the VCXO circuitry.
Task 37 —
TP502 Test Point

Check the signal at the TP502 test point to determine if there is a fault in the
mixer or LPF (low-pass filter) circuitry:
1.

Use the oscilloscope probe to check the difference frequency at the
TP502 test point (see Figure 9.17). The signal is SYN CDC FCL and
should be:
TP502 test point: sine wave of 1.1 ± 0.2 Vpp on 1.5 ± 0.1 V DC

A4 band: The signal should be:
TP502 test point: triangular wave of 1.5 ± 0.2 Vpp on 1.5 ± 0.1 V DC

If the signal is correct, go to Task 38. If it is not, go to Step 3.

The mixer or LPF circuitry under the FCL TOP can is faulty. Remove
the FCL TOP can.

Locate the fault in the mixer (IC501 and associated components) or
LPF circuitry (IC502 pins 5 to 7, and associated components)
(see Figure 9.17).
A4 band: Check the mixer (IC501, IC506 and associated
components) or LPF circuitry (IC502 pins 5 to 7, and associated
components) (see Figure 9.17). Also check L501 and associated
components and buffer Q504, IC509 and associated components.

Repair the circuitry. Note that the TCXO input to the mixer
(see Figure 9.17) should be:
TCXO input at R521 (pin 4 of IC501):
TCXO input: square wave with frequency of 13 MHz
and amplitude of 3.0 ± 0.2 Vpp

A4 band: TCXO input at R520 (pin 4 of IC506):
TCXO input: square wave with frequency of 10.4MHz
and amplitude of 3.0 ± 0.2 Vpp

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

233

Also, the VCXO input to the mixer (see Figure 9.17), although
noisy and difficult to measure, should be:
VCXO input at R522 (pin 1 of IC501):
VCXO input: sine wave of 20 ± 10 mVpp

A4 band: VCXO input at R510 (pin 1 of IC506):
VCXO input: sine wave of 20 ± 10 mVpp

Task 38 —
TP501 Test Point

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Task 38. If the repair
failed, replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

If the signal at the TP502 test point is correct, check the signal at the TP501
test point:
1.

With the oscilloscope probe at the TP501 test point
(see Figure 9.17), check the DAC output CDC VCXO MOD. If a
triangular wave is present, go to Step 2. Otherwise go to “VCXO and
CODEC Circuitry” on page 237.
A fault is causing the loop to oscillate. If not already done, remove the
can.

FCL TOP

Check the waveform at the TP500 test point (see Figure 9.17).
The waveform should be an amplified and inverted version of the
waveform at the TP501 test point.
A4 band: TP500 is not marked, but the waveform can be checked at
the via adjacent C518.

If the waveform is correct, go to Step 5. If it is not, there is a fault in
the modulator buffer amplifier (IC502 pins 1 to 3, and associated
components) (see Figure 9.17). Rectify the fault and return to Step 1.

Connect the TP501 test point to ground by resoldering R527 in the
position shown in Figure 9.17. The VCXO loop voltage is forced high.

Use the oscilloscope probe to check the VCXO output at C536 —
probe the via next to C536 (see Figure 9.17). The signal should be:
VCXO output at C536: sine wave with frequency of 13.017 MHz and
amplitude of 1.1 ± 0.2 Vpp on 1.4 ± 0.2 V DC

234

If the signal is correct, go to Task 39. If it is not, go to Step 8.

The VCXO circuitry is faulty. If not already done, remove the VCXO
BOT can.

Locate and repair the fault in the VCXO circuitry (Q501, Q503,
XL501 and associated components) (see Figure 9.18).

10.

Confirm the removal of the fault, and go to Task 39. If the repair
failed, replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 39 —
TP502 Test Point
(TP501 Grounded)

If the loop was oscillating, Task 38 will have revealed any fault in the
VCXO circuitry. If there was no fault, or if the circuit was repaired, a check
at the TP502 test point is now required. This will show if there are any
additional faults in the mixer or LPF circuitry.
1.

Use the oscilloscope probe to check the difference frequency at the
TP502 test point (see Figure 9.17). The signal is SYN CDC FCL and
should be:
TP502 test point: sine wave with frequency of at least 15kHz and
amplitude of 1.1 ± 0.2 Vpp on 1.5 ± 0.1 V DC

A4 band: the frequency should be:
TP502 test point: triangular wave with frequency of at least 15kHz and
amplitude of 1.5 ± 0.2 Vpp on 1.5 ± 0.1 V DC

If the signal is correct, go to Step 6. If it is not, go to Step 3.

The mixer circuitry (IC501 and associated components) or the LPF
circuitry (IC502 pins 5 to 7, and associated components) under the
FCL TOP can is faulty (see Figure 9.17). Locate the fault.

A4 band: TCXO input at R520 (pin 4 of IC506):
TCXO input: square wave with frequency of 10.4MHz
and amplitude of 3.0 ± 0.2 Vpp

Also, the VCXO input to the mixer (see Figure 9.17), although
noisy and difficult to measure, should be:
VCXO input at R522 (pin 1 of IC501):
VCXO input: sine wave of 20 ± 10 mVpp

A4 band: VCXO input at R510 (pin 1 of IC506):
VCXO input: sine wave of 20 ± 10 mVpp

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Confirm the removal of the fault, and go to Step 6. If the repair
failed, resolder R527 in its original position as shown in Figure 9.17,
replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

235

Resolder R527 in its original position as shown in Figure 9.17.

Replace all cans.

Use the oscilloscope probe to check the difference frequency at the
test point (see Figure 9.17). The signal is SYN CDC FCL and
should be:

TP502

TP502 test point: sine wave of 1.1 ± 0.2 Vpp on 1.5 ± 0.1 V DC

236

If the signal is correct, the fault has been removed; go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157. If the signal is not correct, the repair failed;
replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

9.11

VCXO and CODEC Circuitry

Introduction

If the signals at the TP501 and TP502 test points are correct, two CCTM
checks will reveal any remaining faults. These possible faults concern the
VCXO tank circuit and the CODEC 2 circuitry. There are therefore three
aspects, which are covered in Task 40 to Task 42:
■

Task 40: CCTM checks

■

Task 41: VCXO tank circuit

■

Task 42: CODEC 2 circuitry.

Following any repairs of the VCXO or CODEC 2 circuitry, Task 40 will
need to be repeated to confirm the removal of the fault.
Task 40 —
CCTM Checks

If the signals at the TP501 and TP502 test points are correct, or any related
faults were rectified, perform the following CCTM checks:
1.

Enter the CCTM command 393 1 1900. Measure the voltage level at
the TP501 test point (see Figure 9.17):
TP501 test point: 1.3 ± 0.2 V DC (after CCTM 393 1 1900)

Enter the CCTM command 72 and note the lock status.
lock status=xyz (x=RF PLL; y=FCL; z=LO2) (0=not in lock; 1=in lock)

Enter the CCTM command 393 1 –1900. Again measure the voltage
level at the TP501 test point:
TP501 test point: 2.1 ± 0.2 V DC (after CCTM 393 1 –1900)

Enter the CCTM command 72 and note the lock status.

If the above voltage levels are not correct or if the FCL is out of lock
in either or both of the above cases, investigate the VCXO tank
circuit; go to Task 41.
If the voltage level remains fixed at about 1.5V DC, investigate the
CODEC 2 circuitry; go to Task 42.
If the voltage levels are all correct (following earlier repairs), the fault
has been removed; go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Task 41 —
VCXO Tank Circuit

If the CCTM checks indicate that the VCXO tank circuit is faulty, repair
the circuit as follows:
1.

If not already done, remove the VCXO BOT can.

Locate and repair the fault in the VCXO tank circuit (Q501, D501,
D502, XL501 and associated components) (see Figure 9.18).

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Step 4. If the repair failed,
replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

237

Task 42 —
CODEC 2 Circuitry

Replace all cans.

Repeat Task 40 to confirm the removal of the fault. If the repair
failed, replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

If the CCTM checks indicate a fault in the CODEC 2 circuitry or with the
digital signals to and from the circuitry, rectify the fault as follows:
1.

Most of the CODEC 2 circuitry is situated under the CDC TOP can.
If not already done, remove the CDC TOP can.

Check the following digital signals at IC205 (see Figure 9.16):
■

pin 10 : DIG CDC2 LRCK

■

pin 12 : DIG CDC2 SCLK

■

pin 8 : CDC2 DIG SDTO

■

pin 9 : DIG CDC2 SDTI.

These signals to and from the digital board should all be active:
digital signals: 3.3 ± 0.3 V

If the digital signals are correct, the CODEC 2 circuitry is suspect;
go to Step 6. If they are not, go to Step 4.

If any or all digital signals are missing, check the connections between
IC205 and the digital board (see Figure 9.16).

If there are faults such as open circuits in the connections, repair the
circuitry and repeat Task 40.
If the connections are not faulty, then the digital board is faulty.
Replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

238

The CODEC 2 circuitry comprises IC205 and associated components
under the CDC TOP can (see Figure 9.16) as well as R246 under the
CDC BOT can (see Figure 7.3 on page 168). Locate the fault.

Repair the circuitry. Note that, if the circuitry is functioning properly,
probing the TP501 test point (see Figure 9.17) during power-up
will show a five-step staircase signal followed by a random nine-step
staircase signal — this is the expected power-up auto-calibration
sequence.

Confirm the removal of the fault, and go to Step 9. If the repair
failed, replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Replace all cans.

10.

Repeat Task 40 to confirm the removal of the fault. If the repair
failed, replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Receiver Fault Finding
This section covers the diagnosis of faults in the receiver. The fault-diagnosis
procedures consist of 18 tasks grouped into the following sections.
The symptoms of the fault in the receiver circuitry determine which
sections are relevant:

Fault Conditions

■

“Faulty Receiver Sensitivity”

■

“Excessive Loss of Sensitivity”

■

“Moderate or Slight Loss of Sensitivity”

■

“Incorrect RSSI Readings”

■

“Faulty Radio Mute”

■

“High Receiver Distortion”

If the receiver sensitivity is low, begin with “Faulty Receiver Sensitivity” on
page 240 to determine the extent of the loss in sensitivity.
CCTM Commands

Table 10.1

The CCTM commands required are listed in Table 10.1. Full details of the
commands are given in “Computer-Controlled Test Mode (CCTM)” on
page 118.

CCTM commands required for the diagnosis of faults in the receiver

Command

Description

Read lock status of RF PLL, FCL and LO2 — displays xyz (0=not in lock, 1=in lock)

101 x y 0

Set transmit frequency (x in hertz) and receive frequency (y in hertz) to specified values

376

Read tuning voltage for front-end circuitry — displays voltage x in millivolts

378

Read signal power at output of channel filter — displays power x (square of amplitude

Frequency Bands

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Receiver Fault Finding

239

10.1

Faulty Receiver Sensitivity

Introduction

This section covers the determination of the extent of the receiver’s loss of
sensitivity. Depending on the nature of the fault, a reduction in receiver
sensitivity of 1dB is often due to a reduction in receiver gain of many
decibels. It is therefore easier to measure gain loss rather than sensitivity loss.
Consequently, if the receiver sensitivity is too low, first check the receiver
gain. The procedure is given in Task 1 below.

Task 1 —
Determine Extent
of Sensitivity Loss

Determine the receiver gain as follows. The corresponding loss of sensitivity
can then be deduced. Depending on the extent of the loss, continue with
“Excessive Loss of Sensitivity” on page 242 or “Moderate or Slight Loss of
Sensitivity” on page 246 to rectify the fault.
1.

Input an RF signal (not necessarily modulated) of –90 dBm (or –84
dBm with a trigger-base radio) at the RF connector.

Enter the CCTM command 378 to measure the receiver output level.

Note the value x returned for the receiver output level. Depending
on the frequency band in which the radio operates, the value should
be:
receiver output level x: normally between 500 000 and 6000 000

Note that a change in the input level of 10dBm should result in a tenfold change in x.
4.

If necessary, measure the RF voltage at the QN test point
(see Figure 10.1). (There is access through a hole in the IF TOP can.)
For comparison, the voltages corresponding to the above values of x
are:
x = 500 000: 12mVpp
x = 6000 000: 120mVpp

With an unmodulated RF signal the frequency should be 64.000kHz,
provided that the LO1, FCL and LO2 are locked and on the correct
frequency.
5.

240

Receiver Fault Finding

Given the value of x, go to the relevant section as follows:
■

x < 1500, go to “Excessive Loss of Sensitivity” on page 242
(sensitivity is very low)

■

x < 500 000, go to “Moderate or Slight Loss of Sensitivity” on
page 246 (sensitivity is low)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 10.1

Receiver circuitry under the IF TOP can (top side)

VHF

Q404

Measurement point

Q404

Measurement point

IC400

UHF

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Receiver Fault Finding

241

10.2

Excessive Loss of Sensitivity

Introduction

This section covers the case where the receiver has suffered an excessive loss
of sensitivity. As measured in Task 1, the receiver gain will be less than 1500,
which implies a sensitivity that is more than 40dBm too low. The faultdiagnosis procedure for this case consists of five tasks:
■

Task 2: check power supplies

■

Task 3: check logic signal

■

Task 4: check lock status

■

Task 5: check biasing of IF amplifier

■

Task 6: check matching circuitry

If the fault does not lie with the power supplies, it is probably in the control,
LO, IF1 or IF2 circuitry.
Task 2 —
Check Power
Supplies

First check the two power supplies 3V0 AN and 3V0 RX for the receiver
circuitry.
1.

Remove the board from the chassis.

Check for 3.0V DC (3V0 AN) at the TP601 test point near the LO2 BOT
can (see Figure 10.2).
TP601 test point: 3.0V DC

If the voltage is correct, go to Step 4. If it is not, the 3V regulator
IC603 is suspect; go to Task 3 of “Power Supply Fault Finding” on
page 168.

Remove the LO2 BOT can.

Check for 3.0V DC (3V0 RX) around the collector feed to Q402 or
Q403 of LO2 (see Figure 10.2).
Q402 or Q403 collector: 3.0V DC

Alternative measurement points are the collector feed to Q401 of the
RF LNA under the FE TOP can (see Figure 10.3) or Q404 of the IF
amplifier under the IF TOP can (see Figure 10.1).
6.

242

Receiver Fault Finding

If the voltage is correct, go to Task 3. If it is not, the 3V RX switch
(based on Q604 and Q605) in the PSU module is suspect; go to
Task 3 of “Power Supply Fault Finding” on page 168.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 10.2

Receiver circuitry under the LO2 BOT can (UHF shown)

Figure 10.3

Receiver circuitry under the FE TOP can (top side)
Q401

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Measurement point

Receiver Fault Finding

243

Task 3 —
Check Logic Signal

If there is no fault with the power supplies, check the logic signal DIG RX EN
that is input from the digital board.
1.

Check the logic signal DIG RX EN at pin 8 of IC403 (see Figure 10.2).
The signal is active high. The required status is active.
pin 8 of IC403: about 3.0V (active)

An alternative measurement point to the above is pin 24 of IC400
under the IF TOP can (see Figure 10.1).

Task 4 —
Check Lock Status

If DIG RX EN is active, go to Task 4. If it is not, go to Step 3.

Check the signal continuity from the digital board to the receiver.
Repair any fault and go to Step 4. If the digital board itself appears to
be faulty, replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Recalibrate the receiver using the calibration application.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, go to Task 7.

If the logic signal from the digital board is active, as required, check the lock
status of the radio.
1.

Enter the CCTM command 72 to determine the lock status.
The status should be normal:
lock status: 111 (LO1, FCL, LO2 all in lock)

244

If the lock status is normal, go to Task 5. If the LO1 is not in lock, go
to “Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding” on page 179. If the FCL is
not in lock, go to “Power Supply for FCL” on page 227. If the LO2
is not in lock, go to Step 3.

Check the components around IC403, Q402 and Q403
(see Figure 10.2). Repair any fault.

Recalibrate the receiver using the calibration application.

Confirm the removal of the fault, and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed go to Task 7.

Receiver Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 5 —
Check Biasing
of IF Amplifier

If the lock status is normal, check the biasing of the IF amplifier.
1.

Remove the IF TOP can.

Check all components around Q404 of the IF amplifier
(see Figure 10.1).

Check the 3V supply voltage at L419; use the measurement point
shown in Figure 10.1.

Also check the amplifier bias conditions. First measure Vc between
the collector of Q404 and ground (see Figure 10.1).
Vc: 2.0 ± 0.2V

Secondly, check Ic. To do so, unsolder and raise one terminal of L419
(tombstone position) (see Figure 10.1), connect a multimeter
between this terminal and the pad for the terminal, and measure the
current.
Ic: 1.8 ± 0.5mA

Task 6 —
Check Matching
Circuitry

If the checks in Step 2 to Step 5 reveal no fault, go to Task 6. If there
is a fault, repair it and go to Step 7.

Recalibrate the receiver using the calibration application.

Confirm the removal of the fault, and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed go to Task 7.

Having excluded the IF amplifier, check the matching circuitry for the
crystal filters.
1.

Check all remaining components between T401 and IC400 — these
form the matching circuitry for the crystal filters XF400 and XF401
(see Figure 10.1).

If the above check reveals no fault, go to Step 3. If there is a fault,
repair it and go to Step 6.

Remove the PIN TOP and LPF TOP cans.

Make a visual check of the components in the receive path of the PIN
switch and LPF circuits.

If the visual check reveals an obvious fault, repair it and go to Step 6.
If there is no obvious fault, go to Task 7.

Recalibrate the receiver using the calibration application.

Confirm the removal of the fault, and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed go to Task 7.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Receiver Fault Finding

245

10.3

Moderate or Slight Loss of Sensitivity

Introduction

This section covers the case where the receiver has suffered a moderate or
slight loss of sensitivity. As measured in Task 1, the receiver gain will be less
than 500 000, but not as low as 1500. With a gain less than 40 000, the loss
of sensitivity will be moderate — about 15dBm too low; otherwise it will
be slight — just a few decibels too low. There are three tasks:
■

Task 7: front-end calibration and tuning voltages

■

Task 8: moderately low receiver sensitivity

■

Task 9: slightly low receiver sensitivity

The fault-diagnosis procedures of Task 8 and Task 9 are similar; although
the differences are minor they are important.
Task 7 —
Front-end
Calibration
and Tuning Voltages

If the loss of sensitivity is moderate or slight, the fault is probably in the
front-end tuning circuitry.
1.

Using the calibration application, check the calibration of the frontend tuning circuitry: Open the “Raw Data” page and click the
“Receiver” tab.

Record the values listed in the “Rx FE Tune BPF Settings” field — these
are the DAC values of the FE (front-end) tuning voltages for the five
frequencies FE TUNE0 to FE TUNE4.
(FE TUNE0 is the lowest frequency and FE TUNE4 the highest frequency in the radio’s frequency band; the values are given in
Table 10.2.)

For each of the frequencies FE TUNE0 to FE TUNE4 in turn, carry out
the following procedure: Enter the CCTM command 101 a a 0,
where a is the frequency in hertz.
Enter the CCTM command 376 and record the value returned — this
is the front-end tuning voltage in millivolts.

246

Compare the values measured in Step 2 and Step 3 with the nominal
DAC and voltage values listed in Table 10.2.

If the DAC and voltage values are correct, go to Step 8. If they are
not, go to Step 6.

Recalibrate the receiver using the calibration application, and check
the DAC and voltage values again.

If the DAC and voltage values are now correct, the fault has been
rectified; go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If they are not, go to
Step 8.

Go to Task 8 if the receiver output level x measured in Task 1 was less
than 40 000; otherwise go to Task 9.

Receiver Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 8 —
Moderately Low
Sensitivity

Following the initial investigation in Task 7, check the circuitry as follows
when the sensitivity loss is moderate.
1.

Remove the FE TOP can and, if not already done, the IF TOP can.

Check the soldering of all the components of the front-end tuning
circuitry from C400 to T401 (see Figure 10.1 and Figure 10.3).

Check the 3V supply voltage at L404; use the measurement point
shown in Figure 10.3.

Also check the LNA bias conditions. First measure Vc between the
collector of Q401 and ground (see Figure 10.3).
Vc: 2.7 ± 0.1V

Secondly, check Ic. To do so, unsolder and raise one terminal of L404
(tombstone position) (see Figure 10.3), connect a multimeter
between this terminal and the pad for the terminal, and measure the
current.
Ic: 10 ± 1mA

If the checks in Step 2 to Step 5 reveal no fault, go to Step 7. If there
is a fault, repair it and go to Step 8.

Check the signal level at the output of LO1 and continue the fault
diagnosis as in “Power Supply for FCL” on page 227.

Recalibrate the receiver using the calibration application.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, go to Task 9.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Receiver Fault Finding

247

Table 10.2

Front-end tuning voltages and corresponding DAC values
Tuning voltages at five different frequencies

Frequency band
FE TUNE0

FE TUNE1

FE TUNE2

FE TUNE3

FE TUNE4

A4 band
Frequency (MHz)
DAC value
Voltage (V)

65.9
0 to 40
0 to 0.47

72.1
89 ± 15
1.05 ± 0.18

77.1
134 ± 15
1.58 ± 0.18

82.1
173 ± 15
2.04 ± 0.18

88.1
218 ± 15
2.56 ± 0.18

B1 band
Frequency (MHz)
DAC value
Voltage (V)

135.9
37 ± 20
0.44 ± 0.24

145.1
88 ± 15
1.04 ± 0.18

155.1
136 ± 15
1.60 ± 0.18

164.1
174 ± 15
2.04 ± 0.18

174.1
210 ± 15
2.57 ± 0.18

C0 band
Frequency (MHz)
DAC value
Voltage (V)

173.9
41 ± 20
0.48 ± 0.24

187.1
104 ± 15
1.22 ± 0.18

200.1
149 ± 15
1.75 ± 0.18

213.1
187 ± 15
2.20 ± 0.18

225.1
220 ± 15
2.59 ± 0.18

D1 band
Frequency (MHz)
DAC value
Voltage (V)

215.9
42 ± 20
0.5 ± 0.2

228.1
103 ± 15
1.2 ± 0.18

241.1
151 ± 15
1.7 ± 0.18

253.1
187 ± 15
2.2 ± 0.18

266.1
224 ± 10
2.6 ± 0.12

H5 band
Frequency (MHz)
DAC value
Voltage (V)

399.9
0 to 36
0 to 0.43

417.1
94 ± 15
1.11 ± 0.18

435.1
106 ± 15
1.25 ± 0.18

452.1
156 ± 15
1.84 ± 0.18

470.1
191 ± 15
2.25 ± 0.18

H6 band
Frequency (MHz)
DAC value
Voltage (V)

449.9
41 ± 20
0.48 ± 0.24

470.1
91 ± 15
1.07 ± 0.18

490.1
134 ± 15
1.58 ± 0.18

510.1
176 ± 15
2.07 ± 0.18

530.1
210 ± 15
2.47 ± 0.18

248

Receiver Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 9 —
Slightly Low
Sensitivity

Following the initial investigation in Task 7, check the circuitry as follows
when the sensitivity loss is slight.
1.

Remove the FE TOP can and, if not already done, the IF TOP can.

Check the soldering of all the components of the front-end tuning
circuitry from C400 to T401 (see Figure 10.1 and Figure 10.3).

Check the IF-amplifier bias conditions as in Step 4 and Step 5 of
Task 5.

Check the LNA bias conditions as in Step 4 and Step 5 of Task 8.

If the checks of Step 2 to Step 4 reveal no fault, go to Step 6. If there
is a fault, repair it and go to Step 7.

Check the PIN switch and LPF as in Task 31 to Task 33 of
“Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)” on page 259 or
“Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)” on page 323.

Recalibrate the receiver using the calibration application.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Receiver Fault Finding

249

10.4

Incorrect RSSI Readings

Introduction

If the RSSI readings are incorrect, the receiver calibration is suspect.
There are four tasks, which cover the four types of settings concerned:
■

Task 10: AGC voltage calibration

■

Task 11: FE tune BPF settings

■

Task 12: RSSI delta gain

■

Task 13: AGC delta gain

If the receiver is properly calibrated but the fault persists, then the receiver
sensitivity is suspect.
Task 10 —
AGC Voltage
Calibration

250

The first settings to check concern the AGC voltage calibration.
1.

In the calibration application open the “Raw Data” page and click the
“Receiver” tab.

Note the settings listed in the “AGC Voltage Cal Pts” field. The nominal
settings should be as listed in Table 10.3. The AGC values depend
on which demod IC is fitted (IC400). The IC is either an RF9667 or
an RF2667.

If the settings are correct, go to Task 11. If they are not, go to Step 4.

Recalibrate the receiver and check the settings again.

If the settings are now correct, go to Step 6. If they are not, go to
Task 1 and check the receiver sensitivity.

Check if the RSSI fault has been removed. If it has, go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157. If it has not, go to Task 11.

Receiver Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Table 10.3

Nominal AGC data

Parameter

AGC voltage (mV)
A4 band:
RF2667

AGC0
AGC1
AGC2

1810 ± 40
1985 ± 40
2135 ± 50
B1 band:
RF2667

AGC0
AGC1
AGC2

1790 ± 40
1960 ± 40
2110 ± 50
C0 band:
RF2667

AGC0
AGC1
AGC2

Not used
D1 band:
RF2667

AGC0
AGC1
AGC2

1855 ± 40
2050 ± 40
2220 ± 50
H5 band:
RF2667

AGC0
AGC1
AGC2

1860 ± 40
2040 ± 40
2200 ± 50
H6 band:
RF2667

AGC0
AGC1
AGC2

1870 ± 40
2050 ± 40
2220 ± 50

RF9667
1710 ± 40
1845 ± 40
1965 ± 50
RF9667
1750 ± 40
1900 ± 40
2040 ± 50
RF9667
1700 ± 40
1840 ± 40
1960 ± 50
RF9667
1750 ± 40
1900 ± 40
2050 ± 50
RF9667
1725 ± 40
1865 ± 40
2000 ± 50
RF9667
1825 ± 40
1970 ± 40
2150 ± 50

Receiver input power (dBm)
Standard radio
AGC0
AGC1
AGC2

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

–50
–60
–68

Trigger-base radio
–44
–54
–62

Receiver Fault Finding

251

Task 11 —
FE Tune BPF Settings

Task 12 —
RSSI Delta Gain

Task 13 —
AGC Delta Gain

252

If the AGC voltage calibration is correct, check the FE tune BPF settings.
1.

Note the settings listed in the “FE Tune BPF Settings” field.
The nominal settings should be as listed in Table 10.2.

If the settings are correct, go to Task 12. If they are not, go to Step 3.

Recalibrate the receiver and check the settings again.

If the settings are now correct, go to Step 5. If they are not, go to
Task 1 of “Faulty Receiver Sensitivity” on page 240 and check the
receiver sensitivity.

Check if the RSSI fault has been removed. If it has, go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157. If it has not, go to Task 12.

If the FE tune BPF settings are also correct, check the RSSI delta gain
values.
1.

Note the values listed in the “Rx Delta Gain Values” field. The values
should be between 0dBm and about –3dBm.

If the values are as expected, go to Task 13. If they are not, go to
Step 3.

Recalibrate the receiver and check the values again.

If the values are now correct, go to Step 5. If they are not, go to
Task 1 and check the receiver sensitivity.

Check if the RSSI fault has been removed. If it has, go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157. If it has not, go to Task 13.

If the RSSI delta gain values are also correct, check the AGC delta gain
values.
1.

Note the values listed in the “AGC Delta Gain Values” field. The values
should run gradually from 0dBm to about 35dBm.

If the values are as expected, go to Step 6. If they are not, go to
Step 3.

Recalibrate the receiver and check the values again.

If the values are now correct, go to Step 5. If they are not, go to
Task 1 and check the receiver sensitivity.

Check if the RSSI fault has been removed. If it has, go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157. If it has not, go to Step 6.

In this case all the RSSI calibration settings are correct, but there is
still an RSSI fault. Go to Task 1 and check the receiver sensitivity.

Receiver Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

10.5

Faulty Radio Mute

Introduction

If the radio mute is faulty, the calibration settings are suspect. There are three
tasks:
■

Task 14: determine type of muting selected

■

Task 15: noise muting selected

■

Task 16: RSSI muting selected

The programming application is required for Task 14, and the calibration
application for Task 15 and Task 16.
Task 14 —
Determine Type of
Muting Selected

First use the programming application to determine the type of muting
selected.
1.

In the programming application click the “Basic Settings” page under
the “Networks” heading.

Click the “Basic Network Settings” tab.

Check the setting in the “Squelch Detect Type” field. Ensure that the
setting is what the Customer expects.

If the setting is “Noise Level”, implying that noise muting is selected,
go to Task 15. If the setting is “Signal Strength”, implying that RSSI
muting is selected, go to Task 16.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Receiver Fault Finding

253

Task 15 —
Noise Muting
Selected

Table 10.4

With noise muting selected, check the noise mute settings:
1.

In the calibration application open the “Deviation/Squelch” page and
click the “Squelch and Signaling Thresholds” tab.

Ensure that, under the “Squelch Thresholds” label, the settings in the
“Country”, “City” and “Hard” fields are what the Customer expects.

Open the “Raw Data” page and click the “Mute” tab.

Compare the values in the “Mute Noise Readings” field with the
required minimum and maximum values listed in Table 10.4.

If the mute noise readings are correct, go to Task 1 and check the
receiver sensitivity. If they are not, go to Step 6.

Recalibrate the mute and then check if the mute fault has been
removed.

If the fault has been removed, go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If it
has not, go to Task 1 and check the receiver sensitivity.

Mute data
Mute noise readings

Channel spacing

SINAD (dB)
Minimum noise value

Narrow (12.5 kHz)

Medium (20 kHz)

Wide (25 kHz)

254

Maximum noise value

1900

2300

250

500

3700

4200

1000

1500

5000

7300

2200

3700

Receiver Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 16 —
RSSI Muting
Selected

Figure 10.4

With RSSI muting selected, check the RSSI mute settings.
1.

In the calibration application open the “Deviation/Squelch” page and
click the “Squelch and Signaling Thresholds” tab.

Check that the values in the “Opening Pt” fields and the “Hysteresis”
fields under the “Squelch Thresholds” label are what the Customer
expects.

If the calibration values are as expected, go to Task 10 and check the
RSSI calibration. If they are not, go to Step 4.

Adjust the values in the “Opening Pt” and “Hysteresis” fields. Program
the radio with the new values.

Check if the mute fault has been removed. If it has, go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157. If it has not, go to Task 10 and check the RSSI
calibration.

TCXO circuitry under the CDC TOP can (top side)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Receiver Fault Finding

255

10.6

High Receiver Distortion

Introduction

If there is high receiver distortion, the TCXO is suspect, or alternatively, the
matching circuitry for the crystal filters XF400 and XF401. There are two
tasks:
■

Task 17: TCXO calibration and repair of TCXO

■

Task 18: second IF and repair of matching circuitry

Recalibrating the TCXO might often be sufficient to rectify the fault.
Task 17 —
TCXO Calibration
and Repair of TCXO

First check the TCXO calibration and, if necessary, repair the TCXO.
1.

Use the calibration application to check the TCXO calibration:
Open the “Raw Data” page and click the “Volt Ref/TCXO/VCO/VCXO”
tab.

Note the values listed in the “Tx TCXO” and “Rx TCXO” fields of the
“TCXO” group box. The values should be:
Tx TCXO and Rx TCXO values: between +20Hz and –20Hz

256

If the calibration values are correct, go to Step 4. If they are not,
recalibrate the TCXO and go to Step 8.

Remove the CDC TOP can.

Check the components of the TCXO, which is based on XL500
(see Figure 10.4). Repair any fault.

Recalibrate the TCXO and check the TCXO calibration values
again as in Step 1 and Step 2.

If the calibration values are now correct, go to Step 8. If they are not,
go to Task 18.

Check if the distortion fault has been removed. If it has, go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157. If it has not, go to Task 18.

Receiver Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 18 —
Second IF and
Repair of Matching
Circuitry

If the TCXO is not faulty, check the second IF and, if necessary, repair the
matching circuitry.
1.

Input a large unmodulated RF input signal exceeding –90dBm at the
RF connector.

Use a needle probe to measure the frequency of the signal at the QN
test point — access is through the hole in the IF TOP can
(see Figure 10.1). The frequency is the second IF and should be:
frequency at QN test point: 64.000kHz

If the second IF is correct, go to Step 6. If it is not, go to Step 4.

Recalibrate the TCXO.

Check if the distortion fault has been removed. If it has, go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157. If it has not, go to Step 6.

Remove the IF TOP can.

Check the components between T401 and IC400 — these form the
matching circuitry for the crystal filters XF400 and XF401
(see Figure 10.1).

Repair any fault, confirm the removal of the fault, and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157. If the repair failed or no fault could be found,
replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Receiver Fault Finding

257

258

Receiver Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

Introduction

This section covers the diagnosis of faults in the 40W/50W transmitter
circuitry. The main indication of a fault in the transmitter is a reduction in
range. This implies that the power output is wrong or too low. Another type
of fault is manifested when the radio always transmits at full power, even if
set otherwise. Regardless of the fault, the lock status should be normal.

Fault-Diagnosis
Tasks

The procedure for diagnosing transmitter faults is divided into tasks, which
are grouped into the following sections:
■

“Power Supplies”

■

“Transmitter RF Power”

■

“Biasing of PA Driver and PAs”

■

“RF Signal Path”.

Before beginning the fault diagnosis with “Power Supplies”, note the
following information regarding CCTM commands, frequency bands, can
removal and replacement, and transmit tests.
CCTM Commands

Table 11.1
Command

The CCTM commands required in this section are listed in Table 11.1.
Full details of the commands are given in “Computer-Controlled Test
Mode (CCTM)” on page 118.

CCTM commands required for the diagnosis of faults in the transmitter
Description

Set radio in receive mode

Set radio in transmit mode

Read temperature near PAs — displays temperature x in degrees celsius and voltage y

101 x y 0

Set transmit frequency (x in hertz) and receive frequency (y in hertz) to specified values

114 x

Set DAC value x (in range 0 to 1023) of transmit power

304

Read clamp current at gate of PA driver — displays DAC value x (in range 0 to 255)

304 x

Set DAC value x (in range 0 to 255) of clamp current at gate of PA driver

318

Read forward-power level — displays corresponding voltage x in millivolts

319

Read reverse-power level — displays corresponding voltage x in millivolts

326 x

Set transmitter power level x (0=off, 1=very low, 2=low, 3=medium, 4=high, 5=maximum)

331

Read bias voltage for first PA — displays DAC value x (in range 0 to 255)

331 x

Set DAC value x (in range 0 to 255) of bias voltage for first PA

332

Read bias voltage for second PA — displays DAC value x (in range 0 to 255)

332 x

Set DAC value x (in range 0 to 255) of bias voltage for second PA

334 x

Set synthesizer on (x=1) or off (x=0) via DIG SYN EN line

335 x

Set transmit-receive switch on (x=1) or off (x=0) via DIG SYN TR SW line

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

259

Frequency Bands

Where test procedures or figures differ according to the frequency band of
the radio, the frequency band is given in brackets. The frequency band may
be referred to as either ‘VHF’ (very high frequency) or ‘UHF’ (ultra high
frequency) or identified by the frequency sub-band, such as ‘B1’ or ‘H7’.
For example:
RF output power: > 60W (VHF), > 52W (UHF)
current: < 15A (VHF), < 12A (UHF)

A definition of frequency bands is given in “Defining Frequency Bands” on
page 126.
Some fault-diagnosis tasks require programming the radio with the lowest,
centre or highest frequency in the radio’s frequency band. The relevant
frequencies for the different bands are listed in Table 11.2.
Table 11.2

Lowest, centre and highest frequencies in MHz
Lowest
frequency

Band
B1
H5
H7

Emergency
Frequencies

136
400
450

Centre
frequency
155
435
485

Highest
frequency
174
470
520

The following frequency ranges are reserved worldwide for use as maritime
emergency frequencies or by distress beacons:
■

B1 band: 156.8MHz ± 375kHz

■

H5 band: 406.0 to 406.1MHz

Do not program the radio with any frequency in the above ranges.
Can Removal

There are five cans shielding the bulk of the transmitter circuitry:
■

PAD TOP

■

PAF TOP

■

DIRC TOP

■

PIN TOP

■

LPF TOP.

To remove any can, first remove the board from the chassis. In the case of
the PAD TOP and PAF TOP cans, first detach the heat-transfer block from the
main board. Secure the block again after removing the cans. Follow the
procedures given in “Disassembly and Reassembly” on page 129.
Can Replacement

260

Replace all cans that have been removed only after repairing the board.
An exception is the B1 band, however, where the LPF TOP can must be in
place if the transmitter is to operate correctly.

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmit Tests

The following actions need to be taken when carrying out transmit tests:
■

secure the board

■

ensure the proper antenna load

■

limit the duration of transmit tests

■

protect against accidental transmissions

■

avoid thermal and RF burns.

These points are discussed in more detail in the following sections.
Secure the Board

Before conducting any transmit tests, ensure that the board is adequately
secured in the chassis. This is essential if overheating of the radio is to be
avoided. (As mentioned earlier, the heat-transfer block must already be
secured to the main board of the assembly.) It is good practice to secure the
assembly by at least the two external screws and one of the internal screws.
The screws are labelled I and E in Figure 5.3 on page 133. There is no
need, however, to secure the lid of the radio body.

Ensure Proper
Antenna Load

The radio has been designed to operate with a 50Ω termination impedance,
but will tolerate a wide range of antenna loading conditions. Nevertheless,
care should be exercised. Normally the RF connector on the board will be
connected to the RF communications test set as shown in Figure 4.2 on
page 112. But for those tests where this connection is not necessary, a 50Ω
load may be used instead. Do not operate the transmitter without such a load
or without a connection to the test set. Failure to do so may result in damage
to the power output stage of the transmitter.

Limit Duration of
Transmit Tests

After setting the frequency and power level (if necessary), enter the CCTM
command 33 to perform a transmit test. This command places the radio in
transmit mode. After completing the measurement or check required,
immediately enter the CCTM command 32. This command returns the
radio to the receive mode. Restricting the duration of transmit tests in this
way will further limit the danger of overheating. The reason for this
precaution is that the transmit timers do not function in the CCTM mode.

Protect Against
Accidental
Transmissions

Under certain circumstances the microprocessor can key on the transmitter.
Ensure that all instruments are protected at all times from such accidental
transmissions.

Avoid Thermal
and RF Burns

Avoid thermal burns. Do not touch the cooling fins or underside of the
radio body when the transmitter is or has been operating. Avoid RF burns.
Do not touch the antenna or the RF signal path on the circuit board while
the transmitter is operating.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

261

11.1

Power Supplies
First check that a power supply is not the cause of the fault. There are two
power supplies and a switch circuit for the transmitter:

Introduction

■

Task 1: 13.8V DC supply from power connector (+13V8 BATT)

■

Task 2: switch circuit for 13.8V DC supply

■

Task 3: 9V DC supply from 9V regulator in PSU module (+9V0 TX).

The measurement and test points for diagnosing faults in the power supplies
are summarized in Figure 11.1.
Figure 11.1

Measurement and test points for diagnosing faults involving the power supplies for
the transmitter

+9V0 TX

TRANSMITTER
+13.8 V DC
+13.8 V DC SUPPLY
SUPPLY TO PAs
TO PA DRIVER

POWER
SUPPLY

9V0 TX
TEST POINT

+13V8 BATT
SIGNAL TYPES
RF
SWITCH

ANALOG

AGND
L310

L306
GND
TEST POINT

OTHER
TRANSMITTER
CIRCUITRY

262

PAs

DRIVER

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

EXCITER

INTERFACE
CIRCUITRY

FREQUENCY
SYNTHESIZER

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 1 —
13.8V Power Supply

First check the power supply from the power connector.
1.

Obtain a needle probe to use for measurements of the power supply
at the PA driver and PAs. If none is available, remove the PAF TOP and
PAD TOP cans.

Set the DC power supply to 13.8V, with a current limit of 10A.

Program the radio with the highest frequency in the radio’s frequency
band: Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the frequency
in hertz. The required values for the different frequency bands are
given in Table 11.2.

Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the radio to maximum
power.

Attempt to place the radio in transmit mode. Enter the CCTM
command 33.

If the radio enters the transmit mode, continue with Step 7. If instead
a C03 error is displayed in response to the command 33, go to Task 7
in “Transmitter RF Power” on page 269.

Measure the voltage at the point on L310 shown in Figure 11.2
(VHF) or Figure 11.3 (UHF). This is the supply at the common
drain of Q309 and Q310, and should be:
common drain of Q309 and Q310: more than 13V DC

Also measure the voltage at the point on L306 shown in
Figure 11.3. This is the supply at the drain of Q306, and should be:
drain of Q306: more than 13V DC

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

10.

If the power supply measured in Step 7 and Step 8 is not correct, go
to Task 2. If it is, go to Task 3.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

263

POINT 1
ON R350

Point for measuring the power supply to the PAs and PA driver (VHF)

Q309

MEASUREMENT POINT ON L310

Q310

Q306

POINT 2 ON R 350

R350

Q308

R339

MEASUREMENT
POINT ON R339

Figure 11.2

L310
264

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

POINT 1
ON R350

Point for measuring the power supply to the PAs and PA driver (UHF)

Q309

L310

MEASUREMENT POINT ON L310

Q310

Q306

POINT 2 ON R 350

R350

Q308

R339

MEASUREMENT
POINT ON R339

Figure 11.3

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

265

Task 2 —
Check Switch Circuit

If the power supply to the drains of the PAs and PA driver is not correct, the
switch circuit is suspect. Check the circuit as follows:
1.

Measure the voltage at the point 1 on R350 shown in Figure 11.2
(VHF) or Figure 11.3 (UHF). The voltage should be:
point 1 on R350: 13.8V DC

If the voltage measured in Step 1 is correct, go to Step 3. If it is not,
check for continuity between R350 and the power connector. Repair
any fault and conclude with Step 8.

Measure the voltage at R339 as shown in Figure 11.2 (VHF) or
Figure 11.3 (UHF). The voltage should be:
R339: 9V DC

If the voltage measured in Step 3 is correct, go to Step 5. If it is not,
go to Task 3 and check the 9V power supply.

Measure the voltage at the point 2 on R350 shown in Figure 11.2
(VHF) or Figure 11.3 (UHF). The voltage should be:
point 2 on R350: < 5V DC

266

If the voltage measured in Step 5 is correct, go to Step 7. If it is not,
replace Q308 — see Figure 11.2 (VHF) or Figure 11.3 (UHF) —
and conclude with Step 8.

Remove the heat-transfer block from the main board. Replace Q311
(situated on the bottom-side of the main board next to the power
connector). Replace the heat-transfer block, and conclude with
Step 8.

Repeat Task 1 to confirm the removal of the fault, and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157. If the repair failed or the fault could not be
found, replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 3 —
9V Power Supply

If the supply from the power connector is correct, check the 9V DC supply.
1.

Enter the CCTM command 326 1 to set the transmitter power level
very low.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Measure the supply voltage between the 9V0 TX test point and the
GND test point (see Figure 11.4).
supply 9V0 TX: 9.0 ± 0.5V DC

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the supply measured in Step 3 is correct, go to Task 4 in
“Transmitter RF Power” on page 269. If it is not, the 9V regulator
IC601 and the associated switching circuitry Q603 are suspect; go to
Task 3 of “Power Supply Fault Finding” on page 168.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

267

Test points for checking the 9V supply, the forward and reverse RF power, and the
inhibiting of the transmitter

268

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

FWD PWR
TEST POINT

REV PWR
TEST POINT

9V0 TX
TEST POINT

TX INH
TEST POINT

DIRC TOP CAN

VHF

IF TOP CAN

GND
TEST POINT

FWD PWR
TEST POINT

REV PWR
TEST POINT

9V0 TX
TEST POINT

TX INH
TEST POINT

D TX INH
TEST POINT

DIRC TOP CAN

UHF

IF TOP CAN

VCO
TOP
CAN

Figure 11.4

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

11.2

Transmitter RF Power

Introduction

If there is no fault with the power supplies, check the transmitter RF power
and correct any fault. The procedure is covered in the following eight tasks:
■

Task 4: check forward and reverse powers

■

Task 5: check RF output power

■

Task 6: power unchanged regardless of setting

■

Task 7: check for inhibiting of transmitter

■

Task 8: check temperature sensor

■

Task 9: power and current are skewed

■

Task 10: repair output matching circuitry

■

Task 11: power and current are low

The measurement points for diagnosing faults concerning the transmitter
RF power are summarized in Figure 11.5. Data required for the first task
(checking the forward and reverse powers) is supplied in Table 11.3.
Table 11.3

Voltages in millivolts corresponding to nominal forward and reverse powers

Frequency band

Forward power (318 command)

Reverse power (319 command)

2600 to 3400

< 500

3200 to 3900

< 700

3300 to 4000

< 900

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

269

270

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

LEAD TO
TEST SET

RF CONNECTOR

LPF

DIGITAL

CLOCK

ANALOG

SIGNAL TYPES

REV PWR
TEST POINT

RECEIVER

PIN SWITCH

BUFFER
AMPLIFIER

FWD PWR
TEST POINT

DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER

50 TEST LEAD
TO TEST SET

DIGITAL
BOARD

POWER
CONTROL

SYN LOCK

DIG SYN EN

DIG TX INH

D TX INH
TEST POINT

PAs
DRIVER

AND

SHAPING
FILTER

SHAPER
AND
LEVEL
SHIFTER

BIAS
LIMITER

EXCITER

OR GATE

TX REV PWR

TX FWD PWR

PWR CTL

CDC TX

FIN BIAS2

CDC TX

FIN BIAS1

CDC TX

DRV BIAS

CDC TX

SYN TX LO

TX INH
TEST POINT

CODEC
AND AUDIO
CIRCUITRY

FREQUENCY
SYNTHESIZER

Figure 11.5
Measurement and test points for diagnosing faults concerning the transmitter
RF power

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 4 —
Check Forward and
Reverse Powers

First check the forward and reverse powers for an indication of which part
of the circuitry is suspect.
1.

Enter the CCTM command 326 4 to set the transmitter power level
high.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Enter the CCTM command 318 to check the forward power.
The value returned is the voltage in millivolts corresponding to the
power level, and should be as shown in Table 11.3.

Confirm the above result by checking the level at the FWD PWR test
point (see Figure 11.4) using an oscilloscope.

Enter the CCTM command 319 to check the reverse power.
The value returned is the voltage in millivolts corresponding to the
power level, and should be as shown in Table 11.3.

Confirm the above result by checking the level at the REV PWR test
point (see Figure 11.4) using an oscilloscope.
If the oscilloscope momentarily indicates a very high reverse power,
then the most likely scenario is that the antenna VSWR threshold has
been exceeded and the PA has shut down to very low power.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the values obtained in Step 3 and Step 5 are both correct, and there
is no indication of a momentary high reverse power, go to Task 5.
If one or both are incorrect, go to Step 9.

Check the connection from the RF connector on the radio to the test
set.

10.

If there is no fault, go to Step 11. If there is, rectify the fault and
repeat the above measurements.

11.

If the reverse power is momentarily too high, the directional coupler,
PIN switch or LPF is suspect; go to Task 31. Otherwise go to Task 5.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

271

Task 5 —
Check RF Output
Power

If the power supplies are correct, check the RF output power of the
transmitter.
1.

Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level
to the maximum value.

If not already done, program the radio with the highest frequency in
the radio’s frequency band: Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0,
where x is the frequency in hertz. The required values for the
different frequency bands are given in Table 11.2.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Note the RF output power measured by the test set, and note the
current reading on the DC power supply.
RF output power: > 60W (VHF), > 52W (UHF)
current: < 15A (VHF), < 12A (UHF)

Table 11.4

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

Program the radio with the centre frequency in the radio’s frequency
band: Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the frequency
in hertz. The required values for the different frequency bands are
given in Table 11.2.

Repeat Step 3 to Step 5.

Program the radio with the lowest frequency in the radio’s frequency
band: Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the frequency
in hertz. The required values for the different frequency bands are
given in Table 11.2.

Repeat Step 3 to Step 5.

10.

Depending on the results of the above measurements, proceed to the
task indicated in Table 11.4. Note that the power and current are
considered to be skewed if they are low at one part of the frequency
band and high elsewhere.

Tasks to be performed according to the results of the power and current measurements
of Task 5

Power

Current

Task

Correct

Task 6 — Power unchanged regardless of setting

Correct

Wrong

Task 31 — Check power at directional coupler

Skewed

Task 9 — Power and current are skewed

Low (> 0.1W)

Low (> 0.5A)

Task 11 — Power and current are low

None at RF connector (< 0.1W)

Low (> 0.5A)

Task 31 — Check power at directional coupler

None at RF connector (< 0.1W)

None (< 0.5A)

Task 7 — Check for inhibiting of transmitter

272

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 6 —
Power Unchanged
Regardless of
Setting

If all the power and current values measured in Task 5 are correct, it is likely
that the power remains unchanged regardless of the power setting.
1.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Enter the following CCTM commands in turn and measure the RF
output power in each case:
■

326 4

■

326 3

■

326 2

■

326 1

The above measurements should confirm that the power remains
unchanged at all settings. Carry out Task 12 and then Task 19.

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

273

Task 7 —
Check for Inhibiting
of Transmitter

If the transmitter is drawing no current or the wrong current, check
whether it is being inhibited. This check is also required if a CO3 error
occurs in Task 1.
1.

If not already done, enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio
in transmit mode.

Check the logic signal at the TX INH test point (see Figure 11.4).
The signal should be:
TX INH test point: about 0V (inactive)

If the signal is inactive as required, go to Step 4. If it is active — about
1.1V — the transmitter is being inhibited; go to Step 5.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode,
and go to Task 12 in “Biasing of PA Driver and PAs” on page 280.

Check the logic signal at the D TX INH test point; see Figure 11.14
on page 298 (VHF) or Figure 11.4 (UHF). The signal should be:
D TX INH test point: about 0V (inactive)

274

If the signal is inactive as required, go to Step 8. If it is active — about
3.2V — the temperature sensor is suspect; go to Step 7.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode,
and go to Task 8.

The lock status is possibly no longer normal. Enter the CCTM
command 72 and check the lock status.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

10.

The normal lock status is 110. If it is not, proceed to the relevant
section. If it is, go to Step 11.

11.

Check for short circuits on the DIG TX INH line from the D TX INH test
point.

12.

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 8 —
Check Temperature
Sensor

If the transmitter is being inhibited and the logic signal at the D TX INH test
point is active, a fault in the temperature sensor may be the cause.
1.

Enter the CCTM command 47 to check the temperature reading.

Of the two numbers returned, the first is the temperature in degrees
celsius and should be about 25°C. If it is, go to Task 12 in “Biasing of
PA Driver and PAs” on page 280. If it is not, go to Step 3.

If not already done, remove the PAF TOP can.

Check D301 and the surrounding components — see Figure 11.6
(UHF shown).

If there is no fault, go to “CODEC and Audio Fault Finding” on
page 381. If a fault is found, repair it, confirm the removal of the
fault, and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If the repair failed, replace
the board, and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

275

Figure 11.6

PA circuitry under the PAF TOP can and part of the directional coupler under the
DIRC TOP can (UHF shown)

Q310

Q309

D301

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

C350

C349

C348

MOUNTING POINT FOR
TEST CAPACITOR

TEST PAD

276

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

H5, H7 BANDS

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 9 —
Power and Current
Are Skewed

If the RF output power and the supply current are skewed, the output
matching is suspect.
1.

Remove the DIRC TOP can.

Remove the coupling capacitors C348, C349 and C350 —
see Figure 11.6 (UHF shown).

Solder one terminal of a 680 pF (VHF) or 82pF (UHF) test capacitor
to the PCB at the point shown in Figure 11.6. Mount the capacitor
vertically. Use a test capacitor of the type GRM111, DLI C17,
Murata 1210, or the equivalent.

Solder a 50Ω test lead to the PCB. Solder the outer sheath to the test
pad shown in Figure 11.6, and solder the central wire to the other
terminal of the test capacitor.

Connect the test lead to the test set.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Note the RF output power measured by the test set, and note the
current reading on the DC power supply.
RF output power: > 70W (VHF), > 60W (UHF)
current: < 15A (VHF), < 12A (UHF)

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

10.

Program the radio with the centre frequency in the band: Enter the
CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the frequency in hertz.

11.

Repeat Step 7 to Step 9.

12.

Program the radio with the lowest frequency in the band: Enter the
CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the frequency in hertz.

13.

Repeat Step 7 to Step 9.

14.

If the power and current are still skewed, go to Task 10. If the power
and current are correct, remove the test lead and test capacitor,
resolder the coupling capacitors in position, and go to Task 33 — the
PIN switch and LPF require checking.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

277

Task 10 —
Repair Output
Matching Circuitry

If the checks in Task 9 show that the power and current are still skewed,
there is a fault in the output matching circuitry.
1.

If not already done, remove the PAF TOP can.

Check for faulty, shorted or misplaced components in the circuit
between the test capacitor and the common drain of Q309 and Q310
(see Figure 11.6). Repair any fault.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Note the RF output power measured by the test set, and note the
current reading on the DC power supply.
RF output power: > 70W (VHF), > 60W (UHF)
current: < 15A (VHF), < 12A (UHF)

278

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

Program the radio with the centre frequency in the band: Enter the
CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the frequency in hertz.

Repeat Step 4 to Step 6.

Program the radio with the lowest frequency in the band: Enter the
CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the frequency in hertz.

10.

Repeat Step 4 to Step 6.

11.

Remove the test lead and test capacitor, and resolder the coupling
capacitors C348, C349 and C350 in position (see Figure 11.6).

12.

If the power and current are now correct at all three frequencies, the
fault has been rectified; go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If they are
not, go to Task 26 in “RF Signal Path” on page 303.

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 11 —
Power and Current
Are Low

Table 11.5

If the RF output power and the supply current are uniformly low at all
frequencies, one of the PAs is suspect or the input to the PAs is reduced.
Check each PA in turn:
1.

For the first PA (Q310), enter the CCTM command 331 to check the
DAC value of final bias 1 (CDC TX FIN BIAS 1). Record the value x
returned.

Note the current reading on the DC power supply.

Enter the CCTM command 331 1 to turn off final bias 1.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Note the RF output power measured at the test set. This should be
as shown in Table 11.5.

If the RF power is correct, go to Step 7 to repeat the check with the
second PA. If it is not, enter the CCTM command 32 to place the
radio in receive mode, and carry out Task 12 and then Task 13.

For the second PA (Q309), enter the CCTM command 332 to check
the DAC value of final bias 2 (CDC TX FIN BIAS 2). Record the value y
returned.

Note the current reading on the DC power supply.

Enter the CCTM command 332 1 to turn off final bias 2.

10.

With the radio still in transmit mode, note the RF output power
measured at the test set. This should be as shown in Table 11.5.

11.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

12.

If the RF power measured in Step 10 is correct, go to “RF Signal
Path” on page 302. If it is not, carry out Task 12 and then Task 16.

RF output power of individual RF power amplifiers at different frequencies
Frequency within band

Frequency band
Lowest frequency

Centre frequency

Highest frequency

38 ± 5W

48 ± 5W

33 ± 5W

16 ± 5W

17 ± 5W

21 ± 5W

25 ± 5W

32 ± 5W

40 ± 5W

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

279

11.3

Biasing of PA Driver and PAs

Introduction

The measurements of the transmitter RF output power in “Transmitter RF
Power” may indicate a need to check the biasing of the two PAs and the PA
driver. The procedure is covered in this section. There are thirteen tasks
grouped as follows:
■

Task 12: prepare to check biasing

■

Task 13 to Task 15: check biasing of first PA

■

Task 16 to Task 18: check biasing of second PA

■

Task 19 and Task 20: check biasing of PA driver

■

Task 21 to Task 24: repair circuitry

The test and measurement points for diagnosing faults in the biasing of the
PAs and PA driver are summarized in Figure 11.7.
Task 12 —
Prepare to
Check Biasing

280

If the transmitter is not being inhibited, check the biasing of the two PAs
and the PA driver. First make the following preparations:
1.

Set the current limit on the DC power supply to 3A.

Enter the CCTM command 331 to check the DAC value of final bias
1 (CDC TX FIN BIAS 1) at maximum power. Record the value x returned.

Enter the CCTM command 332 to check the DAC value of final bias
2 (CDC TX FIN BIAS 2) at maximum power. Record the value y returned.

Enter the CCTM command 304 to check the DAC value of the
clamp current at the driver gate. Record the value z returned.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Switch off all biases by entering the following CCTM commands in
sequence:
■

331 1

■

332 1

■

304 1

■

114 1023

■

334 0

■

335 0

Note the current reading on the DC power supply. This will be less
than 500mA.

With the radio still in transmit mode, check the biasing of the PAs and
PA driver, beginning with Task 13.

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

PIN 3 OF
IC303

ANALOG

SIGNAL TYPES

PIN
SWITCH
AND LPF

REV PWR

BUFFER
AMPLIFIER

FWD PWR

BUFFER
AMPLIFIER

PIN 5 OF
IC303

DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER

R396

R347

PIN 9 OF
IC303

PIN 10 OF
IC303

POWER
CONTROL

R336

PIN 8 OF
IC303

GATES OF
Q309, Q310

PAs

PIN 1 OF
IC301

PIN 8 OF
IC301

PIN 14 OF
IC301

SET PWR
TEST POINT

DRIVER

GATE OF
Q306

SHAPING
FILTER

SHAPER
AND
LEVEL
SHIFTER

BIAS
LIMITER

EXCITER

TX REV PWR

TX FWD PWR

CDC TX PWR CTL

PWR
TEST POINT

CDC TX FIN BIAS2

FIN2
TEST POINT

CDC TX FIN BIAS1

FIN1
TEST POINT

CDC TX DRV BIAS

DRV
TEST POINT

CODEC
AND AUDIO
CIRCUITRY

FREQUENCY
SYNTHESIZER

Figure 11.7
Measurement and test points for diagnosing faults in the biasing of the PAs and PA
driver

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

281

Task 13 —
Check Biasing
of First PA

Check the biasing of the first PA (Q310).
Important

Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 3A.
And, when entering the CCTM command 331 x, do not
specify a value x higher than that recorded in Task 12. Failure to do so may result in the destruction of the PAs.

Use a multimeter to measure the voltage at pin 14 of IC301
(see Figure 11.8 and Figure 11.9). The voltage should be:
pin 14 of IC301: < 100mV (initially)

Note the current reading on the DC power supply. As mentioned in
Step 7 of Task 12, this will be less than 500mA.

Enter the CCTM command 331 x (where x was recorded in Task 12).

Check that the voltage changes to:
pin 14 of IC301: 2 to 5V (after entry of CCTM 331 x)

Table 11.6

Also note the current reading. This should increase by an amount
approximately equal to the offset given in Table 11.6.

If the voltage and current are both correct, go to Step 7. If the voltage
is correct but not the current, go to Task 14. If neither the current
nor the voltage is correct, go to Task 15.

Enter the CCTM command 331 1 to switch off final bias 1, and go to
Task 16.

Gate biases for the PAs and PA driver at high power
Offset currents in mA

Frequency band
First PA

Second PA

PA driver

1690

150

1800

400

1800

600

282

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 11.8

Test points and components of the shaping filter (VHF)

DIRC TOP CAN

IC301

R334

DRV TEST POINT

SET PWR TEST POINT

R333

REV PWR TEST POINT

R340

C322

C324

R342

IC303

R347

R336

FIN2 TEST POINT

FIN1 TEST POINT

FWD PWR TEST POINT

B1 BAND

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

PWR TEST POINT

IF TOP CAN

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

283

Figure 11.9

Test points and components of the shaping filter (UHF)

DIRC TOP CAN

VCO TOP CAN

IC301

R334

SET PWR TEST POINT

R333

C322

C324

R342

IC303

R347

R336
FIN1 TEST POINT

FIN2 TEST POINT
REV PWR TEST POINT

DRV TEST POINT

FWD PWR TEST POINT

H5, H7 BANDS

284

PWR TEST POINT

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

IF TOP CAN

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 14 —
Shaper and
Level Shifter

If the voltage measured in Task 13 is correct but not the current, either the
first PA or the shaper and level shifter for the PA is suspect.
Important

If the PAF TOP can has already been removed, go to Step 5 If it has not,
go to Step 2.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

Remove the PAF TOP can.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Enter the CCTM command 331 x (where x was recorded in Task 12).

Check that the voltage at the gate of Q310 is (see Figure 11.10):
gate of Q310: 2 to 5V

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage measured above is correct, Q310 is faulty; replace the
board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If it is not correct, go to
Step 9.

Check the circuitry between pin 14 of IC301 and the gate of Q310
(see Figure 11.10). If a fault is found, repair it, confirm the removal
of the fault, and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If the repair failed
or Q310 itself is faulty, replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

285

Figure 11.10 PA circuitry under the PAF TOP can (UHF shown)

Q310

Q309
CIRCUITRY BETWEEN
IC301 AND PAs

H5, H7 BANDS

VIA TO PIN 14 OF IC301

VIA TO PIN 8 OF IC301

286

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

VIA TO GATE OF Q309

VIA TO GATE OF Q310

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 15 —
Shaping Filter for
Power Control

If neither the voltage nor the current measured in Task 13 is correct, then
the shaping filter for the power-control circuitry or the CODEC and audio
circuitry is suspect.
Important

Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 3A.
And, when entering the CCTM command 331 x, do not
specify a value x higher than that recorded in Task 12.
Failure to do so may result in the destruction of the PAs.

Use the multimeter to measure the voltage at the FIN1 test point
(see Figure 11.8 and Figure 11.9). The voltage should be:
FIN1 test point: 18 ± 2mV (initially)

Enter the CCTM command 331 x (where x was recorded in Task 12).

Check that the voltage changes to:
FIN1 test point: 1.1 to 2.7V (after entry of CCTM 331 x)

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage measured above is correct, go to Step 6. If it is not, go
to “CODEC and Audio Fault Finding” on page 381.

Check IC301 and the surrounding shaping-filter circuitry
(see Figure 11.8 and Figure 11.9). If a fault is found, repair it,
confirm the removal of the fault, and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

287

Task 16 —
Check Biasing
of Second PA

If the biasing of the first PA is correct, check that of the second PA (Q309).
Important

Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 3A.
And, when entering the CCTM command 332 y, do not
specify a value y higher than that recorded in Task 12.
Failure to do so may result in the destruction of the PAs.

Use the multimeter to measure the voltage at pin 8 of IC301
(see Figure 11.8 and Figure 11.9). The voltage should be:
pin 8 of IC301: < 100mV (initially)

Note the current reading on the DC power supply. As mentioned in
Step 7 of Task 12, the current will be less than 500mA.

Enter the CCTM command 332 y (where y was recorded in Task 12).

Check that the voltage changes to:
pin 8 of IC301: 2 to 5V (after entry of CCTM 332 y)

288

Also note the current reading. This should increase by an amount
approximately equal to the offset given in Table 11.6.

If the voltage and current are both correct, go to Step 7. If the voltage
is correct but not the current, go to Task 17. If neither the current
nor the voltage is correct, go to Task 18.

Enter the CCTM command 332 1 to switch off final bias 2, and go to
Task 19.

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 17 —
Shaper and
Level Shifter

If the voltage measured in Task 16 is correct but not the current, either the
second PA or the shaper and level shifter for the PA is suspect.
Important

If the PAF TOP can has already been removed, go to Step 5. If it has
not, go to Step 2.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

Remove the PAF TOP can.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Enter the CCTM command 332 y (where y was recorded in Task 12).

Check that the voltage at the gate of Q309 is (see Figure 11.10):
gate of Q309: 2 to 5V

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage is correct, Q309 is faulty; replace the board and go to
“Final Tasks” on page 157. If it is not, go to Step 9.

Check the circuitry between pin 8 of IC301 and the gate of Q309
(see Figure 11.6). If a fault is found, repair it, confirm the removal
of the fault, and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If the repair failed
or Q309 itself is faulty, replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

289

Task 18 —
Shaping Filter for
Power Control

If neither the voltage nor the current measured in Task 16 is correct, then
the shaping filter for the power-control circuitry or the CODEC and audio
circuitry is suspect.
Important

Use the multimeter to measure the voltage at the FIN2 test point
(see Figure 11.8 and Figure 11.9). The voltage should be:
FIN2 test point: 18 ± 2V (initially)

Enter the CCTM command 332 y (where y was recorded in Task 12).

Check that the voltage changes to:
FIN2 test point: 1.1 to 2.7V (after entry of CCTM 332 y)

290

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage measured above is correct, go to Step 6. If it is not, go
to “CODEC and Audio Fault Finding” on page 381.

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 19 —
Biasing of PA Driver
—
DRV test point

If there is no fault in the biasing of the PAs, investigate the biasing of the PA
driver (Q306). First check the DRV test point.
Important

Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 3A.
And, when entering the CCTM command 304 z, do not
specify a value z higher than that recorded in Task 12.
Failure to do so may result in the destruction of the
PA driver.

Note the current reading on the DC power supply. As mentioned in
Step 7 of Task 12, the current will be less than 500mA.

Enter the CCTM command 304 z (where z was recorded in Task 12)
to switch on the clamp current.

Note the current reading on the DC power supply.

Compare the above current readings. The current should increase by
an amount approximately equal to the offset given in Table 11.6.
If it does, go to Task 21. If it does not, go to Step 5.

Check as follows that the voltage from the DAC is changing:
First enter the CCTM command 304 1 to switch off the bias.

Measure the voltage at the DRV test point (CDC TX DRV BIAS)
(see Figure 11.8 and Figure 11.9). The voltage should be:
DRV test point: < 0.1V (after entry of CCTM 304 1)

Enter the CCTM command 304 z (where z was recorded in Task 12)
to change the DAC value of the clamp current.

The voltage should increase to:
DRV test point: 0.8 to 2.5V (after entry of CCTM 304 z)

If the voltage does change, go to Task 20. If it does not, go to
Step 10.

10.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode,
and go to “CODEC and Audio Fault Finding” on page 381.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

291

Task 20 —
Biasing of
PA Driver—
SET PWR test point

If the voltage at the DRV test point is correct, check that at the SET PWR test
point.
1.

Check the voltage at the SET PWR test point (see Figure 11.8 and
Figure 11.9):
SET PWR test point: 2 to 5V

If the voltage is correct, go to Step 3. If it is not, go to Task 21.

If the PAD TOP can has already been removed, go to Step 7. If it has
not, go to Step 4.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

Remove the PAD TOP can.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Check the voltage on the gate of Q306 (see Figure 11.11 and
Figure 11.12):
gate of Q306: 2 to 5V

292

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage is correct, replace Q306; confirm the removal of the
fault and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If it is not, go to Task 23.

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 11.11 PA driver circuitry under the PAD TOP can (VHF)

PAD TOP
COMPONENTS C310,
R324 AND R327

R327
C310
R324

Q306

Q3504

GATE OF Q306

B1 BAND

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

293

Figure 11.12 PA driver circuitry under the PAD TOP can (UHF)

COMPONENTS C310,
R324 AND R327

PAD TOP

R324
C310

Q306

GATE OF Q306

H5, H7 BANDS

294

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 21 —
Check Power
Control

Check the power-control circuitry if the clamp current for the PA driver is
correct or if the voltage at the SET PWR test point is incorrect.
Important

Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 3A.
And, when entering the CCTM command 304 z, do not
specify a value z higher than that recorded in Task 12. Failure to do so may result in the destruction of the PA driver.

Enter the CCTM command 304 z (where z was recorded in Task 12).

Note the current reading on the DC power supply.

Enter the CCTM command 114 0 to switch off the power.

Note the current reading on the DC power supply.

Compare the above current readings. The current should decrease by
an amount approximately equal to the offset given in Table 11.6.
If it does, go to Task 26 in “RF Signal Path” on page 303. If it does
not, go to Step 6.

Check that the voltage from the DAC is changing. Measure the
voltage at the PWR test point (CDC TX PWR CTL) (see Figure 11.8 and
Figure 11.9).

Enter the CCTM command 114 1023. The voltage should increase
to:
PWR test point: 2.4 ± 0.1V

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage at the PWR test point increases as required, go to
Task 22. If it does not, go to “CODEC and Audio Fault Finding” on
page 381.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

295

Figure 11.13 Circuitry under the DIRC TOP can
VHF

296

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

UHF

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 22 —
Directional Coupler
and Buffer
Amplifiers

Table 11.7

Following the checks in Task 19 to Task 21, locate the fault and repair the
circuitry as described in the remaining tasks of the section. In this task any
faults in the directional coupler or the buffer amplifiers will be located.
1.

Cycle the power.

Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter to maximum
power. Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit
mode.

Measure the voltage at pin 9 of IC303 in the power-control circuit
(see Figure 11.8 and Figure 11.9).

The above voltage should be as given in Table 11.7. If it is, go to
Task 24. If it is not, go to Step 5.

Check the voltage at the FWD PWR test point (pin 5 of IC303) and at
the REV PWR test point (pin 3 of IC303) (see Figure 11.8 and
Figure 11.9). Note that the probe impedance may affect these
measurements.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

The voltages measured in Step 5 should be as given in Table 11.7.
If they are, go to Step 10. If the FWD PWR voltage is incorrect, go to
Step 8. If the REV PWR voltage is incorrect, go to Step 9.

Voltages at IC303 at maximum power (70 W for VHF, and 60W for UHF)
Voltage (V)

Frequency band

Frequency (MHz)
Pin 9

Pin 3 (REV PWR)

Pin 5 (FWD PWR)

136
155
174

2.6 ± 0.5
2.9 ± 0.5
3.2 ± 0.5

0.4 ± 0.3
0.4 ± 0.3
0.5 ± 0.3

3.1 ± 0.5
3.4 ± 0.5
3.9 ± 0.5

400
435
470

2.8 ± 0.5
3.0 ± 0.5
3.3 ± 0.5

0.6 ± 0.4
0.6 ± 0.4
0.5 ± 0.4

3.3 ± 0.5
3.7 ± 0.5
3.9 ± 0.5

450
485
520

3.9 ± 0.5
4.1 ± 0.5
4.4 ± 0.5

0.6 ± 0.4
0.8 ± 0.4
0.8 ± 0.4

4.4 ± 0.5
4.6 ± 0.5
5.0 ± 0.5

Remove the DIRC TOP can. Check the components of the directional
coupler (see Figure 11.13) and go to Step 11.

Remove the DIRC TOP can. Check D305 and R3035 (VHF) or R383
(UHF) (see Figure 11.13). If there is no fault, the PIN switch or
LPF or both are suspect; go to Task 33. If there is a fault, go to
Step 11.

10.

In the buffer amplifiers, check R340 (see Figure 11.8 for VHF and
Figure 11.14 for UHF) and R341 (see Figure 11.14 and
Figure 11.15).

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

297

Task 23 —
Power Control
for PA Driver

11.

Repair any fault revealed by the above checks. Replace IC303 if none
of the other components is faulty (see Figure 11.8 and
Figure 11.9).

12.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

In this task any faults in the path between the power-control circuit and the
PA driver will be located, as well as any fault with the PA driver.
1.

Check for short circuits at the gate of the PA driver Q306. Check
R333, R336 (see Figure 11.8 and Figure 11.9), C310, R324 and
R327 (see Figure 11.11 and Figure 11.12) between the powercontrol circuit and Q306.

Repair any fault revealed by the checks in Step 1. If none of the
above-mentioned components is faulty, replace Q306
(see Figure 11.11 and Figure 11.12).

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

Figure 11.14 Components of concern on the bottom-side of the main board (VHF)

COPPER PLATE

VCO BOT CAN

D311

B1 BAND

298

NB BOT CAN

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

R341

C319

R396

D TX INH TEST POINT

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 11.15 Components of concern on the bottom-side of the main board (UHF)

COPPER PLATE

C319

VCO BOT CAN

R396

R341

R340

H5, H7 BANDS

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

299

Task 24 —
Power Control

In this task any faults in the power-control circuitry will be located:
1.

Measure the voltage at pin 8 of IC303 (see Figure 11.8 and
Figure 11.9) in the power-control circuit. The voltage should be:
pin 8 of IC303: 7.4 ± 0.5V

If the voltage is correct, go to Step 3. If it is not, enter the CCTM
command 32 and return to Task 23.

Measure the voltage at pin 10 of IC303 in the power-control circuit.
The voltage should be:
pin 10 of IC303: 4.8 ± 0.5V

300

If the voltage is correct, go to Step 5. If it is not, go to Task 25.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

Check C322, C324, R342, R347 (see Figure 11.8 and
Figure 11.9) and R396 (see Figure 11.14 and Figure 11.15) in the
power-control circuit. Repair any fault. Replace IC303 if none of the
other components is faulty.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 25 —
Shaping Filter

In this task any faults in the shaping-filter circuitry will be located.
1.

With the radio still in transmit mode, measure the voltage at pin 1 of
IC301 (see Figure 11.8 and Figure 11.9) in the shaping-filter circuit. The voltage should be:
pin 1 of IC301: 4.8 ± 0.5V

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage measured in Step 1 is correct, go to Step 4. If it is not,
go to Step 5.

Check the components R334 (see Figure 11.8 and Figure 11.9)
and C319 (see Figure 11.14 and Figure 11.15) and go to Step 6.

Check the components between the PWR test point and pin 1 of
IC301 (see Figure 11.8 and Figure 11.9) and go to Step 6.

Repair any fault revealed by the checks in Step 4 and Step 5. Replace
IC301 if none of the other components is faulty.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

301

11.4

RF Signal Path
The RF signal path extends from the output of the frequency synthesizer to
the LPF. This section of circuitry will require investigation either following
certain checks in “Transmitter RF Power” or if the biasing checks of
“Biasing of PA Driver and PAs” reveal no fault. The procedure is divided
into ten tasks grouped as follows:

Introduction

■

Task 26 to Task 30: initial RF signal path

■

Task 31 and Task 32: directional coupler

■

Task 33 and Task 34: PIN switch

■

Task 35: LPF

The initial signal path includes the exciter and PA driver. The directional
coupler, PIN switch, and LPF make up the final signal path.
The measurement points for diagnosing faults in the signal path are
summarized in Figure 11.16.
Figure 11.16 Measurement points for diagnosing faults in the RF signal path
SIGNAL TYPES

STAGE 3
EXCITER
OUTPUT

SYNTHESIZER
OUTPUT
SYN TX LO

ANALOG

PAs

DRIVER

EXCITER
C307

L314

C3500

TEST
CAPACITOR
GATES OF
Q309, Q310

50 TEST
LEAD TO
TEST SET

PA DRIVER
OUTPUT AT
DRAIN OF Q306

STAGE 2
OUTPUT
AT C3509

STAGE 1
OUTPUT
AT C3505

FREQUENCY
SYNTHESIZER

DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER

RECEIVER
PIN
SWITCH
TEST
CAPACITOR
50 TEST
LEAD TO
TEST SET

RF CONNECTOR

302

LPF

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 26 —
Output of
Frequency
Synthesizer

The first point to check in the initial RF signal path is the output SYN TX LO
from the frequency synthesizer. This signal is input to the exciter at C300.
1.

For test purposes select a representative power level and frequency
from Table 11.8 (B1), Table 11.9 (H5) or Table 11.10 (H7).
(Note that the data for these tables were obtained using an
RFP5401A RF probe.)

To set the power level, enter the CCTM command 326 x, where x
defines the level. To set the frequency, enter the CCTM command
101 x x 0, where x is the frequency in hertz.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Use an RFP5401A RF probe or the equivalent to measure the RF
voltage after C3500 (see Figure 11.17). Earth the probe to the
FCL TOP can adjacent to the PA driver circuitry. The required voltage
should be as given in Table 11.8 (B1), Table 11.9 (H5) or
Table 11.10 (H7).

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage measured above is correct, go to Task 27. If it is not, go
to Step 7.

Check C3500 (see Figure 11.17). If C3500 is not faulty, go to
“Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding” on page 179. If C3500 is
faulty, replace it and return to Step 2.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

303

Figure 11.17 PA driver circuitry under the PAD TOP can (UHF shown)

OUTPUT OF PA DRIVER

PAD TOP

OUTPUT OF STAGE 3
OF EXCITER AT C307

C317

Q306

C389

JUNCTION OF
R3525 AND C3512

Q3504

C307

Q3505

C3509 (B1 BAND)
OUTPUT OF STAGE 2
OF EXCITER
OUTPUT OF STAGE 2
OF EXCITER AT C3509

C3509

Q3502

C3505

C3500

Q3501

R3525

FCL TOP CAN

H5, H7 BANDS

OUTPUT OF STAGE 2 OF
EXCITER AT C3505
SYNTHESIZER
OUTPUT AT C3500

304

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Table 11.8

RF voltages along the initial RF signal path of the VHF radio (B1 band)
RF voltages (V)

Power
level (W)

Frequency
(MHz)

Synthesizer
output

Exciter
stage 1

Exciter
stage 2

Exciter
stage 3

Driver
output

136
155
174

0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

0.6 ± 0.2
0.6 ± 0.2
0.7 ± 0.2

2.7 ± 0.5
2.2 ± 0.5
1.7 ± 0.5

4.0 ± 0.5
3.7 ± 0.5
4.0 ± 0.5

9.9 ± 0.5
8.4 ± 0.5
8.4 ± 0.5

136
155
174

0.3 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

0.6 ± 0.2
0.6 ± 0.2
0.7 ± 0.2

2.7 ± 0.5
2.2 ± 0.5
1.7 ± 0.5

4.0 ± 0.5
3.7 ± 0.5
4.0 ± 0.5

11.8 ± 0.5
10.0 ± 0.5
10.0 ± 0.5

136
155
174

0.3 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

0.6 ± 0.2
0.6 ± 0.2
0.7 ± 0.2

2.7 ± 0.5
2.2 ± 0.5
1.7 ± 0.5

4.0 ± 0.5
3.7 ± 0.5
4.0 ± 0.5

14.3 ± 0.5
13.5 ± 0.5
14.7 ± 0.5

136
155
174

0.3 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

0.6 ± 0.2
0.6 ± 0.2
0.7 ± 0.2

2.7 ± 0.5
2.2 ± 0.5
1.7 ± 0.5

4.0 ± 0.5
3.7 ± 0.5
4.0 ± 0.5

15.6 ± 0.5
15.0 ± 0.5
15.6 ± 0.5

136
155
174

0.3 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

0.6 ± 0.2
0.6 ± 0.2
0.7 ± 0.2

2.7 ± 0.5
2.2 ± 0.5
1.7 ± 0.5

4.0 ± 0.5
3.7 ± 0.5
4.0 ± 0.5

24.5 ± 0.5
29.0 ± 0.5
22.0 ± 0.5

Table 11.9

RF voltages along the initial RF signal path of the UHF radio (H5 band)
RF voltages (V)

Power
level (W)

Frequency
(MHz)

Synthesizer
output

Exciter
stage 1

Exciter
stage 2

Exciter
stage 3

Driver
output

400
435
470

0.3 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

1.2 ± 0.2
2.4 ± 0.2
1.1 ± 0.2

4.2 ± 0.5
2.7 ± 0.5
2.1 ± 0.5

9.2 ± 0.5
6.8 ± 0.5
4.8 ± 0.5

3.0 ± 0.5
2.9 ± 0.5
2.0 ± 0.5

400
435
470

0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

1.2 ± 0.2
2.4 ± 0.2
1.1 ± 0.2

4.2 ± 0.5
2.7 ± 0.5
2.1 ± 0.5

9.2 ± 0.5
6.8 ± 0.5
4.8 ± 0.5

4.1 ± 0.5
3.8 ± 0.5
2.5 ± 0.5

400
435
470

0.4 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

1.2 ± 0.2
2.4 ± 0.2
1.1 ± 0.2

4.2 ± 0.5
2.7 ± 0.5
2.1 ± 0.5

9.2 ± 0.5
6.8 ± 0.5
4.8 ± 0.5

4.8 ± 0.5
4.2 ± 0.5
3.0 ± 0.5

400
435
470

0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

1.2 ± 0.2
2.4 ± 0.2
1.1 ± 0.2

4.2 ± 0.5
2.7 ± 0.5
2.1 ± 0.5

9.2 ± 0.5
6.8 ± 0.5
4.8 ± 0.5

4.6 ± 0.5
4.0 ± 0.5
2.9 ± 0.5

400
435
470

0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

1.2 ± 0.2
2.4 ± 0.2
1.1 ± 0.2

4.2 ± 0.5
2.7 ± 0.5
2.1 ± 0.5

9.2 ± 0.5
6.8 ± 0.5
4.8 ± 0.5

8.1 ± 0.5
7.3 ± 0.5
5.3 ± 0.5

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

305

Table 11.10 RF voltages along the initial RF signal path of the UHF radio (H7 band)
RF voltages (V)
Power
level (W)

Frequency
(MHz)

Synthesizer
output

Exciter
stage 1

Exciter
stage 2

Exciter
stage 3

Driver
output

450
485
520

0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

1.1 ± 0.2
1.0 ± 0.2
1.2 ± 0.2

2.2 ± 0.5
1.9 ± 0.5
0.9 ± 0.5

5.7 ± 0.5
3.4 ± 0.5
2.4 ± 0.5

2.5 ± 0.5
2.0 ± 0.5
0.9 ± 0.5

450
485
520

0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

1.1 ± 0.2
1.0 ± 0.2
1.2 ± 0.2

2.2 ± 0.5
1.9 ± 0.5
0.9 ± 0.5

5.7 ± 0.5
3.4 ± 0.5
2.4 ± 0.5

3.1 ± 0.5
2.4 ± 0.5
1.1 ± 0.5

450
485
520

0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

1.1 ± 0.2
1.0 ± 0.2
1.2 ± 0.2

2.2 ± 0.5
1.9 ± 0.5
0.9 ± 0.5

5.7 ± 0.5
3.4 ± 0.5
2.4 ± 0.5

3.6 ± 0.5
2.9 ± 0.5
1.4 ± 0.5

450
485
520

0.2 ± 0.1
0.1 ± 0.1
0.1 ± 0.1

1.1 ± 0.2
1.0 ± 0.2
1.2 ± 0.2

2.2 ± 0.5
1.9 ± 0.5
0.9 ± 0.5

5.7 ± 0.5
3.4 ± 0.5
2.4 ± 0.5

3.8 ± 0.5
3.2 ± 0.5
1.5 ± 0.5

450
485
520

0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

1.1 ± 0.2
1.0 ± 0.2
1.2 ± 0.2

2.2 ± 0.5
1.9 ± 0.5
0.9 ± 0.5

5.7 ± 0.5
3.4 ± 0.5
2.4 ± 0.5

7.8 ± 0.5
4.8 ± 0.5
2.8 ± 0.5

306

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 27 —
Output of First
Stage of Exciter

If the synthesizer output is correct, check the output at C3505 of the first
stage of the exciter circuit.
1.

If not already done, remove the PAD TOP can.

Enter the CCTM command 326 x, where x defines the power level
selected in Task 26.

Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the frequency
selected in Task 26.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Measure the RF voltage after C3505 (see Figure 11.17). (Use an
RFP5401A RF probe or the equivalent.) The required voltage
should be as given in Table 11.8 (B1), Table 11.9 (H5) or
Table 11.10 (H7).

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage measured above is correct, go to Task 29. If it is not, go
to Step 8.

Check the components around Q3501 (see Figure 11.17).

Repair any fault revealed by the above checks. Replace Q3501
(see Figure 11.17) if none of the other components is faulty.

10.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

307

Task 28 —
Output of Second
Stage of Exciter

308

If the output of the first stage of the exciter circuit is correct, check that of
the second stage at C3509:
1.

With the radio still in transmit mode, measure the RF voltage after
C3509 (see Figure 11.17). (Use an RFP5401A RF probe or the
equivalent.) The required voltage should be as given in Table 11.8
(B1), Table 11.9 (H5) or Table 11.10 (H7).

If the voltage is correct, go to Task 30. If it is not, go to Step 3.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

Check the components around Q3502 (see Figure 11.17).

Repair any fault revealed by the above checks. Replace Q3502
(see Figure 11.17) if none of the other components is faulty.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 29 —
Output of Third
Stage of Exciter

If the output of the second stage of the exciter circuit is correct, check that
of the third and final stage at C307.
1.

With the radio still in transmit mode, measure the RF voltage after
C307 (see Figure 11.17). (Use an RFP5401A RF probe or the
equivalent.) The required voltage should be as given in Table 11.8
(B1), Table 11.9 (H5) or Table 11.10 (H7).

If the voltage is correct, go to Task 30. If it is not, go toStep 3.

With the radio still in transmit mode, measure the RF voltage at the
junction of R3525 and C3512 (see Figure 11.17). The voltage
should be:
junction of R3525 and C3512: 1.3 ± 0.2V (VHF)
1.8 ± 0.2V (UHF)

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage measured in Step 3 is correct, go to Step 7. If it is not,
go to Step 6.

Check the components around Q3504 (see Figure 11.17). Repair
any fault. Replace Q3504 if none of the other components is faulty.
Conclude with Step 8.

Check the components around Q3505 (see Figure 11.17). Repair
any fault. Replace Q3505 if none of the other components is faulty.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

309

Task 30 —
Output of PA Driver

310

If the exciter output is correct, check the output of the PA driver at the
drain of Q306. If necessary, also check the signal at the gates of the PAs
Q309 and Q310. This is the last point in the initial RF signal path.
1.

With the radio still in transmit mode, measure the RF voltage at the
drain of Q306 (B1) or after C317 and C389 (other bands). See
Figure 11.17 and use an RFP5401A RF probe or the equivalent.)
The required voltage should be as given in Table 11.8 (B1),
Table 11.9 (H5) or Table 11.10 (H7).

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage measured above is correct, go to Step 7. If it is not, go
to Step 4.

Check the components between C307 and Q306
(see Figure 11.17).

If the above checks reveal a fault, go to Step 6. If they do not, go to
Task 12 in “Biasing of PA Driver and PAs” on page 280.

Repair the fault. Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to
“Final Tasks” on page 157.

If not already done, remove the PAF TOP can.

Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the power level to the
maximum, and then the command 33 to place the radio in transmit
mode.

Measure the RF voltage at the gates of the PAs Q309 and Q310
(see Figure 11.18 and Figure 11.19).

10.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

11.

If an RF voltage is present, there is no fault in the initial RF signal
path; go to Task 31. If there is no RF voltage, go to Step 12.

12.

Check the components of the interstage matching circuitry between
the PA driver Q306 and the gates of the PAs Q309 and Q310
(see Figure 11.18 and Figure 11.19).

13.

If a fault is found, repair it, confirm the removal of the fault, and go
to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If the repair failed or the fault could
not be found, replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 11.18 Components of the interstage matching circuitry between the PA driver Q306 and the
PAs Q309 and Q310 (VHF)

Q310

Q306

Q309

B1 BAND
PAF TOP CAN

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

PAD TOP CAN

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

311

Figure 11.19 Components of the interstage matching circuitry between the PA driver Q306 and the
PAs Q309 and Q310 (UHF)

Q310

Q306

Q309

H5, H7 BANDS
PAF TOP CAN

312

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

PAD TOP CAN

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 31 —
Check Power at
Directional Coupler

If, as determined in Task 26 to Task 30, there is no fault in the initial RF
signal path, investigate the final signal path. This part of the circuitry may
also require investigation following certain checks in “Transmitter RF
Power”. Begin by checking the directional coupler as follows:
1.

If not already done, remove the DIRC TOP can.

Remove the coupling capacitors C348, C349, C350
(see Figure 11.20).

Solder one terminal of a 80pF (VHF) or 82pF (UHF) test capacitor
to the PCB at the point shown in Figure 11.20. Mount the capacitor
vertically. Use a test capacitor of the type GRM111, DLI C17,
Murata 1210, or the equivalent.

Solder a 50Ω test lead to the PCB: Solder the outer sheath to the test
pad shown in Figure 11.20, and solder the central wire to the other
terminal of the test capacitor.

Connect the test lead to the test set.

Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level
to the maximum.

Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the lowest
frequency (in hertz) for maximum power, as given in Table 11.8
(B1), Table 11.9 (H5) or Table 11.10 (H7).

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Measure the RF output power. This should be:
RF output power: more than 70W (VHF)
more than 60W (UHF)

10.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

11.

Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the highest
frequency (in hertz) for maximum power, as given in Table 11.8
(B1), Table 11.9 (H5) or Table 11.10 (H7).

12.

Repeat Step 8 to Step 10.

13.

If the power measured in both the above cases exceeds 70W (VHF)
or 60W (UHF), go to Step 14. If it does not, go to Task 32.

14.

Remove the test lead and test capacitor, resolder the coupling
capacitors in position, and go to Task 33.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

313

Figure 11.20 Circuitry under the DIRC TOP can, and the points for attaching the test lead and test
capacitor
VHF

UHF

Mounting point
for test capacitor

Test pad
Test pad

314

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 32 —
Repair Circuitry

If the RF output power measured in Task 31 is low, there is a fault in the
circuit between the common drain of the PAs and the test capacitor.
1.

If not already done, remove the PAF TOP can.

Check for faulty, shorted or misplaced components in the circuit
between the test capacitor and the common drain of Q309 and Q310
(see Figure 11.6).

Repair any fault revealed by the above checks and go to Step 5. If no
fault could be found, go to Step 4.

Remove the test lead and test capacitor, resolder the coupling
capacitors C348, C349 and C350 in position (see Figure 11.20),
and go to Task 26.

With the test lead still connected to the test set, enter the CCTM
command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level to the maximum.

Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the lowest
frequency (in hertz) for maximum power, as given in Table 11.8
(B1), Table 11.9 (H5) or Table 11.10 (H7).

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Measure the RF output power. This should be:
RF output power: more than 70W (VHF)
more than 60W (UHF)

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

10.

Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the highest
frequency (in hertz) for maximum power, as given in Table 11.8
(B1), Table 11.9 (H5) or Table 11.10 (H7).

11.

Repeat Step 7 to Step 9.

12.

Remove the test lead and test capacitor, and resolder the coupling
capacitors C348, C349 and C350 in position (see Figure 11.20).

13.

If the power in both the above cases is now correct, the fault has been
rectified; go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If it is not, the repair
failed; replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

315

Task 33 —
Check PIN Switch

In checking the final RF signal path, if no fault is found in the directional
coupler, then check the PIN switch next. The PIN switch may also require
investigation following certain checks in “Transmitter RF Power”.
1.

Remove the LPF TOP can.

Remove the three blocking capacitors C361, C362 and C363
(see Figure 11.21).

Solder one terminal of a 56 pF (VHF) or 18 pF (UHF) test capacitor
to the PCB at the point shown in Figure 11.21. Mount the capacitor
vertically. Use a test capacitor of the type GRM111, DLI C17,
Murata 1210, or the equivalent.

Solder a 50 Ω test lead to the PCB. Solder the outer sheath to the test
pad shown in Figure 11.21, and solder the central wire to the other
terminal of the test capacitor.

Connect the test lead to the test set.

Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level
to the maximum.

Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the lowest
frequency (in hertz) for maximum power, as given in Table 11.8
(B1), Table 11.9 (H5) or Table 11.10 (H7).

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Measure the RF output power. This should be:
RF output power: more than 70W (VHF)
more than 60W (UHF)

316

10.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

11.

Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the highest
frequency (in hertz) for maximum power, as given in Table 11.8
(B1), Table 11.9 (H5) or Table 11.10 (H7).

12.

Repeat Step 8 to Step 10.

13.

If the power in both the above cases exceeds 70W (VHF) or 60W
(UHF), go to Step 14. If it does not, the circuitry of the PIN switch
is suspect; go to Task 34.

14.

Remove the test lead and test capacitor, resolder the blocking
capacitors in position, and go to Task 35.

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 11.21 Circuitry under the PIN TOP can, and points for attaching the test lead and test capacitor

C363

C361

C363

C361

C362

TEST PAD

MOUNTING POINT FOR
TEST CAPACITOR
D307

D3507

B1 BAND

VHF

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

H5,UHFH7 BANDS

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

317

Task 34 —
Repair PIN switch

If the RF power at the PIN switch is low, the switch is not drawing the
expected current or the diode is faulty. Check the circuit as follows:
1.

Remove the PIN TOP can.

Perform a diode check of D307 (VHF) or D3507 (UHF)
(see Figure 11.21). If it is not faulty, go to Step 3. If it is, replace
D307 or D3507, and go to Step 4.

Check the +9V0_TX supply to the PIN switch via the following
resistors on the bottom-side of the PCB (see Figure 11.22 and
Figure 11.23):
■

VHF: R389 and R390

■

UHF: R3000, R389 and R390

If any resistor is faulty, replace the resistor as well as D307 (VHF) or
D3507 (UHF). (A faulty resistor is likely to have resulted in damage
to D307 or D3507.)
4.

With the test lead still connected to the test set, enter the CCTM
command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level to the maximum.

Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the lowest
frequency (in hertz) for maximum power, as given in Table 11.8
(B1), Table 11.9 (H5) or Table 11.10 (H7).

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.
Again measure the RF output power. This should be:
RF output power: more than 70W VHF)
more than 60W (UHF)

318

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the highest
frequency (in hertz) for maximum power, as given in Table 11.8
(B1), Table 11.9 (H5) or Table 11.10 (H7).

Repeat Step 5 to Step 7.

10.

Remove the test lead and test capacitor, and resolder the blocking
capacitors C361, C362 and C363 (see Figure 11.21) in position.

11.

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 11.22 Components of concern on the bottom-side of the main board (VHF)

VCO BOT CAN

B1 BAND

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

R390

R389

COPPER PLATE

NB BOT CAN

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

319

Figure 11.23 Components of concern on the bottom-side of the main board (UHF)

COPPER PLATE

VCO BOT CAN

R390

R389

R3000

H5, H7 BANDS

320

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 11.24 Circuitry under the LPF TOP can

B1 BAND

VHF

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

H5, H7 BANDS
UHF

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

321

Task 35 —
Check Components
of LPF

If there are no faults in the final RF signal path up to and including the PIN
switch, then the fault should lie in the LPF. Check the LPF as follows:
1.

If not already done, remove the LPF TOP can.

Connect the RF connector to the test set.

Check the capacitors and inductors of the LPF between the PIN
switch and the RF connector. See Figure 11.24. Check for shorts,
open circuits, and faulty components. Repair any fault.

In the case of the B1 band, replace the LPF TOP can before continuing.

Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level
to the maximum.

Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the lowest
frequency (in hertz) for maximum power, as given in Table 11.8
(B1), Table 11.9 (H5) or Table 11.10 (H7).

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Measure the RF output power. This should be:
RF output power: more than 70W (VHF)
more than 60W (UHF)

322

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

10.

Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the highest
frequency (in hertz) for maximum power, as given in Table 11.8
(B1), Table 11.9 (H5) or Table 11.10 (H7).

11.

Repeat Step 7 to Step 9.

12.

If the power in both the above cases exceeds 70W (VHF) or 60W
(UHF), the fault has been rectified; go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.
If it does not, the repair failed; replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

Transmitter Fault Finding (40W/50W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

Introduction

This section covers the diagnosis of faults in the 25W transmitter circuitry.
The main indication of a fault in the transmitter is a reduction in range.
This implies that the power output is wrong or too low. Another type of
fault is manifested when the radio always transmits at full power, even if set
otherwise. Regardless of the fault, the lock status should be normal.

Fault-Diagnosis
Tasks

The procedure for diagnosing transmitter faults is divided into tasks, which
are grouped into the following sections:
■

“Power Supplies”

■

“Transmitter RF Power”

■

“Biasing of PA Driver and PAs”

■

“RF Signal Path”.

Before beginning the fault diagnosis with “Power Supplies”, note the
following information regarding CCTM commands, frequency bands, can
removal and replacement, and transmit tests.
CCTM Commands

Table 12.1
Command

The CCTM commands required in this section are listed in Table 12.1.
Full details of the commands are given in “Computer-Controlled Test
Mode (CCTM)” on page 118.

CCTM commands required for the diagnosis of faults in the transmitter
Description

Set radio in receive mode

Set radio in transmit mode

Read temperature near PAs — displays temperature x in degrees celsius and voltage y

101 x y 0

Set transmit frequency (x in hertz) and receive frequency (y in hertz) to specified values

114 x

Set DAC value x (in range 0 to 1023) of transmit power

304

Read clamp current at gate of PA driver — displays DAC value x (in range 0 to 255)

304 x

Set DAC value x (in range 0 to 255) of clamp current at gate of PA driver

318

Read forward-power level — displays corresponding voltage x in millivolts

319

Read reverse-power level — displays corresponding voltage x in millivolts

326 x

Set transmitter power level x (0=off, 1=very low, 2=low, 3=medium, 4=high, 5=maximum)

331

Read bias voltage for first PA — displays DAC value x (in range 0 to 255)

331 x

Set DAC value x (in range 0 to 255) of bias voltage for first PA

332

Read bias voltage for second PA — displays DAC value x (in range 0 to 255)

332 x

Set DAC value x (in range 0 to 255) of bias voltage for second PA

334 x

Set synthesizer on (x=1) or off (x=0) via DIG SYN EN line

335 x

Set transmit-receive switch on (x=1) or off (x=0) via DIG SYN TR SW line

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

323

Frequency Bands

Where test procedures or figures differ according to the frequency band of
the radio, the frequency band is given in brackets. The frequency band may
be referred to as either ‘VHF’ (very high frequency) or ‘UHF’ (ultra high
frequency) or identified by the frequency sub-band, such as ‘B1’ or ‘H7’.
For example:
RF output power: > 35W
current: < 8A (VHF), < 9A (UHF)

A definition of frequency bands is given in “Defining Frequency Bands” on
page 126.
Table 12.2

Lowest, centre and highest frequencies in MHz

Band
A4
B1
C0
D1
H5
H6

Emergency
Frequencies

Lowest
frequency
66
136
174
216
400
450

Centre
frequency
77
155
199.5
241
435
490

Highest
frequency
88
174
225
266
470
530

The following frequency ranges are reserved worldwide for use as maritime
emergency frequencies or by distress beacons:
■

B1 band: 156.8MHz ± 375kHz

■

D1 band: 243MHz ± 5kHz

■

H5 band: 406.0 to 406.1MHz.

Do not program the radio with any frequency in the above ranges.
Can Removal

There are five cans shielding the bulk of the transmitter circuitry:
■

PAD TOP

■

PAF TOP

■

DIRC TOP

■

PIN TOP

■

LPF TOP.

To remove any can, first remove the board. In the case of the PAD TOP and
PAF TOP cans, first detach the heat-transfer block from the board. Secure the
block again after removing the cans. Follow the procedures given in
“Disassembly and Reassembly” on page 129.
Can Replacement

324

Replace all cans that have been removed only after repairing the board.
This applies to the A4, B1, C0, D1, H5 and H6 bands. For certain other
bands the transmitter will not operate correctly unless all the cans are fitted.

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmit Tests

The following points need to be borne in mind when carrying out transmit
tests:
■

secure board

■

ensure proper antenna load

■

limit duration of transmit tests

■

protect against accidental transmissions

■

avoid thermal and RF burns.

These points are discussed in more detail below.
Secure Board

Before conducting any transmit tests, ensure that the board is adequately
secured in the chassis. This is essential if overheating of the radio is to be
avoided. (As mentioned earlier, the heat-transfer block must already be
secured to the board of the assembly.) It is good practice to secure the
assembly by at least the two external screws and one of the internal screws.
The screws are labelled I and E in Figure 5.3 on page 133. There is no
need, however, to secure the lid of the radio body.

Ensure Proper
Antenna Load

The radio has been designed to operate with a 50Ω termination impedance,
but will tolerate a wide range of antenna loading conditions. Nevertheless,
care should be exercised. Normally the RF connector on the board will be
connected to the RF communications test set as shown in Figure 4.2 on
page 112. But for those tests where this connection is not necessary, a 50Ω
load may be used instead. Do not operate the transmitter without such a load
or without a connection to the test set. Failure to do so might result in
damage to the power output stage of the transmitter.

Limit Duration of
Transmit Tests

Protect Against
Accidental
Transmissions

Under certain circumstances the microprocessor can key on the transmitter.
Ensure that all instruments are protected at all times from such accidental
transmissions.

Avoid Thermal
and RF Burns

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

325

12.1

Power Supplies
First check that a power supply is not the cause of the fault. There are two
power supplies and a switch circuit for the transmitter:

Introduction

■

Task 1: 13.8V DC supply from power connector (+13V8 BATT)

■

Task 2: switch circuit for 13.8V DC supply

■

Task 3: 9V DC supply from 9V regulator in PSU module (+9V0 TX).

The measurement and test points for diagnosing faults in the power supplies
are summarized in Figure 12.1.
Figure 12.1

Measurement and test points for diagnosing faults involving the power supplies for
the transmitter

+9V0 TX

TRANSMITTER
+13.8 V DC
+13.8 V DC SUPPLY
SUPPLY TO PAs
TO PA DRIVER

POWER
SUPPLY

9V0 TX
TEST POINT

+13V8 BATT
SIGNAL TYPES
RF
SWITCH

ANALOG

AGND
L306

L310

GND
TEST POINT

OTHER
TRANSMITTER
CIRCUITRY

326

PAs

DRIVER

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

EXCITER

INTERFACE
CIRCUITRY

FREQUENCY
SYNTHESIZER

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 1 —
13.8V Power Supply

First check the power supply from the power connector.
1.

Obtain a needle probe to use for measurements of the power supply
at the PA driver and PAs. If none is available, remove the PAF TOP and
PAD TOP cans.

Set the DC power supply to 13.8V, with a current limit of 9A.

Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the radio to maximum
power.

Attempt to place the radio in transmit mode. Enter the CCTM
command 33.

If the radio enters the transmit mode, continue with Step 7. If instead
a C03 error is displayed in response to the command 33, go to Task 7
in “Transmitter RF Power” on page 336.

Measure the voltage at the point on L310 shown in Figure 12.2.
This is the supply at the common drain of Q309 and Q310, and
should be:
common drain of Q309 and Q310: more than 13V DC

Also measure the voltage at the point on L306 shown in
Figure 12.3. This is the supply at the drain of Q306, and should be:
drain of Q306: more than 13V DC

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

10.

If the power supply measured in Step 7 and Step 8 is not correct, go
to Task 2. If it is, go to Task 3.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

327

Figure 12.2

Point for measuring the power supply to the PAs (UHF shown)
MEASUREMENT POINT ON L310

H5/H6 BANDS SHOWN

328

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Point for measuring the power supply to the PA driver (VHF shown)
POINT 2 ON R350

R350

POINT 1 ON R350

R339
MEASUREMENT
POINT ON R339

L306

MEASUREMENT
POINT ON L306

Q308

Figure 12.3

R327

C317
C389

R324
C310

Q306
PAD TOP

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

D1 BAND

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

329

Task 2 —
Check Switch Circuit

If the power supply to the drains of the PAs and PA driver is not correct, the
switch circuit is suspect. Check the circuit as follows:
1.

Measure the voltage at the point 1 on R350 shown in Figure 12.3.
The voltage should be:
point 1 on R350: 13.8V DC

If the voltage measured in Step 1 is correct, go to Step 3. If it is not,
check for continuity between R350 and the power connector. Repair
any fault and conclude with Step 8.

Measure the voltage at R339 as shown in Figure 12.3. The voltage
should be:
R339: 9V DC

If the voltage measured in Step 3 is correct, go to Step 5. If it is not,
go to Task 3 and check the 9V power supply.

Measure the voltage at the point 2 on R350 shown in Figure 12.3.
The voltage should be:
point 2 on R350: < 5V DC

Task 3 —
9V Power Supply

If the voltage measured in Step 5 is correct, go to Step 7. If it is not,
replace Q308 — see Figure 12.3 — and conclude with Step 8.

Remove the heat-transfer block from the board. Replace Q311
(situated on the bottom-side of the board next to the power
connector). Replace the heat-transfer block, and conclude with
Step 8.

If the supply from the power connector is correct, check the 9V DC supply.
1.

Enter the CCTM command 326 1 to set the transmitter power level
very low.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Measure the supply voltage between the 9V0 TX test point and the
test point (see Figure 12.4).

GND

supply 9V0 TX: 9.0 ± 0.5V DC

330

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the supply measured in Step 3 is correct, go to Task 4 in
“Transmitter RF Power” on page 334. If it is not, the 9V regulator
IC601 and the associated switching circuitry Q603 are suspect; go to
Task 3 of “Power Supply Fault Finding” on page 168.

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 12.4

Test points for checking the 9V supply, the forward and reverse RF power, and the
inhibiting of the transmitter

VCO TOP CAN (UHF ONLY)

DIRC TOP CAN

D TX INH
TEST POINT

REV PWR
TEST POINT

TX INH
TEST POINT

FWD PWR
TEST POINT

IF TOP CAN
9V0 TX TEST POINT

GND TEST POINT

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

331

12.2

Transmitter RF Power

Introduction

If there is no fault with the power supplies, check the transmitter RF power
and correct any fault. The procedure is covered in the following eight tasks:
■

Task 4: check forward and reverse powers

■

Task 5: check RF output power

■

Task 6: power unchanged regardless of setting

■

Task 7: check for inhibiting of transmitter

■

Task 8: check temperature sensor

■

Task 9: power and current are skewed

■

Task 10: repair output matching circuitry

■

Task 11: power and current are low

The measurement points for diagnosing faults concerning the transmitter
RF power are summarized in Figure 12.5. Data required for the first task
(checking the forward and reverse powers) are supplied in Table 12.3.
Table 12.3

Voltages in millivolts corresponding to nominal forward and reverse powers

Frequency band

Forward power (318 command)

Reverse power (319 command)

2700 to 3900

<700

1100 to 2000

<500

1100 to 2000

<500

1600 to 2500

<700

2500 to 3500

<1000

2800 to 3900

<1000

332

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

LEAD TO
TEST SET

RF CONNECTOR

LPF

DIGITAL

CLOCK

ANALOG

SIGNAL TYPES

REV PWR
TEST POINT

RECEIVER

PIN SWITCH

BUFFER
AMPLIFIER

FWD PWR
TEST POINT

DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER

50 TEST LEAD
TO TEST SET

DIGITAL
BOARD

POWER
CONTROL

SYN LOCK

DIG SYN EN

DIG TX INH

D TX INH
TEST POINT

PAs

DRIVER

AND

CDC TX PWR CTL

SHAPING
FILTER

TX REV PWR

TX FWD PWR

CDC TX FIN BIAS2

CDC TX FIN BIAS1

CDC TX DRV BIAS

SYN TX LO

SHAPER
AND
LEVEL
SHIFTER

BIAS
LIMITER

EXCITER

OR GATE

TX INH
TEST POINT

CODEC
AND AUDIO
CIRCUITRY

FREQUENCY
SYNTHESIZER

Figure 12.5
Measurement and test points for diagnosing faults concerning the transmitter
RF power

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

333

Task 4 —
Check Forward and
Reverse Powers

First check the forward and reverse powers for an indication of which part
of the circuitry is suspect.
1.

Enter the CCTM command 326 4 to set the transmitter power level
high.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Enter the CCTM command 318 to check the forward power.
The value returned is the voltage in millivolts corresponding to the
power level, and should be as shown in Table 12.3.

Confirm the above result by checking the level at the FWD PWR test
point (see Figure 12.4) using an oscilloscope.

Enter the CCTM command 319 to check the reverse power.
The value returned is the voltage in millivolts corresponding to the
power level, and should be as shown in Table 12.3.

Confirm the above result by checking the level at the REV PWR test
point (see Figure 12.4) using an oscilloscope.
If the oscilloscope momentarily indicates a very high reverse power,
then the most likely scenario is that the antenna VSWR threshold has
been exceeded and the PA has shut down to very low power.

334

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the values obtained in Step 3 and Step 5 are both correct, and there
is no indication of a momentary high reverse power, go to Task 5.
If one or both are incorrect, go to Step 9.

Check the connection from the RF connector on the radio to the test
set.

10.

If there is no fault, go to Step 11. If there is, rectify the fault and
repeat the above measurements.

11.

If the reverse power is momentarily too high, the directional coupler,
PIN switch or LPF is suspect; go to Task 29. Otherwise go to Task 5.

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 5 —
Check RF Output
Power

If the power supplies are correct, check the RF output power of the
transmitter.
1.

Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level
to the maximum value.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Note the RF output power measured by the test set, and note the
current reading on the DC power supply.
RF output power: > 30W
current: < 8A (VHF), < 9A (UHF)

Table 12.4

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

Repeat Step 3 to Step 5.

10.

Depending on the results of the above measurements, proceed to the
task indicated in Table 12.4. Note that the power and current are
considered to be skewed if they are low at one part of the frequency
band and high elsewhere.

Tasks to be performed according to the results of the power and current measurements
of Task 5

Power

Current

Task

Correct

Task 6 — Power unchanged regardless of setting

Correct

Wrong

Task 29 — Check power at directional coupler

Skewed

Task 9 — Power and current are skewed

Low (> 0.1W)

Low (> 0.5A)

Task 11 — Power and current are low

None at RF connector (< 0.1W)

Low (> 0.5A)

Task 29 — Check power at directional coupler

None at RF connector (< 0.1W)

None (< 0.5A)

Task 7 — Check for inhibiting of transmitter

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

335

Task 6 —
Power Unchanged
Regardless of
Setting

If all the power and current values measured in Task 5 are correct, it is likely
that the power remains unchanged regardless of the power setting.
1.

Task 7 —
Check for Inhibiting
of Transmitter

Enter the following CCTM commands in turn and measure the RF
output power in each case:
■

326 4

■

326 3

■

326 2

■

326 1

The above measurements should confirm that the power remains
unchanged at all settings. Carry out Task 12 and then Task 19.

If the transmitter is drawing no current or the wrong current, check
whether it is being inhibited. This check is also required if a CO3 error
occurs in Task 1.
1.

If not already done, enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio
in transmit mode.

Check the logic signal at the TX INH test point (see Figure 12.4).
The signal should be:
TX INH test point: about 0V (inactive)

If the signal is inactive as required, go to Step 4. If it is active — about
1.1V — the transmitter is being inhibited; go to Step 5.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode,
and go to Task 12 in “Biasing of PA Driver and PAs” on page 342.

Check the logic signal at the D TX INH test point (see Figure 12.4).
The signal should be:
D TX INH test point: about 0V (inactive)

336

If the signal is inactive as required, go to Step 8. If it is active — about
3.2V — the temperature sensor is suspect; go to Step 7.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode,
and go to Task 8.

The lock status is possibly no longer normal. Enter the CCTM
command 72 and check the lock status.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

10.

The normal lock status is 110. If it is not, proceed to the relevant
section. If it is, go to Step 11.

11.

Check for short circuits on the DIG TX INH line from the D TX INH test
point.

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

12.

Task 8 —
Check Temperature
Sensor

If the transmitter is being inhibited and the logic signal at the D TX INH test
point is active, a fault in the temperature sensor might be the cause.
1.

Enter the CCTM command 47 to check the temperature reading.

Of the two numbers returned, the first is the temperature in degrees
celsius and should be about 25°C. If it is, go to Task 12 in “Biasing of
PA Driver and PAs” on page 342. If it is not, go to Step 3.

If not already done, remove the PAF TOP can.

Check D301 and the surrounding components — see Figure 12.6.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

337

Figure 12.6

PA circuitry under the PAF TOP can and part of the directional coupler under the DIRC TOP
can (VHF shown)

D1 BAND
PAF TOP

Q310

Q309

D301

C349

MOUNTING POINT
FOR TEST CAPACITOR

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

C348

C350

DIRC
TOP

SOLDER
TEST
PADOUTER

SHEATH TO GND

338

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 9 —
Power and Current
Are Skewed

If the RF output power and the supply current are skewed, the output
matching is suspect.
1.

Remove the DIRC TOP can.

Remove the coupling capacitors C348, C349 and C350 —
see Figure 12.6.

Solder one terminal of a test capacitor to the PCB at the point shown
in Figure 12.6. Mount the capacitor vertically. Use a test capacitor
of the type GRM111, DLI C17, Murata 1210, or the equivalent.
The value of the capacitor depends on the frequency band of
the radio:
■

A4 — 100pF

■

B1, C0, D1 — 680pF

■

H5, H6 — 82pF.

Solder a 50Ω test lead to the PCB. Solder the outer sheath in the
position shown in Figure 12.6, and solder the central wire to the
other terminal of the test capacitor.

Connect the test lead to the test set.

Program the radio with the highest frequency in the radio’s frequency
band: Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the frequency
in hertz.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Note the RF output power measured by the test set, and note the
current reading on the DC power supply.
RF output power: > 35W
current: < 8A (VHF), < 9A (UHF)

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

10.

Program the radio with the centre frequency in the band: Enter the
CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the frequency in hertz.

11.

Repeat Step 7 to Step 9.

12.

Program the radio with the lowest frequency in the band: Enter the
CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the frequency in hertz.

13.

Repeat Step 7 to Step 9.

14.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

339

Task 10 —
Repair Output
Matching Circuitry

If the checks in Task 9 show that the power and current are still skewed,
there is a fault in the output matching circuitry.
1.

If not already done, remove the PAF TOP can.

Check for faulty, shorted or misplaced components in the circuit
between the test capacitor and the common drain of Q309 and Q310
(see Figure 12.6). Repair any fault.

Program the radio with the highest frequency in the radio’s frequency
band: Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the frequency
in hertz.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Note the RF output power measured by the test set, and note the
current reading on the DC power supply.
RF output power: > 35W
current: < 8A (VHF), < 9A (UHF)

340

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

Program the radio with the centre frequency in the band: Enter the
CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the frequency in hertz.

Repeat Step 4 to Step 6.

Program the radio with the lowest frequency in the band: Enter the
CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the frequency in hertz.

10.

Repeat Step 4 to Step 6.

11.

Remove the test lead and test capacitor, and resolder the coupling
capacitors C348, C349 and C350 in position (see Figure 12.6).

12.

If the power and current are now correct at all three frequencies, the
fault has been rectified; go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If they are
not, go to Task 25 in “RF Signal Path” on page 362.

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 11 —
Power and Current
Are Low

Table 12.5

If the RF output power and the supply current are uniformly low at all
frequencies, one of the PAs is suspect or the input to the PAs is reduced.
Check each PA in turn:
1.

For the first PA (Q310), enter the CCTM command 331 to check the
DAC value of final bias 1 (CDC TX FIN BIAS 1). Record the value x
returned.

Note the current reading on the DC power supply.

Enter the CCTM command 331 1 to turn off final bias 1.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Note the RF output power measured at the test set. This should be
as shown in Table 12.5.

If the RF power is correct, go to Step 7 to repeat the check with the
second PA. If it is not, enter the CCTM command 32 to place the
radio in receive mode, and carry out Task 12 and then Task 13.

For the second PA (Q309), enter the CCTM command 332 to check
the DAC value of final bias 2 (CDC TX FIN BIAS 2). Record the value y
returned.

Note the current reading on the DC power supply.

Enter the CCTM command 332 1 to turn off final bias 2.

10.

With the radio still in transmit mode, note the RF output power
measured at the test set. This should be as shown in Table 12.5.

11.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

12.

If the RF power measured in Step 10 is correct, go to “RF Signal
Path” on page 361. If it is not, carry out Task 12 and then Task 16.

RF output power of individual RF power amplifiers at different frequencies
Frequency within band

Frequency band
Lowest frequency

Centre frequency

Highest frequency

24 ± 5W

25 ± 5W

29 ± 5W

34 ± 5W

29 ± 5W

23 ± 5W

22 ± 5W

17 ± 5W

33 ± 5 W

28 ± 5 W

29 ± 5 W

5 ± 5W

12 ± 5W

27 ± 5W

13 ± 5W

19 ± 5W

28 ± 5W

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

341

12.3

Biasing of PA Driver and PAs

Introduction

The measurements of the transmitter RF output power in “Transmitter RF
Power” might indicate a need to check the biasing of the two PAs and the
PA driver. The procedure is covered in this section. There are thirteen tasks
grouped as follows:
■

Task 12: prepare to check biasing

■

Task 13 to Task 15: check biasing of first PA

■

Task 16 to Task 18: check biasing of second PA

■

Task 19 and Task 20: check biasing of PA driver

■

Task 21 to Task 24: repair circuitry

The test and measurement points for diagnosing faults in the biasing of the
PAs and PA driver are summarized in Figure 12.7.
Task 12 —
Prepare to
Check Biasing

342

If the transmitter is not being inhibited, check the biasing of the two PAs
and the PA driver. First make the following preparations:
1.

Set the current limit on the DC power supply to 2A.

Enter the CCTM command 331 to check the DAC value of final bias
1 (CDC TX FIN BIAS 1) at maximum power. Record the value x returned.

Enter the CCTM command 332 to check the DAC value of final bias
2 (CDC TX FIN BIAS 2) at maximum power. Record the value y returned.

Enter the CCTM command 304 to check the DAC value of the
clamp current at the driver gate. Record the value z returned.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Switch off all biases by entering the following CCTM commands in
sequence:
■

331 1

■

332 1

■

304 1

■

114 1023

■

334 0

■

335 0

Note the current reading on the DC power supply. This will be less
than 500mA.

With the radio still in transmit mode, check the biasing of the PAs and
PA driver, beginning with Task 13.

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

ANALOG

SIGNAL TYPES

PIN
SWITCH
AND LPF

BUFFER
AMPLIFIER

PIN 5 OF
IC303

DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER

PIN 10 OF
IC303

R347

PIN 9 OF
IC303

POWER
CONTROL

R336

PIN 8 OF
IC303

GATES OF
Q309, Q310

PAs

SHAPING
FILTER

SHAPER
AND
LEVEL
SHIFTER
PIN 8 OF
IC301

PIN 1 OF
IC301

SHAPER
AND
LEVEL
SHIFTER

BIAS
LIMITER

EXCITER

PIN 14 OF
IC301

SET PWR
TEST POINT

DRIVER

GATE OF
Q306

TX REV PWR

TX FWD PWR

CDC TX PWR CTL

PWR
TEST POINT

CDC TX FIN BIAS2

FIN2
TEST POINT

CDC TX FIN BIAS1

FIN1
TEST POINT

CDC TX DRV BIAS

DRV
TEST POINT

CODEC
AND AUDIO
CIRCUITRY

FREQUENCY
SYNTHESIZER

Figure 12.7
Measurement and test points for diagnosing faults in the biasing of the PAs and PA
driver

343

Task 13 —
Check Biasing
of First PA

Check the biasing of the first PA (Q310).
Important

Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 2A.
And, when entering the CCTM command 331 x, do not
specify a value x higher than that recorded in Task 12.
Failure to do so might result in the destruction of the PAs.

Use a multimeter to measure the voltage at pin 14 of IC301
(see Figure 12.8). The voltage should be:
pin 14 of IC301: < 100mV (initially)

Note the current reading on the DC power supply. As mentioned in
Step 7 of Task 12, this will be less than 500mA.

Enter the CCTM command 331 x (where x was recorded in Task 12).

Check that the voltage changes to:
pin 14 of IC301: 2 to 5V (after entry of CCTM 331 x)

Table 12.6

Also note the current reading. This should increase by an amount
approximately equal to the offset given in Table 12.6.

If the voltage and current are both correct, go to Step 7. If the voltage
is correct but not the current, go to Task 14. If neither the current
nor the voltage is correct, go to Task 15.

Enter the CCTM command 331 1 to switch off final bias 1, and go to
Task 16.

Gate biases for the PAs and PA driver at high power
Offset currents in mA

Frequency band
First PA

Second PA

PA driver

750

300

750

300

750

300

800

300

1000

450

1000

450

344

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 12.8

Test points and components of the shaping filter

VCO TOP CAN (UHF ONLY)

DIRC TOP CAN

SET PWR
TEST POINT

DRV TEST POINT

FWD PWR
TEST POINT
IF TOP CAN

PWR TEST POINT

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

FIN1 TEST POINT

FIN2 TEST POINT

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

345

Figure 12.9

PA circuitry under the PAF TOP can (VHF shown)

D1 BAND

PAF TOP
Q310

Q309
CIRCUITRY BETWEEN
IC301 AND PAs

D301

VIA TO PIN 14 OF 1C301

VIA TO PIN 8 OF IC301

346

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

VIA TO GATE OF Q309

VIA TO GATE OF Q310

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 14 —
Shaper and
Level Shifter

If the voltage measured in Task 13 is correct but not the current, either the
first PA or the shaper and level shifter for the PA is suspect.
Important

If the PAF TOP can has already been removed, go to Step 5. If it has not,
go to Step 2.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

Remove the PAF TOP can.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Enter the CCTM command 331 x (where x was recorded in Task 12).

Check that the voltage at the gate of Q310 is (see Figure 12.9):
gate of Q310: 2 to 5V

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage measured above is correct, Q310 is faulty; replace the
board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If it is not correct, go to
Step 9.

Check the circuitry between pin 14 of IC301 and the gate of Q310
(see Figure 12.9). If a fault is found, repair it, confirm the removal
of the fault, and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If the repair failed
or Q310 itself is faulty, replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

347

Task 15 —
Shaping Filter for
Power Control

If neither the voltage nor the current measured in Task 13 is correct, then
the shaping filter for the power-control circuitry or the CODEC and audio
circuitry is suspect.
Important

Use the multimeter to measure the voltage at the FIN1 test point
(see Figure 12.8). The voltage should be:
FIN1 test point: 18 ± 2mV (initially)

Enter the CCTM command 331 x (where x was recorded in Task 12).

Check that the voltage changes to:
FIN1 test point: 1.1 to 2.7V (after entry of CCTM 331 x)

348

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage measured above is correct, go to Step 6. If it is not, go
to “CODEC and Audio Fault Finding” on page 381.

Check IC301 and the surrounding shaping-filter circuitry
(see Figure 12.8). If a fault is found, repair it, confirm the removal
of the fault, and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If the repair failed,
replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 16 —
Check Biasing
of Second PA

If the biasing of the first PA is correct, check that of the second PA (Q309).
Important

Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 2A.
And, when entering the CCTM command 332 y, do not
specify a value y higher than that recorded in Task 12.
Failure to do so might result in the destruction of the PAs.

Use the multimeter to measure the voltage at pin 8 of IC301
(see Figure 12.8). The voltage should be:
pin 8 of IC301: < 100mV (initially)

Note the current reading on the DC power supply. As mentioned in
Step 7 of Task 12, the current will be less than 500mA.

Enter the CCTM command 332 y (where y was recorded in Task 12).

Check that the voltage changes to:
pin 8 of IC301: 2 to 5V (after entry of CCTM 332 y)

Also note the current reading. This should increase by an amount
approximately equal to the offset given in Table 12.6.

If the voltage and current are both correct, go to Step 7. If the voltage
is correct but not the current, go to Task 17. If neither the current
nor the voltage is correct, go to Task 18.

Enter the CCTM command 332 1 to switch off final bias 2, and go to
Task 19.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

349

Task 17 —
Shaper and
Level Shifter

If the voltage measured in Task 16 is correct but not the current, either the
second PA or the shaper and level shifter for the PA is suspect.
Important

If the PAF TOP can has already been removed, go to Step 5. If it has not,
go to Step 2.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

Remove the PAF TOP can.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Enter the CCTM command 332 y (where y was recorded in Task 12).

Check that the voltage at the gate of Q309 is (see Figure 12.9):
gate of Q309: 2 to 5V

350

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage is correct, Q309 is faulty; replace the board and go to
“Final Tasks” on page 157. If it is not, go to Step 9.

Check the circuitry between pin 8 of IC301 and the gate of Q309
(see Figure 12.9). If a fault is found, repair it, confirm the removal
of the fault, and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If the repair failed
or Q309 itself is faulty, replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157.

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 18 —
Shaping Filter for
Power Control

If neither the voltage nor the current measured in Task 16 is correct, then
the shaping filter for the power-control circuitry or the CODEC and audio
circuitry is suspect.
Important

Use the multimeter to measure the voltage at the FIN2 test point
(see Figure 12.8). The voltage should be:
FIN2 test point: 18 ± 2V (initially)

Enter the CCTM command 332 y (where y was recorded in Task 12).

Check that the voltage changes to:
FIN2 test point: 1.1 to 2.7V (after entry of CCTM 332 y)

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage measured above is correct, go to Step 6. If it is not, go
to “CODEC and Audio Fault Finding” on page 381.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

351

Task 19 —
Biasing of
PA Driver—
DRV test point

If there is no fault in the biasing of the PAs, investigate the biasing of the PA
driver (Q306). First check the DRV test point.
Important

Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 2A.
And, when entering the CCTM command 304 z, do not
specify a value z higher than that recorded in Task 12.
Failure to do so might result in the destruction of the PA
driver.

Note the current reading on the DC power supply. As mentioned in
Step 7 of Task 12, the current will be less than 500mA.

Enter the CCTM command 304 z (where z was recorded in Task 12)
to switch on the clamp current.

Note the current reading on the DC power supply.

Compare the above current readings. The current should increase by
an amount approximately equal to the offset given in Table 12.6.
If it does, go to Task 21. If it does not, go to Step 5.

Check as follows that the voltage from the DAC is changing:
First enter the CCTM command 304 1 to switch off the bias.

Measure the voltage at the DRV test point (CDC TX DRV BIAS)
(see Figure 12.8). The voltage should be:
DRV test point: < 0.1V (after entry of CCTM 304 1)

Enter the CCTM command 304 z (where z was recorded in Task 12)
to change the DAC value of the clamp current.

The voltage should increase to:
DRV test point: 0.8 to 2.5V (after entry of CCTM 304 z)

352

If the voltage does change, go to Task 20. If it does not, go to
Step 10.

10.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode,
and go to “CODEC and Audio Fault Finding” on page 381.

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 20 —
Biasing of
PA Driver—
SET PWR test point

If the voltage at the DRV test point is correct, check that at the SET PWR test
point.
1.

Check the voltage at the SET PWR test point (see Figure 12.8):
SET PWR test point: 2 to5V

If the voltage is correct, go to Step 3. If it is not, go to Task 21.

If the PAD TOP can has already been removed, go to Step 7. If it has
not, go to Step 4.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

Remove the PAD TOP can.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Check the voltage on the gate of Q306 (see Figure 12.10):
gate of Q306: 2 to 5V

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage is correct, replace Q306; confirm the removal of the
fault and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If it is not, go to Task 23.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

353

Figure 12.10 PA driver circuitry under the PAD TOP can (VHF shown)

COMPONENTS
C310, R324, R327

R327

C317
C389

R324
C310

Q306

GATE OF Q306

Q303

C301

C313

Q300

R308

PAD TOP

C300

D1 BAND

354

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 21 —
Check Power
Control

Check the power-control circuitry if the clamp current for the PA driver is
correct or if the voltage at the SET PWR test point is incorrect.
Important

Ensure that the current limit on the DC supply is 2A.
And, when entering the CCTM command 304 z, do not
specify a value z higher than that recorded in Task 12. Failure to do so might result in the destruction of the PA driver.

Enter the CCTM command 304 z (where z was recorded in Task 12).

Note the current reading on the DC power supply.

Enter the CCTM command 114 0 to switch off the power.

Note the current reading on the DC power supply.

Compare the above current readings. The current should decrease by
an amount approximately equal to the offset given in Table 12.6.
If it does, go to Task 25 in “RF Signal Path” on page 362. If it does
not, go to Step 6.

Check that the voltage from the DAC is changing. Measure the
voltage at the PWR test point (CDC TX PWR CTL) (see Figure 12.8).

Enter the CCTM command 114 1023. The voltage should increase
to:
PWR test point: 2.4 ± 0.1V

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage at the PWR test point increases as required, go to
Task 22. If it does not, go to “CODEC and Audio Fault Finding” on
page 381.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

355

Figure 12.11 Circuitry under the DIRC TOP can (UHF shown)

356

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 22 —
Directional Coupler
and Buffer
Amplifier

Table 12.7

Cycle the power.

Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter to maximum
power.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Measure the voltage at pin 9 of IC303 in the power-control circuit
(see Figure 12.8).

The above voltage should be as given in Table 12.7. If it is, go to
Task 24. If it is not, go to Step 6.

Check the voltage at pin 5 of IC303 (or use the FWD PWR test point)
(see Figure 12.8). Note that the probe impedance might affect the
measurement.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

The voltage measured in Step 6 should be as given in Table 12.7.
If it is not, go to Step 9. If it is, go to Step 11.

Voltages at IC303 at maximum power (40 W)
Voltage (V)

Frequency band

Frequency (MHz)
Pin 9

Pin 5 (FWD PWR)

66
77
88

1.3 ± 0.5
1.5 ± 0.5
1.7 ± 0.5

1.1 ± 0.5
1.3 ± 0.5
1.4 ± 0.5

136
155
174

2.2 ± 0.5
2.3 ± 0.5
2.5 ± 0.5

1.9 ± 0.5
2.1 ± 0.5
2.3 ± 0.5

174
199.5
225

1.6 ± 0.5
1.8 ± 0.5
1.9 ± 0.5

3.0 ± 0.5
3.4 ± 0.5
3.7 ± 0.5

216
241
266

2.2 ± 0.5
2.2 ± 0.5
2.3 ± 0.5

4.3 ± 0.5
4.3 ± 0.5
4.7 ± 0.5

400
435
470

3.4 ± 0.5
3.8 ± 0.5
4.0 ± 0.5

3.3 ± 0.5
3.7 ± 0.5
3.9 ± 0.5

450
490
530

3.9 ± 0.5
4.2 ± 0.5
4.7 ± 0.5

3.8 ± 0.5
4.1 ± 0.5
4.6 ± 0.5

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

357

Task 23 —
Power Control
for PA Driver

358

Remove the DIRC TOP can.

10.

Check the components of the directional coupler (see Figure 12.11)
and go to Step 12.

11.

Check R340 between pins 6 and 7 of IC303 in the buffer amplifier
(see Figure 12.12), and then go to Step 12.

12.

Repair any fault revealed by the above checks. Replace IC303 if none
of the other components is faulty (see Figure 12.8).

13.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

In this task any faults in the path between the power-control circuit and the
PA driver will be located, as well as any fault with the PA driver.
1.

Check for short circuits at the gate of the PA driver Q306. Check
R333, R336 (see Figure 12.8), C310, R324 and R327
(see Figure 12.10) between the power-control circuit and Q306.

Repair any fault revealed by the checks in Step 1. If none of the
above-mentioned components is faulty, replace Q306
(see Figure 12.10).

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 12.12 Components of concern on the bottom-side of the board (VHF shown)

COPPER PLATE

C319

VCO BOT CAN

R3009

R396

R340
C345

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

R389

R390

R3000

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

359

Task 24 —
Power Control
and Shaping Filter

In this task any faults in the power-control and shaping-filter circuitry will
be located:
1.

Measure the voltage at pin 8 of IC303 (see Figure 12.8) in the
power-control circuit. The voltage should be:
pin 8 of IC303: 7.4 ± 0.5V

If the voltage is correct, go to Step 3. If it is not, enter the CCTM
command 32 and return to Task 23.

Measure the voltage at pin 10 of IC303 (see Figure 12.8) in the
power-control circuit. The voltage should be:
pin 10 of IC303: 4.8 ± 0.5V

If the voltage is correct, go to Step 5. If it is not, go to Step 8.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

Check C322, C324, R342, R347 (see Figure 12.8) in the powercontrol circuit.

Repair any fault revealed by the checks in Step 5. Replace IC303
(see Figure 12.8) if none of the other components is faulty. Confirm
the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If the
repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Measure the voltage at pin 1 of IC301 (see Figure 12.8) in the
shaping-filter circuit. The voltage should be:
pin 1 of IC301: 4.8 ± 0.5V

360

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

10.

If the voltage measured in Step 8 is correct, go to Step 11. If it is not,
go to Step 12.

11.

Check the components R334 (see Figure 12.8) and C319
(see Figure 12.12) and go to Step 13.

12.

Check the components between the PWR test point and pin 1 of
IC301 (see Figure 12.8) and go to Step 13.

13.

Repair any fault revealed by the checks in Step 11 and Step 12.
Replace IC301 (see Figure 12.8) if none of the other components
is faulty. Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

12.4

Introduction

■

Task 25 to Task 28: initial RF signal path

■

Task 29 and Task 30: directional coupler

■

Task 31 and Task 32: PIN switch

■

Task 33: LPF

The initial signal path includes the exciter and PA driver. The directional
coupler, PIN switch, and LPF make up the final signal path.
The measurement points for diagnosing faults in the signal path are
summarized in Figure 12.13.
Figure 12.13 Measurement points for diagnosing faults in the RF signal path
SIGNAL TYPES

SYNTHESIZER
OUTPUT
SYN TX LO

EXCITER
OUTPUT

RF
ANALOG

PAs

DRIVER

EXCITER
C301

L314

C300

TEST
CAPACITOR
GATES OF
Q309, Q310

50 TEST
LEAD TO
TEST SET

PA DRIVER
OUTPUT AT
DRAIN OF Q306

BUFFER
OUTPUT
AT C313

FREQUENCY
SYNTHESIZER

DIRECTIONAL
COUPLER

RECEIVER
PIN
SWITCH
TEST
CAPACITOR
50 TEST
LEAD TO
TEST SET

RF CONNECTOR

LPF

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

361

Task 25 —
Output of
Frequency
Synthesizer

362

The first point to check in the initial RF signal path is the output SYN TX LO
from the frequency synthesizer. This signal is input to the exciter at C300.
1.

For test purposes select a representative power level and frequency
from Table 12.8 (A4 band), Table 12.9 (B1 band), Table 12.10
(C0 band), Table 12.11 (D1 band) or Table 12.12 (H5, H6 bands).
(Note that the data for these tables were obtained using an
RFP5401A RF probe.)

To set the power level, enter the CCTM command 326 x, where x
defines the level. To set the frequency, enter the CCTM command
101 x x 0, where x is the frequency in hertz.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Use an RFP5401A RF probe or the equivalent to measure the RF
voltage after C300 (see Figure 12.14). Earth the probe to the FCL TOP
can adjacent to the PA driver circuitry. The required voltage should
be as given in Table 12.8 (A4 band), Table 12.9 (B1 band),
Table 12.10 (C0 band), Table 12.11 (D1 band) or Table 12.12
(H5, H6 bands).

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage measured above is correct, go to Task 26. If it is not, go
to Step 7.

Check C300 (see Figure 12.14). If C300 is not faulty, go to
“Frequency Synthesizer Fault Finding” on page 179. If C300 is
faulty, replace it and return to Step 2.

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 12.14 PA driver circuitry under the PAD TOP can (UHF shown)

Driver output

Exciter output at C301

Synthesizer output at C300

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Buffer output at C313

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

363

Table 12.8

RF voltages along the initial RF signal path of the VHF radio (A4 band)
RF voltages (V)

Power level
(W)

Frequency
(MHz)

Synthesizer
output

Buffer
output

Exciter
output

Driver
output

66
77
88

0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

0.4 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1

2.7 ± 0.5
2.3 ± 0.5
2.6 ± 0.5

0.98 ± 0.5
1.25 ± 0.5
0.97 ± 0.5

66
77
88

0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

0.4 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1

2.7 ± 0.5
2.4 ± 0.5
2.6 ± 0.5

1.8 ± 0.5
2.5 ± 0.5
1.9 ± 0.5

66
77
88

0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1

0.4 ± 0.1
0.5 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1

2.8 ± 0.5
2.4 ± 0.5
2.6 ± 0.5

2.5 ± 0.5
3.5 ± 0.5
2.7 ± 0.5

66
77
88

0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1

0.4 ± 0.1
0.5 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1

2.9 ± 0.5
2.3 ± 0.5
2.6 ± 0.5

3.2 ± 0.5
4.3 ± 0.5
3.1 ± 0.5

66
77
88

0.4 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.8 ± 0.1

0.6 ± 0.1
0.8 ± 0.1
0.5 ± 0.1

3.0 ± 0.5
2.3 ± 0.5
2.8 ± 0.5

7.1 ± 0.5
7.0 ± 0.5
6.1 ± 0.5

364

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Table 12.9

RF voltages along the initial RF signal path of the VHF radio (B1 band)
RF voltages (V)

Power level
(W)

Frequency
(MHz)

Synthesizer
output

Buffer
output

Exciter
output

Driver
output

136
155
174

0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

0.2 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

2.4 ± 0.5
2.5 ± 0.5
2.6 ± 0.5

1.8 ± 0.5
1.0 ± 0.5
1.5 ± 0.5

136
155
174

0.3 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

0.2 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

2.5 ± 0.5
2.6 ± 0.5
2.6 ± 0.5

3.0 ± 0.5
1.5 ± 0.5
2.6 ± 0.5

136
155
174

0.3 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

0.2 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

2.5 ± 0.5
2.6 ± 0.5
2.7 ± 0.5

4.2 ± 0.5
2.0 ± 0.5
3.8 ± 0.5

136
155
174

0.3 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

0.2 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

2.4 ± 0.5
2.4 ± 0.5
2.5 ± 0.5

3.3 ± 0.5
1.7 ± 0.5
4.5 ± 0.5

136
155
174

0.3 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

0.4 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

2.5 ± 0.5
2.5 ± 0.5
2.5 ± 0.5

8.2 ± 0.5
5.5 ± 0.5
7.7 ± 0.5

Table 12.10 RF voltages along the initial RF signal path of the VHF radio (C0 band)
RF voltages (V)
Power level
(W)

Frequency
(MHz)

Synthesizer
output

Buffer
output

Exciter
output

Driver
output

174
199.5
225

0.4 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

0.5 ± 0.1
0.6 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1

3.2 ± 0.5
3.1 ± 0.5
2.6 ± 0.5

1.5 ± 0.1
1.9 ± 0.1
1.3 ± 0.1

174
199.5
225

0.5 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1

0.6 ± 0.1
0.7 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1

2.8 ± 0.5
3.0 ± 0.5
2.6 ± 0.5

3.0 ± 0.1
3.6 ± 0.1
2.7 ± 0.1

174
199.5
225

0.4 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1

0.5 ± 0.1
0.7 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1

2.4 ± 0.5
3.0 ± 0.5
2.6 ± 0.5

4.4 ± 0.1
5.1 ± 0.1
4.0 ± 0.1

174
199.5
225

0.5 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.6 ± 0.1

0.7 ± 0.1
0.8 ± 0.1
0.5 ± 0.1

2.4 ± 0.5
2.8 ± 0.5
2.4 ± 0.5

5.0 ± 0.1
5.7 ± 0.1
5.5 ± 0.1

174
199.5
225

0.4 ± 0.1
0.5 ± 0.1
0.8 ± 0.1

0.8 ± 0.1
0.9 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1

2.7 ± 0.5
2.9 ± 0.5
2.8 ± 0.5

6.7 ± 0.1
8.1 ± 0.1
7.5 ± 0.1

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

365

Table 12.11 RF voltages along the initial RF signal path of the VHF radio (D1 band)
RF voltages (V)
Power level
(W)

Frequency
(MHz)

Synthesizer
output

Buffer
output

Exciter
output

Driver
output

216
241
266

0.3 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

3.8 ± 0.5
3.7 ± 0.5
3.5 ± 0.5

1.3 ± 0.5
1.0 ± 0.4
2.3 ± 0.9

216
241
266

0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

3.3 ± 0.5
3.2 ± 0.5
3.6 ± 0.5

3 ± 1
3 ± 1
6 ± 2

216
241
266

0.4 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

0.2 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

3.3 ± 0.5
3.6 ± 0.5
3.2 ± 0.5

4 ± 2
4 ± 2
9 ± 4

216
241
266

0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

3.8 ± 0.5
3.5 ± 0.5
3.4 ± 0.5

4 ± 2
5 ± 2
12 ± 5

216
241
266

0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

3.3 ± 0.5
3.3 ± 0.5
3.6 ± 0.5

12 ± 5
9 ± 4
20 ± 8

Table 12.12 RF voltages along the initial RF signal path of the UHF radio (H5 and H6 bands)
Power level (W)

Frequency (MHz)
H5
band

H6
band

RF voltages (V)
Synthesizer
output

Buffer
output

Exciter
output

Driver
output

400
435
470

450
490
530

0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1

4.5 ± 0.5
4.6 ± 0.5
3.9 ± 0.5

2.3 ± 0.5
1.5 ± 0.5
0.8 ± 0.5

400
435
470

450
490
530

0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

0.3 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1
0.4 ± 0.1

4.6 ± 0.5
4.6 ± 0.5
3.6 ± 0.5

3.6 ± 0.5
2.6 ± 0.5
1.2 ± 0.5

400
435
470

450
490
530

0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

0.2 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

3.9 ± 0.5
4.0 ± 0.5
3.4 ± 0.5

4.5 ± 0.5
3.9 ± 0.5
1.7 ± 0.5

400
435
470

450
490
530

0.2 ± 0.1
0.1 ± 0.1
0.1 ± 0.1

0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

3.8 ± 0.5
3.6 ± 0.5
3.0 ± 0.5

4.6 ± 0.5
4.5 ± 0.5
1.8 ± 0.5

400
435
470

450
490
530

0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1
0.2 ± 0.1

0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1
0.3 ± 0.1

4.2 ± 0.5
3.6 ± 0.5
3.2 ± 0.5

8.6 ± 0.5
8.2 ± 0.5
2.5 ± 0.5

366

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 26 —
Output of Buffer in
Exciter Circuit

Task 27 —
Output of Exciter

If the synthesizer output is correct, check the output at C313 of the buffer
amplifier in the exciter circuit.
1.

If not already done, remove the PAD TOP can.

Enter the CCTM command 326 x, where x defines the power level
selected in Task 25.

Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the frequency
selected in Task 25.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Measure the RF voltage after C313 (see Figure 12.14). (Use an
RFP5401A RF probe or the equivalent.) The required voltage
should be as given in Table 12.8 (A4 band), Table 12.9 (B1 band),
Table 12.10 (C0 band), Table 12.11 (D1 band) or Table 12.12
(H5, H6 bands).

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage measured above is correct, go to Task 27. If it is not, go
to Step 8.

Check the components around Q300 (see Figure 12.14).

Repair any fault revealed by the above checks. Replace Q300
(see Figure 12.14) if none of the other components is faulty.

10.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

If the output of the buffer amplifier is correct, check that of the exciter
at C301.
1.

With the radio still in transmit mode, measure the RF voltage after
C301 (see Figure 12.14). (Use an RFP5401A RF probe or the
equivalent.) The required voltage should be as given in Table 12.8
(A4 band), Table 12.9 (B1 band), Table 12.10 (C0 band),
Table 12.11 (D1 band) or Table 12.12 (H5, H6 bands).

If the voltage is correct, go to Task 28. If it is not, go to Step 3.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

Check the components between C313 and Q303, and between
Q303 and R308 (see Figure 12.14).

Repair any fault revealed by the above checks. Replace Q303
(see Figure 12.14) if none of the other components is faulty.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

367

Task 28 —
Output of PA Driver

368

With the radio still in transmit mode, measure the RF voltage at the
drain of Q306 (A4, B1, C0) or after C317 and C389 (D1, H5, H6)
(see Figure 12.14). (Use an RFP5401A RF probe or the equivalent.) The required voltage should be as given in Table 12.8 (A4),
Table 12.9 (B1), Table 12.10 (C0), Table 12.11 (D1) or
Table 12.12 (H5, H6).

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the voltage measured above is correct, go to Step 7. If it is not, go
to Step 4.

Check the components between C301 and Q306
(see Figure 12.14).

If the above checks reveal a fault, go to Step 6. If they do not, go to
Task 12 in “Biasing of PA Driver and PAs” on page 342.

Repair the fault. Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to
“Final Tasks” on page 157.

If not already done, remove the PAF TOP can.

Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the power level to the
maximum, and then the command 33 to place the radio in transmit
mode.

Measure the RF voltage at the gates of the PAs Q309 and Q310
(see Figure 12.15).

10.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

11.

If an RF voltage is present, there is no fault in the initial RF signal
path; go to Task 29. If there is no RF voltage, go to Step 12.

12.

Check the components of the interstage matching circuitry between
the PA driver Q306 and the gates of the PAs Q309 and Q310
(see Figure 12.15).

13.

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 12.15 Components of the interstage matching circuitry between the PA driver Q306 and the
PAs Q309 and Q310 (UHF shown)

PAF TOP can

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

PAD TOP can

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

369

Task 29 —
Check Power at
Directional Coupler

If, as determined in Task 25 to Task 28, there is no fault in the initial RF
signal path, investigate the final signal path. This part of the circuitry may
also require investigation following certain checks in “Transmitter RF
Power”. Begin by checking the directional coupler as follows:
1.

If not already done, remove the DIRC TOP can.

Remove the coupling capacitors C348, C349, C350
(see Figure 12.16).

Solder one terminal of a test capacitor to the PCB at the point shown
in Figure 12.16. Mount the capacitor vertically. Use a test capacitor
of the type GRM111, DLI C17, Murata 1210, or the equivalent.
The value of the capacitor depends on the frequency band of
the radio:
■

A4 — 100pF

■

B1, C0, D1 — 680pF

■

H5, H6 — 82pF.

Solder a 50Ω test lead to the PCB. Solder the outer sheath in the
position shown in Figure 12.16, and solder the central wire to the
other terminal of the test capacitor.

Connect the test lead to the test set.

Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level
to the maximum.

Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the lowest
frequency (in hertz) for maximum power, as given in Table 12.8
(A4), Table 12.9 (B1), Table 12.10 (C0), Table 12.11 (D1) or
Table 12.12 (H5, H6).

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Measure the RF output power. This should exceed 35W.
RF output power: more than 35W

370

10.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

11.

Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the highest
frequency (in hertz) for maximum power, as given in Table 12.8
(A4), Table 12.9 (B1), Table 12.10 (C0), Table 12.11 (D1) or
Table 12.12 (H5, H6).

12.

Repeat Step 8 to Step 10.

13.

If the power measured in both the above cases exceeds 35W, go to
Step 14. If it does not, go to Task 30.

14.

Remove the test lead and test capacitor, resolder the coupling
capacitors in position, and go to Task 31.

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 12.16 Circuitry under the DIRC TOP can, and the points for attaching the
test lead and test capacitor (UHF shown)

MOUNTING POINT
FOR TEST
CAPACITOR

SOLDER OUTER
SHEATH TO GND

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

371

Task 30 —
Repair Circuitry

If the RF output power measured in Task 29 is low, there is a fault in the
circuit between the common drain of the PAs and the test capacitor.
1.

If not already done, remove the PAF TOP can.

Check for faulty, shorted or misplaced components in the circuit
between the test capacitor and the common drain of Q309 and Q310
(see Figure 12.6).

Repair any fault revealed by the above checks and go to Step 5. If no
fault could be found, go to Step 4.

Remove the test lead and test capacitor, resolder the coupling
capacitors C348, C349 and C350 in position (see Figure 12.16),
and go to Task 25.

With the test lead still connected to the test set, enter the CCTM
command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level to the maximum.

Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the lowest
frequency (in hertz) for maximum power, as given in Table 12.8
(A4 band), Table 12.9 (B1 band), Table 12.10 (C0 band),
Table 12.11 (D1 band) or Table 12.12 (H5, H6 bands).

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Measure the RF output power. This should exceed 35 W.
RF output power: more than 35W

372

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

10.

Enter the CCTM command 101 x x 0, where x is the highest
frequency (in hertz) for maximum power, as given in Table 12.8
(A4 band), Table 12.9 (B1 band), Table 12.10 (C0 band),
Table 12.11 (D1 band) or Table 12.12 (H5, H6 bands).

11.

Repeat Steps Step 7 to Step 9.

12.

Remove the test lead and test capacitor, and resolder the coupling
capacitors C348, C349 and C350 in position (see Figure 12.16).

13.

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 31 —
Check PIN Switch

Remove the PIN TOP can.

Remove the three blocking capacitors C361, C362 and C363
(see Figure 12.17).

Solder one terminal of a test capacitor to the PCB at the point shown
in Figure 12.17. Mount the capacitor vertically. Use a test capacitor
of the type GRM111, DLI C17, Murata 1210, or the equivalent.
The value of the capacitor depends on the frequency band of
the radio:
■

A4 — 100pF

■

B1, C0, D1 — 33pF

■

H5, H6 — 22pF.

Solder a 50W test lead to the PCB. Solder the outer sheath in the
position shown in Figure 12.17, and solder the central wire to the
other terminal of the test capacitor.

Connect the test lead to the test set.

Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level
to the maximum.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Measure the RF output power. This should exceed 35W.
RF output power: more than 35W

10.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

11.

12.

Repeat Step 8 to Step 10.

13.

If the power in both the above cases exceeds 35 W, go to Step 14. If it
does not, the circuitry of the PIN switch is suspect; go to Task 32.

14.

Remove the test lead and test capacitor, resolder the blocking
capacitors in position, and go to Task 33.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

373

Figure 12.17 Circuitry under the PIN TOP can, and points for attaching the test lead and test capacitor
(UHF shown)

SOLDER OUTER
SHEATH TO GND

MOUNTING POINT
FOR TEST
CAPACITOR

374

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 32 —
Repair PIN switch

If the RF power at the PIN switch is low, the switch is not drawing the
expected current or the diode is faulty. Check the circuit as follows:
1.

Perform a diode check of D307 (see Figure 12.17). If it is not faulty,
go to Step 2. If it is, replace D307 and go to Step 3.

Check the +9V0_TX supply to the PIN switch via the following
resistors on the bottom-side of the PCB (see Figure 12.18 and
Figure 12.19):
■

A4 — R3000 and R389

■

B1 — R3000, R389 and R390

■

C0 — R3000 and R389

■

D1 — R3000 and R390

■

H5, H6 — R3000 and R389.

If any resistor is faulty, replace the resistor as well as D307. (A faulty
resistor is likely to have resulted in damage to D307.)
3.

With the test lead still connected to the test set, enter the CCTM
command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level to the maximum.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Again measure the RF output power. This should exceed 35W.
RF output power: more than 35W

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

Repeat Step 5 to Step 7.

10.

Remove the test lead and test capacitor, and resolder the blocking
capacitors C361, C362 and C363 (see Figure 12.17) in position.

11.

If the power in both the above cases is now correct, the fault has been
rectified; go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If it is not, the repair
failed: replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

375

Figure 12.18 Components of concern on the bottom-side of the board (C0, D1 bands)

COPPER PLATE

C319

VCO BOT CAN

R3009

R396

R340
C345

376

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

R389

R390

R3000

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 12.19 Components of concern on the bottom-side of the board (A4, B1, H5/H6 bands)

COPPER PLATE

VCO BOT CAN

NB BOT CAN

B1 BAND

COPPER PLATE

VCO BOT CAN

A4 BAND
H5, H6 BANDS

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

377

Figure 12.20 Circuitry under the LPF TOP can (top side)
VHF

378

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

UHF

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 33 —
Check Components
of LPF

If there are no faults in the final RF signal path up to and including the PIN
switch, then the fault should lie in the LPF. Check the LPF as follows:
1.

Remove the LPF TOP can.

Connect the RF connector to the test set.

Check the capacitors and inductors of the LPF between the PIN
switch and the RF connector. See Figure 12.20. Check for shorts,
open circuits, and faulty components. Repair any fault.

Enter the CCTM command 326 5 to set the transmitter power level
to the maximum.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.

Measure the RF output power. This should exceed 35W.
RF output power: more than 35W

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

10.

Repeat Step 6 to Step 8.

11.

If the power in both the above cases exceeds 35 W, the fault has been
rectified; go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If it does not, the repair
failed; replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

379

380

Transmitter Fault Finding (25W)

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding
This section covers the diagnosis of faults in the CODEC and audio
circuitry. There are five conditions that indicate a possible fault in the
circuitry:

Fault Conditions

■

no speaker audio or speaker audio is distorted

■

no speaker audio at auxiliary connector

■

receiver does not operate

■

no transmit modulation or modulation is distorted

■

no transmit modulation despite modulation at auxiliary connector

In the first case regarding the speaker audio, the green STATUS LED will be
operating correctly and all unmute criteria will be satisfied. In the second
case the receiver will be operating normally. In the third case the assumption
is that the receiver and power-supply circuitry were checked and no faults
were found. In the fourth case regarding the transmit modulation, the radio
will be transmitting the correct amount of RF power. In the fifth case the
transmitter will be operating normally.
Fault-Diagnosis
Procedures

The procedures for diagnosing the above faults are given below in the
following sections. In each case, however, first carry out the tasks of “Power
Supplies” on page 382. Also note that the conditions concerning the
auxiliary connector can both occur at the same time. In this case carry out
both “No Speaker Audio at Auxiliary Connector” on page 391 and “Faulty
Modulation Using Auxiliary Connector” on page 402.

CCTM Commands

The CCTM commands required in this section are listed in Table 13.1.
Full details of the commands are given in “Computer-Controlled Test
Mode (CCTM)” on page 118.

Table 13.1
Command

CCTM commands required for the diagnosis of faults in the CODEC and audio circuitry
Description

Unmute received audio

Set radio in receive mode

Set radio in transmit mode

110 x

Set level x (in range 0 to 255) of audio volume

323 x y

Generate audio tone AUD TAP IN at tap point x of tap type y

324 x y

Output audio signal at tap point x of tap type y to AUD TAP OUT

400 x

Select channel with channel number x

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

381

13.1

Power Supplies

Introduction

First check that a power supply is not the cause of the fault. Of these
supplies, the 3.3V DC supply (+3V3) will already have been checked in
“Power Supply Fault Finding” on page 163. The remaining supplies that
need to be checked are:
■

Task 1: 9V DC supply from 9V regulator (+9V0)

■

Task 2: 3V DC supply from 3V regulator (+3V0 AN)

■

Task 3: 2.5V DC supply from 2.5V regulator (+2V5 CDC)

Two other supplies used in the CODEC and audio circuitry are a 1.8V DC
supply (+1V8) from the digital board and the 13.8V DC supply (+13V8 BATT)
from the power connector. Faults in these supplies are dealt with elsewhere.
Task 1 —
9V Power Supply

First check the 9V DC supply (+9V0), which is required by IC201.
1.

Remove the board from the chassis.

Remove the CDC BOT can.

Measure the voltage +9V0 at pin 4 of IC201 (see Figure 13.1).
pin 4 of IC201: 9.0 ± 0.3V DC

Task 2 —
3V Power Supply

If the voltage is correct, go to Task 2. If it is not, go to Step 5.

The fault will be at IC201 (see Figure 13.1), since any fault with the
9V regulator in the PSU module will already have been rectified.
Therefore, check the soldering of IC201. Repair any fault.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed or the fault could not be found, replace
the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

If the 9V supply is correct, check the 3V DC supply (+3V0 AN) next.
1.

Measure the voltage +3V0 AN at the TP601 test point
(see Figure 13.1).
TP601 test point: 2.9 ± 0.3V DC

382

If the voltage is correct, go to Task 3. If it is not, go to Step 3.

The 3V regulator IC603 is suspect (see Figure 13.1). Check the
regulator as described in Task 3 of “Power Supply Fault Finding” on
page 168.

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 13.1

Power-supply circuitry for the CODEC and audio circuitry under the CDC BOT can

LO2 BOT CAN

CAN FOR
DIGITAL
BOARD

Task 3 —
2.5V Power Supply

If the 9V and 3V supplies are correct, the remaining power supply to check
is the 2.5V DC supply (+2V5 CDC).
1.

Measure the voltage +2V5 CDC at pin 5 of IC604 (see Figure 13.1).
pin 5 of IC604: 2.5 ± 0.3V DC

If the voltage is correct, go to Step 4. If it is not, go to Step 3.

The 2.5V regulator IC604 is suspect (see Figure 13.1). Check the
regulator as described in Task 3 of “Power Supply Fault Finding” on
page 168.

Proceed to the section relevant to the fault exhibited:
■

“Faulty Speaker Audio” (distorted or no speaker audio)

■

“No Speaker Audio at Auxiliary Connector” (no speaker audio at
auxiliary connector)

■

“Faulty Receiver” (receiver does not operate)

■

“Faulty Modulation” (distorted or no transmit modulation)

■

“Faulty Modulation Using Auxiliary Connector” (modulation at
auxiliary connector only)

Further details are given in the introduction to the section.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

383

13.2

Faulty Speaker Audio

Introduction

This section covers the case where the green STATUS LED is operating
correctly and all unmute criteria are satisfied, but there is either no speaker
audio or the speaker audio is distorted. There are four tasks:
■

Task 4: check audio power amplifier

■

Task 5: check speaker outputs

■

Task 6: check ITF VOL WIP DC input signal

■

Task 7: check ITF RX BEEP IN input signal

The next section deals with the case where there is no speaker audio at the
auxiliary connector.
Figure 13.2

384

Circuitry in the vicinity of IC202 (top side)

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 4 —
Check Audio
Power Amplifier

If there is no fault with the power supplies, check the inputs to the audio PA
as follows. This check is only applicable, however, if the output of the voiceband CODEC is correct and the signal level varies as the volume is varied.
1.

Use the programming application to find the frequency selected for
channel 1.

In user mode apply an on-channel RF signal of –47dBm with 60%,
1kHz deviation. The channel must not have signalling enabled.
Set the volume to maximum.

Use an oscilloscope probe to check the output of the voice-band
CODEC at the TP200 test point (see Figure 13.2). The signal
should be:
TP200 test point: sine wave of 100mVpp with 0.6V DC offset

If the above signal is correct, go to Step 5. If it is not, go to Task 7.

Vary the volume control. This should cause the signal level at the
TP200 test point (see Figure 13.2) to vary. If it does, go to Step 6.
If it does not, go to Task 6.

Check the voltage at pin 11 of IC202 (see Figure 13.2):
pin 11 of IC202: at least 8V DC

If the voltage is correct, go to Step 9. If it is not, check for and repair
any faults in the level-translation circuits incorporating Q200 and
Q201 (see Figure 13.2).

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

Check the digital signals DIG AUD PA EN1 at R200 and DIG AUD PA EN2 at
R202 (see Figure 13.2):
R200 (DIG AUD PA EN1): 3.3V DC
R202 (DIG AUD PA EN2): 0.0V DC

10.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

If the signals are correct, go to Task 5. If they are not, check the
programming and test set-up; otherwise the digital board is faulty;
replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

385

Task 5 —
Check Speaker
Outputs

If the inputs to the audio PA are not faulty, check the speaker outputs from
the PA.
1.

Check the positive and negative speaker outputs AUD ITF SPK+ and AUD
ITF SPK– at pins 3 and 8 respectively of IC202 (see Figure 13.2):
pin 3 of IC202 (AUD ITF SPK+): approximately half-rail bias
pin 8 of IC202 (AUD ITF SPK–): approximately half-rail bias

If the speaker outputs are correct, go to Step 5. If they are not, go to
Step 3.

Check for and repair any soldering faults around IC202
(see Figure 13.2), or else replace IC202.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

With the volume at maximum, check each speaker output at pins 3
and 8 of IC202 (see Figure 13.2):
pin 3 of IC202 (AUD ITF SPK+): approximately 9.5Vpp AC
pin 8 of IC202 (AUD ITF SPK–): approximately 9.5Vpp AC

386

If the speaker outputs are correct, the fault is unknown (it could be
intermittent); replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.
If there is no AC, go to Step 7.

Check that C204 and R214 (see Figure 13.2) are not faulty and are
correctly soldered. Repair any fault.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed or the fault could not be found, replace
the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Circuitry under the CDC TOP can, and adjacent interface circuitry

Junction of
R708 and C706

Junction of
R234 and R235

Figure 13.3

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

387

Task 6 —
Check ITF VOL WIP DC
Input Signal

If the output of the voice-band CODEC is correct, but the signal level does
not vary as the volume control is varied, check the ITF VOL WIP DC signal.
1.

Check the voltage on the VOL WIP DC line at the junction of R708 and
C706 (see Figure 13.3). As the volume varies, the voltage should
vary as follows.
junction of R708 and C706: 0.0 to 1.2V as volume varies

If the voltage varies as expected, go to Step 5. If it does not, go to
Step 3.

Check the control-head connector SK100. Repair or replace the
connector if necessary.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed or the fault could not be found, replace
the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Remove the CDC TOP can.

Check the voltage at the junction of R234 and R235
(see Figure 13.3). As the volume varies, the voltage should vary as
follows.
junction of R234 and R235: 0.0 to 0.6V as volume varies

388

If the voltage varies as expected, CODEC 1 (IC204) is suspect;
replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157. If it does not,
go to Step 8.

Check for continuity across R234, and check that R235 is properly
soldered (see Figure 13.3). Repair any fault.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed or the fault could not be found, replace
the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 13.4

Circuitry under the CDC BOT can

CDC AUD TAP OUT

JUNCTION OF R218 AND IC204

LO2 BOT CAN

CAN FOR
DIGITAL
BOARD

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

389

Task 7 —
Check ITF RX BEEP IN
Input Signal

If the output of the voice-band CODEC is not correct, check the
ITF RX BEEP IN signal.
1.

If not already done, remove the CDC BOT can.

Check the signal at the junction of R218 and IC204
(see Figure 13.4). The signal should be:
junction of R218 and IC204: sine wave about 1Vpp with 1.2V DC offset

390

If the signal is correct, go to Step 4. If it is not, either CODEC 1
(IC204) or the digital board is faulty; replace the board and go to
“Final Tasks” on page 157.

Check for continuity between the TP200 test point and IC204 via
R214, R215 (see Figure 13.2) and R218 (see Figure 13.4).
Repair any fault; if necessary, replace R214, R215 or R218.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed or the fault could not be found, replace
the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 13.5

Circuitry in the vicinity of the internal-options connector SK102 (top side)

Internal-options
connector

13.3

No Speaker Audio at Auxiliary Connector

Introduction

This section covers the case where the receiver operates normally but there
is no speaker audio at the auxiliary connector. In other words, there is no
signal at pin 13 (AUD TAP OUT) of the connector. The fault-diagnosis
procedure comprises two tasks:
■

Task 8: check signal from CODEC

■

Task 9: check LPF and buffer amplifier in CODEC circuitry

These tasks need to be followed by those of “Faulty Modulation Using
Auxiliary Connector” on page 402 if there is also a fault with the transmit
modulation using the auxiliary connector.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

391

Task 8 —
Check Signal
from CODEC

First generate an appropriate audio test signal and check whether the signal
is present at the output of the CODEC circuitry.
1.

Enter the CCTM command 400 x, where x is a valid channel number.
(A suitable channel will depend on the programming of the radio.)

Enter the CCTM command 21 to force unmuting of the received
audio signal.

Enter the CCTM command 110 128 to set the audio level at its
midpoint.

At the test set apply 60%, 1kHz modulation to the RF signal. Reduce
the volume to a minimum.

Enter the CCTM command 324 r5.

Check that the received signal is present at pin 2 (AUD TAP OUT) of the
internal-options connector SK102 (see Figure 13.5) (alternatively,
the measurement point for CDC AUD TAP OUT shown in Figure 13.4).
The signal should be:
pin 2 of internal-options connector: received signal with 2.4V DC offset

392

If the above signal is correct, go to Step 8. If it is not, go to Task 9.

Check the components in the path from pin 13 of the auxiliary
connector SK101 to the CODEC and audio circuitry. These are
C719 and L708 (see Figure 13.6) and the link R747
(see Figure 13.5). Also check the auxiliary connector itself. Repair
any fault.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Step 10. If the repair failed
or the fault could not be found, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

10.

If there is also a fault with the transmit modulation, notwithstanding
modulation at the auxiliary connector, go to Task 15 of “Faulty
Modulation Using Auxiliary Connector” on page 402. If there is no
other fault, go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 13.6

Circuitry in the vicinity of the auxiliary connector (bottom side)

AUXILIARY CONNECTOR
SK101

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

393

Task 9 —
Check LPF and
Buffer Amplifier

If there is no test signal at the internal-options connector, then either
CODEC 1 is faulty or there is a fault in the LPF or buffer amplifier.
1.

Remove the CDC BOT can.

Check the signal at the junction between R224 and IC204
(see Figure 13.7). This should be:
junction of R224 and IC204: 0.7Vpp with 2.4V DC offset

If the above signal is correct, go to Step 4. If it is not, CODEC 1
(IC204) is faulty; replace the board and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157.

Check the voltage at pin 1 of IC201 (see Figure 13.7).
pin 1 of IC201: 1.2V

If the voltage is correct, go to Step 6. If it is not, check the LPF circuit
based on IC201 (pins 1 to 3) (see Figure 13.7). Repair any fault and
conclude with Step 9.

Check the voltage at pin 7 of IC201 (see Figure 13.7).
pin 7 of IC201: 2.4V

394

If the voltage is correct, go to Step 8. If it is not, check the buffer
amplifier based on IC201 (pins 5 to 7) (see Figure 13.7). Repair any
fault and conclude with Step 9.

Check R207 and R208 (see Figure 13.7). Repair any fault and
conclude with Step 9.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to Step 10. If the repair failed
or the fault could not be found, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

10.

If there is also a fault with the transmit modulation, notwithstanding
modulation at the auxiliary connector, go to “Faulty Modulation
Using Auxiliary Connector” on page 402. If there is no other fault,
go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 13.7

Circuitry under the CDC BOT can
CAN FOR DIGITAL BOARD

LO2 BOT CAN

JUNCTION
OF R224
AND IC204

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

395

13.4

Faulty Receiver

Introduction

This section covers the case where the receiver does not operate, although
there is no apparent fault in the receiver circuit itself. There are two tasks:
■

Task 10: check level shifter

■

Task 11: check QN test point

The latter check will isolate the module at fault if the level shifter is not the
cause of the problem.
Task 10 —
Check Level Shifter

Check the operation of the base-band CODEC and receiver AGC as
described below. This concerns the level-shifter circuit. It is assumed that the
receiver and power-supply circuitry were checked and no faults were found.
1.

If not already done, remove the CDC BOT can.

With no RF signal applied, check the voltage at pin 14 of IC201
(see Figure 13.7):
pin 14 of IC201: more than 2.5V DC

If the above voltage is correct, go to Task 11. If it is not, go to Step 4.

Check the voltage at pin 12 of IC201 (see Figure 13.7):
pin 12 of IC201: more than 1V DC

396

If the above voltage is correct, go to Step 8. If it is not, go to Step 6.

Check for and repair any shorts to ground at the junction of R238
and pin 12 of IC201 (see Figure 13.7).

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed or the fault could not be found, replace
the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Check the circuitry (R238, R239, R240) around pins 12, 13 and 14
of IC201 (see Figure 13.7). Repair any fault.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed or the fault could not be found, replace
the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 13.8

Circuitry in the vicinity of the CDC TOP can (UHF shown)

Junction of
C708 and C732

Task 11 —
Check QN Test Point

If the level shifter is not faulty, check the signal at the QN test point. This will
ascertain whether the digital board, CODEC 1, or the receiver is at fault.
1.

Use the programming application to find the frequency selected for
channel 1.

Apply a strong on-channel signal.

Check that a sine wave is present at the QN test point (there is access
through a hole in the IF TOP can — see Figure 13.8).
QN test point: sine wave

If there is a sine wave present, go to Step 5. If there is not, go to
“Receiver Fault Finding” on page 239.

Either the digital board or CODEC 1 (IC204) is faulty; replace the
board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

397

13.5

Faulty Modulation

Introduction

This section covers the case where the radio transmits the correct amount of
RF power, but there is either no modulation or the modulation is distorted.
There are three tasks:
■

Task 12: initial checks

■

Task 13: check 2.3V DC supply

■

Task 14: check bias network

The initial checks will determine whether the frequency synthesizer, the
2.3V supply, or the bias network is at fault.
Task 12 —
Initial Checks

Carry out the following checks to isolate the part of the circuitry that is
faulty.
1.

Apply a 1kHz audio signal of 20 mVpp at the microphone input on
the control head.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.
(The frequency is that of channel 1.)

Check that the 1kHz signal appears at the TP503 test point
(see Figure 13.8).
TP503 test point: 1kHz signal

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the 1kHz signal is present, go to “Frequency Synthesizer Fault
Finding” on page 179. If it is not, go to Step 6.

With no microphone connected, check the voltage at the junction of
C708 and C732 (CH MIC AUD) (see Figure 13.8):
junction of C708 and C732: approximately 3V

398

If the above voltage is correct, go to Task 14; the bias network is
suspect. If it is not, go to Task 13; the 2.3V supply is suspect.

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 13.9

Circuitry in under the CDC BOT can

LO2 BOT CAN

CAN FOR
DIGITAL
BOARD

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

399

Task 13 —
Check 2.3V Supply

If the CH MIC AUD signal is not as expected, the 2.3V supply needs to be
checked.
1.

If not already done, remove the CDC BOT can.

Check the voltage across C202 (see Figure 13.9):
voltage across C202: 3V

Task 14 —
Check Bias Network

If the above voltage is correct, go to Task 14. If it is not, go to Step 4.

Check the soldering of R209, and check for shorts to ground at C202
(see Figure 13.9). Repair any fault.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed or the fault could not be found, replace
the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

If the signal at the TP503 test point is incorrect, but the other checks in the
above tasks reveal no fault, check the bias network.
1.

Remove the CDC TOP can.

Check the voltage at the junction of R229 and R232
(see Figure 13.10):
junction of R229 and R232: 1.5V DC

400

If the voltage is correct, go to Step 4. If it is not, go to Step 5.

CODEC 1 (IC204) is faulty; replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

Check the soldering of R229 and R232, and check for shorts across
R232 (see Figure 13.10). Repair any fault.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed or the fault could not be found, replace
the board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Figure 13.10 Circuitry under the CDC TOP can

JUNCTION OF
R229 AND R232

ITF AUD TAP IN
JUNCTION OF R237 AND R241

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

401

13.6

Faulty Modulation Using Auxiliary Connector

Introduction

This section covers the case where the transmitter operates normally but
there is no modulation (although there is modulation at the auxiliary
connector). There are two tasks:
■

Task 15: apply AUD TAP IN signal

■

Task 16: check CODEC 2 device

If there was also a fault with the speaker audio at the auxiliary connector, it
is assumed that this has now been rectified.
Task 15 —
Apply AUD TAP IN
Signal

First check the modulation and, if necessary, the DC offset.
1.

Enter the CCTM command 33 to place the radio in transmit mode.
(The frequency is that of channel 1.)

Check the modulation via the microphone input.

Enter the CCTM command 32 to place the radio in receive mode.

If the modulation is correct, go to Step 5. If it is not, go to Task 12
of “Faulty Modulation” on page 398.

Apply a 1kHz AC-coupled signal of 0.7Vpp at pin 7 (AUD TAP IN) of
the auxiliary connector (alternatively, as ITF AUD TAP IN at the junction
of R237 and R241 — see Figure 13.10).

Enter the CCTM command 323 t5.

Check the DC offset voltage at pin 7:
pin 7 of auxiliary connector: approximately 1.5V DC offset

402

If the above DC offset is correct, go to Step 9. If it is not, go to
Step 11.

Remove the CDC TOP can.

10.

Check for and repair any soldering faults around IC205, or else
replace IC205 (see Figure 13.10). Conclude with Step 12.

11.

Check for shorts at pin 7 of the auxiliary connector. If there are none,
go to Task 16. If there are, repair the fault and conclude with Step 12.

12.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Task 16 —
Check CODEC 2
Device

If the DC offset measured in Task 15 is incorrect but there is no fault with
the auxiliary connector, check the CODEC 2 device.
1.

Remove the CDC TOP can.

Check the voltage at both ends of R241 (see Figure 13.10):
R241: 1.5V DC at both ends

If the voltages are correct, go to Step 4. If they are not, go to Step 6.

Check for and repair any soldering faults around IC205, or else
replace IC205 (see Figure 13.10).

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

Remove R241.

Check the voltage at pin 3 of IC205 (see Figure 13.10):
pin 3 of IC205: 1.5V DC

If the above voltage is correct, go to Step 9. If it is not, replace the
board and go to “Final Tasks” on page 157.

Check for and repair any soldering faults around R241 and IC205
(see Figure 13.10).

10.

Confirm the removal of the fault and go to “Final Tasks” on
page 157. If the repair failed, replace the board and go to “Final
Tasks” on page 157.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

403

404

CODEC and Audio Fault Finding

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Overview

Fault Finding of Control Head with
Graphical Display
This section describes the fault finding of the control head with graphical
display for the following faults:
■

power supply faulty (initial check)

■

LCD display faulty

■

LCD backlighting faulty

■

LCD contrast faulty

■

LCD heating faulty

■

function key LEDs or status LEDs faulty

■

keypad backlighting faulty

■

ON/OFF

■

function, scroll, or selection keys faulty

■

speaker faulty

■

volume control faulty

■

PTT faulty

key faulty

The faults can be detected by visual inspection (refer to “Check the
User Interface” on page 153) or using the CCTM commands in Table 14.1
on page 406.
General

The following applies for all fault finding procedures:
Important

Do not disconnect or connect the control head while
power is supplied to the radio.

■

To connect to ground use one of the screw bosses of the metal
spaceframe or the screw bosses of the radio body.

■

If the radio does not switch on when power is supplied, the radio may
be programmed to go into the status it was in when powered down.
Connect a known good control head, power up the radio, and change
the relevant setting in the programming application. Remember to
program the original setting before returning the radio to the customer.

■

For disassembly and re-assembly instructions, refer to “Disassembling
and Reassembling the Control Head” on page 141.

■

If the repair fails or no fault could be found, replace the control-head
board.

■

After completing the repair, carry out the tasks in “Initial Tasks” on
page 149.

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

405

14.1

CCTM Commands
The following CCTM commands are used during the fault finding of the
control head:

Table 14.1

CCTM commands for fault finding of the control head

CCTM command

Entry at keyboard

Response on screen

1000 – All function key LEDs and status LEDs 1000 0 = off
sequentially switches the function key LEDs and 1000 1 = on
the status LEDs on and off

none

1001 – Individual function key LEDs and
status LEDs
switches individual LEDs on and off

1001 x y
none
where x is the LED number (0=F1,
1=F4, 2=yellow, 3=green, 4=red),
and y is the state (0=off, 1=on)

1002 – LED intensity
sets the LED intensity

1002 0 = off
1002 1 = low
1002 2 = medium
1002 3 = high

none

1003 – Keypad backlighting
Activate keypad backlighting at specified
intensity

1003 0 = off
1003 1 = low
1003 2 = medium
1003 3 = high

none

1004 – LCD backlighting
Activate LCD backlighting at specified intensity

1004 0 = off
1004 1 = low
1004 2 = medium
1004 3 = high

none

1005 – LCD contrast
sets the LCD contrast (16 levels)

1005 x
where x is the contrast level
(0 to 15)

none

1006 – LCD elements
switches all LCD elements on and off

1006 0 = off
1006 1 = on

none

1007 – LCD temperature sensor
Reads the LCD temperature sensor

1007

value between 00 (0)
and FF (255)

1008 – LCD heating
switches the LCD heating on and off

1008 0 = off
1008 1 = on

1009 – Key press
detects and notifies individual key press and
release events

1009 0 = off
1009 1 = on

serial output

1010 – Volume potentiometer
reads and notifies the volume potentiometer
setting

1010

value between 00 (0)
and FF (255)

1011 – Microphone
selects the microphone input source

1011 0 = microphone connector
1011 2 = covert microphone

none

406

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

The following CCTM commands are used during the fault finding of the
remote control-head kit:
Table 14.2

CCTM commands for fault finding of the remote control-head kit

CCTM command

Entry at keyboard

Response on screen

1012 – Remote kit
turns the audio amplifier on and off

1012 0 = off
1012 1 = on

none

1013 – Mute audio amplifier
mutes and unmutes the audio amplifier

1012 0 = mute
1012 1 =unmute

none

1014 – Digital potentiometer
reads the digital potentiometer

1014

value between 0 and
255

1017 – Audio amplifier gain
sets the audio amplifier gain (4 levels)

1017 x
where x is the gain (0 to 3)

none

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
© Tait Electronics Limited June 2006

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

407

14.2

Power Supply Faulty
A 3.3V regulator (U1) converts the switched 13.8V supply from the radio
body to 3.3V. A 1.5V regulator (U203) converts the 3.3V to 1.5V.
A power-sense module (U202) verifies the outputs of the voltage regulators
and—in the case of a fault—creates a power reset signal which is processed
by the FPGA. If the start-up of the control head fails, the radio body reduces
the switched 13.8V supply shortly after power is supplied.

2
IN
1
EN

L201

3V3

E202

3V3

R206

C14

C210

R205

D201

8
VCC
1
OUT
2
SYNC
4
6
COMP U1 VREF
3
INH
5
FB
GND
7
GND

E203

4
OUT
U203 RST 5
GND
3 6

1V5
1V5

C202

C12

R18 C13

C206
R210

Q201

C201

R208

R16 D1
R17

ControlHead
Connector

C11

C207

J103

13V8
2

Circuit diagram of the power supply circuitry

C205

Figure 14.1

FPGA

R202
MR
PWR WDT

PWR RESET

D203
K2 AA

C204

S201

K1 AA

D203

R201

4
3
1
MR
RST
6
7
PFI U202 PFO
8
2
WDI
WDI
GND
5

3V3

R203

R204
DNI

3V3

For all faults, check that the supply voltages are correct:
1.

Check the 3.3V supply voltage between E202 and C210.
E202/C210: 3.3V

If the signal is correct, continue with Step 4.
If the signal is not correct, visually inspect the components E202,
D201, L201, R205, and R206 for open or shorted contacts.
Replace if necessary. Continue with Step 2.
2.

Check the 13.8V supply voltage (9.7V to 17.2V) between pin 2 of
the control-head connector J103 and pin 8 of U1.
J103 pin 2: 13.8V (Vs =9.7V…17.2V)
U1 pin 8: 13.8V (Vs =9.7V…17.2V)

If the signal is correct, continue with Step 3.
Note

408

A fault in the control head can cause the radio body to reduce the
switched 13.8V supply shortly after power is supplied. In this case,
the control head must be supplied directly through pin 2 of connector J103.

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

If the signal is not correct, check the 13.8V supply voltage from the
radio body. Return to Step 1.
3.

Check the inhibit signal at pin 3 of U1.
U1 pin 3: high: >2.2V, low: < 0.7V
D1: Vs – 5.1V

If the signal is above 2.2V, visually inspect the components D1, R16,
R17, R208, and Q201 for open or shorted contacts. Replace if necessary. Return to Step 1.
If the signal is low, replace U1. Return to Step 1.
4.

Check the 1.5V supply voltage at pin 4 of U203.
U203 pin 4: 1.5V

If the signal is correct, continue with Step 6.
If the signal is not correct, continue with Step 5.
5.

Check E203 for continuity.
E203: 1.5V

If E203 is correct, continue with Step 6
If E203 is faulty, replace E203 and return to Step 4.
6.

U202 detects a possible power failure and generates an output signal
on pin 7. Check whether this signal is low.
U202 pin 4: 3.3V
U202 pin 7: 3.3V

If pin 4 measures 3.3V and pin 7 is low, replace U202.
If pin 4 measures 3.3V and pin 7 is high, replace U203.
Figure 14.2

PCB layout of the power supply circuitry

Junction of C210 and E202

top side

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

409

14.3

LCD Display Faulty
The LCD module is connected to the control-head board via the LCD
connector. The LCD module display is controlled by a serial data link to the
FPGA. A faulty LCD display can be caused by the following:
■

a loose or dirty LCD loom connection,

■

a faulty LCD, or

■

a fault on the control-head board

Note

Figure 14.3

This section only deals with the display of the LCD. For faults of
the LCD backlighting, refer to “LCD Backlighting Faulty” on
page 412.

Circuit diagram of the LCD circuitry
3V3
LCD BACKLIGHT CTRL

3V3

Q102

LCD HEATER CTRL

Q102

FPGA
LCD RESETN
LCD D/C
LCD SCLK
LCD DAT
LCD CEN

3V3

LCD RESETN
LCD D/C
LCD SCLK
LCD DAT
LCD CEN
LED

R7
R5
R8
R6

E108
HEATER

C101

C102
C103

U601

LCD Connector
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

J102

LCD RESETN
2

Note

If some of the LCD pixels are faulty (usually complete rows or
lines), send CCTM command 1006 1 to activate all LCD pixels.
If some of the LCD pixels are faulty, replace the LCD.

If the LCD display is faulty:
1.

410

Disconnect the LCD loom, visually inspect and clean the contacts,
and reconnect the LCD loom. Visually inspect connector J102 for
open or shorted contacts.

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

Check the 3.3V supply voltage at pin 2 of the LCD connector J102.
J102 pin 2: 3.3V

If the signal is not correct, refer to “Power Supply Faulty” on
page 408.
Tip

For a quick check of the LCD without having to disassemble the
control head, connect a good LCD to the control head, or disconnect the LCD loom and connect it to a good control head.

Replace the LCD. Carefully remove the protective plastic film from
the LCD. Take care not to scratch the soft polarizer material on the
top side of the LCD.

Use an oscilloscope to check the signals of pins 3 to 7 of connector
J102.
J102 pins 3 to 7:

The signals should be switching 0 to 3.3V in bursts of
0.125ms at approximately 1s intervals.

If any of the signals are missing or distorted, remove can E100 and
check for continuity between the FPGA and the LCD connector.
If necessary, replace the corresponding 100Ω resistor(s) R4 to R8.
Figure 14.4

PCB layout of the LCD circuitry

top side

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

411

14.4

LCD Backlighting Faulty
The backlighting incorporated in the LCD module is controlled by a data
line from the FPGA, which switches a transistor on MOSFET Q102.
Note

The LCD backlighting has four brightness settings: off=GND,
on=3.3V, and two intermediate settings which are implemented
by pulse-width modulation.

For a circuit diagram and PCB layout, refer to Figure 14.3 on page 410 and
Figure 14.4 on page 411.
If the LCD backlighting is faulty:
1.

Make sure that LCD backlighting has been enabled in the programming application.

Check the 3.3V supply voltage at pin 1 (S1) of Q102.
Q102 pin 1 (S1): 3.3V

If the signal is correct, continue with Step 3.
If the signal is not correct, refer to “Power Supply Faulty” on
page 408
3.

Send CCTM command 1004 3 to switch on LCD backlighting.

Check the signal at pin 2 (G1) of Q102.
Q102 pin 2 (G1): GND (with backlighting switched on)

If the signal is correct, continue with Step 5.
If the signal is not correct, visually inspect pin 2 for open contact.
Otherwise the FPGA is faulty and the control-head board must be
replaced.
5.

Check the signal at pin 7 (DA1) of Q102.
Q102 pin 7 (D1A): 3.3V (with backlighting switched on)

If the signal is correct, continue with Step 6.
If the signal is not correct, replace Q102.
6.

Visually inspect whether the contact of pin 8 of connector J102 is
open or shorted. Check the signal at pin 8 of connector J102.
J102 pin 8: 3.3V (with backlighting switched on)

If the signal is correct, replace the LCD.

412

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

14.5

LCD Heating Faulty
The heating incorporated in the LCD module is controlled by a data line
from the FPGA, which switches a transistor on MOSFET Q102.
A temperature signal from the LCD module is converted to a digital signal
by an analog/digital converter (U601) and processed by the FPGA.
Note

The temperature sensor signal is independent from the heating
and is also used to control the LCD contrast.

For a circuit diagram and PCB layout, refer to Figure 14.3 on page 410 and
Figure 14.4 on page 411.
If the LCD heating is faulty:
1.

Check the temperature sensor signal at pin 14 of J102.
J102 pin 14: 1.52V at 30°C, 1.58V at 25°C, 1.64V at 20°C, 1.69V at 15°C

If the signal is below 0.7V (low) or above 2.5V, (high), the LCD temperature sensor is faulty.
2.

Send CCTM command 1007 to read the temperature sensor value.
If the value does not correspond to the ambient temperature, U601
is faulty.

Check the 3.3V supply voltage at pin 3 (S2) of Q102.
Q102 pin 3 (S2): GND

If the signal is not correct, refer to “Power Supply Faulty” on
page 408.
4.

Check the signal at pin 4 (G2) of Q102.
Q102 pin 4 (G2): GND (with heating switched on)

If the signal is not correct, visually inspect pin 4 for open contact.
Otherwise the FPGA is faulty and the control-head board must be
replaced.
5.

Check the signal at pin 5 (DA2) of Q102.
Q102 pin 5 (D2A): 3.3V (with heating switched on)

If the signal is missing, replace Q102.
6.

Visually inspect pins 10 and 12 of connector J102 for open or shorted
contacts.

Check the signal at pins 10 and 12 of connector J102.
J102 pins 10 and 12: 3.3V (with heating switched on)

If the signal is not correct, replace the LCD.

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

413

14.6

Function Key LEDs or Status LEDs Faulty
The function key LEDs (F1 and F4) and the red, green and amber status
LEDs each are controlled by an FPGA signal and a transistor (Q604 to
Q608). The brightness level is controlled by two FPGA signals, resulting in
four intensity levels (off, low, medium and high).

Figure 14.5

Circuit diagram of the function key LEDs and status LEDs
3V3

3V3

R35

R34

F1 Key

R601

IND BRIGHT1
IND BRIGHT2

D613

Q604

3V3
3V3

F4 Key

D614

Q605

3V3

R36

Red

D615

Green

Q606

D616

Amber

Q607

D617

Q608

R602
R603

R604

R605

R609

R612

R616

FPGA
LED FUNC 1
LED FUNC 4
LED IND TX
LED IND RX
LED IND BUSY

LED Faulty

If one of the function key LEDs or status LEDs is faulty:
1.

Send CCTM command 1001 x 1 (where x is the LED number:
0=F1, 1=F4, 2=amber, 3=green, 4=red) to activate the relevant
LED.

Check the resistors R34, R35, and R36 in the paths of the green
LEDs.
R34: 0Ω
R35: 0Ω
R36: 0Ω

Measure the voltage at the point between the LED and the transistor.
D613/Q604 (F1 key LED):
D614/Q605 (F4 key LED):
D615/Q606 (red status LED):
D616/Q607 (green status LED):
D617/Q608 (amber status LED):

1.87V (on)
1.87V (on)
1.92V (on)
1.87V (on)
1.89V (on)

1.40V (off)
1.40V (off)
1.57V (off)
1.40V (off)
1.48V (off)

If the voltage is incorrect, replace the LED.
4.
LED Intensity Faulty

414

Replace the corresponding transistor.

If the intensity of the LEDs is faulty:
1.

Send CCTM command 1001 0 1 to activate the LED of the F1 key.

Send CCTM command 1002 3 to set the LED intensity level to high.

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

Check the resistors R601 and R602, and replace if necessary.
R601: 2.2kΩ
R602: 5.62kΩ

If the resistors are okay, the FPGA is faulty and the control-head
board must be replaced.
Figure 14.6

PCB layout of the function key LED and status LED circuitry

top side

top side
bottom side

bottom side

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

415

14.7

Keypad Backlighting Faulty
The keypad backlighting LEDs are controlled by two FPGA signals and two
transistors (Q2), resulting in four intensity levels (off, low, medium and
high). The keypad backlighting LEDs are arranged in two groups for the
main keypad and one group for the on/off keypad, each group consisting of
three LEDs.

Figure 14.7

Circuit diagram of the keypad backlighting circuitry
Main Keypad
3V3

KEY BRIGHT0

47K
10K

FPGA

13V8

3V3

R607

13V8

R30

R617

R614

D607

D609

D605

D610

D611

D606

D608

D612

Q603

Q609

Q610

R615

R618

R619

R611

KEY BRIGHT1

R613

One LED or
One Group of LEDs
Faulty

D618

Send CCTM command 1003 x (where x is the intensity: 0=off,
1=low, 2=medium, 3=high) to switch on keypad backlighting.

Check the 13.8V supply voltage of the relevant branch.

From top to bottom, check the resistor, the three LEDs, and the
transistor of the relevant branch for continuity.
R617: 4.7Ω
D607: 1.9V (on)
D609: 1.9V (on)
D611: 1.9V (on)
Q609: 1.9V (on)
R618: 56Ω

R614: 4.7Ω
D605: 1.9V (on)
D606: 1.9V (on)
D618: 1.9V (on)
Q610: 1.9V (on)
R619: 56Ω

If all LEDs are faulty or the intensity is faulty:
1.

416

On/Off
Keypad

If one LED or one group of three LEDs is faulty:

R30: 4.7Ω
D607: 1.9V (on)
D610: 1.9V (on)
D608: 1.9V (on)
Q603: 1.9V (on)
R615: 56Ω

All LEDs Faulty or
Intensity Faulty

13V8

Send CCTM command 1003 x (where x is the intensity: 0=off,
1=low, 2=medium, 3=high) to switch on keypad backlighting.

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

With the intensity set to high, check the signals at pins 2 (B1) and 5
(B2) of Q2.
Q2 pin 2 (B1): GND
Q2 pin 5 (B2): GND

If any of these signals are incorrect, the FPGA is faulty and the control-head board must be replaced.
3.

Check the signals at pins 6 (C1) and 3 (C2) of Q2. Check the signals
at pins 1 (E1) and 4 (E2) of Q2.
Q2 pin 6 (C1): 3.3V
Q2 pin 3 (C2): 3.3V
Q2 pin 1 (E1): 3.3V
Q2 pin 4 (E2): 3.3V

If any of these signals are incorrect, Q2 is faulty.
4.

Check the resistors R607, 611, and R613 for shorted or open
circuits.
R607: 3.3kΩ
R611: 2.2kΩ
R613: 1kΩ

Figure 14.8

PCB layout of the keypad backlighting circuitry

top side

top side
bottom side

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

417

14.8

On/Off Key Faulty
When battery power (13.8V) is applied to the radio, a press of the ON/OFF key
will create an active low signal (CH ON OFF) back to the radio body to initiate
the power-on or power-off sequence. This key-press will also be detected
by the FPGA of the control head through Q611 as an active high signal
(POWER ON OFF 3V3). For more information on the start-up process, refer to
“Software Architecture” on page 47.
Figure 14.9

Circuit diagram of the ON/OFF key
3V3

Control-Head
Connector

13V8

R628
R606

J103

POWER ON OFF 3V3

R626

CH ON OFF
9

R610

FPGA

Q611

R627

Power
On/Off

S610
2

If the ON/OFF key is faulty:
1.

Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens-cleaning cloth to clean the pads
S610 on the control-head board for the ON/OFF key.

Check the CH ON OFF signal level from the radio at pin 9 of the controlhead connector J103.
J103 pin 9: 13V

If the signal is approx. 13V, continue with Step 5.
If near or at ground, continue with Step 3.
3.

Visually inspect pin 9 of connector J103 for open or shorted contacts.

Verify the source of the signal to pin 9 of connector J103 from the
radio (without the control-head connector).

Visually inspect R610, R606, and R624 for short-circuit to adjacent
components. Replace if necessary. Return to Step 2.

Visually inspect R610 for shorted or open circuits. Repair if
necessary. Retest switch.

Verify continuity between R610 and switch S610, and continuity
between switch S610 and ground.
If the continuity cannot be restored, replace the control-head board.

418

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

Figure 14.10 PCB layout of the power on/off key circuitry

top side

bottom side

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

419

14.9

Function, Scroll, or Selection Keys Faulty
The eight keys of the main keypad (function, scroll, and selection keys) are
connected to the FPGA by an array of three columns and three rows.
During idle operation, the KEY ROW signals are driven low by the FPGA and
the KEY COL signals (pulled high by an external resistor) are monitored for
activity by the FPGA. A key-press will generate a high-to-low transition on
the associated column KEY COL signal. This, in turn, will initiate a sequence of
high output levels on the KEY ROW signals to identify which key was pressed.

Figure 14.11 Circuit diagram of the function, scroll, and selection keys
3V3

3V3

D604

3V3

D620

3V3

D602

3V3

R620

3V3

R621

R622

S603B

S603A

S602B

S602A

S601B

D602

D620

D604

S601A

KEY COL1
KEY COL2
KEY COL3

R623

S606B

S606A

F3 Key

S605B

S605A

S604B

S604A

FPGA

Right Selection Key

F4 Key

KEY ROW1

R624

Left Selection Key

S608B

Scroll-Down Key

S608A

S607B

1
2

S607A

Scroll-Up Key

KEY ROW2

R625

KEY ROW3

F2 Key

F1 Key

The signal at the column side of the switch should be 3.3V. The row side of
the switch should be GND. A successful press will cause transition on
associated KEY_COL signal to low.
Note

One Key Faulty

420

CCTM command 1009 can be used to monitor keypad press and
release events.

If an individual key is faulty:
1.

Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens-cleaning cloth to clean the pad
of the PCB switch contacts.

Visually inspect both PCB switch contacts (A and B) of a key for
short-circuits. Repair if necessary.

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

Several Keys Faulty

The keys can be grouped into columns and rows of three or two keys, as
illustrated in Figure 14.11.
If one column of keys is faulty:
1.

Visually inspect the associated resistor and diodes for open or shorted
circuits.
F2 key
F4 key
scroll-up key

R620 F1 key
R621 F3 key
D602 right selection key D620 left selection key
scroll-down key

R622
D604

If one row of keys is faulty:
1.

Visually inspect the associated resistor for open or shorted circuits.
F3 key
R623 scroll-up key
F4 key
scroll-down key
right selection key
left selection key

R624 F1 key
F2 key

R625

Figure 14.12 PCB layout of the function, scroll, and selection key circuitry

top side

bottom side

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

421

14.10 Speaker Faulty
The two speaker lines (SPK+ and SPK–) are connected to the speaker
connector (J104) which is connected to the control-head connector (J103)
through two ferrite beads (L105 and L106).
Figure 14.13 Circuit diagram of the speaker circuitry

Control-Head
Connector
SPKR+

Speaker
Connector
E105

J103
SPKR–
17

J104

E106
2

If the speaker functions only intermittently or the audio level is low:

422

Check the continuity from the speaker connector J104 to pin 18
(SPK+) and pin 17 (SPK–) of the control-head connector J103.

Inspect E105 and E106.

Replace the speaker.

If there is still a fault, go to “Volume Control Faulty” on page 424.

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

Figure 14.14 PCB layout of the speaker circuitry

top side

bottom side

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

423

14.11 Volume Control Faulty
The voltage level of the volume control potentiometer is converted to a
digital signal by an analog/digital converter, processed by the FPGA and
transmitted to the main board.
Note

This section only describes faults to the volume control caused by
the control head, which has been established during the initial
servicing tasks by means of elimination test. For fault finding of
the amplifier circuitry of the main board, refer to “Faulty Speaker
Audio” on page 384.

Figure 14.15 Circuit diagram of the volume control circuitry
3V3

3V3

8
VCC

FPGA

ADC DO

CH1 U601 DO

R105
6

VOL WIP DC

RV101

If the volume control works only intermittently, works only at full volume,
or does not work at all:
1.

Check that the voltage between pins CW and WIP of the volumecontrol potentiometer RV1 varies linearly between about 0V and
3.3V.
RV1: 0 to 3.3V

If the voltage is not correct, replace the potentiometer RV1
2.

Send CCTM command 1010 to read the volume potentiometer.
No volume: reading 0 (1V)
Full volume: reading 255 (3.3V)

If the signal is not correct, remove can E100 and replace the
analog/digital converter U601.
If the signal is correct, replace the speaker.

424

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

Figure 14.16 PCB layout of the volume control circuitry

top side

bottom side

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

425

14.12 PTT Faulty
The PTT signal from the microphone connector is connected to the FPGA
via a resistor (R25) and relayed to the radio as a digital command.
Figure 14.17 Circuit diagram of the PTT circuitry

Microphone
Connector
FP PTT

FPGA

Note

C108

R25

MIC PTT
4

J106

D106

This section only describes faults to the PTT caused by the control head, which has been established during the initial servicing
tasks by means of elimination test.

If the PTT is faulty:
1.

With no PTT switch and hookswitch operated, check whether pin 4
of J106 is 4V.
J106 pin 4: 4V

If the signal is correct, continue with Step 2.
If the signal is incorrect, inspect R25 for open or shorted contacts.
Repair if necessary. Repeat Step 1.
2.

With the PTT switch operated, check whether the same 4V are
pulled to ground on the other side of R25.
If the signal is correct, continue with Step 3.
R25: GND

If the signal is incorrect, inspect D106 and C108 for short-circuits.
Repair if necessary.
3.

426

Verify continuity between R25 and the FPGA. Repair PCB track if
possible.

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

Figure 14.18 PCB layout of PTT circuitry

top side

bottom side

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

427

428

Fault Finding of Control Head with Graphical Display

Overview

Fault Finding of Control Head with
1- 2- or 3-Digit Display
This section describes the fault finding of the control head with 1-, 2- or 3digit display for the following faults:
■

display faulty but not LEDs

■

some LEDs faulty

■

all LEDs faulty

■

display and all LEDs faulty

■

some but not all keys faulty

■

all keys faulty

■

speaker faulty

■

volume control faulty

The faults can be detected by visual inspection (refer to “Check the
User Interface” on page 153).
General

The following applies for all fault finding procedures:
Important

Do not disconnect or connect the control head while
power is supplied to the radio.

■

For disassembly and re-assembly instructions, refer to “Disassembling
and Reassembling the Control Head” on page 141.

■

If the repair fails or no fault could be found, replace the control-head
board.

■

After completing the repair, carry out the tasks in “Initial Tasks” on
page 149.

Fault Finding of Control Head with 1- 2- or 3-Digit Display

429

Top side of the control-head board (2-digit control head shown)

pads for keys

pads for LCD

Figure 15.1

430

Fault Finding of Control Head with 1- 2- or 3-Digit Display

Bottom side of the control-head board (2-digit control head shown)

pins of RV1

Figure 15.2

Fault Finding of Control Head with 1- 2- or 3-Digit Display

431

15.1

Display Faulty but not LEDs

Elastomeric Strips
Faulty

LCD Faulty

432

If all the LEDs function correctly but the display functions only partially or
not at all, first check the elastomeric strips:
1.

Disconnect the control-head loom from the control head. Remove
the control-head board.

Remove the elastomeric strips and check the conductors in the strips
for continuity. Replace the strips if they are faulty.

Ensure that the conductors along the edges of the strips are clean.
Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens-cleaning cloth to clean the
edges.

Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens-cleaning cloth to clean the pads
for the LCD on the control-head board.

Insert the elastomeric strips in their slots in the space-frame.

Re-assemble the control-head board.

Reconnect the control-head loom to the control head and test the
user interface. If the fault has been removed, return to “Initial Tasks”
on page 149. If it has not, replace the LCD as follows.

If the elastomeric strips are not the cause of the fault, replace the LCD:
1.

Disconnect the control-head loom. Remove the control-head board
and disassemble the control head.

Remove the LCD.

Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens-cleaning cloth to clean the
electrical contact points on the spare LCD. Carefully remove the
protective plastic film from the LCD. Take care not to scratch the soft
polariser material on both sides of the LCD.

Re-assemble the control head.

Reconnect the control-head loom and test the user interface. If the
fault has been removed, return to “Initial Tasks” on page 149. If it has
not, go to Step 6.

The control-head board is suspect. Level-1 service centres should
replace the board. Level-2 service centres should attempt to repair the
board as follows.

Fault Finding of Control Head with 1- 2- or 3-Digit Display

Control-Head Board
Faulty

15.2

If neither the elastomeric strips nor the LCD are faulty, check the relevant
components on the control-head board:
1.

Use an oscilloscope to display the signal at pin 5 of IC5
(see Figure 15.2). The signal should be a square wave with a frequency of about 60Hz and an amplitude that alternates between 0.0
and 3.3V. If the signal is correct, go to Step 3. If it is not, go to Step 2.

Replace IC2 (see Figure 15.2). Test the user interface. If the fault has
been removed, return to “Initial Tasks” on page 149. If it has not, go
to Step 3.

Use the oscilloscope to display the signal at pin 12 of IC7 (see
Figure 15.2). The signal should be a square wave with a frequency of
about 120Hz and an amplitude that alternates between 0.0 and 3.3V.
If the signal is correct, replace IC5 and go to Step 4. If it is not,
replace IC7 and go to Step 4.

Test the user interface. If the fault has been removed, return to “Initial
Tasks” on page 149. If it has not, the repair failed; replace the
control-head board.

Some LEDs Faulty
If the display functions correctly but one or more (but not all) of the LEDs
D1 to D18 are faulty:
1.

Disconnect the control-head loom. Remove the control-head board.
Reconnect the loom to the board.

Use a multimeter to measure the forward voltage across each faulty
LED. See Figure 15.1. The voltage should be 2.0±0.4V DC. If it is,
go to Step 3. If it is not, replace the LED and go to Step 4.

If the forward voltage is correct, the LED is functional but the
associated switching transistor is suspect. Replace the transistor
corresponding to the LED in question. The switching transistors
associated with the LEDs D1 to D18 are Q1 to Q4. See Figure 15.2.
Continue with Step 4.

Test the user interface. If the fault has been removed, re-assemble the
control-head board, and return to “Initial Tasks” on page 149. If it
has not, replace the control-head board and return to “Initial Tasks”
on page 149.

Fault Finding of Control Head with 1- 2- or 3-Digit Display

433

15.3

All LEDs Faulty
If the display functions correctly but all the LEDs are faulty:

15.4

Disconnect the control-head loom.

Replace IC3 which drives the switching transistors for the LEDs.
See Figure 15.2.

Reconnect the loom and test the user interface. If the fault has been
removed, return to “Initial Tasks” on page 149. If it has not, replace
the control-head board and return to “Initial Tasks” on page 149.

Display and All LEDs Faulty
If the display and all LEDs are faulty:

434

Use a multimeter to measure the 3.3 V DC supply voltage across C1
(see Figure 15.2). If it is correct, go to Step 3. If it is not, go to Step 2.

Check for shorts to ground of the 3.3 V supply. Repair any fault and
go to Step 8.

Use the multimeter to check that the RST line at pin 6 of IC7 is high.
The level should be 3.3 V. If it is, go to Step 5. If it is not, go to
Step 4.

Check for continuity in the LCD driver circuitry D22 (not fitted for
3-digit control head), C12 and R27 (see Figure 15.2). Repair any
fault and go to Step 8. If there is no continuity fault, replace IC7 and
go to Step 8.

Use the multimeter to check that the OE line at pin 8 of IC5 is low.
The level should be less than 0.6 V. If it is, replace IC7 and go to
Step 8. If it is not, go to Step 6.

Check that the voltage at pins 4, 10 and 14 of IC5 is 3.3 V DC.
Also check that pin 7 of IC5 is at ground. If the voltages are correct,
replace IC7 and go to Step 8. If they are not, go to Step 7.

Check for continuity between IC5 and the control-head connector
SK1. Also check for shorts to ground between IC5 and SK1. Repair
any fault and go to Step 8.

Confirm the removal of the fault. If the fault has been removed,
return to “Initial Tasks” on page 149. If it has not, replace the
control-head board and return to “Initial Tasks” on page 149.

Fault Finding of Control Head with 1- 2- or 3-Digit Display

15.5

Some but not All Keys Faulty
If one or more (but not all) of the keys are faulty, repair the control head as
follows:

15.6

Disconnect the control-head loom and remove the control-head
board.

Use isopropyl alcohol and a soft lens-cleaning cloth to clean the pads
on the control-head board for those keys that are faulty.

Re-install the control-head board.

Reconnect the control-head loom and test the keys. If the fault has
been removed, return to “Initial Tasks” on page 149. If it has not, go
to Step 5.

Replace the keypad.

Re-assemble the control head. Reconnect the control-head loom,
test the keys to confirm the removal of the fault, and return to “Initial
Tasks” on page 149.

All Keys Faulty
If all the keys, with the exception of the ON/OFF key, are faulty:
1.

Disconnect the control-head loom. Replace IC4, which reads the
status of the keys. See Figure 15.2.

Reconnect the control-head loom and test the keys to confirm the
removal of the fault. If the fault has been removed, return to “Initial
Tasks” on page 149. If it has not, replace the control-head board and
return to “Initial Tasks” on page 149.

Fault Finding of Control Head with 1- 2- or 3-Digit Display

435

15.7

Speaker Faulty
If the speaker functions only intermittently or the audio level is low:

15.8

Replace the speaker.

Check the continuity from the speaker connector SK2 to pin 17
(SPK–) and pin 18 (SPK+) of the control-head connector SK1 (see
Figure 15.2). If there is no fault, go to Step 3. If there is still a fault,
go to “Volume Control Faulty”.

Reconnect the control-head loom, test the speaker to confirm the
removal of the fault, and return to “Initial Tasks” on page 149.

Volume Control Faulty
If the volume control works only intermittently, works only at full volume,
or does not work at all:

436

Disconnect the control-head loom.

Check that the resistance between pins 1 and 2 of the volume-control
potentiometer RV1 varies linearly between about 0Ω and 10kΩ. (see
Figure 15.2). If it does, go to Step 3. If it does not, go to Step 6.

Replace the speaker.

Re-assemble the control head. Reconnect the control-head loom.
Confirm the removal of the fault, and return to “Initial Tasks” on
page 149.

Remove the control-head board.

Replace the potentiometer RV1. See Figure 15.1.

Re-assemble the control-head board. Reconnect the control-head
loom. Confirm the removal of the fault, and return to “Initial Tasks”
on page 149.

Fault Finding of Control Head with 1- 2- or 3-Digit Display

Spare Parts

Introduction

This section lists all serviceable parts (except PCB components) of the
■ radio body (Figure 16.1, Figure 16.2, and Table 16.1)
■ control head with graphical display (Figure 16.3 and Table 16.2)
■ control heads with 1-, 2- or 3-digit display (Figure 16.4, Table 16.3 and
Table 16.4)
■ RJ45 control head (Figure 16.5 and Table 16.5).
Figure 16.1

Spare parts of the radio body (sheet 1 of 2)

Cx4
D
E

Gx5
H
1@
1!

I
C x2

Spare Parts

437

Figure 16.2

Spare parts of the radio body (sheet 2 of 2)

Gx3
1#x2

1$
1%

1(
2)
1^
1& x2

2!
2@
3641z_01

438

Spare Parts

Table 16.1
Pos.

Spare parts of the radio body

Description

Qty.

IPN

Spares Kit

Cover

–

TMAA22-02 mech. kit

Screw M4 x 16

349-02067-xx

TMAA22-02 mech. kit

Lid

312-01091-xx

–

Bung for aperture for external options connector

302-50000-xx

TMAA22-02 mech. kit

Main seal

362-01109-xx

TMAA22-02 mech. kit

Screw M3 x 10

349-02066-xx

TMAA22-02 mech. kit

Main-board assembly (50W/40W radios)
Main-board assembly (25W radios)

1
1

XMAB14-yyzz TMAA22-14yyzz
XMAB12-yyzz TMAA22-12yyzz

Bung for auxiliary connector

302-50001-xx

TMAA22-02 mech. kit

Seal for RF connector

362-01113-xx

TMAA22-02 mech. kit

Chassis (50W/40W radio)
Chassis (25W radio)

1
1

303-11301-xx
303-11225-xx

–
–

Gap pad for chassis (50W/40W radio only)

369-01048-xx

TMAA22-02 mech. kit
TMAA22-98 gap pad kit

Control-head seal

362-01115-xx

TMAA22-02 mech. kit
TMAA22-07 seals kit

Screw for power connector (50W/40W radio)
Screw for power connector (25W radio)

2
2

346-10022-07
346-10030-08

–

Auxiliary connector [SK101]

240-02022-xx

–

Inner foam seal for auxiliary connector

362-01110-xx

TMAA22-02 mech. kit

Outer foam seal for auxiliary connector

362-01112-xx

TMAA22-02 mech. kit

Lock-nut for auxiliary connector

354-01043-xx

TMAA22-02 mech. kit

Rubber seal for power connector (50W/40W radio)
Rubber seal for power connector (25W radio)

1
1

362-01127-xx
362-01114-xx

TMAA22-02 mech. kit

Power connector [PL100] (50W/40W radio)
Power connector [PL100] (25W radio)

1
1

240-00040-xx
240-00027-xx

–

Gap pad for copper plate (50W/40W radio only)

369-01049-xx

TMAA22-02 mech. kit
TMAA22-98 gap pad kit

Heat-transfer block

308-13147-xx

–

Antenna connector [SK103] (mini-UHF), or
Antenna connector [SK103] (BNC)
(both incl. lock washer and hexagonal nut)

1
1

240-00029-xx
240-00028-xx

–

The characters xx in an IPN stand for the issue number. Items will always be the latest issue at the time the
radio is manufactured.
The characters yy in an IPN or spares kit number stand for the abbreviated frequency band.
For more information, refer to “Frequency Bands” on page 15.
The characters zz in an IPN or spares kit number stand for the type of RF connector (00=BNC, 01=mini-UHF).

Spare Parts

439

Figure 16.3

Spare parts of the control head with graphical display

Bx2
C

D
Ex4

H
I

G
1)

1%
1#
1^

440

Spare Parts

Table 16.2
Pos.

Spare parts of the control head with graphical display

Description

Qty.

IPN

Spares Kita

M4 x 12 Taptite screw

349-02058-xx

TMAA22-08

Adaptor flange

349-02067-xx
301-00020-xx

TMAA22-08

Control-head loom (with female-female adaptor)
– female-female adaptor

219-02882-xx
240-00021-41

TMAA22-08

3 x 10 PT screw

346-10030-xx

TMAA22-08

Control-head board

–

TMAA22-09 (x3)

Seal

362-01124-xx

TMAA22-08

Short light pipe

262-00003-xx

TMAA22-08

Long light pipe

262-00004-xx

TMAA22-08

Space-frame

319-30077-xx

TMAA22-08

Speaker clamp

303-50111-xx

TMAA22-08

Speaker

252-00011-xx

TMAA22-08

LCD assembly (including LCD seal)b

–

TMAA22-95 (x3)

Main keypad

311-03121-xx

TMAA22-08

Power keypad

311-03120-xx

TMAA22-08

Concealed microphone (optional)

–

TMAA02-07

Front-panel assembly

–

TMAA22-08

Knob for volume-control potentiometer

311-01054-xx

TMAA22-08

The characters xx in an IPN stand for the issue number. Items will always be the latest issue at the time the
radio is manufactured.
a. Spares kit TMAA22-08 contains an assembled control head without control-head board, concealed microphone
and LED assembly.
b. The LCD seal IPN 362-01126-xx is part of the LCD assembly and must be replaced whenever the LCD is replaced.
This seal is included in the TMAA22-95 kit.

Spare Parts

441

Figure 16.4

Spare parts of the control heads with 1, - 2- or 3-digit display

B
B
Dx3

H
I

E
1!
x2

F
J

J
1)

1$
1#

3828z_01

442

Spare Parts

Table 16.3
Pos.

Spare parts of the control heads with 1- or 2-digit display

Description

Control-head loom (with female/female adaptor)
– female-female adaptor

Qty.

IPN

Spares Kita

219-02882-xx
210-00021-41

TMAA22-01 and 90

Control-head options board (optional)
– dynamic microphone board

–

TMAA02-06

3 x 8 PT screw

346-10030-08

TMAA22-01 and 90

Control-head board (2-digit display)
Control-head board (1-digit display)

1
1

–
–

TMAA22-03 (x6)
TMAA22-91 (x6)

Elastomeric strip

209-00011-xx

TMAA22-01 and 90

Space-frame

319-30073-xx

TMAA22-01 and 90

Front-panel assembly

–

TMAA22-01 and 90

Knob for volume-control potentiometer

311-01054-xx

TMAA22-01 and 90

Speaker

252-00011-xx

TMAA22-01 and 90

Concealed microphone (optional)

–

TMAA02-06

LCD

008-00031-xx

TMAA22-01 and 90

Keypad

311-03114-xx

TMAA02-01 and 90

Short light pipe

262-00003-xx

TMAA22-01 and 90

Long light pipe

262-00004-xx

TMAA22-01 and 90

The characters xx in an IPN stand for the issue number. Items will always be the latest issue at the time the
radio is manufactured.
a. Spares kit TMAA22-01 contains an assembled 2-digit-display control head without the control-head board.
Spares kit TMAA22-90 contains an assembled 1-digit-display control head without the control-head board.
Neither spares kit includes the optional parts of the concealed microphone.

Spare Parts

443

Table 16.4
Pos.

Spare parts for the 3-digit display

Description

Qty.

IPN

Control-head loom (with female/female adaptor)
– female-female adaptor

219-02882-xx
210-00021-41

Control-head options board (optional)

–

TMAA02-06

3 x 8 PT screw

346-10030-08

Control-head board (3-digit display)

XMAC60

Elastomeric strip

209-00011-xx

Space-frame

319-30073-xx

Front-panel assembly

–

Knob for volume-control potentiometer

311-01054-xx

Speaker

252-00011-xx

Concealed microphone (optional)

TMAA02-06

LCD

008-00036-xx

Keypad

311-03130-xx

Short light pipe

262-00003-xx

Long light pipe

262-00004-xx

The characters xx in an IPN stand for the issue number. Items will always be the
latest issue at the time the radio is manufactured.

444

Spare Parts

Figure 16.5

Spare parts of the RJ45 control head

C
Torx T10
5lb·in (0.6N·m)

Dx4
E

G x2

Table 16.5
Pos.

Spare parts of the RJ45 control head

Description

Qty.

IPN

Control-head board

XMAC30

Control-head loom (with female/female adaptor)
– female-female adaptor

219-02882-xx
210-00021-41

3 x 8 PT screw

346-10030-08

PCB bracket

302-10063-xx

Front panel

316-06843-xx

RJ45 bung

302-50002-xx

Spare Parts

445

446

Spare Parts

TM8100 mobiles
TM8200 mobiles

Chapter 3
Accessories

447

Chapter 3 – Accessories
17 TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
17.1 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
17.2 Configuring the Line-Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
17.3 Installing the Line-Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
17.4 Programming Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
17.5 Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
17.6 Line-Interface Board Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
17.7 Line-Interface Board Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
17.8 Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
17.9 PCB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
18 TMAA01-02 RS-232 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
18.1 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
18.2 Installing the RS-232 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
18.3 Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
18.4 PCB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
19 TMAA01-05 Options-Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
19.1 Changing the Options-Extender Links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
19.2 Installing the Options-Extender Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
19.3 Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
19.4 PCB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
20 TMAA02-02 DTMF Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
20.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
20.2 Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
20.3 Radio Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
20.4 Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
20.5 Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
21 TMAA02-06 Support Kit for Concealed & Dynamic Microphones . . . . .493
21.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
21.2 Radio Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
21.3 Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
21.4 PCB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

448

22 TMAA02-07 Concealed Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
22.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
22.2 Radio Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
23 TMAA02-08 Keypad Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
23.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
23.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
23.3 Radio Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
23.4 Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
24 TMAA03-02 Security Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
24.1 Installing the Security Bracket and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
24.2 Installation Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
24.3 Removing a Radio from the Security Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
24.4 Replacing the Radio in the Security Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
24.5 Disassembling the Security Bracket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
24.6 Re-Ordering Extra Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
25 Installing a Remote Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
25.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
25.2 Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
25.3 Servicing the Remote Kit Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
25.4 PCB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
26 Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
26.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
26.2 Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
26.3 Servicing the Remote Control-Head Installation Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
26.4 PCB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
27 TMAA04-04 Crossband Linking Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
27.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
27.2 Radio Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
27.3 Operational Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
27.4 Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
27.5 PCB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
28 TMAA04-05 Ignition Sense Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
28.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
28.2 Radio Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549

449

29 TMAA10-01 Desktop Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
29.1 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
29.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
29.3 Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
29.4 Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
29.5 Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
30 TMAA10-02 Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
30.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
30.2 Radio Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
30.3 Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
31 TMAA10-03 and TMAA10-06 High-Power Remote Speakers . . . . . . . .559
31.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
32 TMAA10-04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10-05 Hands-Free Kit . . . . . .561
32.1 VOX Operation (TMAA10-05 Hands-Free Kit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
32.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
32.3 Radio Programming for the TMAA10-04 Remote PTT Kit. . . . . . . . . 563
32.4 Radio Programming for the TMAA10-05 Hands-Free Kit . . . . . . . . . . 564
32.5 Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
32.6 Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
32.7 PCB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
33 TMAA10-07 Desktop Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
33.1 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
33.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
33.3 Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
33.4 Radio Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
33.5 Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
34 TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
34.1 Test Equipment Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
34.2 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
34.3 PCB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575

450

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board
Note

These instructions refer to line-interface PCB issue 220-65202-02
or later. On earlier issue PCBs, SK1 pin 5 is ground.
The TMAA01-01 line-interface board provides both audio and
digital interfaces for a variety of systems. The interfaces available are:

D-range
hood parts

■

an isolated 600Ω audio interface which is capable of both
simplex operation on a two-wire system, or duplex operation on
a four-wire system

■

a keying interface which allows for two-wire keying or single
line bi-directional keying

■

a variable delay timer

■

a logic sense control.

D-range plug
internal options
connector

external options
connector

line-interface board

line-interface
installation parts

The line-interface board fits inside the radio in the options cavity
and is connected to the main PCB by the internal options loom.
The high-density 15-way D-range connector mounted on the lineinterface board fits through the external options connector hole
provided in the radio chassis.
Important

external options
cover seal

17.1

internal options
loom

This kit does not meet the IP54 protection standard. Care must be taken when a
radio with a TMAA01-01 line-interface
board kit installed is being operated in an
environment where there is water, dust or
other environmental hazards.

Operation
One of the control head function keys may be programmed to toggle the
line-interface board on and off. When the function key LED is glowing,
the line-interface board is on and when the LED is off, the line-interface
board is off.
Refer to “Programming Information” on page 458 for information on the
radio programming procedure.

17.2

Configuring the Line-Interface Board
Important

This equipment contains devices which are susceptible to
damage from static charges. Refer to “ESD Precautions”
on page 108 for more information.

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

451

17.2.1

Adjustment Points on the Line-Interface Board
The following table describes the line-interface adjustment points.
Adjustments are made by setting the DIP switches on S1 to either “on” or
“off ” and by three variable resistors (RV1, RV2 and RV3).

Table 17.1

Line-interface board adjustment points
Function
line-interface board
top side

17.2.2

Selection 1

Selection 2

two-wire audio interface

DIP1 on

DIP2 off

four-wire audio interface

DIP1 off

DIP2 on

busy/gate = busy

DIP3 on

DIP4 off

busy/gate = rx-gate

DIP3 off

DIP4 on

busy/gate logic
(active high)

DIP5 on

DIP6 off

busy/gate logic
(active low)

DIP5 off

DIP6 on

bi-directional keying line

DIP7 on

two-wire keying

DIP 7 off

enable gate/keying delay

DIP8 on

gate/keying delay

adjust RV1

audio line out level

adjust RV2

audio line in level

adjust RV3

time delay range

W1 open

Test Equipment Setup
The following diagram shows the setup of the test equipment used when
adjusting RV1, RV2 and RV3.

452

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

Figure 17.1

Line-interface
: test equipment setup1

1. Note: On PCB issue 220-65202-01 and earlier, pin 5 of SK1 is ground.

17.2.3

Configuration Procedure
The line-interface board configuration must be completed before the board
is installed in the radio, as the top side of the line-interface board is not
accessible once the board is screwed to the radio lid. To configure the lineinterface board, carry out the following steps.
1.

Note

Table 17.2
Pin

Program the radio in which the line-interface board is being
installed with default line-interface test settings. The default test
settings are explained in the following tables.
A general description of IOP_GPIO lines used with the lineinterface board is given in Table 17.6 on page 458.

Line-interface default test settings in the Programmable I/O form, Digital tab
Direction

Label

Action

Active

Debounce

Signal State

Mirrored

IOP_GPIO1 Input

PTT

External PTT 1

Low

None

IOP_GPIO2 Output

No Action

Low

None

IOP_GPIO3 Output

BUSY

Busy Status

High

None

High

None

Latching

None

IOP_GPIO4 Output

FKEY

F1 Key Status

1. One of the four control head function keys may be selected to control the line-interface AUX line,
which turns the line-interface board on and off. For the associated LED to reflect the status of the
line-interface board, the Function Key Action field on the Key Settings form must be set to Action
Digital Output Line.

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

453

Table 17.3

Line-interface settings in the Programmable I/O form, Audio tab

Rx/PTT Type

Tap In

Tap In Type

Tap In Unmute

Tap Out

Tap Out Type

Tap Out Unmute

None

A-Bypass In

On PTT

D - Split

Busy Detect

EPTT1

A-Bypass In

On PTT

None

C-Bypass 0

On PTT

Table 17.4

Line-interface settings in the PTT form, External PTT (1) tab

Field

Setting

Advanced PTT

PTT Transmission Type

Voice

Audio Source

Audio Tap In

Set the DIP switches on the line-interface board (S1) to the following
default test settings:
■ DIP1 on (two-wire audio interface)
■ DIP2 off
■ DIP3 off
■ DIP4 on (busy/gate = rx-gate)
■ DIP5 on (busy/gate logic active high)
■ DIP6 off
■ DIP7 off (two-wire keying)
■ DIP8 off (time delay disabled).
Disassemble the radio in order to gain access to the options cavity. For
detailed disassembly instructions, refer to “Disassembly and
Reassembly” on page 129.

3.
Note

When installing the internal options loom, take care that it is
folded in the way shown in Figure 17.2.
Connect the internal options loom between SK2 on the line-interface board and SK102 on the radio’s main PCB.

17.2.4

Set up the test equipment shown in Figure 17.1, and follow the
adjustment procedure for RV1, RV2 and RV3 described in the following
section.

Adjusting RV1, RV2 and RV3

Setting the Keying
Time Delay (RV1)

The keying time delay circuit is used to prevent the burst of noise occurring
before a mobile is able to mute the audio when the carrier signal disappears.
The keying time delay is used in conjuction with the keying signal
(SK1 pin 1).
Set DIP8 on, and adjust RV1 for the required time delay. Rotate RV1
clockwise to increase the delay, and counterclockwise to reduce the delay.

454

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

Note

Setting the Line
Output Level (RV2)

If the W1 link is fitted, the maximum time delay available is
reduced from 5 seconds to approximately 2.5 seconds.

Monitor the line output (SK1 pins 14 and 15) and apply an on-channel
signal from the RF signal generator at an output level of -47dBm,
modulated to 60% of system deviation, at 1kHz AF.
Adjust the RV2 for a line output level of -10dBm.

Setting the Line
Input Level (RV3)

Apply a line input signal of -10dBm and key the transmitter.
■

For a two-wire configuration, apply the line input signal to pins 14 and
15 on SK1.

■

For a four-wire configuration, apply the line input signal to pins 4 and
10 on SK1.

Adjust RV3 until 60% of system deviation at 1kHz is achieved.

17.3

Installing the Line-Interface Board
Note

17.3.1

The line-interface board link options must be set before the board
is installed in the radio, as the top side of the line-interface board
is not accessible once the board is screwed to the radio lid.

Parts Required
The following table describes the parts required to install a line-interface
board in a radio. The parts marked with an asterisk (*) are not shown in
Figure 17.2 and are used to connect to the radio’s external
options connector.
Table 17.5
Quantity

Line-interface installation parts required
Internal Part Number

Description

Figure 17.2
Reference

362-01111-XX1

foam seal

362-01108-XXa

cover seal

347-00011-00

4-40x3/16 screws

354-01043-00

screw-lock fasteners

349-02062-00

M3x8 screws

240-00032-00

D-range plug

—

240-06010-29

D-range hood

—

1. Contact Technical Support for the exact IPN.

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

455

17.3.2

Installation Procedure
1.

Disassemble the radio in order to gain access to the options cavity.
For detailed disassembly instructions, refer to “Disassembly and
Reassembly” on page 129.

The circled numbers in the following instructions refer to items in the
diagram on page 457.
2.

Remove the top cover and lid b from the radio to access the
options cavity.

Remove the external options connector bung c, if it is fitted.

On the inside of the radio lid place the foam seal d over the external
options connector cavity e.

With the top side of the line-interface board f facing the radio lid,
guide the external options connector g into the external options
connector cavity.

Screw the external options connector to the radio lid using the two
screw-lock fasteners h.
Tighten the fasteners to a torque of 0.9N·m (8lbf·in).

Important

The external options connector screw-lock fasteners must
be tightened correctly before screwing the line-interface
board onto the mounting posts i.

Screw the line-interface board to the mounting posts on the radio lid
using six M3x8 self-tapping screws j.
Tighten the M3x8 screws to a torque of 1.9N·m (17lbf·in)

Important

456

For the line-interface board to be installed correctly in the
radio’s options cavity, the internal options connector
loom 1) must be looped in the way shown in the diagram
on page 457.

Plug the unattached end of internal options connector loom 1) into
the internal options connector on the radio main PCB.

Refit the radio lid and top cover to the radio and screw the external
options cover seal 1! over the external options connector, using the
two 4-40x3/16 screws 1@.

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

Figure 17.2

Installing the line-interface board

c
1!

1@
h

g
j
1)
b
c
d
e
f
g

radio lid
external options connector bung
foam seal
external options connector cavity
line-interface board
external options connector

h
i
j
1)
1!
1@

screw-lock fasteners
mounting posts
M3x8 self-tapping screws
internal options loom
external options cover seal
4-40x3/16 screws

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

457

17.4

Programming Information
The lines from the radio’s internal options connector that are used by the
line-interface board are IOP_GPIO1 to IOP_GPIO4. The behaviour of
these lines is configured in the Programmable I/O and PTT forms of the
programming application. Refer to the online help of the programming
application for more information.
The following table explains the required input and output line-interface
connections.

Table 17.6

Line-interface
s input and output connections

Radio Signal

Function

Comments

GPIO1

PTT FROM OPT

This signal causes the radio to transmit. This normally
requires External PTT1 to be set up in the Digital tab of
the Programmable I/O form and the External PTT (1) tab
of the PTT form.

GPIO2

Busy/Gate

This active high signal allows connection to the Busy/Gate
output signal. If this is not used, the Action field is set to
No Action and the Active field is set to Low.

GPIO3

Busy/Gate (Keying Line)

This active high signal allows connection to the Busy/
Gate output signal. This signal also allows the single line
keying functionality.

GPIO4

AUX

This allows the line-interface board to be disabled. One of
the four control head function keys is selected to control
this AUX line.
For the associated LED to reflect the status of the lineinterface board, the Function Key Action field on the Key
Settings form must be set to Action Digital Output Line.

458

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

17.5

Interface Specification
The following tables summarize the signals used for the line-interface board
on the internal options connector (SK2 on the line-interface board) and the
external options connector (SK1 on the line-interface board).

Table 17.7

Internal options connector (SK2) — pins and signals
Pin

1&1*
1%1^
1#1$
1!1@
J1)
HI
FG
DE
BC
top view

Radio Signal

Line-Interface
Signal

Description

13V8_SW

13V8 FROM RADIO switched 13V8 supply from the radio

AUD_TAP_OUT

AUDIO TAP OUT

Programmable tap point out of the receive or
transmit audio chain.

AGND

analogue ground

AUX_MIC_AUD

—

not connected

RX_BEEP_IN

—

not connected

AUD_TAP_IN

Programmable tap point into the receive or
transmit audio chain.

RX_AUD

—

not connected

RSSI

—

not connected

IOP_GPIO1

PTT FROM OPT

IOP_GPIO1 from the radio
3V3 logic level, 5V tolerant

IOP_GPIO2

SECONDARY BUSY IOP_GPIO2 from the radio
3V3 logic level, 5V tolerant

IOP_GPIO3

BUSY

IOP_GPIO3 from the radio
3V3 logic level, 5V tolerant

IOP_GPIO4

AUX

IOP_GPIO4 from the radio
3V3 logic level, 5V tolerant

IOP_GPIO5

GPIO5

IOP_GPIO5 from the radio
3V3 logic level, 5V tolerant

IOP_GPIO6

—

not connected

IOP_GPIO7

—

not connected

DGND

AGND

analogue ground

IOP_RXD

RXD

asynchronous serial port - receive data

IOP_TXD

TXD

asynchronous serial port - transmit data

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

459

Table 17.8

External options connector (SK1) — pins and signals
Pin

front view

17.6

Signal

Description

KEYING

signal line keying

RS-422

serial data TX-

RS-422/RS-232

serial data TX+/RS-232 TXD

PTT-IN

bi-directional keying input

4W_LINE_IN -

4-wire line in negative

4W_LINE_IN +

4-wire line in positive

RS-422/RS-232

serial data RX+/RS-232 RXD

RS-422

serial data RX-

GND

ground

—

not connected

13V8 FROM RADIO switched 13.8V supply from the radio

BUSY/GATE

busy or receiver gate output. 5V CMOS logic level.

—

not connected

4W_LINE_OUT -

4-wire line out negative or 2-wire line in/out negative

4W_LINE_OUT +

4-wire line out positive or 2-wire line in/out positive

Line-Interface Board Application
The following diagram shows the control of two radios operated together,
crossband or repeater linked.

Figure 17.3

Two radios connected as a repeater/crossband link

line-interface board

SK2
IOP_TXD
IOP_RXD
IOP_GPIO1
IOP_GPIO2
IOP_GPIO3
IOP_GPIO4
IOP_GPIO5
IOP_GPIO6
IOP_GPIO7
RX_AUD
13V8_SW
RX_BEEP_IN
AUD_TAP_IN
AUD_TAP_OUT
AUX_MIC_AUD

18
17
9
15
11
12
13
4
10
7
1
5
6
2
14

RSSI 8
3
AGND
16
DGND

TXD
RXD
PTT FROM OPT

2° BUSY
BUSY
AUX

11
12

keying
logic

RS-422 TX
RS-422 RX

KEYING
PTT_IN

BUSY/GATE

—
13V8
—
AUD_TAP_IN
AUD_TAP_OUT

1
3

KEYING
PTT_IN

12 BUSY/GATE

AGND
DGND

3
12

13V8_SW

LINE IN+

4
15

LINE INLINE OUT+

4
15

LINE IN4
15 LINE OUT+

4
15

LINE OUT-

5
6

AGND

5
6

AGND

5
6

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

external
options
connector

5
6

10
11

—

RS-422/RS-232 RX 5

RS-422 RX

external
options
connector

SK2
18

—
—

internal
options
connector

460

11 RS-422/RS-232 TX 11

5 RS-422/RS-232 RX

GPIO5

RS-422 TX

line-interface board

SK1

SK1
11 RS-422/RS-232 TX 11

keying
logic

TXD
RXD
PTT FROM OPT

2° BUSY

18
17
9
15

IOP_TXD
IOP_RXD
IOP_GPIO1
IOP_GPIO2

IOP_GPIO3
12
IOP_GPIO4
13
IOP_GPIO5
4
IOP_GPIO6
10
—
IOP_GPIO7
7
—
RX_AUD
1
1
13V8_SW
13V8
5
—
RX_BEEP_IN
6
6
AUD_TAP_IN
AUD_TAP_IN
2
2
AUD_TAP_OUT
AUD_TAP_OUT
14
—
AUX_MIC_AUD
8
—
RSSI
3
3
AGND
AGND
16
16
DGND
DGND
12

BUSY

AUX
GPIO5
—

internal
options
connector

17.7

Line-Interface Board Specifications
Input Voltage

10.8V to 16VDC

Operating Temperature Range

-10°C to +60°C ambient

DC Input Current

<40mA total (+13.8V supply)

Line Input Sensitivity (60% deviation)

-20dBm to +6dBm (600Ω)

Line Output Level (60% deviation)

-20dBm to +6dBm (600Ω)

Line Impedance

600Ω

Return Loss (300Hz to 3kHz)

>20dB relative to 600Ω

Line Output Filter Response (stopband)
2 pole
6 pole

17.7.1

-12dB/octave, f >4kHz
-36dB/octave, f >4kHz

Radio With Line-Interface Board: Receiver + Line Output
Receiver Frequency Response*
Receiver Processed
Bandwidth
Response
Receiver Unprocessed

300Hz to 3kHz (standard
400Hz to 3kHz (CTCSS)
+1, -3dB relative to -6dB/octave
+1, -3dB (300Hz to 3kHz)

*relative to 1kHz, 60% deviation

Test Signal

-46dBm RF*, 0dBm line output,
audio tap T4
*60% deviation at 1kHz

Signal-to-Noise Ratio
Narrow Bandwidth
Wide Bandwidth
Mute Ratio

>40dB
>43dB
>60dB

Distortion*
Narrow Bandwidth
Wide Bandwidth

<4%
<4%

*30kHz bandwidth distortion meter

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

461

17.7.2

Radio With Line-Interface Board: Receiver + Line Input
Transmitter Frequency Response*
Bandwidth
Response

300Hz to 3kHz
+1, -3dB relative to -6dB/octave

*relative to 1kHz, 20% deviation, below
limiting

Test Signal

0dBm line input*, audio tap T1
*60% deviation at 1kHz

Signal-to-Noise Ratio*
Narrow Bandwidth
Wide Bandwidth

>40dB
>43dB

*demodulated, filtered 300Hz to 3kHz and
de-emphasised 750µs rms

Mute Ratio

>60dB

Distortion*

<3%

*demodulated, filtered 15kHz low pass

462

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

17.8

Circuit Description

17.8.1

Audio Interface
When the line-interface board is used for repeater applications, the audio
passed between the two radios must be of such a level that the message is able
to be repeated intelligibly. The audio interface is therefore capable of
handling a wide range of input and output levels (-20 to +6dBm). The
audio interface is also capable of using either a two- or four-wire isolated
interface formats, which are selectable using S1.
The input to the line driver IC (U5) is the AUDIO TAP OUT line from
the radio. This line is a software-programmabable tap point which can be
chosen from various audio signals available within the radio and is coupled
through a capacitor into the audio line out level control (RV2). This variable
resister is AC coupled into the line driver (U5) which is used in a bridgedoutput format, with gain set to provide the necessary 21dB gain.
The resistors on the output of the line driver provides the necessary 600Ω
terminating impedance, but also cause a 50% loss of signal. This is
compensated for by the higher-than-necessary gain of the line driver. Line
out protection is provided by two zener diodes, and the transformer (T1)
provides isolation.
The audio interface is capable of using a two- or four-wire interface, so a
tap is taken from one side of the balanced line out and is feed directly into
the line input level control (RV3). When using a four-wire interface, the
signal comes in through a second isolation transformer, T2. T2 is terminated
with 600Ω and also acts as a voltage divider. This means that the signal level
at RV3 will be identical to the level at RV3 when using a two-wire interface.
To achieve the required output level the non-inverting AC amplifier (U7)
has a gain of 10, which provides the necessary 13dB of gain. The output of
the amplifier is AC coupled into the AUDIO_TAP_IN line (pin 6 of SK2).

17.8.2

Logic Interface
The line-interface board is able to provide simple interface solutions with
other radios. Logic is used to control keying of both radios as well as
providing time delays to prevent squelch or cycling problems. The logic uses
gates rather than discrete components.
The choice of which input controls BUSY/GATE can be selected using
switches 3 and 4 of S1, while the sense of BUSY/GATE (pin 12 of SK1) can
be selected using switches 5 and 6. Switch 7 accommodates either a twoline keying system or a single bi-directional keying line.

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

463

The comparators (in U1) operate off a single sided regulated 5V supply.
U1 pins 2,4 and 5 provide receiver gate delay. Once the busy signal is not
active, C4 charges through R12 and causes U4 to go low. Once charging
exceeds the voltage at U1 pin5. This also locks out the keying state until this
delay has occurred (U6 pin 5).

17.8.3

Data Communication
The Line Interface circuitry is designed to provide RS-232 and RS-422 data
communication. RS-232 is provided by U9, but if RS-422 is required, U9
is removed and replaced by U2 and U10. Also resistors R15,16,43 and 47
need to be fitted.

17.8.4

Power Supply
The power supply for the line-interface board comes from the radio via
the internal options connector and is a 13.8 V switched supply. Digital
logic components are used in the line-interface board so there is a 5 V
regulator provided.
Initially the 13.8V from the radio is filtered and used for the audio line
driver (U5) with reference to analogue ground. This 13.8V is also used to
supply the 5V regulator, which is filtered separately for either 5V digital or
analogue devices. A simple voltage divider is used to provide a 2.5V half-rail
for the digital and a 2.2V rail for the analogue sections.

464

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

17.9

PCB Information

17.9.1

TMAA01-01 Parts List (PCB IPN 220-65202-04)

Ref.

IPN

Description

Ref.

IPN

Description

C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C7
C8
C9
C10
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C25
C26
C27
C28
C29
C30
C31
C32
C35
C37
C38
C39
C40
C41

014-08100-03
015-26100-08
014-07470-01
014-18100-05
015-26100-08
014-07470-01
018-14100-00
018-14100-00
015-26100-08
015-26220-08
015-26100-08
018-14100-00
018-14100-00
014-06220-00
015-26220-18
016-08470-01
018-15100-00
018-15100-00
014-07470-01
018-15100-00
015-26220-18
018-13150-00
015-26220-08
015-26220-18
018-15100-00
018-15100-00
018-15100-00
018-15100-00
015-26220-18
018-15100-00
018-15100-00
018-15100-00
018-15100-00
018-15100-00

Cap Tant SMD 10u 35v 20% D
Cap Cer 0805 100n 10% X7r 50v
Cap Tant SMD 4u7 25v 10% B
Cap Tant SMD 10u 10v 10% A
Cap Cer 0805 100n 10% X7r 50v
Cap Tant SMD 4u7 25v 10% B
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap Cer 0805 100n 10% X7r 50v
CAP CER 220N 50V 10% 0805 X7R
Cap Cer 0805 100n 10% X7r 50v
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap Tant SMD 2.2Mf 50v
AP CER 220N 50V 10% 0805 X7R
Cap Elec SMD 47uf 6*4 16v
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap Tant SMD 4u7 25v 10% B
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r ±10%
AP CER 220N 50V 10% 0805 X7R
Cap 0603 150p 50v NPO ±5%
Cap 0805 220n 10% X7r 16v
AP CER 220N 50V 10% 0805 X7R
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r ±10%
AP CER 220N 50V 10% 0805 X7R
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r ±10%

D1
D2
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12

001-10084-47
001-10099-01
001-10070-01
001-10084-51
001-10084-51
001-10084-51
001-10099-01
001-10084-51
001-10099-01
001-10099-01
001-10284-51

Diode SMD BZX84C4V7 Zen SOT23
Diode BAV99w Dual Ss
Diode BAV70W Dual Ss SOT323
Diode SMD BZX84C5V1 Zen SOT23
Diode SMD BZX84C5V1 Zen SOT23
Diode SMD BZX84C5V1 Zen SOT23
Diode BAV99w Dual Ss
Diode SMD BZX84C5V1 Zen SOT23
Diode BAV99w Dual Ss
Diode BAV99w Dual Ss
Diode SMD BZX284B5V1 Zensod110

R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15A
R16A
R17
R18
R19
R20
R21
R22
R23
R24
R25
R26
R27
R28
R29
R30
R31
R32
R34
R35
R36
R37
R38
R39
R40
R41
R43A
R44
R45
R47A
R48
R49
R50
R51
R52
R53
R54
R55
R56

038-13100-10
038-14330-10
038-14560-00
038-16330-10
038-16330-10
038-13680-00
038-13120-00
038-13680-00
038-15100-10
036-13270-00
038-15100-10
038-14330-10
038-10000-00
038-15100-10
038-14330-10
038-15100-10
038-15470-10
038-15820-10
038-15470-10
038-16120-10
038-15470-10
038-15470-10
038-16120-10
038-12560-00
038-14100-10
038-15470-10
038-15100-10
038-15120-10
038-16180-00
038-13180-10
038-13180-10
038-13680-00
038-13680-00
038-13330-00
038-13120-00
038-16120-10
038-16150-10
038-15120-10
038-16120-10
038-15470-10
038-10000-00
038-10000-00
038-10000-00
038-12560-00

RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 3k3 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 5k6 5% 1/10W
RES 0603 330k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 330k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 680R 5% 1/10W
RES 0603 120R 5% 1/10W
RES 0603 680R 5% 1/10W
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0805 270R 5% 1/8W
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 3k3 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 0R
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 3k3 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 47k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 82k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 47k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 120k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 47k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 47k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 120k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 56R 5% 1/10W
RES 0603 1k0 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 47k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 12k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 180k 5% 1/10W
RES 0603 180R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 180R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 680R 5% 1/10W
RES 0603 680R 5% 1/10W
RES 0603 330R 5% 1/10W
RES 0603 120R 5% 1/10W
RES 0603 120k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 150k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 12k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 120k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 47k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 0R
RES 0603 0R
RES 0603 0R
RES 0603 56R 5% 1/10W

E1
E2
E3
E4
FL1
FL2
FL3
FL4
FL5
FL6
FL7
FL8
FL9
Q1
Q2
Q3
R1
RV1
R2
RV2
R3
RV3
R4
R5
R8
R9

057-10120-03
057-10120-03
057-10120-03
057-10120-03
057-10120-03
057-10120-03
057-10120-03
057-10120-03
057-11220-02
057-11220-02
057-11220-02
057-11220-02
012-14100-00
000-10084-71
000-10084-71
000-10084-71
036-02100-03
042-05100-06
038-15100-10
042-05100-06
038-14100-10
042-05100-06
038-15100-10
038-16470-00
038-17100-10
036-02100-03

Ind 0805 120e@100m .2 Emi Supr
Ind 0805 120e@100m .2 Emi Supr
Ind 0805 120e@100m .2 Emi Supr
Ind 0805 120e@100m .2 Emi Supr
Ind 0805 120e@100m .2 Emi Supr
Ind 0805 120e@100m .2 Emi Supr
Ind 0805 120e@100m .2 Emi Supr
Ind 0805 120e@100m .2 Emi Supr
Ind 0603 Blm11a221 Emi Supr
Ind 0603 Blm11a221 Emi Supr
Ind 0603 Blm11a221 Emi Supr
Ind 0603 Blm11a221 Emi Supr
Cap Cer SMD 1N Array EMI Supr
Xstr BC847BW NPN SOT323
Xstr BC847BW NPN SOT323
Xstr BC847BW NPN SOT323
RES Pwr 1218 10R 5% 1W
Res Pre TH 10k 6mm Top
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
Res Pre TH 10k 6mm Top
RES 0603 1k0 1% 1/10W
Res Pre TH 10k 6mm Top
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 470k 5% 1/10W
RES 0603 1M 1% 1/10W
RES Pwr 1218 10R 5% 1W

S1
SK1
SK2

230-10010-44
240-00011-67
240-10000-11

Sw SMD Spst 16dil X8
Skt 15w Drng Ra Slim Dsub 7912
Conn SMD 18w Skt M/Match

T1
T2

054-00010-18
054-00010-18

Xfmr Line SMD 600 Ohm P2781
Xfmr Line SMD 600 Ohm P2781

U1
U3
U4
U5
U6
U7
U8
U9

002-10339-00
002-10740-40
002-10740-80
002-10854-10
002-10740-80
002-10003-58
002-10078-05
002-10002-02
220-65202-04
402-00012-0X

IC SMD LM339 4x CMplt S014
IC 74AHCT04 SOIC14 Hex Inv
IC 74AHCT08 SOIC14 4x2IP AND
IC TDA8541T 1w Audio Amp
IC 74AHCT08 SOIC14 4x2IP AND
IC SMD LM358 Dual 0-Amp
IC SMD 78l05 5v Reg
IC SMD ADM202E RS232/Esd S016
PCB TMA 600R LINE INTFC
MANL f/instr TMAA01-01

600-00009-00 Pkg Kit Opt 15w parts:
240-00032-00
Plg 15w Drng Hi-D UL-CSA P/Mtg
240-06010-29
Conn 9w Hood/Cvr Lets
600-00010-00 Pkg Kit Opt Int parts:
219-00329-00
Loom TMA Int Opt
347-00011-00
Scrw 4-40*3/16 Unc P/P Blk
349-02062-00
Scrw M3*8 T/T P/T ContiR
354-01043-00
Fsnr Scrw Lok 1pr 4-40
362-01108-01
Seal Drng Cvr 9way TMA
362-01111-00
Seal Drng 9way TMA

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

465

17.9.2

TMAA01-01 Grid Reference List (PCB IPN 220-65202-04)

Ref.

PCB

Circuit

Ref.

PCB

Circuit

Ref.

PCB

Circuit

C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C7
C8
C9
C10
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C24
C25
C26
C27
C28
C29
C30
C31
C32
C33
C35
C37
C38
C39
C40
C41

B2
B1
C5
F6
D8
B6
D2
D2
B6
E2
F8
D2
C2
C7
E3
E3
E6
C6
F3
D6
C1
E5
F5
G4
F4
E5
D6
C1
C1
B1
D5
E8
D8
E8
E8
D8

2:A2
2:A2
2:A4
1:D5
2:G3
2:A4
2:F6
2:G6
2:B4
1:K3
2:C3
2:B6
2:C6
1:B10
1:K4
1:J7
1:A9
1:A9
1:K8
1:A10
2:G8
1:H2
1:H3
1:G3
1:H4
1:A12
1:A11
1:J13
1:H13
2:G8
1:J9
2:E3
2:E3
2:E3
2:E4
2:E4

MT4
MT5
MT6

G6
A1
G1

2:A7
2:A7
2:A8

Q1
Q2
Q3

G5
E2
C6

1:E9
1:G10
1:D4

SK1

SK2

T1
T2
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7

D4
C4
B4
B3
B4
B3
D2
C2
C2

1:J11
1:H11
1:D2
1:F2
1:D2
1:G2
1:E13
1:G12
1:D13

D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12

B3
C2
C3
G5
B2
D2
C2
B5

1:C11
1:F12
1:G12
1:C10
1:B10
1:J12
1:K12
1:J12
1:H4
1:H12
1:E12
1:D12
2:A3

U2
U3

E8
F5

E1
E2
E3
E4

C2
D2
C1
D1

2:C6
2:C6
2:C7
2:C7

FL1
FL2
FL3
FL4
FL5
FL6
FL7
FL8
FL9

D2
D2
D1
D1
E3
D3
C3
C3
C1

2:G6
2:F6
2:G7
2:F7
1:K11
1:J11
1:J11
1:H11
1:D13
1:G13
1:E13

2:B2
1:E7
1:E12
2:G3
1:E6
1:D5
2:B3
2:A4
1:D2
1:E5
1:E5
1:E4
2:E8
2:G5
2:E8
2:F5
2:F5
1:E6
1:D5
1:D4
1:D2
2:B8
1:B8
1:G2
1:E9
1:G9
1:B9
1:B9
1:B10
1:F9
1:G11
1:B10
1:D9
1:D12
1:E11
1:B11
1:K4
1:K7
1:K8
1:J8
2:E9
2:C4
2:B4
1:H10
2:F2
2:E9
2:C4
1:H3
1:H3
1:G3
1:H3
1:D12
1:H11
1:J11
2:F3
1:F10
2:F2
1:E5
1:K3
1:H5

E1
D2

B1
D6
D2
F8
E6
E6
C6
B6
C4
E6
E6
C7
A7
F8
A7
E8
E8
F7
F7
D6
C4
D1
D7
C3
F5
E2
D7
E7
E7
E3
D2
D7
F5
C2
E2
D6
E3
E4
E4
D4
A7
C8
C8
C4
E8
A7
C8
F5
E5
F4
F5
D2
C3
D3
F8
E3
F9
E7
F2
F4

SK1

D1
D2

R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15A
R15
R16A
R16
R17
R18
R19
R20
R21
R22
R23
R24
R25
R26
R27
R28
R29
R30
R31
R32
R34
R35
R36
R37
R38
R39
R40
R41
R43A
R43
R44
R45
R46
R47A
R47
R48
R49
R50
R51
R52
R53
R54
R55
R56
R57
RV1
RV2
RV3

1:D5
1:D11
1:F4
1:G4
1:G9
1:J9
1:H9
1:F9
2:B8
2:F9
2:C8
2:G9
1:K13
1:J13
1:H13
1:B13
1:G13
1:D13
1:E13
2:F1
2:C1
2:B1
2:G1
1:C1
1:H1
1:D1
1:G1
1:F1
1:K1

U5
U6

E3
D5

U8
U9
U10

B5
D8
C8

1:C5
1:E6
1:B9
1:A11
1:C4
2:F3
1:G6
1:G7
1:F2
1:B6
1:C10
1:A9
1:B6
1:A10
1:E8
1:F3
1:J7
1:A8
1:C10
1:B11
1:B7
1:D3
1:H3
1:J3
1;A12
2:A3
2:E3
2:C3

1:E4

MT1
MT2
MT3

466

B9
G9
A6

2:A5
2:A6
2:A6

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

17.9.3

Line-Interface Board Layout (top side)

IPN 220-65202-04

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

467

17.9.4

Line-Interface Board Layout (bottom side)

IPN 220-65202-04

468

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

17.9.5

Line-Interface Board Circuit Diagram

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

469

470

TMAA01-01 Line-Interface Board

TMAA01-02 RS-232 Board
The TMAA01-02 RS-232 board fits inside the radio in the
options cavity and is connected to the main PCB by the internal
options connector and loom.

D-range
hood parts

D-range plug
internal options
connector

The RS-232 signals are then made available on the 9-way Drange connector mounted on the RS-232 board. This connector
fits through the external options connector hole provided in the
radio chassis.

RS-232
board

external options
connector

external options
cover seal

18.1

RS-232 board
installation parts

Important

The radio does not meet the IP54 protection standard once an RS-232 board has
been installed unless the external options
cover seal is installed.

Important

To comply with EN 301 489-5, all
cables connected to the external options
connector must be less than three metres
(10 feet) in length.

internal options
loom

Operation
The TMAA01-02 RS-232 board provides a suitable interface to external
devices requiring full RS-232 level compatibility. As well as supporting
transmit and receive data lines, the board also supports RTS and CTS
hardware flow control lines.

18.1.1

Hardware Flow Control
Although the serial transmit and receive lines are dedicated connections on
the internal options connector, the RTS and CTS lines have to be assigned.
For hardware flow control, these lines are set up in the programming
application. RTS should be assigned to IOP_GPIO3 and CTS should be
assigned to IOP_GPIO1.
Refer to the online help of the programming application for
more information.

TMAA01-02 RS-232 Board

471

18.2

Installing the RS-232 Board
Important

18.2.1

This equipment contains devices which are susceptible to
damage from static charges. Refer to “ESD Precautions”
on page 108 for more information.

Parts Required
The following table describes the parts required to install an RS-232 board in
a radio. The parts marked with an asterisk (*) are not shown in Figure 18.1
and are used to connect to the radio’s external options connector.
Table 18.1
Quantity

RS-232 installation parts required
Internal Part Number

Figure 18.1
Reference

Description

362-01111-XX1

foam seal

362-01108-XXa

cover seal

347-00011-00

4-40x3/16 screws

354-01043-00

screw-lock fasteners

349-02062-00

M3x8 screws

d
1!
1@
h
j

*1
*1

240-00034-00

D-range plug

—

240-06010-29

D-range hood

—

1. Contact Technical Support for the exact IPN.

18.2.2

Installation Procedure
1.

Disassemble the radio in order to gain access to the options cavity.
For detailed disassembly instructions, refer to “Disassembly and
Reassembly” on page 129.

The circled numbers in the following instructions refer to items in the
diagram on page 473.

472

Remove the top cover and lid b from the radio to access the
options cavity.

Remove the external options connector bung c, if it is fitted.

On the inside of the radio lid place the foam seal d over the external
options connector cavity e.

Plug one end of the internal options connector loom into the internal
options connector on the RS-232 board.

With the top side of the RS-232 board f facing the radio lid, guide
the external options connector g into the external options
connector cavity.

TMAA01-02 RS-232 Board

Important

The external options connector screw-lock fasteners must
be tightened correctly before screwing the RS-232 board
onto the mounting posts i.

Screw the external options connector to the radio lid using the two
screw-lock fasteners h.
Tighten the fasteners to a torque of 0.9N·m (8lbf·in).

Screw the RS-232 board to the mounting posts on the radio lid using
four M3x8 self-tapping screws j.
Tighten the M3x8 screws to a torque of 1.9N·m (17lbf·in)

Important

Figure 18.1

For the RS232 board to be installed correctly in the radio’s
options cavity, the internal options connector loom 1) must
be looped in the way shown in the diagram on page 473.

Plug the unattached end of internal options connector loom 1) into
the internal options connector on the radio main PCB.

10.

Refit the radio lid and top cover to the radio and screw the external
options cover seal 1! over the external options connector, using the
two 4-40x3/16 screws 1@.

RS-232 board installation

c
1!

1@
h

d
f

j
1)

b
c
d
e
f
g

radio lid
external options connector bung
foam seal
external options connector cavity
RS-232 board
external options connector

h
i
j
1)
1!
1@

screw-lock fasteners
mounting posts
M3x8 self-tapping screws
internal options loom
external options cover seal
4-40x3/16 screws

TMAA01-02 RS-232 Board

473

18.3

Interface Specification
The following tables summarize the signals used for the RS-232 board on the
internal options connector (SK1 on the RS-232 board) and the external
options connector (SK2 on the RS-232 board).
Note

Table 18.2

Internal options connector—pins and signals
Pin

1&1*
1%1^
1#1$
1!1@
J1)
HI
FG
DE
BC
top view

The TM8000 3DK Hardware Developer’s Kit Application
Manual contains a detailed electrical specification for the signals
available on the radio’s internal options connector. This manual is
part of the 3DK Resource CD, which can be purchased using
product code TMAA30-01.

Connector
Signal

Description
switched 13V8 supply from the radio

13V8_SW

AUD_TAP_OUT Programmable tap point out of the receive or transmit audio chain.
DC-coupled

AGND

AUX_MIC_AUD Auxiliary microphone input, with electret microphone biasing
provided.
Dynamic microphones are not supported.

RX_BEEP_IN

receive sidetone input, AC-coupled

AUD_TAP_IN

Programmable tap point into the receive or transmit audio chain.
DC-coupled

RX_AUD

not connected

RSSI

analogue RSSI output

analogue ground

programmable function and direction

9-15 IOP_GPIO1 to
IOP_GPIO7
16

DGND

digital ground

IOP_RXD

an RS-232 compliant asynchronous serial port - receive data

IOP_TXD

an RS-232 compliant asynchronous serial port - transmit data

Table 18.3

External options connector (SK2) — pins and signals
Pin

front view

474

TMAA01-02 RS-232 Board

Signal

Direction

serial transmit data

output from the radio

serial receive data

input to the radio

data ground

—
input to the radio

RTS using IOP_GPIO3

CTS using IOP_GPIO1 output from the radio

18.4

PCB Information

18.4.1

TMAA01-02 Parts List (PCB IPN 220-01740-01)

Ref.

IPN

Description

C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18

014-07100-02
018-14100-00
018-14100-00
018-14100-00
018-14100-00
018-16100-00
014-07470-11
018-16100-00
018-16100-00
018-16100-00
018-14100-00
018-16100-00
018-16100-00
018-14100-00
018-14100-00
018-14100-00
018-14100-00
018-14100-00

Cap Tant SMD 1u0 16v 20% A
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap Tant 4u7 10V 20% 0603
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%

LK1
LK3

036-14100-10
036-14100-10

RES 0805 1k 1% 1/8W
RES 0805 1k 1% 1/8W

R1
R2
R3
R4
R8
R9
R10
R13

038-15100-10
038-15100-10
038-15100-10
038-15100-10
038-13100-10
038-13100-10
038-13100-10
038-13100-10

RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W

SK1
SK2

240-10000-11
240-06009-20

Conn SMD 18w Skt M/Match
Conn DIP D-Sub 9W Female TM8K

U1
U2
U3

002-10740-40
002-10078-00
002-10022-22

IC 74AHCT04 SOIC14 Hex Inv
IC SMD MC78M05CDT5v Reg0.5a
IC SMD ST202E RS232/ESD SO16

Ref.

IPN

Description

220-01740-01
402-00019-0X

PCB TMA RS232 Options
F/Inst TMAA01-02 RS232 Brd

600-00010-00 Pkg Kit Opt Int parts:
219-00329-00 Loom TMA Int Opt
347-00011-00 Scrw 4-40*3/16 Unc P/P Blk
349-02062-00 Scrw M3*8 T/T P/T ContiR
354-01043-00 Fsnr Scrw Lok 1pr 4-40
362-01108-01 Seal Drng Cvr 9way TMA
362-01111-00 Seal Drng 9way TMA
600-00012-00 Pkg Kit Opt 9w parts:
240-00034-00 Plg 9w Drng UL-CSA Pnl Mtg
240-06010-29 Conn 9w Hood/Cvr Lets

TMAA01-02 RS-232 Board

475

18.4.2

RS-232 Board Layout (top side)

IPN 220-01740-01

476

TMAA01-02 RS-232 Board

18.4.3

RS-232 Board Layout (bottom side)

IPN 220-01740-01

TMAA01-02 RS-232 Board

477

18.4.4

478

RS-232 Board Circuit Diagram

TMAA01-02 RS-232 Board

TMAA01-05 Options-Extender Board
The TMAA01-05 options-extender board provides external
access to most of the signal lines provided by the radio’s internal
options connector.

D-range
hood parts

The options-extender board fits inside the radio in the options
cavity and is connected to the main PCB by the internal options
connector and loom.

D-range plug
internal options
connector
optionsextender
board

external options
connector

external options
cover seal

19.1

The internal options connector signals are then made available on
the high-density 15-way D-range connector mounted on the
options-extender board. This connector fits through the external
options connector hole provided in the radio chassis.

options-extender
installation parts

Important

The radio does not meet the IP54 protection standard once an options-extender
board has been installed unless the external options cover seal is installed.

Important

To comply with EN 301 489-5, all
cables connected to the external options
connector must be less than three metres
(10 feet) in length.

internal options
loom

Changing the Options-Extender Links
The options-extender board configuration must be completed before the
board is installed in the radio, as the top side of the options-extender board
is not accessible once the board is screwed to the radio lid.
Important

This equipment contains devices which are susceptible to
damage from static discharges. Refer to “ESD Precautions”
on page 108 for more information.

The options-extender board has various link options which allow the user
to re-configure the outputs available on the external options connector. The
outputs that can be made available by changing linking resistors are:
■

the 5V supply line, and

■

the RX_BEEP_IN line.

In both cases, these lines replace other lines that are available when the
linking resistors are in the factory-set configuration. Note that there is no
external connection available for the RX_AUD line.

TMAA01-05 Options-Extender Board

479

Figure 19.1

Options-extender board linking resistor locations

power supply line

RX_BEEP_IN line

19.1.1

Power Supply Line
The power supply output available on pin 2 of the external options
connector is factory-set to 13.8V. The output on this pin can be changed to
5V if R11 (a 0Ω surface mount resistor) is moved to position R10.
Figure 19.1 at the top of the page shows the component locations.
Important

19.1.2

The maximum current for the 5V supply line is 400mA.

RX_BEEP_IN Line
If the RX_BEEP_IN line is required on the external options connector,
it must replace one of the following lines:
■

IOP_RSSI

■

AUD_TAP_IN

■

AUX_MIC_AUD

■

AUD_TAP_OUT.

The following table explains the resistor link changes required and
Figure 19.1 at the top of the page shows the component locations.
Table 19.1

RX_BEEP_IN resistor changes

RX_BEEP_IN Line Replaces

480

Remove Resistor

Add Resistor

IOP_RSSI

AUD_TAP_IN

AUX_MIC_AUD

AUD_TAP_OUT

TMAA01-05 Options-Extender Board

19.2

Installing the Options-Extender Board

19.2.1

Parts Required
The following table describes the parts required to install an options-extender
board in a radio. The parts marked with an asterisk (*) are not shown in
Figure 19.2 and are used to connect to the radio’s external options connector.
Table 19.2
Quantity

Options-extender installation parts required
Internal Part Number

Description

Figure 19.2
Reference

362-01111-XX1

foam seal

362-01108-XXa

cover seal

347-00011-00

4-40x3/16 screws

354-01043-00

screw-lock fasteners

349-02062-00

M3x8 screws

d
1!
1@
h
j

*1
*1

240-00032-00

D-range plug

—

240-06010-29

D-range hood

—

1. Contact Technical Support for the exact IPN.

19.2.2

Installation Procedure
1.

Disassemble the radio in order to gain access to the options cavity.
For detailed disassembly instructions, refer to “Disassembly and
Reassembly” on page 129.

Refer to the diagram on the following page and the instructions below.
2.

Remove the top cover and lid b from the radio to access the
options cavity.

Remove the external options connector bung c, if it is fitted.

On the inside of the radio lid place the foam seal d over the external
options connector cavity e.

With the top side of the options-extender board f facing the radio
lid, guide the external options connector g (the D-range connector
on the options-extender board) into the external options connector
cavity.

Screw the external options connector to the radio lid using the two
screw-lock fasteners h.
Tighten the fasteners to a torque of 0.9N·m (8lbf·in).

Important

The external options connector screw-lock fasteners must
be tightened correctly before screwing the optionsextender board onto the mounting posts i.

TMAA01-05 Options-Extender Board

481

Screw the options-extender board to the mounting posts on the radio
lid using four M3x8 self-tapping screws j.
Tighten the M3x8 screws to a torque of 1.9N·m (17lbf·in)

Important

For the options-extender board to be installed correctly in
the radio’s options cavity, the internal options connector
loom 1) must be looped in the way shown in Figure 19.2.

Plug the unattached end of internal options connector loom 1) into
the internal options connector on the radio main PCB.

Refit the radio lid and top cover to the radio and screw the external
options cover seal 1! over the external options connector, using the
two 4-40x3/16 screws 1@.

Figure 19.2

Options-extender board installation

c
1!

1@
h

i
d

g
1)
b
c
d
e
f
g

482

radio lid
external options connector bung
foam seal
external options connector cavity
options-extender board
external options connector

TMAA01-05 Options-Extender Board

h
i
j
1)
1!
1@

screw-lock fasteners
mounting posts
M3x8 self-tapping screws
internal options loom
external options cover seal
4-40x3/16 screws

19.3

Interface Specification
The following tables summarize the signals used for the options-extender
board on the internal options connector (SK1 on the options-extender board)
and the external options connector (SK2 on the options-extender board).
Note

Table 19.3

Internal options connector—pins and signals
Pin

1&1*
1%1^
1#1$
1!1@
J1)
HI
FG
DE
BC
top view

The TM8000 3DK Hardware Developer’s Kit Application
Manual (product code MMAA30-01-00-807) contains a detailed
electrical specification for the signals available on the radio’s internal options connector. This manual is part of the 3DK Resource
CD, which can be purchased using product code TMAA30-01.

Connector
Signal

Description
switched 13V8 supply from the radio

13V8_SW

AUD_TAP_OUT Programmable tap point out of the receive or transmit audio chain.
DC-coupled

AGND

AUX_MIC_AUD Auxiliary microphone input, with electret microphone biasing
provided.
Dynamic microphones are not supported.

RX_BEEP_IN

receive sidetone input, AC-coupled

AUD_TAP_IN

Programmable tap point into the receive or transmit audio chain.
DC-coupled

RX_AUD

not connected

RSSI

analogue RSSI output

9-15 IOP_GPIO1 to
IOP_GPIO7

analogue ground

programmable function and direction

DGND

digital ground

IOP_RXD

an RS-232 compliant asynchronous serial port - receive data

IOP_TXD

an RS-232 compliant asynchronous serial port - transmit data

TMAA01-05 Options-Extender Board

483

Table 19.4

External options connector (SK2) — pins and signals
Pin Signal

Description

13V8_SW1

AUD_TAP_OUTb Programmable tap point out of the Rx or Tx audio
chain. DC-coupled

AGND

13V8 supply

analogue ground

11 AUX_MIC_AUD
front view

Auxiliary microphone input, with electret microphone
biasing provided.
Dynamic microphones are not supported.

AUD_TAP_INb

Programmable tap point into the Rx or Tx audio chain.
DC-coupled.

RSSI2

analogue RSSI output
3

programmable function and direction

IOP_GPIO2c

programmable function and direction

IOP_GPIO3c

programmable function and direction

IOP_GPIO4c

programmable function and direction

IOP_GPIO5c

programmable function and direction

IOP_GPIO6c

programmable function and direction

IOP_GPIO7c

programmable function and direction

IOP_RXD

an RS-232 compliant asynchronous serial port receive data

12 IOP_TXD

an RS-232 compliant asynchronous serial port transmit data

15 IOP_GPIO1

1. This can be configured to be 5V. Refer to “Power Supply Line” on page 480.
2. This can be re-configured to be RX_BEEP_IN. Refer to “RX_BEEP_IN Line” on page 480.
3. 3V3 CMOS output via 1kΩ series resistance. 5V tolerant input.

484

TMAA01-05 Options-Extender Board

19.4

PCB Information

19.4.1

TMAA01-05 Parts List (PCB IPN 220-65203-00)

Ref.

IPN

Description

Ref.

IPN

Description

C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
C26
C27
C28
C29
C30
C31
C32
C33
C34
C35
C36

018-16100-00
018-16100-00
018-16100-00
018-16100-00
018-16100-00
018-16100-00
018-15100-00
014-08100-30
015-26100-08
016-08470-01
014-08100-30
018-16100-00
016-08470-01
018-15100-00
018-15100-00
018-15100-00
015-07220-35
015-06470-01
018-13470-00
018-13470-00
018-13470-00
018-13470-00
018-13470-00
018-13470-00
018-13470-00
018-13470-00
018-13470-00
018-15100-00
015-07220-35
018-14100-00
018-14100-00
018-14100-00
018-14100-00
018-14100-00
018-14100-00
018-14100-00

Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap Tant SMD 100u 10v Loesr D
Cap Cer 0805 100n 10% X7r 50v
Cap Elec SMD 47uf 6*4 16v
Cap Tant SMD 100u 10v Loesr D
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap Elec SMD 47uf 6*4 16v
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap Cer 1210 2u2 X5R 35v
Cap Cer 1206 470n X7r 20% 50v
Cap 0603 470p 50v X7r±10%
Cap 0603 470p 50v X7r±10%
Cap 0603 470p 50v X7r±10%
Cap 0603 470p 50v X7r±10%
Cap 0603 470p 50v X7r±10%
Cap 0603 470p 50v X7r±10%
Cap 0603 470p 50v X7r±10%
Cap 0603 470p 50v X7r±10%
Cap 0603 470p 50v X7r±10%
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap Cer 1210 2u2 X5R 35v
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%

L12
L13
L14
L15
L16
L17
L18

057-10010-20
057-10010-20
057-10010-20
057-10600-05
057-10010-20
057-10010-20
057-10010-20

Ind 0603 Blm11-B102s 0.1a
Ind 0603 Blm11-B102s 0.1a
Ind 0603 Blm11-B102s 0.1a
Ind 0603 Blm11p600s .5a F/Bead
Ind 0603 Blm11-B102s 0.1a
Ind 0603 Blm11-B102s 0.1a
Ind 0603 Blm11-B102s 0.1a

R2
R4
R6
R8
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15
R16
R17
R18
R19

036-10000-00
036-10000-00
036-10000-00
036-10000-00
036-10000-00
038-13100-10
038-13100-10
038-13100-10
038-13100-10
038-13100-10
038-13100-10
038-13100-10
038-13100-10

RES 0805 0R 1/8W
RES 0805 0R 1/8W
RES 0805 0R 1/8W
RES 0805 0R 1/8W
RES 0805 0R 1/8W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W

SK1
SK2

240-10000-11
240-00011-67

Conn SMD 18w Skt M/Match
Skt 15w Drng Ra Slim Dsub 7912

220-65203-00
402-00008-0X

PCB TM8000 Options Extender
MANL f/instr TMAA01-05

D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8

001-10014-03
001-10099-01
001-10099-01
001-10099-01
001-10099-01
001-10099-01
001-10099-01
001-10099-01

Diode SMD MBRS140T3 Sch
Diode BAV99w Dual Ss
Diode BAV99w Dual Ss
Diode BAV99w Dual Ss
Diode BAV99w Dual Ss
Diode BAV99w Dual Ss
Diode BAV99w Dual Ss
Diode BAV99w Dual Ss

IC1
IC2

002-10020-20
002-10267-40

IC SMD ADM202 Rs-232 Con S0-16
IC LM2674 S08 Swtch Volt Regul

L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
L9
L10
L11

057-10100-65
057-10010-20
057-10010-20
057-10010-20
057-10010-20
057-10010-20
057-10010-20
057-10010-20
057-10010-45
057-10010-45
057-10600-05

Ind SMD Pwr Cdrh6D38 100UH .65
Ind 0603 Blm11-B102s 0.1a
Ind 0603 Blm11-B102s 0.1a
Ind 0603 Blm11-B102s 0.1a
Ind 0603 Blm11-B102s 0.1a
Ind 0603 Blm11-B102s 0.1a
Ind 0603 Blm11-B102s 0.1a
Ind 0603 Blm11-B102s 0.1a
Ind SMD Pwr CDRH2D18 10UH .43A
Ind SMD Pwr CDRH2D18 10UH .43A
Ind 0603 Blm11p600s .5a F/Bead

TMAA01-05 Options-Extender Board

485

19.4.2

TMAA01-05 Grid Reference List (PCB IPN 220-65203-00)

Ref.

PCB

Circuit

Ref.

PCB

Circuit

C1
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C2
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
C26
C27
C28
C29
C3
C30
C31
C32
C33
C34
C35
C36
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9

D5
F3
E3
E2
F2
D2
D2
D2
E1
B1
B1
D4
B1
B1
C1
C1
C1
C1
C1
D1
D1
F1
D4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
D4
D4
E4
F3
E3
F3

1G4
1G5
1G8
1G8
1G5
1E2
1D2
1D2
1G9
1G2
1F8
1F2
1C2
1A2
1B3
1D2
1B3
1C3
1B2
1F8
1E2
1G4
1G4
1D1
1C1
1C1
1B1
1B1
1B1
1A1
1G2
1G4
1G7
1G7
1G8
1G6

L17
L18
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
L9

D1
D1
B2
B2
C2
C2
C2
C2
C2
E2

1F7
1E2
1C2
1A2
1B3
1D2
1B3
1C3
1B2
1G9

R1
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15
R16
R17
R18
R19
R2
R20
R21
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9

B4
D1
D1
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C4
C3
B3
B2
D2
C3
B3
C3
B3
C3
B3
C3

1A2
1F9
1G9
1D2
1C2
1C2
1B2
1B2
1B2
1A2
1E2
1E2
1F2
1F2
1E2
1E2
1E2
1E2
1E2
1D2
1D2

SK1

D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8

G3
B2
C2
C2
B2
C2
C2
C2

1G7
1A2
1D2
1C3
1C2
1C3 1B3
1B3
1B2

SK2

IC1
IC2

D4
F3

1F3
1G6

1D2
1G2
1E2
1F2
1D1
1C1
1B1
1A1
1D9
1C9
1A9
1B9
1E9
1F9

L1
L10
L11
L12
L13
L14
L15
L16

F4
F2
E2
D2
D2
D2
F1
B1

1G7
1G5
1G9
1E2
1D2
1E2
1G5
1F7

486

TMAA01-05 Options-Extender Board

Ref.

PCB

Circuit

Options-Extender Board Layout (top side)

19.4.4

Options-Extender Board Layout (bottom side)

IPN 220-65203-00

19.4.3

TMAA01-05 Options-Extender Board

487

19.4.5

488

Options-Extender Board Circuit Diagram

TMAA01-05 Options-Extender Board

TMAA02-02 DTMF Microphone

PTT key
microphone
button not shown
(to rear of
microphone)

To make a call, enter the required number using the DTMF keypad
and the DTMF microphone generates audible DTMF tones as the
microphone keys are pressed. Press the PTT key and speak clearly
into the microphone then release the PTT key when you have
finished speaking.
The microphone button operates a hookswitch, which is closed
when the microphone is connected to the microphone clip and open
when the microphone is removed from the microphone clip. The
function of the hookswitch is determined by the radio programming.

grommet

Note

20.1

The TMAA02-02 DTMF microphone plugs into the
microphone socket on the radio control head, and enables users
to make calls to a PABX or PSTN.

The TMAA02-02 DTMF microphone is not suitable for use with
PTT signalling. An example of PTT signalling is leading ANI.

Installation

Installing the
Microphone

Important

The DTMF microphone grommet must be installed whenever the microphone is plugged into the microphone
socket. When installed, the grommet has two functions:
■

to prevent damage to the microphone socket when
there is movement of the microphone cord, and

■

to ensure that the control head is sealed against water,
dust and other environmental hazards.

Plug the DTMF microphone cord into the microphone socket on the
radio control head.

Slide the microphone grommet along the microphone cord and push
two adjacent corners of the grommet into the microphone socket cavity.

Squeeze the grommet and push the remaining corners into position.

Check that the grommet is seated correctly in the cavity.

Figure 20.1

Correct DTMF microphone grommet seating

microphone
grommet
control head

TMAA02-02 DTMF Microphone

489

Installing the
Microphone Clip

Install the microphone clip in the most convenient location for the radio
user. It must be within easy reach of the user, but in such a position that the
microphone PTT key cannot be inadvertently activated or jammed on.
Connect the microphone clip to the negative supply if hookswitch
operation is required.

20.2

Adjustment
Remove the DTMF microphone back cover and set the DTMF tone level
to approximately 60% deviation (±3kHz for wide bandwidth radios and
±1.5kHz for narrow bandwidth radios).

20.3

Radio Programming
The following table shows the settings required for CH_GPIO1 in the
Programmable I/O form of the programming application. When
CH_GPIO1 is set to Send Mic Audio To Spkr, then DTMF tones are fed
into the radio’s speaker at a reduced volume whenever a key on the DTMF
microphone is pressed. This gives the radio user confidence that the tones
are being transmitted.
Refer to the online help of the programming application for more
information.

Table 20.1
Pin

DTMF microphone settings in the Programmable I/O form, Digital tab
Direction

CH_GPIO1 Input

490

Label
None

Action

Active

Send Mic Audio High
To Spkr

TMAA02-02 DTMF Microphone

Debounce
None

Signal State
None

Mirrored To
None

20.4

Interface Specification
The following table and diagram summarizes the signals used for the DTMF
microphone on the radio’s microphone connector and shows the interface
between the DTMF microphone and the radio.
Table 20.2

DTMF microphone connector—pins and signals
Pin

Figure 20.2

Signal

Colour

Description

—

not connected

13V8_SW

red

power supply (switched)

—

yellow

not connected

MIC_PTT

black

PTT and hookswitch

MIC_AUD

white

audio from the microphone

AGND

blue

analogue ground

—

not connected

MIC_GPIO1

green

mute out

DTMF microphone
to radio interface
.

TMAA02-02 DTMF Microphone

491

20.5

Circuit Description
The microphone has a standard 12-key telephone keypad. When one of the
keypad keys is pressed, a DTMF tone specific to that key is generated on the
MIC_AUD line (pin 5). For the duration of the tone, the tone generator
activates the PTT, so that the user is not required to press the PTT key to
transmit each tone.

492

TMAA02-02 DTMF Microphone

TMAA02-06 Support Kit for Concealed &
Dynamic Microphones
The support kit for concealed and dynamic microphones can be
used in two main applications:

concealed & dynamic
microphone support
board

■

to monitor activity around the radio if the radio is placed in
emergency mode, and

■

to support the use of a dynamic microphone, such as that used in
the TMAA10-02 handset.

P2
P3

The concealed and dynamic microphone support board plugs onto
the radio’s control head PCB and contains circuitry for a preamplifier and a microphone switch circuit. The concealed electret
microphone is installed inside the speaker grille of the control head.

concealed microphone
(capsule, rubber seal & wires)

21.1

Installation
Important

This equipment contains devices which are susceptible to
damage from static discharges. Refer to “ESD Precautions”
on page 108 for more information.

Disassembling the
Radio Control Head

To install the concealed-microphone capsule and concealed and dynamic
microphone support board, the control head must be removed from the
radio and disassembled. For detailed disassembly instructions, refer to
“Disassembly and Reassembly” on page 129.

Installing the
Microphone
Capsule and
Dynamic
Microphone Board

Disassemble the control head in order to gain access to the speaker
grille. This will mean removing the control head PCB, the space
frame, and the speaker.

Drill a 1mm diameter hole in the
concealed-microphone cavity b in
the position indicated by the small
‘dimple’ c.

TMAA02-06 Support Kit for Concealed & Dynamic Microphones 493

Important

To maintain the IP54 protection class, great care must be
taken when installing the microphone capsule and seal d
into the concealed-microphone cavity.

Push the microphone capsule and seal
into the concealed-microphone
cavity, with the capsule wires e
towards the speaker grille f .

Reassemble the control head. This
includes reinstalling the speaker g,
the space frame h and the control
head PCB i.

e f d

Plug the speaker lead into the speaker
connector j.
5.

On the control head PCB, solder the positive concealed-microphone
wire to the MIC+ pad 1) and the negative wire to AGND 1!.

Note

The positive wire on the microphone capsule is identified by a red stripe.

g h i j

1@ 1$

On the control head PCB, remove R11 1@ and
solder P2 1# and P3 1$ in the positions shown.

Plug S2 1% and S3 1^ on the concealed and
dynamic microphone support board onto P2
and P3 on the control head PCB.

Re-install the control head on the radio body.

1^
21.2

Radio Programming
When the support kit for concealed and dynamic microphones is installed
in a radio, two fields in the UI Preferences form of the programming
application may need to be changed.
■

Enable Options Board Preamp: select this field if a dynamic
microphone is installed. An example of an accessory that uses a dynamic
microphone is the TMAA10-02 handset.

■

Emergency Mic: select Concealed if a concealed microphone is installed.

Refer to the online help of the programming application for more information.

494 TMAA02-06 Support Kit for Concealed & Dynamic Microphones

21.3

Interface Specification
The following table and diagram summarizes the signals used for the
concealed and dynamic microphone support kit and shows the interface
between the support kit and the radio control head.

Table 21.1

Concealed and dynamic microphone support board—pins and signals
Pin
1

Signal

Colour

CH_LE

SPI latch signal to latch microphone select data into
the concealed and dynamic microphone board

D2-D3

data from the control head shift register

enables the output of the shift register of the audio
switch

CH_SPI_CLK

SPI clock signal to clock microphone select data into
concealed and dynamic microphone board

+13V8_SW

power for analogue parts

+3V3

power for digital parts

RST

initialise the concealed and dynamic microphone
board shift register

DGND

digital ground

MIC_AUD_IN-P1

microphone audio from microphone interface

GEC
FDB

MIC_AUD_OUT

processed microphone signal output to radio

—

not connected

S3 top view

MIC_AUD_OUT

processed microphone signal output to radio

MIC+

audio from the concealed microphone

AGND

analogue ground

IGEC
HFDB
S2 top view

Figure 21.1

Concealed and dynamic microphone support kit to radio interface

TMAA02-06 Support Kit for Concealed & Dynamic Microphones 495

21.4

PCB Information

21.4.1

TMAA02-06 Parts List (PCB IPN 220-01712-01)

Ref.

IPN

Description

C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C10

015-26330-08
015-26330-08
018-15100-00
015-26330-08
018-16100-00
018-16100-00
018-16100-00
018-16100-00
018-16100-00

Cap Cer 0805 330n 5% 10v X7r
Cap Cer 0805 330n 5% 10v X7r
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r +-10%
Cap Cer 0805 330n 5% 10v X7r
Cap 0603 100n 16vx7r+-10%
Cap 0603 100n 16vx7r+-10%
Cap 0603 100n 16vx7r+-10%
Cap 0603 100n 16vx7r+-10%
Cap 0603 100n 16vx7r+-10%

IC1
IC2

002-13740-53 IC 74LV4053 Mux/Demux Tssop16
002-13745-95 IC 74LV595 8BIT SHIFTREG TSSOP

Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4

000-10084-71
000-10085-71
000-10084-62
001-10099-01

Xstr BC847BW NPN SOT323
Xstr SMD BC857BW PNP SOT323
Xstr BC846S Dual SOT363 NPN
Diode BAV99w Dual Ss

R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R13
R14
R15
R16
R17
R18
R20

038-14220-00
038-14680-00
038-14470-00
038-15470-10
038-14100-10
038-15330-10
038-15100-10
038-14100-10
038-14100-10
038-15470-10
038-15150-10
038-15470-10
036-10000-00

Res 0603 2k2 1/16w +-5%
Res 0603 6k8 1/16w +-5%
Res 0603 4k7 1/16w +-5%
Res 0603 47k 1/16w+-1%
Res 0603 1k0 1/16w +-1%
Res 0603 33k 1%
Res 0603 10k 1/16w +-1%
Res 0603 1k0 1/16w +-1%
Res 0603 1k0 1/16w +-1%
Res 0603 47k 1/16w+-1%
Res 0603 15K 1% WDS
Res 0603 47k 1/16w+-1%
Res M/F SMD 0805 0e 0.125w

S2
S3

240-10002-00 Skt SMD 8w 2x4 Lo-Prof 2mm
240-10001-00 Skt SMD 6w 2x3 Lo-Prof 2mm

P2
P3

240-10004-00 Hdr SMD 8w 2x4 Lo-Prof 2mm
240-10003-00 Hdr SMD 6w 2x3 Lo-Prof 2mm

Ref.

IPN

Description

220-01712-01 Pcb Dynamic/Covert Mic
252-00010-41 Mic Capsule Electret 2.7*6mm
369-01031-00 Rbbr Mic Upper A3M2751 T3K
402-00007-XX MANL I/INSTR TMAA02-06

496 TMAA02-06 Support Kit for Concealed & Dynamic Microphones

21.4.2

Concealed and Dynamic Microphone Support Board (top side)

IPN 220-01712-01

TMAA02-06 Support Kit for Concealed & Dynamic Microphones 497

21.4.3

Concealed and Dynamic Microphone Support Board (bottom side)

IPN 220-01712-01

498 TMAA02-06 Support Kit for Concealed & Dynamic Microphones

21.4.4

Concealed and Dynamic Microphone Board Circuit Diagram

TMAA02-06 Support Kit for Concealed & Dynamic Microphones 499

500 TMAA02-06 Support Kit for Concealed & Dynamic Microphones

TMAA02-07 Concealed Microphone
The concealed microphone can be used to monitor activity around
the radio if the radio is placed in emergency mode, and is installed
beside the speaker grille of the graphical-display control head.

concealed microphone
(capsule, rubber seal & wires)

22.1

Installation
Important

Removing the Radio
Control Head

This equipment contains devices which are susceptible to
damage from static discharges. Refer to “ESD Precautions”
on page 108 for more information.

To install the concealed-microphone capsule, the control head must be
removed from the radio.
Important

During this procedure, take care that the control-head seal
is not damaged. Damage to this seal reduces environmental
protection.

On the underside of the radio,
insert a 5mm (3/16 inch) flatbladed screwdriver between the
control head and the control-head
seal, in either position 1 or 2 .

lever point
control-head seal
indication of
lever point
1

Insertion points 1 and 2 are
lever points and are indicated on
the radio chassis by a dot-dash-dot pattern (•

Installing the
Microphone
Capsule

– •).

Use the screwdriver to lift the control head off the chassis clip, then
repeat in the other position.

Unplug the control head loom from the radio body.

Unscrew the two screws holding the adaptor flange to the control
head. The adaptor flange can now be separated from the control head.

Drill a 1mm diameter
hole in the concealedmicrophone cavity b,
in the position
indicated by the small
‘dimple’ c.

TMAA02-07 Concealed Microphone 501

Important

Push the microphone capsule and
seal into the concealedmicrophone cavity.

On the control head PCB, solder
the negative wire to the
COV MIC- pad e and the positive
concealed-microphone wire to the
COV MIC+ pad f.

Note

22.2

To maintain the IP54 protection class, great care must be
taken when installing the microphone capsule and seal d
into the concealed-microphone cavity.

The positive wire on the microphone capsule is identified by a
red stripe.

Re-install adaptor flange onto the control head.

Plug the control head loom
onto the control
head connector 1 .

Insert the bottom edge of the
control head onto the two clips
in the front of the radio
chassis 2 , then snap
into place.

2
1
2

Radio Programming
When the concealed microphone is installed in a radio for use in emergency
situations, a field in the UI Preferences form, Audio tab of the programming
application may need to be selected.
■

Emergency Mic: select Concealed.

Refer to the online help of the programming application for more information.

502 TMAA02-07 Concealed Microphone

TMAA02-08 Keypad Microphone

PTT key
alphanumeric
keys
left selection key

right selection key

scroll keys

grommet

The TMAA02-08 keypad microphone plugs into the
microphone socket on the graphical-display radio control
head, and enables users to make calls to other radios, groups,
or to a PABX or PSTN. The types of call that you can make
depends on the way your radio has been programmed.
As well as the PTT key, there are twelve alphanumeric keys,
two scroll keys, and a left and right selection key on the keypad
microphone. The selection keys and scroll keys duplicate the
keys on the control head and the 12 alphanumeric keys on the
keypad microphone are used to dial call strings and enter text.
The microphone button operates a hookswitch, which is
closed when the microphone is connected to the microphone
clip, and open when the microphone is removed from the
microphone clip. The function of the hookswitch is
determined by the way the radio is programmed.

23.1

Operation

Dialling Characters

If an incorrect character has been dialled, use the left selection key on either
the microphone keypad or control head to clear it and move
back one character.

Dialling Text
Messages

When the keypad microphone is used to enter a text message, the
microphone keys have special functions. Use the
key to toggle between
upper and lower case characters and use the left selection key
to delete
a character from the display.
The alphanumeric keys
to
are used to enter letters, numbers and
punctuation. Repeated presses of these keys will give you the characters
shown in the table below.
Key

Characters

Key

Characters
P

space 0

TMAA02-08 Keypad Microphone

503

23.2

Installation

Installing the
Microphone

Important

The keypad microphone grommet must be installed whenever the microphone is plugged into the microphone
socket. When installed, the grommet has two functions:
■

to prevent damage to the microphone socket when
there is movement of the microphone cord, and

■

to ensure that the control head is sealed against water,
dust and other environmental hazards.

Make sure the radio is turned off, then plug the keypad microphone
cord into the microphone socket on the radio control head.

Important

The radio will only recognize the presence of the keypad
microphone when the radio is powered on, so that if the
microphone is plugged in after the radio has been powered
on, it will not recognize the keypad microphone. Also, if
the keypad microphone is plugged in on power up but is
later unplugged, then plugged back in, the radio will not
recognize it again until the next power cycle.

Slide the microphone grommet along the microphone cord and push
two adjacent corners of the grommet into the microphone
socket cavity.

Squeeze the grommet and push the remaining corners into position.

Check that the grommet is seated correctly in the cavity.

Figure 23.1

Correct keypad microphone grommet seating

microphone
grommet
control head

Installing the
Microphone Clip

504

TMAA02-08 Keypad Microphone

23.3

Radio Programming
The radio does not need to be programmed to recognize the presence of a
keypad microphone, as this is automatically done when the radio is
powered on. However, there are a few related fields that should be
configured, as required, to enable the keypad microphone to be
used effectively.
Note

You must power-cycle the radio after replacing the keypad microphone with a programming lead, in order to read or program
the radio.

UI Preferences Form
(TM8100 radios)

Set the Control Head Mic Gain to Low.

Conventional Forms

In conventional mode, there are check boxes labelled Selcall Call Dialling,
DTMF Call Dialling and Phone Patch Call Dialling. There is also an
option Conventional Dialling Type field, where you can program the
radio to dial labels or channels from the default display.
Refer to the online help of the programming application for more information
about these programming options.

MPT1327 Trunked
Forms

In MPT1327 trunked mode, there may be check boxes labelled DTMF
Dialling, PABX Calls and PSTN Calls. These check boxes need to be
selected before you can make these types of calls.
Refer to the online help of the programming application for more information
about these programming options.

23.4

Interface Specification
The following table and diagram summarizes the signals used for the keypad
microphone on the radio’s microphone connector and shows the interface
between the keypad microphone and the radio.
Table 23.1

Keypad microphone connector—pins and signals
Pin

Signal

Colour
—

Description

RX audio

not connected

13.8V

black

power supply

TXD

green

transmit serial data

PTT

white

PTT and hookswitch

MIC

blue

audio from the microphone

GND

red

ground

RXD

yellow

receive serial data

—

not connected

TMAA02-08 Keypad Microphone

505

506

TMAA02-08 Keypad Microphone

TMAA03-02 Security Bracket
The TMAA03-02 security bracket can be used in place of the standard
U-bracket in locations where you want to stop opportunistic removal of the
radio by a third party, or where you want to have a quick release setup that
allows you to swap over radios (e.g. leasing situation). The security bracket
also provides electrical isolation to the radio.
The parts of the TMAA03-02 security bracket are illustrated in Figure 24.1.

Figure 24.1

Parts of the TMAA03-02 security bracket
Mounting rails (see E and F)

Description

Quantity

security bracket cradle base

slide locks

slide lock key

self-tapping screws (10Gx20 hex/
poz) - for fixing security bracket in
place (not pictured)

anti-vibration washers for selftapping screws (not pictured)

1 left
1 right

short mounting rails for TM8100

screws (M4x25 T/T P/T ContiR) for attaching short mounting rails
to TM8100 radio (not pictured)

tall mounting rails for TM8200

screws (M4x30 T/T P/T ContiR) for attaching tall mounting rails to
TM8200 (not pictured)

Note: B and C are pre-assembled

TMAA03-02 Security Bracket

507

24.1

Installing the Security Bracket and Radio

24.2

Installation Planning
Before installing the security bracket, make sure that the site you have
chosen for the installation meets the following criteria:
1.

The site has enough height for the radio to be easily installed
and removed.
The measurements given at the bottom of Figure 24.1 are the heights
of the radios and base only. Allow extra space for manipulation.

Note
2.

You will need more space if you are installing a TM8200 radio.
The site has enough depth for the radio.
Check that the front and rear overhang of the radios will fit where you
are mounting the security bracket.

Installation
Procedure

The site allows for good air circulation, particularly at the rear of
the radio.

Important

Note

The security bracket must be securely installed. Otherwise
there is a risk that the whole assembly of the radio and security bracket may become loose over time, or as a result of
serious impact.

Because some model control heads are taller than others, each
security bracket kit comes with two different heights of mounting
rail and mounting screws, depending on the radio type you
are installing.

Once you have identified a suitable site for the security bracket and radio,
installation is as follows:

508

Use the four self-tapping screws and washers to fix the security
bracket base in place. The base actually has five screw holes available,
but the centre screw hole does not need to be used. The layout and
dimensions of the five screw holes is identical to the T2000 cradle.

Depending on whether you are installing a TM8100 or TM8200
radio, select the correct height mounting rails and screws, and attach
a rail to each side of the bottom of the radio body (two screws per rail,
minimum torque 20in.lbf [2.26N.m]).

To insert the radio, with the mounting rails attached, into the security
bracket base, check that the left and right slide locks are open.

TMAA03-02 Security Bracket

If the slide locks are closed, open them by inserting the slide lock key
into the keyhole. Rotate the key 90° (it will slip into a detent),
and pull.
Two slide lock keys are supplied so that you can either use them both
at once, or so that you can keep one as a spare.

Place the radio over the security bracket base so that the feet of the
mounting rails fit securely into the base.

Close the slide locks by pressing them into the base. You should hear
an audible click as the internal spring lock mechanism engages.

Warning!!

24.3

For continued safe operation, replace and do
not re-use Security Bracket once it has been
involved in a crash greater than 50km/h.

Removing a Radio from the Security Bracket
Remove the radio from the security bracket as follows:

24.4

Open the slide locks by inserting the slide lock key into the keyhole.
Rotate the key 90° (it will slip into a detent), and pull. The pull will
be need to be quite firm to open each slide lock.

Remove the radio and its mounting rails by lifting it up and out of
the security bracket base.

If required, remove the mounting rails from the radio body base by
unscrewing them.

Replacing the Radio in the Security Bracket
To replace the radio in a security bracket, first follow the steps in
“Removing a Radio from the Security Bracket” on page 509, and then
follow from step 2 in “Installing the Security Bracket and Radio” on
page 508.

24.5

Disassembling the Security Bracket
Disassemble the security bracket as follows:
1.

Remove the radio from the security bracket by following the steps in
“Removing a Radio from the Security Bracket” on page 509.

Unscrew the four self-tapping screws holding the security bracket
base in place.

TMAA03-02 Security Bracket

509

24.6

Re-Ordering Extra Parts
The following parts can be re-ordered separately in case of loss, or in
situations where, for example, one security bracket is installed where several
different radios may be installed at different times.
Part

Part Number

Quantity

Security Crdl Key TM8
(slide lock key)

319-60004-XX1

Security Crdl Mtg Short TM8
(short mounting rails for TM8100)

319-60002-XXa

Scrw M4*25 T/T P/T ContiR
(for attaching short mounting rails to TM8100 radio)

349-02063-XXa

Security Crdl Mtg Tall TM8
(tall mounting rails for TM8200)

319-60003-XXa

Scrw M4*30 T/T P/T ContiR
(for attaching tall mounting rails to TM8200 radio)

349-02068-XXa

1. Contact Technical Support for the exact IPN.

510

TMAA03-02 Security Bracket

Installing a Remote Kit
A TMAA03-16 or TMAA03-25 remote kit can be used to install the control
head of a graphical-display radio remotely from the radio body. The diagram
below shows the parts used for this installation.

control-head interface
remote cable

torso interface

remote U-bracket

25.1

Note

Although the torso interface is similar in appearance to the dualRJ45 on the telemetry radio, the control head on the telemetry
radio cannot be used for remote installation.

Note

The interfaces in the TMAA03-16 or TMAA03-25 remote kit
appear similar to the TMAA03-03, TMAC34-0T or
TMAC34-1T. However, the interfaces in the remote kits are not
compatible with TMAA03-03, TMAC34-0T or TMAC34-1T
control-head interfaces.

Installation
Warning!!

Mount the remote U-bracket with the remote
control-head assembly and the U-bracket with
the radio body securely. These units must not
break loose in the event of a collision. Unsecured radio units are dangerous to the
vehicle occupants.

Caution

Observe the installation warnings and safety regulations in the installation procedures of the radio.

Important

This equipment contains devices which are susceptible to
damage from static discharges. Refer to “ESD Precautions”
on page 108 for more information.

Note

Torx T10 and T20 screwdrivers are required for most of the screws
in this installation.

The circled numbers in the following sections refer to the items in Figure 25.1
on page 512.

Installing a Remote Kit

511

25.1.1

Overview
Installing the control head remotely is done in six steps:

25.1.2

Remove the control head from the radio body, if necessary.

Install the torso interface b onto the radio body.

Mount the remote U-bracket d in the required position.

Install the control-head interface c onto the control head and install
the remote control-head assembly in the remote U-bracket.

Mount the U-bracket in the required position and install the radio
body in the U-bracket.

Route the remote cable e between the remote control-head
assembly and the radio body.

Parts Required
The following diagram identifies the parts for remote controlhead installation and shows how they fit together.

Figure 25.1

Parts for remote control-head installation

1)
i

e
h
b

c
f
g
d
b
c
d
e
f
g

512

torso interface
control-head interface
remote U-bracket
remote cable
self-drilling screw
thumb screw

Installing a Remote Kit

h
i
j
1)
1!
1@

RJ45 bung
control-head interface loom
torso-interface loom
earthing tag
earthing-tag screw
remote cable grommets

25.1.3

Removing the Control Head from the Radio Body (if necessary)
Caution

During this procedure, take care that the controlhead seal is not damaged. Damage to this seal
reduces environmental protection.

On the underside of the radio,
insert a 5mm (3/16 inch) flatbladed screwdriver between the
control head and the control-head
seal, in the positions shown.

lever point
control-head seal
indication of
lever point

Insertion points and are lever
points and are indicated on the
radio chassis by a dot-dash-dot pattern (•

– •).

Use the screwdriver to lift the control head off the chassis clip, then
repeat in the other position.

Unplug the control-head loom from the radio body.
The control head is now separate from the radio body.

25.1.4

Installing the Torso Interface
The torso interface must be installed onto the radio body, in place of the
control head.
1.

Screw the solder tag 1) onto one of the screw bosses on the
radio chassis.

Plug the torso-interface loom j
onto the control-head connector.

Insert the bottom edge of the
torso interface b onto the two
clips in the front of the radio
chassis, then snap into place.

Remove the bung h covering
the outer RJ45 connector. The
h
remote cable e will plug into this
connector once the installation is complete.

Important

The inner RJ45 cavity is not used and has no connector
installed so the RJ45-cavity bung must be installed at
all times.
This ensures that the torso interface is sealed against water,
dust and other environmental hazards.

Installing a Remote Kit

513

25.1.5

Mounting the Remote U-Bracket
The remote U-bracket with its self-drilling screws, is used to install the remote
control-head assembly on the dashboard or on any sufficiently flat surface.

25.1.6

Caution

When drilling holes in the vehicle, check that drilling
at the selected points will not damage existing wiring.

Important

Check that the remote U-bracket is not distorted when the
screws are tightened.

Drill any holes required for cables and install suitable grommets or
bushings in the holes.

If precise positioning is required, predrill 3mm (1/8 inch) pilot
holes for the self-drilling screws. Reduce the hole size in metal that
is less than 1mm (1/32 inch) thick.

Screw the remote U-bracket in the chosen mounting position using the
self-drilling screws provided. Use all four screws provided.

Installing the Control-Head Interface
With the control head separated from the radio body, the control-head
interface c must be installed on the rear of the control head.
1.

Undo the two Torx T-20 screws
on the adaptor flange of the
control head, and remove the
adaptor flange.

adaptor flange

Unplug the control-head loom.

space-frame seal

The adaptor flange and controlhead loom are not used for the
remote control-head installation.
Keep the two screws for step (4).
3.

Plug the control-head interface
loom i into the connector on
the control head.

Important
4.

514

Installing a Remote Kit

control head loom

control head

When fitting the control-head interface to the controlhead, be careful not to damage the space-frame seal.

Use the two screws from step (2) to fit the control-head interface to
the control head through the two screw holes at the rear of the
control-head interface.

Installing the
Remote ControlHead Assembly in
the Remote
U-Bracket

Note
2.

25.1.7

Position the control-head assembly in the remote U-bracket and
position it for a good viewing angle.
Adjusting the contrast on the control-head display may also
improve its readability.
Screw the remote control-head assembly into position using the two
thumb screws provided.

Mounting the U-Bracket and Installing the Radio Body

Mounting the
U-Bracket

Install the U-bracket on any sufficiently flat surface, using self-drilling screws
and washers.
Caution

When drilling holes in the vehicle, check that drilling
at the selected points will not damage existing wiring,
petrol tanks, fuel lines, brake pipes or battery cables.

Important

When mounting the U-bracket, check whether the
mounting surface needs to be reinforced.

Important

Install the U-bracket using at least four screws.

If the U-bracket is being mounted over a curved surface, bend the
U-bracket tabs slightly, to match the surface shape.

Drill any holes required for cables and install suitable grommets or
bushings in the holes.

Important

Installing the Radio
Body in the
U-Bracket

Check that the U-bracket is not distorted when the screws
are tightened.

If precise positioning is required, predrill 3mm (1/8 inch) pilot
holes for the self-drilling screws. Reduce the hole size in metal that
is less than 1mm (1/32 inch) thick.

Screw the U-bracket in the chosen mounting position using the selfdrilling screws washers.

Connect the antenna and power cables to the rear of the radio.

Position the radio body in the U-bracket so that the holes in the
U-bracket line up with the holes in the radio chassis.

Screw the radio into position using the four thumb screws.

Installing a Remote Kit

515

25.1.8

Connecting the Remote Cable
Caution

Installing the
Remote-Cable
Grommets

When drilling holes in the vehicle, check that drilling
at the selected points will not damage existing wiring,
petrol tanks, fuel lines, brake pipes or battery cables.

Drill any holes required for cables and install suitable grommets or
bushings in the holes.

Plug one end of the remote cable into the control-head interface.

Run the remote cable to the torso interface and plug it into the
RJ45 connector without a bung.

Install both the remote cable grommets, using the following procedure.
Important

The remote cable grommets must be installed whenever the
remote cable is plugged into the RJ45 sockets. When
installed, the grommets have two functions:
■

to prevent damage to the RJ45 sockets when there is
movement of the remote cable, and

■

to ensure that the radio and remote control-head assembly
is sealed against water, dust and other environmental
hazards.

Slide the grommet along the remote cable and push two adjacent
corners of the grommet into the RJ45 socket cavity.

Squeeze the grommet and push the remaining corners into position.

Check that the grommet is seated correctly in the cavity.

Figure 25.2

Correct remote cable grommet seating

microphone
grommet
control head

516

Installing a Remote Kit

25.2

Circuit Description
Figure 25.3 shows a block diagram of the remote control-head installation.
The control heads contain circuit boards with RS-485 driver components
and an audio amplifier or attenuator.

Figure 25.3

Block diagram of remote control-head installation

Installing a Remote Kit

517

25.3

Servicing the Remote Kit Parts

25.3.1

Disassembling the Torso Interface
Disassemble only as much as is necessary to replace the defective parts.
Re-assembly is carried out in reverse order of disassembly.

Figure 25.4

Remove the remote cable from the RJ45 connector.

Release the clips of the PCB bracket E and remove the controlhead board B .

Disconnect the torso-interface loom C .

Unscrew the four PT type screws D and remove the PCB bracket E.

Parts of the torso interface
Description

B
C
D
E
F
G
H

C
Dx4
E

IPN

control-head board
torso-interface loom

219-02882-00

3 x 8 PT screw (x4)

346-10030-XXa

PCB bracket

302-10063-XXa

front panel

316-06843-XXa

label

365-01751-XXa

RJ45 bung

302-50002-XXa

Contact Technical Support for the exact IPN.

G
H

518

Installing a Remote Kit

25.3.2

Disassembling the Control-Head Interface
Disassemble only as much as necessary to replace the defective parts or to
swap the Micromatch connector loom. Re-assembly is carried out in reverse
order of disassembly.

Figure 25.5

Remove the remote cable from the RJ45 connector.

Unscrew the seven PT type screws B and remove the PCB C.

Remove the control-head interface loom (not illustrated).

Parts of the control-head interface
Description

B
C
D

Bx5

IPN

3 x 8 PT screw (x5)

346-10030-XXa

control-head interface PCB
control-head interface

316-06842-XXa

control-head interface loom 219-02914-00

Contact Technical Support for the exact IPN.

Installing a Remote Kit

519

25.4

PCB Information

25.4.1

Control-Head Interface (PCB IPN 220-02122-02)

Parts List
Ref.

IPN

Description

Ref.

IPN

Description

C101
C102
C103
C104
C105
C106
C107
C108
C109
C110
C111
C112
C113
C114
C115
C116
C117

015-06470-01
018-16100-00
015-07220-08
015-07220-08
015-26220-18
018-14470-00
015-23270-05
015-23270-05
018-14470-00
015-23270-05
015-23270-05
015-07220-08
018-14470-00
018-16100-00
018-16100-00
015-07220-08
015-07470-20

Cap Cer 1206 470n X7r 20% 50v
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r
Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r
CAP CER 0805 220N 10% X7R 50V
Cap 0603 4n7 50v X7r±10%
Cap 0805 270p 1% 200v Grm40
Cap 0805 270p 1% 200v Grm40
Cap 0603 4n7 50v X7r±10%
Cap 0805 270p 1% 200v Grm40
Cap 0805 270p 1% 200v Grm40
Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r
Cap 0603 4n7 50v X7r±10%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r
CAP Cer 1206 4u7 10% 25V X7R

R108
R109
R110
R111
R112
R113
R114
R115
R116
R117
R118
R119
R120
R121
R122
R123

038-13560-10
038-13100-10
036-02270-10
036-02270-10
038-13100-10
038-12100-10
038-15100-10
038-16150-10
038-16330-10
038-14270-00
038-13560-10
038-16100-10
038-14220-00
038-13560-10
038-13390-10
038-16100-10

Res 0603 560R 1/10w 1%
Res 0603 100R 1/10w 1%
Res 1206 27.0e 1%
Res 1206 27.0e 1%
Res 0603 100R 1/10w 1%
Res 0603 10e 1%
Res 0603 10k 1/10w 1%
Res 0603 150k 1%
Res 0603 330k 1/10w 1%
Res 0603 2k7 1/10w 5%
Res 0603 560R 1/10w 1%
Res 0603 100k 1/10w 1%
Res 0603 2k2 1/10w 5%
Res 0603 560R 1/10w 1%
Res 0603 390R 1/10w 1%
Res 0603 100k 1/10w 1%

D101
D102
D103
D104
D105
D106
D107

001-10000-99
001-10000-99
001-10153-00
001-00010-47
001-10000-99
001-10000-99
001-10084-33

Diode SMD BAV99 D-Sw SOT23
Diode SMD BAV99 D-Sw SOT23
Diode SMD SM15T30a TranSIl Smc
Diode 1SMA5923 8v2 1.5w Zen
Diode SMD BAV99 D-Sw SOT23
Diode SMD BAV99 D-Sw SOT23
Diode SMD BZX84C3V3 Zen SOT23

U101
U102

002-10078-00
002-10014-85

IC SMD MC78M05CDT5v Reg0.5a
IC ADM1485 RS485 Transc S08

220-02122-02

PCB MFx Single Rmt Head I/F

E101
E102
E103
E104
E105
E106
E107
E108
E109

057-10020-02
057-10020-02
057-10600-05
057-10600-05
057-10020-02
057-10020-02
057-10020-02
057-10600-05
057-10600-05

Ind 0603 BlM18pg300 Emi Supr
Ind 0603 BlM18pg300 Emi Supr
Ind 0603 Blm11p600s .5a F/Bead
Ind 0603 Blm11p600s .5a F/Bead
Ind 0603 BlM18pg300 Emi Supr
Ind 0603 BlM18pg300 Emi Supr
Ind 0603 BlM18pg300 Emi Supr
Ind 0603 Blm11p600s .5a F/Bead
Ind 0603 Blm11p600s .5a F/Bead

F101

265-10150-00

Fuse SMD 1A 50V 0805 UL Cert

J100
J101

240-00016-00
240-10000-11

Conn RJ45 Shld 8P8C LP RA TH
Conn SMD 18w Skt M/Match

Q101

000-10084-73

Xstr BC847BPNNPN/PNP SOT363

R101
R102
R103
R104
R105
R106
R107

038-10000-00
036-03100-10
036-03100-10
038-13100-10
038-15100-10
038-14220-00
038-15100-10

Res 0603 Zero 0hm 1/16w ± 5%
Res 2512 100R 5% 1W
Res 2512 100R 5% 1W
Res 0603 100R 1/10w 1%
Res 0603 10k 1/10w 1%
Res 0603 2k2 1/10w 5%
Res 0603 10k 1/10w 1%

520

Installing a Remote Kit

Mechanical Parts for the Control-Head Interface and
the Torso Interface
219-02882-00
219-02914-00
219-02918-00
302-10062-00
302-10063-00
316-06842-00
316-06843-00
349-02062-00
402-00020-00
302-05263-00
302-50002-00
353-05007-00
354-01052-00
349-00060-00

Loom Control Head TMA
Loom MFX Remote Head
Cbl Rmt Ctrl Hd Kit
Brkt Remote Head TM8200
Brkt PCB Remote TM8200 Body
Pnl Rear TM8200 MF2
Pnl Frt Remote TM8200 MF0
Scrw M3*8 T/T P/T ContiR
F/Inst TMAA03-16 Sngl Hd Rmt
Brkt U Thumb Scrw TMA
Bung RJ45 MFO
Wshr Rubber M4*19*1.0 S/A
Fsnr Bush PSM SHK-B-M4 Ins
Scrw 10GX20 SLFDRL Hex/Poz TMA

Remote Cable Parts
219-02918-00
240-02158-00
360-02022-00

Cbl Rmt Ctrl Hd Kit, comprising:
Conn Shld RJ45 Shortbody Plg
Grommet Mic TMA

Grid Reference List
Ref.

PCB

Circuit

Ref.

PCB

Circuit

C101
C102
C103
C104
C105
C106
C107
C108
C109
C110
C111
C112
C113
C114
C115
C116
C117

F3
F2
K1
F4
E4
G1
F1
G1
E4
F4
F4
M3
M3
M3
M3
M4
M4

1D2
1D3
1D5
1E3
1D3
1C4
1C2
1C3
1C3
1B2
1B2
1E5
1D5
1E6
1D6
1D6
1D6

R112
R113
R114
R115
R116
R117
R118
R119
R120
R121
R122
R123

G1
M2
M3
M3
M3
M2
M3
M3
M3
M4
L4
K2

1C4
1E4
1E5
1E6
1E6
1D5
1D5
1D6
1D6
1E7
1D6
1B6

U101
U102

G3
K1

1D3
1C5

D101
D102
D103
D104
D105
D106
D107

J2
J1
G4
J4
F4
D4
M4

1C4 1C5
1C4
1E2
1E3
1D4 1D3
1B2
1D7

E101
E102
E103
E104
E105
E106
E107
E108
E109

F3
F4
G1
G1
K3
D3
E4
E4
K1

1B2
1B3
1C3
1C3
1D1
1D1
1D2
1C2
1D5

F101

1D2

J100
J101

E4
L2

1C1
1C7

MT100
MT101

A3
J3

1E1
1E1

Q101

1E5

R101
R102
R103
R104
R105
R106
R107
R108
R109
R110
R111

K3
G4
G4
D4
K1
K2
K2
M2
E4
G2
G1

1D1
1E3
1E3
1B3
1B6
1C5
1B5
1B6
1D3
1C4
1C4

Ref.

PCB

Circuit

Installing a Remote Kit

521

Board Layout

IPN 220-02122-02

522

Installing a Remote Kit

Circuit Diagram

Installing a Remote Kit

523

25.4.2

RJ-45 Control Head (PCB IPN 220-02123-01)

Parts List
Ref.

IPN

Description

Ref.

IPN

Description

C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11

015-06470-01
018-14470-00
015-07220-08
018-13470-00
018-13470-00
018-14470-00
015-23270-05
015-23270-05
018-15330-00
015-23270-05
015-23270-05

Cap Cer 1206 470n X7r 20% 50v
Cap 0603 4n7 50v X7r±10%
Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r
Cap 0603 470p 50v X7r±10%
Cap 0603 470p 50v X7r±10%
Cap 0603 4n7 50v X7r±10%
Cap 0805 270p 1% 200v Grm40
Cap 0805 270p 1% 200v Grm40
Cap 0603 33n 50v X7r10%
Cap 0805 270p 1% 200v Grm40
Cap 0805 270p 1% 200v Grm40

R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14

038-14220-00
038-15100-10
038-13560-10
038-13560-10
036-02270-10
036-02270-10
038-13120-00
038-16100-10
036-05100-01

Res 0603 2k2 1/10w 5%
Res 0603 10k 1/10w 1%
Res 0603 560R 1/10w 1%
Res 0603 560R 1/10w 1%
Res 1206 27.0e 1%
Res 1206 27.0e 1%
Res 0603 120R 1/10w 5%
Res 0603 100k 1/10w 1%
Res M/F 1206 10k 5%

U1
U2

002-10078-00
002-10014-85

IC SMD MC78M05CDT5v Reg0.5a
IC ADM1485 RS485 Transc S08

D1
DS1
D2
D3

001-10000-99
008-00014-74
001-10000-99
001-10000-99

Diode SMD BAV99 D-Sw SOT23
LED Hp Red Rang PCB Mtg
Diode SMD BAV99 D-Sw SOT23
Diode SMD BAV99 D-Sw SOT23

220-02123-01

PCB Single Rmt Radio I/F

E1
E2
E3
E4
E5

057-10600-05
057-10600-05
057-10600-05
057-10600-05
057-10020-02

Ind 0603 Blm11p600s .5a F/Bead
Ind 0603 Blm11p600s .5a F/Bead
Ind 0603 Blm11p600s .5a F/Bead
Ind 0603 Blm11p600s .5a F/Bead
Ind 0603 BlM18pg300 Emi Supr

J1
J3

240-10000-11
240-00016-00

Conn SMD 18w Skt M/Match
Conn RJ45 Shld 8P8C LP RA TH

Q1
R1
R3
R4
R5

000-10561-60
038-13100-10
038-15100-10
038-13100-10
038-16100-10

XSTR BCX56-16 AF NPN SOT89
Res 0603 100R 1/10w 1%
Res 0603 10k 1/10w 1%
Res 0603 100R 1/10w 1%
Res 0603 100k 1/10w 1%

Grid Reference List
Ref.

PCB

Circuit

Ref.

PCB

Circuit

Ref.

PCB

Circuit

C1
C10
C11
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9

F2
M2
M2
H2
J1
J2
L2
L2
M2
M2
N2

1B1
1B6
1B7
1D3
1D4
1D5
1D5
1C6
1C6
1C6
1C6

E1
E2
E3
E4
E5

L2
M2
M2
L2
N2

1C5
1B6
1D6
1C6
1D6

J1
J3

H2
N2

1D1
1C7

MT1

1B4

R13
R14
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9

L2
M2
H2
G2
H2
K2
J2
J2
K1
L2

1D5
1E6
1D2
1D3
1D3
1D3
1D4
1D4
1D5
1C5

1B1

TP2

1B4

D1
D2
D3
DS1

K2
K1
L2
F2

1C4 1D4
1C5 1D5
1D6 1E6
1B1

R1
R10
R11
R12

F2
L2
L2
L2

1B1
1D5
1C5
1C5

U1
U2

D2
K1

1B2
1C4

524

Installing a Remote Kit

Board Layout

IPN 220-02123-01

Installing a Remote Kit

525

Circuit Diagram

526

Installing a Remote Kit

Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit
The control head of a graphical-display radio can be installed remotely from
the radio body. The diagram below shows the parts used for this installation.

control-head interface

remote U-bracket

TMAA03-03 remote
TMAA04-01 remote cable
control-head back
(includes remote U-bracket)

Note

26.1

TMAC34-0T (TM8200) or
TMAC34-1T(TM9100)
torso interface

Although the torso interface is similar in appearance to the RJ45
control head on the telemetry radio, the control head on the
telemetry radio cannot be used for remote installation.

Installation
Warning!!

Caution

Observe the installation warnings and safety regulations in the installation procedures of the radio.

Important

This equipment contains devices which are susceptible to
damage from static discharges. Refer to “ESD Precautions”
on page 108 for more information.

Note

Torx T10 and T20 screwdrivers are required for most of the screws
in this installation.

The circled numbers in the following sections refer to the items in Figure 26.1
on page 528.

Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit

527

26.1.1

Overview
Installing the control head remotely is done in six steps:

26.1.2

Remove the control head from the radio body, if necessary.

Install the torso interface b onto the radio body.

Mount the remote U-bracket d in the required position.

Install the control-head interface c onto the control head and install
the remote control-head assembly in the remote U-bracket.

Mount the U-bracket in the required position and install the radio
body in the U-bracket.

Route the remote cable e between the remote control-head
assembly and the radio body.

Parts Required
The following diagram identifies the parts for remote controlhead installation and shows how they fit together.

Figure 26.1

Parts for remote control-head installation

e
i
h
b

c
f
g
d
b
c
d
e
f
g

528

torso interface
control-head interface
remote U-bracket
remote cable
self-drilling screw
thumb screw

Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit

h
i
j
1)
1!
1@

RJ45 bung
control-head interface loom
torso-interface loom
earthing tag
earthing-tag screw
remote cable grommets

26.1.3

Removing the Control Head from the Radio Body (if necessary)
Caution

During this procedure, take care that the controlhead seal is not damaged. Damage to this seal
reduces environmental protection.

On the underside of the radio,
insert a 5mm (3/16 inch) flatbladed screwdriver between the
control head and the control-head
seal, in the positions shown.

lever point
control-head seal
indication of
lever point

Insertion points and are lever
points and are indicated on the
radio chassis by a dot-dash-dot pattern (•

– •).

Use the screwdriver to lift the control head off the chassis clip, then
repeat in the other position.

Unplug the control-head loom from the radio body.
The control head is now separate from the radio body.

26.1.4

Installing the Torso Interface
The torso interface must be installed onto the radio body, in place of the
control head.
1.

Screw the solder tag 1) onto one of the screw bosses on the
radio chassis.

Plug the torso-interface loom j
onto the control-head connector.

Insert the bottom edge of the
remote control head b onto the
two clips in the front of the radio
chassis, then snap into place.
Remove one of the bungs h
covering the RJ45 connectors.
h
The remote cable e will plug
into this connector once the installation is complete.

j
b

If the remote cable is not installed in the RJ45 cavity, then
the RJ45 bung must be installed. This ensures that the torso
interface is sealed against water, dust and other
environmental hazards.

Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit

529

26.1.5

Mounting the Remote U-Bracket
The remote U-bracket with its self-drilling screws, is used to install the remote
control-head assembly on the dashboard or on any sufficiently flat surface.

26.1.6

Caution

When drilling holes in the vehicle, check that drilling
at the selected points will not damage existing wiring.

Important

Check that the remote U-bracket is not distorted when the
screws are tightened.

Drill any holes required for cables and install suitable grommets or
bushings in the holes.

If precise positioning is required, predrill 3mm (1/8 inch) pilot
holes for the self-drilling screws. Reduce the hole size in metal that
is less than 1mm (1/32 inch) thick.

Screw the remote U-bracket in the chosen mounting position using the
self-drilling screws provided. Use all four screws provided.

Installing the Control-Head Interface
With the control head separated from the radio body, the control-head
interface c must be installed on the rear of the control head.
1.

Undo the two Torx T-20 screws
on the adaptor flange of the
control head, and remove the
adaptor flange.

adaptor flange

Unplug the control-head loom.

space-frame seal

The adaptor flange and controlhead loom are not used for the
remote control-head installation.
Keep the two screws for step (4).
3.

Plug the control-head interface
loom i into the connector on
the control head.

Important
4.

Changing the
Remote U-Bracket
Orientation

530

control head loom

control head

When fitting the control-head interface to the controlhead, be careful not to damage the space-frame seal.

Use the two screws from step (2) to fit the control-head interface to
the control head through the two screw holes at the rear of the
control-head interface.

The control-head interface is configured for installation with the RJ45
socket facing downwards (U-bracket below control head, as in Figure 26.1).
If the RJ45 socket is required to face upwards (control head hanging from

Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit

U-bracket), the control-head interface loom i must be moved, so that it
can reach the control head connector.
To move the control-head interface loom:

Installing the
Remote ControlHead Assembly in
the Remote
U-Bracket

Undo the seven Torx T-10 screws on the control-head board, and
remove the control-head interface board from the
control-head interface.

Change the control-head interface loom i to the
opposite connector.

Reinstall the control-head interface board.

Position the control-head assembly in the remote U-bracket and
position it for a good viewing angle.

Note
2.

26.1.7

Adjusting the contrast on the control-head display may also
improve its readability.
Screw the remote control-head assembly into position using the two
thumb screws provided.

Mounting the U-Bracket and Installing the Radio Body

Mounting the
U-Bracket

Install the U-bracket on any sufficiently flat surface, using self-drilling screws
and washers.
Caution

When drilling holes in the vehicle, check that drilling
at the selected points will not damage existing wiring,
petrol tanks, fuel lines, brake pipes or battery cables.

Important

When mounting the U-bracket, check whether the
mounting surface needs to be reinforced.

Important

Install the U-bracket using at least four screws.

If the U-bracket is being mounted over a curved surface, bend the
U-bracket tabs slightly, to match the surface shape.

Drill any holes required for cables and install suitable grommets or
bushings in the holes.

Important
3.

Check that the U-bracket is not distorted when the screws
are tightened.

If precise positioning is required, predrill 3mm (1/8 inch) pilot
holes for the self-drilling screws. Reduce the hole size in metal that
is less than 1mm (1/32 inch) thick.

Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit

531

Installing the Radio
Body in the
U-Bracket

26.1.8

Screw the U-bracket in the chosen mounting position using the selfdrilling screws washers.

Connect the antenna and power cables to the rear of the radio.

Position the radio body in the U-bracket so that the holes in the
U-bracket line up with the holes in the radio chassis.

Screw the radio into position using the four thumb screws.

Connecting the Remote Cable
Caution

Installing the
Remote-Cable
Grommets

When drilling holes in the vehicle, check that drilling
at the selected points will not damage existing wiring,
petrol tanks, fuel lines, brake pipes or battery cables.

Drill any holes required for cables and install suitable grommets or
bushings in the holes.

Plug one end of the remote cable into the control-head interface.

Run the remote cable to the torso interface and plug it into the
RJ45 connector without a bung.

Install both the remote cable grommets, using the following procedure.
Important

The remote cable grommets must be installed whenever the
remote cable is plugged into the RJ45 sockets. When
installed, the grommets have two functions:
■

to prevent damage to the RJ45 sockets when there is
movement of the remote cable, and

■

to ensure that the radio and remote control-head assembly
is sealed against water, dust and other environmental
hazards.

Slide the grommet along the remote cable and push two adjacent
corners of the grommet into the RJ45 socket cavity.

Squeeze the grommet and push the remaining corners into position.

Check that the grommet is seated correctly in the cavity.

Figure 26.2

Correct remote cable grommet seating

microphone
grommet
control head

532

Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit

26.2

Circuit Description
Figure 26.3 shows a block diagram of the remote control-head installation.
Both control heads contain a circuit board with audio amplifiers and RS485 driver components.

Figure 26.3

Block diagram of remote control-head installation

Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit

533

26.3

Servicing the Remote Control-Head Installation Parts

26.3.1

Disassembling the Torso Interface
Disassemble only as much as is necessary to replace the defective parts.
Re-assembly is carried out in reverse order of disassembly.

Figure 26.4

Release the clip of the PCB bracket E and remove the controlhead board B .

Disconnect the torso-interface loom C .

Unscrew the four PT type screws D and remove the PCB bracket E.

Parts of the torso interface
Description

B
C
D
E
F
G
H

C
Dx4
E

IPN

control-head board
torso-interface loom

219-02882-XXa

3 x 8 PT screw (x4)

346-10030-XXa

PCB bracket

302-10063-XXa

front panel

316-06843-XXa

label

365-01751-XXa

RJ45 bung

302-50002-XXa

Contact Technical Support for the exact IPN.

G
H

534

Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit

26.3.2

Figure 26.5

Unscrew the seven PT type screws B and remove the PCB C.

Remove the control-head interface loom (not illustrated).

Parts of the control-head interface

Bx7

Description

B
C
D

3 x 8 PT screw (x7)

IPN
346-10030-XXa

control-head interface PCB
control-head interface

316-06842-XXa

control-head interface loom 219-02914-XXa

C
a

Contact Technical Support for the exact IPN.

Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit

535

26.4

PCB Information

26.4.1

TMAA03-03 Control-Head Interface (PCB IPN 220-01721-04)

Parts List
Ref.

IPN

Description

Ref.

IPN

Description

C1
C100
C101
C102
C103
C110
C300
C301
C310
C312
C320
C400
C401
C410
C411
C420
C421
C422
C423
C430
C500
C600
C601
C610
C611
C612
C700
C701
C702
C703
C704
C705
C706
C707
C708
C710
C711
C712
C730
C731
C732
C733
C734
C735

016-08100-03
018-14100-00
018-14100-00
015-02470-06
015-02470-06
018-16100-00
015-06470-01
016-07470-01
015-26100-08
014-07470-05
016-08100-03
018-16100-00
015-07220-08
018-16100-00
018-13100-00
018-16100-00
018-13100-00
015-07220-08
015-07220-08
015-07220-08
015-26100-08
015-26100-08
015-26100-08
015-26100-08
015-07220-08
015-07220-08
015-26100-08
015-07220-35
015-07220-35
015-06470-01
018-16100-00
018-16100-00
018-13220-00
015-06470-01
015-07220-35
015-07220-35
015-07220-35
015-07220-35
015-26220-18
015-26220-18
018-14100-00
018-14100-00
015-07220-08
015-07220-08

Cap Elec SMD 10uF 35V 105/2000
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap Cer 1210 47p NPO 500v
Cap Cer 1210 47p NPO 500v
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap Cer 1206 470n X7r 20% 50v
Cap Elec SMD 4u7 6*4 16v 20%
Cap Cer 0805 100n 10% X7r 50v
Cap Tant SMD 4u7 16v 10% A
Cap Elec SMD 10uF 35V 105/2000
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 100p 50v NPO ±5%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 100p 50v NPO ±5%
Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r
Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r
Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r
Cap Cer 0805 100n 10% X7r 50v
Cap Cer 0805 100n 10% X7r 50v
Cap Cer 0805 100n 10% X7r 50v
Cap Cer 0805 100n 10% X7r 50v
Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r
Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r
Cap Cer 0805 100n 10% X7r 50v
Cap Cer 1210 2u2 X5R 35v
Cap Cer 1210 2u2 X5R 35v
Cap Cer 1206 470n X7r 20% 50v
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 220p 50v NPO±5%
Cap Cer 1206 470n X7r 20% 50v
Cap Cer 1210 2u2 X5R 35v
Cap Cer 1210 2u2 X5R 35v
Cap Cer 1210 2u2 X5R 35v
Cap Cer 1210 2u2 X5R 35v
CAP CER 0805 220N 10% X7R 50V
CAP CER 0805 220N 10% X7R 50V
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap 0603 1n 50v X7r ±10%
Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r
Cap Cer 1206 2u2 16v X7r

E100
E101
E102
E103
E105
E710
E711
E730
E731

057-10081-06
057-10081-06
057-10600-05
057-10600-05
057-10081-06
057-10600-05
057-10081-06
057-10081-06
057-10081-06

Ind 1806 Blm41p750s Emi Supr
Ind 1806 Blm41p750s Emi Supr
Ind 0603 Blm11p600s .5a F/Bead
Ind 0603 Blm11p600s .5a F/Bead
Ind 1806 Blm41p750s Emi Supr
Ind 0603 Blm11p600s .5a F/Bead
Ind 1806 Blm41p750s Emi Supr
Ind 1806 Blm41p750s Emi Supr
Ind 1806 Blm41p750s Emi Supr

J100
J200
J201

240-00016-00
240-10000-11
240-10000-11

Conn RJ45 Shld 8P8C LP RA TH
Conn SMD 18w Skt M/Match
Conn SMD 18w Skt M/Match

L712
L730
L731

057-10100-65
057-10470-10
057-10470-10

Ind SMD Pwr Cdrh6D38 100UH .65
Ind SMD Pwr CDRH104R 47uH 1A
Ind SMD Pwr CDRH104R 47uH 1A

Q610
Q720
Q721

000-10084-71
000-10084-71
000-10442-71

Xstr BC847BW NPN SOT323
Xstr BC847BW NPN SOT323
Xstr SI4427BDY PCH MOSFET SO8

D100
D101
D102
D103
D104
D110
D201
D211
D300
D720
D730
D731

001-10000-99
001-10000-99
001-10000-99
001-10000-99
001-10000-99
001-10084-91
001-10000-99
001-10000-99
001-10000-99
001-10841-10
001-10014-03
001-10014-03

Diode SMD BAV99 D-Sw SOT23
Diode SMD BAV99 D-Sw SOT23
Diode SMD BAV99 D-Sw SOT23
Diode SMD BAV99 D-Sw SOT23
Diode SMD BAV99 D-Sw SOT23
Diode SMD BZX84C9V1 Zen SOT23
Diode SMD BAV99 D-Sw SOT23
Diode SMD BAV99 D-Sw SOT23
Diode SMD BAV99 D-Sw SOT23
Diode SMD BZX84C11v ZEN SOT23
Diode SMD MBRS140T3 Sch
Diode SMD MBRS140T3 Sch

R100
R110
R200
R201
R202
R210
R211
R212
R320
R401
R402
R410
R411
R412
R420
R421
R422
R430
R431
R441
R442
R501
R510
R511
R600
R601
R602
R603
R604
R605
R606
R607
R608
R609
R611
R612

038-13100-10
038-15100-10
038-13100-10
038-13100-10
038-13100-10
038-13100-10
038-13100-10
038-13100-10
036-00000-01
038-15820-10
038-15820-10
038-15150-10
038-16150-10
038-13100-10
038-15330-10
038-15220-10
038-12470-00
038-14220-00
038-14220-00
038-14470-10
038-14470-10
038-15100-10
038-13120-00
038-10000-00
038-15100-10
038-16470-00
038-10000-00
038-10000-00
038-10000-00
038-10000-00
038-15100-10
038-15100-10
038-15100-10
038-15100-10
038-15100-10
038-14470-10

RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 1206 0R 5% 0.25W
RES 0603 82k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 82k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 15k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 150k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 33k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 22k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 47R 5% 1/10W
RES 0603 2k2 5% 1/10W
RES 0603 2k2 5% 1/10W
Res 0603 4k7 1% 100ppm
Res 0603 4k7 1% 100ppm
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 120R 5% 1/10W
RES 0603 0R
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 470k 5% 1/10W
RES 0603 0R
RES 0603 0R
RES 0603 0R
RES 0603 0R
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
Res 0603 4k7 1% 100ppm

536

Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit

Ref.

IPN

Description

R701
R710
R720
R721
R722
R730
R731

038-16120-10
036-13100-10
038-15100-10
038-14220-00
038-14470-10
038-12470-00
038-12470-00

RES 0603 120k 1% 1/10W
RES 0805 100R 1% 1/8W
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 2k2 5% 1/10W
Res 0603 4k7 1% 100ppm
RES 0603 47R 5% 1/10W
RES 0603 47R 5% 1/10W

Ref.

U300
U310
U400
U500
U600
U610
U700

002-10800-00
002-14931-00
002-19120-00
002-13483-00
002-15595-00
002-10126-71
002-13001-00

IC LDO REG LF80C 8V@1A PPAKT/R
IC L4931CD33 3.3v 250Ma Regso8
IC TS912ID Cmos R2R Opamp
IC XCVR RS485 LTD SLEW RATE 3V
IC 74AHC595 8bit Shiftreg Tsop
IC SMD DS1868 Dgtl Pot Tsop20
IC TPA3001 20W Mono PA TSSOP24

220-01721-04
219-02914-00

PCB MFX Head Remote
LOOM MFX Remote Head

IPN

Description

302-05263-00
302-10062-00
316-06842-00
346-10030-08
349-00060-00
353-05007-00
354-01052-00
402-00015-00
410-01183-02
410-01197-01

Brkt U Thumb Scrw TMA
Brkt Remote Head TM8200
Pnl Rear TM8200 MF2
Scrw P/T Wn1412 Kc30x08 Zbc
Scrw 10G*20 SLFDRL Hex/Poz TMA
Wshr Rubber M4*19*1.0 S/A
Fsnr Bush PSM SHK-B-M4 Ins
MANL f/instr TMAA03-05
Pkg Box 220x82x65 TMA
Pkg Ins Lg Ctrl Hd TMA

TMAA04-01 Remote Cable Parts
219-02918-00
219-00025-00
240-02158-00
360-02022-00

Cbl Rmt Ctrl Hd Kit, comprising:
loom 6m shld Bonded+Drain
Conn Shld RJ45 Shortbody Plg
Grommet Mic TMA

Grid Reference List
Ref.

PCB

Circuit

C1
C100
C101
C102
C103
C110
C300
C301
C310
C311
C312
C320
C400
C401
C410
C411
C420
C421
C422
C423
C430
C500
C600
C601
C610
C611
C612
C700
C701
C702
C703
C704
C705
C706
C707
C708
C710
C711
C712
C720
C721
C730
C731
C732
C733
C734
C735

D1
J3
L4
J4
J4
L4
M5
N5
M2
N2
M2
P4
L3
L3
M3
M3
L3
L3
K3
K3
M2
L4
L2
L2
K1
K1
J2
F2
G3
E3
E2
G2
F2
E3
E2
G2
E2
F2
E2
F1
G1
E3
G3
F4
G4
F4
F4

D7
E3
E3
E3
E3
F4
G2
G3
G4
G4
G5
D8
G10
G10
G8
G8
G5
G6
F7
F7
G9
F6
C3
B2
C5
C4
C5
C6
C7
C7
C6
C6
B6
B6
B6
A6
D6
D7
D7
D2
D2
B8
A8
B9
B9
B10
B9

D100

D101

F4
E4
E4

Ref.

PCB

Circuit

Ref.

PCB

Circuit

R321
R401
R402
R410
R411
R412
R420
R421
R422
R430
R431
R440
R441
R442
R501
R510
R511
R600
R601
R602
R603
R604
R605
R606
R607
R608
R609
R610
R611
R612
R701
R710
R720
R721
R722
R730
R731

M4
L3
L3
M3
M3
L4
L3
L3
K3
M2
M2
K3
K3
J3
M4
K4
K4
L2
L2
L1
L2
L2
L2
M2
M2
M2
M2
J2
K1
K1
E3
F2
F1
F1
G1
E3
G3

E8
G10
G10
G8
G7
G7
G6
G6
F7
G9
G9
E5
D5
D5
E7
F6
F6
B1
B2
C1
C1
B1
B3
B3
B3
B3
B4
B5
C4
D4
B6
D6
D1
D2
D2
B7
A7

U300
U310
U400

P5
N2
L3

U500
U600
U610
U700

L4
L2
K2
F3

G3
G4
F6
G7
1G9
F7
B2
B4
B7

D102

D103

D104
D110
D201
D211
D300
D301
D720
D730
D731

K5
L5
K5
K5
N5
M5
G1
F3
G3

F4
F4
E4
E5
F5
E5
F3
E8
C9
G3
G2
D2
B7
B7

E100
E101
E102
E103
E105
E710
E711
E730
E731

J5
H5
K4
K4
H5
F2
E2
E4
G4

E2
E2
F3
E4
F2
D7
D7
B8
B8

J100
J200
J201

H4
P3
B4

E1
E10
C10

L712
L730
L731

D2
E4
G4

D8
B9
B9

MT800
MT801

D3
M3

B5
B5

Q610
Q720
Q721

K1
F1
G2

D4
D2
D3

R100
R110
R200
R201
R202
R203
R210
R211
R212
R213
R320

J3
L4
N4
R3
R2
J5
C3
B3
B4
J5
N4

F2
F3
F8
E8
E8
E1
D9
C9
C9
D1
E8

Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit

537

Board Layout

IPN 220-01721-04

538

Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit

Circuit Diagram

Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit

539

26.4.2

TMAC34-0T Torso Interface (PCB IPN 220-01720-05)

Parts List
Ref.

IPN

Description

Ref.

IPN

Description

C1
C2
C3
C4
C7
C9
C10
C13
C15
C17
C101
C102
C103
C203
C207
C209
C213

018-16100-00
015-07470-20
015-06470-01
018-13100-00
015-27100-08
018-13100-00
018-16100-00
018-16100-00
018-16100-00
018-16100-00
018-16100-00
015-07470-20
015-07470-20
018-13270-00
018-13270-00
018-13270-00
018-13270-00

Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
CAP Cer 1206 4u7 10% 25V X7R
Cap Cer 1206 470n X7r 20% 50v
Cap 0603 100p 50v NPO ±5%
Cap Cer 0805 X7R 1uF 16V 10%
Cap 0603 100p 50v NPO ±5%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
CAP Cer 1206 4u7 10% 25V X7R
CAP Cer 1206 4u7 10% 25V X7R
Cap 0603 270p 50v NPO±5%
Cap 0603 270p 50v NPO±5%
Cap 0603 270p 50v NPO±5%
Cap 0603 270p 50v NPO±5%

DS1

008-00014-73

LED Hp Grn Rang PCB Mtg

J1
J2
J3

240-10000-11
240-00016-00
240-00016-00

Conn SMD 18w Skt M/Match
Conn RJ45 Shld 8P8C LP RA TH
Conn RJ45 Shld 8P8C LP RA TH

R13
R14
R15
R16
R17
R18
R19
R20
R21
R30
R31
R40
R103
R104
R203
R207
R209
R213
R911
R915
R917

038-16100-10
036-13560-10
038-15820-10
038-15100-10
038-15220-10
038-13220-10
038-14120-10
038-10000-00
038-10000-00
038-13390-10
038-13390-10
036-00000-01
038-12100-10
038-15100-10
038-13100-10
038-13100-10
038-13100-10
038-13100-10
036-00000-01
036-00000-01
038-10000-00

RES 0603 100k 1% 1/10W
RES 0805 560R 1% 1/8W
RES 0603 82k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 22k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 220R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 1k2 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 0R
RES 0603 0R
RES 0603 390R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 390R 1% 1/10W
RES 1206 0R 5% 0.25W
RES 0603 10R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 1206 0R 5% 0.25W
RES 1206 0R 5% 0.25W
RES 0603 0R

R1
R2
R3
R4
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R12

038-13120-00
038-10000-00
038-15820-10
038-15820-10
038-15220-10
038-15100-10
038-15820-10
038-13100-10
038-15100-10
038-16100-10

RES 0603 120R 5% 1/10W
RES 0603 0R
RES 0603 82k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 82k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 22k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 82k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 10k 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 100k 1% 1/10W

U1
U2
U3

002-19120-00
002-12523-17
002-13483-00
219-02882-00
219-02950-00
220-01720-05
302-10063-01
302-50002-01
316-06843-00
346-10030-08
349-02062-00

IC TS912ID Cmos R2R Opamp
IC LM317l Reg T0252 0.5a
IC XCVR RS485 LTD SLEW RATE 3V
Loom Control Head TMA
CBL MFX Remote Kit Gnd Lead
PCB MFX Radio Remote
Brkt PCB Remote TM8200 Body
Bung RJ45 MFO
Pnl Frt Remote TM8200 MF0
Scrw P/T Wn1412 Kc30x08 Zbc
Scrw M3*8 T/T P/T ContiR

Grid Reference List
Ref.

PCB

Circuit

Ref.

PCB

Circuit

Ref.

PCB

Circuit

C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C13
C15
C17
C102
C103
C203
C207
C213

1:J2
1:K1
1:D2
1:J1
2:J2
1:K1
1:J2
2:K2
1:K2
1:N2
1:N2
2:L2
2:L2
1:D1
1:E2
1:J2
1:H2
1:H1

H7
J6
H3
H8
G7
J7
G7
J9
G8
G9
G9
H10
H8
H4
D7
D6
D5
D6

MT1

1:R2

F12

Q1
Q2

2:G2
2:G2

G4
F5

DS1
D1
D2
D3

1:F2
2:J2
1:H2
2:H2

J5
G4
E5
G3

1:K1

E3
E12
G12
D9

E10
G7
J6
J6
G4
H7
E5
J8
J9
G8
F4
G9
G9
H5
H9
D5
H9
H4
H4
J10
G10
G4
G5

F5
D10
E9
F11
E7
E7
E6
E6
E6
E6
H10
G10
E9
E9
E10
F11
E5
G12
F11
F11
G11
J4

1:H2
1:N2
1:L2
1:M2

2:N2
2:J2
1:J1
1:J1
2:H2
1:J1
1:G2
1:J1
2:L2
1:K2
2:G2
1:N2
1:N2
1:F2
2:L2
1:H2
2:L2
1:D2
1:E2
2:L2
1:N2
2:H2
2:G2

2:G2
1:F2
1:E2
2:N2
1:G2
1:G2
1:J2
1:J2
1:H2
1:H2
2:L2
1:N2
1:F2
1:E2
2:J2
2:L2
1:H2
2:M2
2:N2
1:N2
2:M2
1:D2

J1
J2
J3
J4

R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15
R16
R17
R18
R19
R20
R21
R22
R23

R24
R30
R31
R40
R103
R104
R203
R207
R209
R213
R820
R821
R900
R901
R910
R911
R912
R915
R916
R917
R918
R920

U2
U3

1:D2
1:F2

G8
J8
J5
J4
E8

540

Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit

Board Layout

IPN 220-01720-05

Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit

541

Circuit Diagram

542

Installing an Enhanced Remote Kit

TMAA04-04 Crossband Linking Cable
The TMAA04-04 crossband linking cable is used to connect
the auxiliary connectors of two radios configured as a
crossband repeater. Components in the TMAA04-04 are
optomized for voice applications.
Important The radio does not meet the IP54 protection standard once the auxiliary connector
rubber bung has been removed and a crossband linking cable has been installed. Care
must be taken when the radio is being operated in an environment where there is
water, dust or other environmental hazards.

27.1

27.2

Installation
1.

Remove the rubber bung that covers the auxiliary connector on each
of the radios.

Plug each end of the crossband linking cable into the auxiliary
connector on each radio.

Radio Programming
After the transmit and receive channels have been programmed for both
radios, settings in the following forms must also be configured:
■ PTT form (refer to Table 27.1)
■ Programmable I/O form — Digital tab (refer to Table 27.2)
■ Programmable I/O form — Audio tab (refer to Table 27.3).
If a repeater transmit tail is required, settings in the following forms must be
configured in both radios:
■ PTT form (TM8100 radios only) (refer to Table 27.4)
■

Basic Settings form—Subaudible Signalling tab (TM8200 radios and
optional for TM8100 radios) (refer to Table 27.5 and Table 27.6).

Some of the settings shown in the tables are default settings and may not
need to be changed. In all cases, refer to the online help of the programming
application for more information.
Crossband Settings
in the PTT Form

The following table shows the crossband linking settings required in the
External PTT (1) tab of the PTT form.
Table 27.1

Crossband settings in the PTT form, External PTT (1) tab

Field
Advanced EPTT1

Setting
PTT Transmission Type

Voice

Audio Source

Audio Tap In

TMAA04-04 Crossband Linking Cable

543

Programmable I/O
Form—Digital Tab
Table 27.2
Pin

Crossband settings in the Programmable I/O form, Digital tab
Direction

AUX_GPI1

The following table shows the crossband linking settings required in the
Digital tab of the Programmable I/O form.

Input

AUX_GPIO5 Output

Label

Action

PTT_INS External PTT 1
BUSY

Status1

Busy

Active

Debounce

Signal State

Mirrored To

Low

None

Low

None

1. To transmit only when the signalling is valid, set this field to Signalling Audio Mute Status.

Programmable I/O
Form—Audio Tab
Table 27.3
Pin

The following table shows the crossband linking settings required in the
Audio tab of the Programmable I/O form.

Crossband settings in the Programmable I/O form, Audio tab
Tap In

Tap In Type

Tap In Unmute

Tap Out

Tap Out Type

Tap Out Unmute

None

A-Bypass In

On PTT

D-Split

Busy Detect1

EPTT1

A-Bypass In

On PTT

None

C-Bypass 0

On PTT

1. This can be set to Busy Detect + Sub if the mute is to open only when valid subaudible signalling is present with
the transmission.

27.2.1

Repeater Transmit Tail Settings

TM8100 Radios

If the transmitter requires a “tail”, then this can be set in the External
PTT (1) tab of the PTT form. During the PTT deactivation delay period,
any signalling, such as CTCSS or DCS, is still present.
Table 27.4

Transmit tail settings in the PTT form, External PTT (1) tab

Field

Setting

Advanced EPTT1

PTT Deactivation Delay

up to 1000ms

If a further transmitter tail is required, then this can be configured in the
Subaudible Signalling tab of the Basic Settings form. During the lead-out
delay period, no signalling, such as CTCSS or DCS, is present.
Table 27.5

Additional Transmit tail in the Basic Settings form, Subaudible
Signalling tab

Field

TM8200 Radios

Setting

CTCSS Settings

Lead-Out Delay

any duration, up to 1000ms

DCS Settings

Lead-Out Delay

any duration, up to 1000ms

If the transmitter requires a “tail”, then this can be configured in the
Subaudible Signalling tab of the Basic Settings form. During the lead-out
delay period, no signalling, such as CTCSS or DCS, is present.
Table 27.6

Transmit tail in the Basic Settings form, Subaudible Signalling tab

Field

544

Setting

CTCSS Settings

Lead-Out Delay

any duration, up to 1000ms

DCS Settings

Lead-Out Delay

any duration, up to 1000ms

TMAA04-04 Crossband Linking Cable

27.3

27.4

Operational Testing
1.

On the receiving radio, inject an on-channel RF signal at a level of
-70dBm, modulated to ±3kHz deviation (wide bandwidth channel)
or ±1.5kHz (narrow bandwidth channel), at 1kHz AF.

On the transmitting radio, the resulting deviation should be:
■

±3kHz (with a tolerance of ±200Hz) on a 25kHz wide
bandwidth channel.

■

±1.5kHz (with a tolerance of ±200Hz) on a 12.5kHz narrow
bandwidth channel.

Interface Specification
The following table and diagram summarizes the signals used for the crossband
linking cable on the radios’ auxiliary connectors and shows the interface
between the cable and the radios.

Figure 27.1

TMAA04-04 crossband linking cable

auxiliary connector
radio 1

crossband linking board

Table 27.7

Auxiliary connectors—pins and signals
Pin

B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I

J
1)
1!
1@
1#
1$
1%

rear view

auxiliary connector
radio 2

Signal name

Description

AUX_GPIO5

busy (output)

AUD_TAP_IN

audio tap input

AUX_GPI1

PTT (input)

AUD_TAP_OUT

audio tap output

AGND

analogue ground

TMAA04-04 Crossband Linking Cable

545

27.5

PCB Information

27.5.1

TMAA04-04 Parts List (PCB IPN 220-02127-01)

Ref.

IPN

Description

C2
C10
J1
R1
R6

018-16100-00
018-16100-00
240-00031-00
038-13560-10
038-13560-10

Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Cap 0603 100n 16v x7r + - 10%
Plg 15w Drng UL-CSA Pnl Mtg
RES 0603 560R 1% 1/10W
RES 0603 560R 1% 1/10W

205-00110-50

CBL 8wy Oval Std Telecom

546

219-03005-00

CBL TMA X-Band

220-02127-01

PCB MFX Programming cable

240-00031-00

Plg 15w Drng UL-CSA Pnl Mtg

240-06010-18

Conn 15w Hood/Cvr Drng MDJ15

402-00030-0X

MANL f/instr TMAA04-04 XB

TMAA04-04 Crossband Linking Cable

Ref.

IPN

Description

27.5.2

Crossband Linking Board Layouts

IPN 220-02127-01

TMAA04-04 Crossband Linking Cable

547

27.5.3

548

Crossband Linking Board Circuit Diagram

TMAA04-04 Crossband Linking Cable

TMAA04-05 Ignition Sense Kit

auxiliary connector plug

ignition sense cable

plug into the
radio’s auxiliary
connector

The TMAA04-05 ignition sense kit provides a
mating plug for the radio’s auxiliary connector.
The four metre length of cable from pin 4 of the
plug connects to the vehicle’s ignition signal.
Once the kit is installed, the ignition signal is used
to power up and power down the radio, so that the
radio turns off when the vehicle ignition is off.
This avoids any possibility that the radio may
flatten the vehicle’s battery. When the vehicle
ignition is turned on, the radio either turns on, or
returns to the state that it was in when the vehicle
ignition was turned off.

Important

28.1

28.2

The radio does not meet the IP54 protection standard once
the bung for the auxiliary connector is removed. Therefore,
once the TMAA04-05 ignition sense kit is installed, mount
the radio in areas where it is not exposed to water, dust or
other environmental hazards.

Installation
1.

Connect the auxiliary connector plug to the radio’s
auxiliary connector

Connect the ignition sense cable to the 13.8V signal controlled by the
vehicle’s ignition key.

Radio Programming
Program the AUX GPI3 line to ‘Power Sense (Ignition)’ and active
to ‘High’.
Refer to the online help of the programming application for
more information.

TMAA04-05 Ignition Sense Kit

549

550

TMAA04-05 Ignition Sense Kit

TMAA10-01 Desktop Microphone
The TMAA10-01 desktop microphone is an omnidirectional
dynamic microphone which can be used in dispatch
situations, where the microphone is positioned on a flat
surface. The desktop microphone plugs into the microphone
socket on the radio control head.

grille

microphone
base
TRANS MIT

The desktop microphone has an internal pre-amplifier and an
adjustable sensitivity control on the underside of the desktop
microphone base.

MONITOR

monitor key

PTT key

grommet

29.1

Operation
Hold down the monitor key and check whether the channel is clear.
If the channel is clear, press the PTT key to transmit. Speak clearly into the
microphone and release the PTT key when you have finished talking.
Note

29.2

The monitor key can be locked in the ‘on’ position. To do this,
hold the monitor key down and slide the monitor key towards
you. The monitor key should now be locked on.

Installation
Important

The desktop microphone grommet must be installed
whenever the desktop microphone is plugged into the
microphone socket. When installed, the grommet has two
functions:
■

to prevent damage to the microphone socket when
there is movement of the microphone cord, and

■

to ensure that the control head is sealed against water,
dust and other environmental hazards.

Plug the microphone cord into the microphone socket on the radio
control head.

Slide the grommet along the cord and push two adjacent corners of the
grommet into the microphone socket cavity.

TMAA10-01 Desktop Microphone

551

Squeeze the grommet and push the remaining corners into position.

Check that the grommet is seated correctly in the cavity.

Figure 29.1

Correct desktop microphone grommet seating

microphone
grommet
control head

29.3

Adjustment
Adjust the output sensitivity of the desktop
microphone using R5. R5 is accessible from the
underside of the desktop microphone, as shown.
The microphone sensitivity is set to maximum by
rotating R5 counterclockwise.

adjust R5 here

29.4

Interface Specification
The following table and diagram summarizes the signals used for the desktop
microphone on the radio’s microphone connector and shows the interface
between the desktop microphone and the radio.
Table 29.1

Desktop microphone connector—pins and signals
Pin

552

Signal

Colour

Description

—

not connected

—

not connected

—

not connected

MIC_PTT

yellow

PTT

MIC_AUD

red

audio from the microphone

AGND

bare

analogue ground

—

not connected

—

not connected

TMAA10-01 Desktop Microphone

Figure 29.2 Desktop microphone
to radio interface
.

29.5

Circuit Description
The desktop microphone uses a dynamic microphone capsule and contains
a pre-amplifier (Q1) to boost the microphone level to that required by the
radio. Power for the pre-amplifier is provided by the electret microphone
bias circuit within the radio. R5 is used to adjust the gain.
PTT and hookswitch signals are combined onto one line and fed to the
control head PTT input of the radio.

TMAA10-01 Desktop Microphone

553

554

TMAA10-01 Desktop Microphone

TMAA10-02 Handset
The TMAA10-02 handset provides the user with privacy and also
improves the audio quality in noisy environments. The handset
uses a dynamic microphone capsule, therefore the radio control
head must support dynamic microphone operation. For example,
a TMAA02-06 (support kit for dynamic microphones) must be
fitted to control head TMAC20-0T.

handset

pushbutton
locking
cradle

radio to
handset cord

mounting
plate

When your radio receives a call and the handset is mounted in
its locking cradle, the radio unmutes and you can hear the call
from your radio’s internal speaker and from any connected
remote speaker.
If you remove the handset from its cradle when you receive a call,
the radio unmutes and you can hear the call from your radio’s
internal speaker, from any connected remote speaker and from the
handset earpiece.
Using private handset mode, the radios internal and external speakers
are muted and the call can only be heard from the handset earpiece.

grommet

30.1

Installation

30.1.1

Handset Wiring
The circled numbers in the following instructions refer to items in the
diagram in Table 30.1.
1.

Drill a hole in the chosen mounting surface for the radio to handset
cord and pass the cord through the hole.

Prepare the radio to handset cord, as follows.
■

Cut the radio to handset cord to the required length.

■

Strip away about 60mm (2 inches) of the cable outer sheath on the
end without a connector.

■

Cut off the exposed orange, red, black and bare wires.

■

Strip about 6mm (0.2 inches) of the coating off each of the five
remaining wires.

Secure the radio to handset cord in the handset PCB P-clip b, as
shown in the diagram.

Connect the five wires to the handset PCB connector c.

TMAA10-02 Handset

555

Table 30.1

Handset PCB connector wiring
Handset PCB
Connector

b
c
de
30.1.2

30.1.3

white
or violet

blue

brown

yellow

green

Handset Installation
1.

Press the pushbutton and remove the handset from the locking cradle.

Disassemble the locking cradle by removing the four locking cradle
screws.

Screw the handset mounting plate to the required mounting surface.
Note that mounting screws are not provided in this kit.

Clamp the top part of the locking cradle onto the mounting plate,
and secure it with the four locking cradle screws.

Connecting the Handset to the Radio
Important

556

fgh

Colour Reference

The handset microphone grommet must be installed whenever the handset to radio cord is plugged into the microphone
socket. When installed, the grommet has two functions:
■

to prevent damage to the microphone socket when there
is movement of the microphone cord, and

■

to ensure that the control head is sealed against water,
dust and other environmental hazards.

Plug the radio to microphone cord into the microphone socket on
the radio control head.

Slide the grommet along the cord and push two adjacent corners of the
grommet into the microphone socket cavity.

Squeeze the grommet and push the remaining corners into position.

Check that the grommet is seated correctly in the cavity.

TMAA10-02 Handset

Figure 30.1

Correct handset microphone grommet seating

microphone
grommet
control head

30.2

Radio Programming
Dynamic microphone support must be enabled in the UI Preferences form
of the radio’s programming application, so that audio is optomized for
dynamic microphones. Refer to the online help of the programming
application for more information.

Dynamic
Microphone
Support

Table 30.2

Handset settings in the UI Preferences form
(TM8100 Programming Application)

Field

Setting

Audio Setup
Table 30.3

Enable Options Board Preamp selected
Handset settings in the UI Preferences form
(TM8200, TM9000/TP9000 Programming Application)

Field

Setting

Audio>Audio Setup

Private Handset
Mode

Selected/Cleared

Dynamic Mic Support

selected

If private handset mode is required, the radio needs to be programmed to
mute the audio power amplifier when the handset is out of the cradle. The
audio path is then only through the RX AUDIO line to the handset earpiece.
The following table shows the settings required in the Programmable I/O
form of the radio’s programming application. Refer to the online help of the
programming application for more information.
Note

Table 30.4
Pin

If private handset mode is programmed, then no audio will be
heard from the speakers if the handset is unplugged.

Handset settings in the Programmable I/O form, Digital tab
Direction

CH_GPIO1 Input

Label
None

Action

Active

Force Audio PA Off High

Debounce
25

Signal State
None

Mirrored To
None

TMAA10-02 Handset

557

30.3

Interface Specification
The following table and diagram summarizes the signals used for the handset
on the radio’s microphone connector and shows the interface between the
handset and the radio.

Table 30.5

Handset microphone connector—pins and signals
Pin

Figure 30.2

558

Signal

Handset PCB
Connector

Colour

Description

RX_AUD

brown

receive audio to handset

—

not connected

—

not connected

PTT

white

PTT and hookswitch

MIC

yellow

audio from the handset to dynamic-mic
support board

GND

green

analogue ground

—

not connected

CH_GPIO1 3

blue

programmable line controlling private mode

Handset to. radio interface

TMAA10-02 Handset

TMAA10-03 and TMAA10-06
High-Power Remote Speakers
The TMAA10-03 remote speaker (for the 25W radio) and
the TMAA10-06 remote speaker (for the 40W/50W
radio) are installed in parallel with the radio’s existing
internal speaker. The remote speaker can then be installed
at some distance from the radio, or it can be used to
increase the volume of the audio from the radio’s existing
internal speaker.

mounting
bracket
remote
speaker
cable

socket
housing

The remote speaker is supplied with a socket housing
(already installed) and a flying lead connector. This
connector enables the speaker to be easily removed and
reconnected as required.

flying lead
connector

The flying lead connector is terminated with two
receptacles. The receptacles supplied with the
TMAA10-03 (for 25W radios) are different to those
supplied with the TMAA10-06 (40W/50W radios). Two spare receptacles are included with each
kit, along with four mounting screws and washers.
receptacles

31.1

Installation

Remote Speaker
Mounting

Choose a mounting position for the remote speaker where it will not
interfere with the operation of any of the vehicle controls.

Remove the remote speaker from the mounting bracket and use the
screws and washers provided to fix the mounting bracket securely in
the chosen location.

Important

■

If mounting the bracket onto a metal surface, drill two 3.5mm
(0.14 inch) holes in the appropriate locations and secure the
bracket with the supplied self tapping screws.

■

If mounting the bracket to any other material, such as plastic, drill
two 4.5mm (0.18 inch) holes and attach the bracket with screws
and captive nuts, or similar.

Attach the speaker to the mounting bracket using the thumbscrews.

Important

Check before drilling that the drill will not damage any
components or wiring behind the mounting location.

Check that the speaker cable is protected from engine heat,
sharp edges and from being pinched or crushed.

TMAA10-03 and TMAA10-06 High-Power Remote Speakers

559

Power Connector
Wiring

Run the free end of the speaker cable to the radio power cable and
install the two receptacles in the power connector, as described in the
“Power Connector Wiring” procedure.

Insert the flying lead receptacles into the power connector socket, as shown
in the diagrams below.
Note

The positive remote speaker wire has a white stripe.

TMAA10-03 remote speaker (25W radios)
For the TMAA10-03 remote speaker (25W radios), insert the flying
lead receptacles:
■

the positive wire and receptacle into the position nearest to the red
wire, and

■

the negative wire and receptacle into the position nearest to the
black wire.

+13.8V
(red)
speaker +

flying lead
connector

power
connector

speaker –

ground
(black)

TMAA10-06 remote speaker (40W/50W radios)
For the TMAA10-06 remote speaker (40W/50W radios), insert the
flying lead receptacles:
■

the positive wire and receptacle into position 3, and

■

the negative wire and receptacle into position 2.

+13.8V
(red)
flying lead
connector

speaker – (to pin 2)
SPKR –

e
c
d

ground
(black)

+
SPKR +

speaker + (to pin 3)

power connector
rear view

power connector

Connecting the
Remote Speaker

To connect the remote speaker, plug the flying lead into the housing socket.
To disconnect the speaker, release the locking mechanism and unplug the
flying lead.

560

TMAA10-03 and TMAA10-06 High-Power Remote Speakers

TMAA10-04 Remote PTT Kit and
TMAA10-05 Hands-Free Kit

remote PTT (TMAA10-04)

extension lead for
remote PTT

auxiliary
connector plug

The TMAA10-04 kit uses a conveniently mounted remote
PTT key for PTT operation. When the remote PTT is
activated, the remote microphone is used for communication.
There are three mounting options for the remote microphone
and an extension lead is provided for the remote PTT in the
TMAA10-04 kit.

remote microphone

Important These kits do not meet the IP54 protection standard. Care must be taken
when a radio with a TMAA10-04 or
TMAA10-05 kit installed is being
operated in an environment where
there is water, dust or other
environmental hazards.

remote microphone
mounting options

32.1

The TMAA10-04 remote PTT kit and the TMAA10-05
hands-free kit plug into the radio’s auxiliary connector.
Both kits use the remote electret microphone to replace
communication through the usual rugged microphone.
The rugged microphone can still provide hookswitch
operation, if this is required.

VOX Operation (TMAA10-05 Hands-Free Kit)
Your radio may able to detect the sound of your voice, so that you can make
calls without using the PTT key. Voice-operated transmit (VOX) is turned
on and off either by using a function key programmed for VOX or by
using the radio’s Main menu.

Changing to VOX
Using a Function
Key

The function key programmed for VOX toggles VOX between on and off.
When VOX is turned on, it remains on until the function key is pressed again.
While VOX is on, the VOX indication may be
programmed to appear below the channel information on your display.

Changing to VOX by
using the Main
Menu

Select Menu>Radio Settings>
Function Settings>VOX.

TMAA10-04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10-05 Hands-Free Kit

561

In the VOX menu, choose On.

Press Select.

While VOX is on, the VOX indication may be
programmed to appear below the channel information on your display.

Changing the
Sensitivity of VOX

32.2

You may need to change the threshold at which the radio detects your voice
and makes a call. To do this, you use the VOX Sensitivity menu.
1.

Select Menu>Radio Settings>
Function Settings>VOX Sensitivity.

In the VOX Sensitivity menu, use the scroll keys
or
to adjust the VOX sensitivity to the
desired level.

Press Done to save this setting.

Installation
Important

Installing the
Remote
Microphone

Care should be taken to avoid routing any cables near vehicle pedal controls, steering column and other moving parts.

Choose one of the three mounting options provided for the remote
microphone and determine its most appropriate location.
The mounting position of the microphone should be no more than
50cm (20 inches) from the user’s mouth.

Installing the
Remote PTT
(TMAA10-04)

Route the remote microphone cable so as not to distract the driver.

Mount the remote microphone in the chosen location and check
that the microphone and cable are clear of all the usual movements
performed by the user.

Important
1.

The remote PTT must be operable from a normal
driving position.

Secure the remote PTT in position using the velcro strap and plug the
remote PTT cord into the remote PTT extension lead.
A common position for the remote PTT is on the gear lever of
the vehicle.

562

TMAA10-04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10-05 Hands-Free Kit

Check that the cord and lead do not interfere with the safe operation
of the vehicle.

32.3 Radio Programming for the TMAA10-04 Remote PTT Kit
Remote PTT
Settings in the PTT
Form

The following table shows the settings required in the PTT form of the
programming application. Some of these settings are default settings and
may not need to be changed. Refer to the online help of the programming
application for more information.
Note

The handsfree remote PTT cannot transmit when the rugged
microphone is on the microphone clip (microphone hookswitch
is closed) if:
■

hookswitch operation is programmed for the rugged microphone,
and

■

the Inhibit PTT Transmission When Mic On Hook field is
selected in the PTT tab of the PTT form.

Table 32.1

Remote PTT settings in the PTT form, External PTT (1) tab

Field

Setting

Advanced EPTT1

Remote PTT
Settings in the
Programmable I/O
Form

Pin
AUX_GPI1

Voice

Audio Source

AUX MIC

The following table shows the settings required in the Programmable I/O
form of the programming application. Some of these settings are default
settings and may not need to be changed. Refer to the online help of the
programming application for more information.
Note

Table 32.2

PTT Transmission Type

The Programmable I/O form setting for AUX_GPIO4 must have
the default programming settings and the AUX_GPIO4 pullup
resistor on the radio main PCB must be set for the factory default
of 3.3V (R769 fitted).

Remote PTT settings in the Programmable I/O form, Digital tab
Direction

Label

Action

Active

Debounce

Signal State

Mirrored To

Input

None

External PTT 1 Low

None

AUX_GPIO4 None

None

No Action

None

TMAA10-04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10-05 Hands-Free Kit

563

32.4 Radio Programming for the TMAA10-05 Hands-Free Kit
VOX Settings in the
PTT Form

The following table shows the settings required in the PTT form of the
programming application. For detailed instructions on how to configure a
radio for VOX operation, refer to the section “Configuring VOX” in the
online help of the programming application.
Table 32.3

VOX settings in the PTT form, External PTT (2) or VOX tab

Field

Setting

EPTT2 or VOX Inhibit

Inhibit PTT When Emergency Active

select1

Inhibit PTT Transmission When Mic on Hook cleara
Indicate PTT Inhibit to User
Advanced EPTT2 or VOX PTT Transmission Type

cleara
Voice

Audio Source

AUX MIC

PTT Priority

Highesta

1. These are recommended settings only.

VOX Settings in the
Key Settings Form

In the Key Settings form of the programming application, one of the
function keys on the control head can be programmed to activate VOX.
Table 32.4

VOX settings in the Key Settings form

Field

Setting
Key 11

Function Key Actions

VOX Activation

1. Select the required function key.

32.5

Interface Specification
The following table and diagram summarizes the signals used for the remote
PTT and hands-free kits on the radio’s auxiliary connector and shows the
interface between the kits and the radio.
Table 32.5

Auxiliary connector—pins and signals
Pin

B
J
C
1)
D
1!
E
1@
F
1#
G
1$
H
1%
I
rear view

564

Signal name

Description

+13V8_SW

power to hands-free microphone preamplifier

AUX_GPIO4

reference voltage to pre-amplifier
regulator

AUX_GPI1

PTT signal from hands-free kit

AUX_MIC_AUD microphone audio to the radio

AGND

analogue ground

TMAA10-04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10-05 Hands-Free Kit

Figure 32.1

32.6

TMAA10-04/TMAA10-05
to radio interface
.

Circuit Description
The remote microphone signal is amplified by a pre-amplifier in the
auxiliary connector plug. The power supply to this amplifier is provided by
the +13.8V supply on the auxiliary connector. This supply is filtered and
regulated down to approximately 3.3V. The reference voltage for the
regulator is provided by AUX_GPIO4 line.
The remote microphone signal is fed via AUX_MIC_AUD and an input
selector to the radio’s internal microphone amplifier. The microphone input
selected depends on the PTT source used to make the call. If the remote PTT
is used, then AUX_MIC_AUD is selected. If the control head microphone
PTT is used, then CH_MIC_AUD is selected. Test points for all other
auxiliary connections are provided on the auxiliary connector plug PCB to
facilitate the connection of other devices or signals e.g ignition switch signal.

TMAA10-04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10-05 Hands-Free Kit

565

32.7

PCB Information

32.7.1

TMAA10-04/TMAA10-05 Parts List (PCB IPN 220-01711-01)

Ref.

IPN

Description

C2
C3
C4
C6
C7

015-26330-08
018-15100-00
015-26330-08
015-26100-08
015-26100-08

Cap Cer 0805 330n 5% 10v X7r
Cap 0603 10n 50v X7r +-10%
Cap Cer 0805 330n 5% 10v X7r
Cap Cer 0805 100n 10% X7r 50v
Cap Cer 0805 100n 10% X7r 50v

Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4

000-10084-71
000-10085-71
000-10084-71
000-10084-71

Xstr BC847BW NPN SOT323
Xstr SMD BC857BW PNP SOT323
Xstr BC847BW NPN SOT323
Xstr BC847BW NPN SOT323

R1
R3
R4
R6
R13
R16
R17
R18
R19

038-14220-00
038-14390-10
038-15470-10
038-15330-10
038-15100-10
038-15470-10
038-15150-00
038-15100-10
038-15100-10

Res 0603 2k2 1/16w +-5%
Res 0603 3k9 1%
Res 0603 47k 1/16w+-1%
Res 0603 33k 1%
Res 0603 10k 1/16w +-1%
Res 0603 47k 1/16w+-1%
Res 0603 15k 1/16w +-5%
Res 0603 10k 1/16w +-1%
Res 0603 10k 1/16w +-1%

Ref.

IPN

Description

219-00305-00 cable
220-01711-01 Pcb HFree
240-06010-18 Conn 15w Hood/Cvr Drng MDJ15
252-00010-72 Mic Electret Unidir 2.5mm Plg
402-00006-01 F/Inst TMAA10-04/TMAA10-05 Eng
TMAA10-04 Remote PTT only
236-00001-00 Sw Ptt W/Cbl & Strap

566

TMAA10-04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10-05 Hands-Free Kit

Pre-Amplifier Board Layout

IPN 220-01711-01

32.7.2

TMAA10-04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10-05 Hands-Free Kit

567

32.7.3

568

Pre-Amplifier Board Circuit Diagram

TMAA10-04 Remote PTT Kit and TMAA10-05 Hands-Free Kit

TMAA10-07 Desktop Microphone
The TMAA10-01 desktop microphone is an
omnidirectional dynamic microphone which can be used
in dispatch situations, where the microphone is positioned
on a flat surface. The desktop microphone plugs into the
microphone socket on the radio control head.
LOCK
TRANSMIT

key

MONITOR

The desktop microphone has an internal pre-amplifier and
an adjustable output control on the underside of the
desktop microphone base.

TRANSMIT

key

grommet
MONITOR

key

33.1

Operation
Hold down the MONITOR key and check whether the channel is clear.
If the channel is clear, press the TRANSMIT key (PTT) to transmit. Speak
clearly into the microphone and release the TRANSMIT key when you have
finished talking.
Note

33.2

The MONITOR key can be locked in the ‘on’ position. To do this,
hold the MONITOR key down and slide the LOCK key towards
you. The MONITOR key should now be locked on.

Installation
Important

The desktop microphone grommet must be installed
whenever the desktop microphone is plugged into the
microphone socket. When installed, the grommet has two
functions:
■

to prevent damage to the microphone socket when
there is movement of the microphone cord, and

■

to ensure that the control head is sealed against water,
dust and other environmental hazards.

Plug the microphone cord into the microphone socket on the radio
control head.

TMAA10-07 Desktop Microphone

569

Slide the grommet along the cord and push two adjacent corners of the
grommet into the microphone socket cavity.

Squeeze the grommet and push the remaining corners into position.

Check that the grommet is seated correctly in the cavity.

Figure 33.1

Correct desktop microphone grommet seating

microphone
grommet
control head

33.3

Adjustment
Adjust the output sensitivity of the desktop
microphone using the control accessible from the
underside of the desktop microphone,.
The microphone sensitivity is set to maximum by
turning the control fully clockwise.

33.4

Radio Programming

adjust output level here

The desktop microphone has an internal pre-amplifier. Therefore, the
dynamic microphone support in the UI Preferences form of the radio’s
programming application should not be enabled.

33.5

Desktop microphone connector—pins and signals
Pin

570

TMAA10-07 Desktop Microphone

Signal

Description

—

not connected

—

not connected

—

not connected

MIC_PTT

PTT

MIC_AUD

audio from the microphone

AGND

analogue ground

—

not connected

—

not connected

TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit
The TOPA-SV-024 test unit is used to test and maintain Tait portable and
mobile radios by providing an interface between the radio, a test PC, and
an RF communications test set.
The diagram below shows the front panel of the test unit.
Figure 34.1

34.1

TOPA-SV-024 test unit

Test Equipment Setup
The diagram on the following page shows how the test unit is connected to
the radio, the test PC, and the RF communications test set.
Note

The test unit can also be connected to a Tait Orca portable radio
(TOP) using the TOPA-SV-007 cable, or to a T2000 radio using
the T2000-11 cable. Use with Tait Orca and T2000 radios is not
described in this document.

TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit

571

Figure 34.2

Test equipment setup

Test PC

serial port
(DB9)
RF comms set
T2000-A19
cable

TOPA-SV-024

computer
connector
(RJ12)

RF in/out
(N-type)

transmit audio
connector (BNC)

AUDIO
OUT
(BNC)

AUDIO
IN HI
(BNC)

audio
monitor
out (BNC)

receive audio /
SINAD connector
(BNC)
radio connector
(DB15)
speaker
connector

Oscilloscope
TMAA21-01 cable

microphone
connector (RJ45)

AC input
(BNC)

radio with user interface
TMAA21-01 cable
microphone
connector (RJ45)

power
connector

auxiliary
connector
(DB15)

TMAA23-02 cable
(50W/40W radios)
TMAA20-03 cable
(25W radios)

RF connector
(mini UHF or
BNC)

DC power supply

TMAA20-02 cable
programming
connector (DB9)

radio with blank control head

banana plugs

572

TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit

34.2

Operation
This section explains the function of the TOPA-SV-024 test unit controls.
The procedure for using the test unit is described in the relevant section on
test equipment setup.

34.2.1

Portable / Mobile Switch
This 2-way toggle switch is used to switch attenuation resistors (R4, R5, R6)
in and out of the line from the radio’s positive speaker output to the positive
Rx Audio/SINAD output of the test unit (before the isolating transformer).
■

When set to Portable, the attenuation resistors are switched out.

■

When set to Mobile, the attenuation resistors are switched in
(attenuation 10:1).

Important

34.2.2

Selecting the wrong switch position may result in incorrect
SINAD readings and damage to the test unit.

Mod Audio/Audio Tap In / Off / Mic Audio Switch
This 3-way toggle switch is used to switch between Mod Audio/Audio Tap
In, Mic Audio, and Off (no audio signal).

34.2.3

■

With the Tait Orca portables, this switch can be used for setting up dual
point modulation by applying modulation to different parts of the radio.

■

For normal transmit deviation tests (other portables and mobiles), this
switch is set to Mic Audio.

On Hook / Off Hook Switch
Important

When using the test unit with portables, the On Hook /
Off Hook toggle switch must be set to Off Hook.
Portables do not have a hookswitch, and if the switch is set
to On Hook, the accessory function key of the portable is
activated.

This 2-way toggle switch is used to simulate the microphone hookswitch
opening (“hook off ”) and closing (“hook on”). This is done by switching a
12kΩ resistor (R3) in or out of the MIC_PTT line.
■

When set to Off Hook, the 12kΩ resistor (R3) is switched out of the
MIC_PTT line. This simulates the microphone being removed from the
microphone clip.

■

When set to On Hook, a 12kΩ resistor (R3) is switched into the
MIC_PTT line. This simulates the microphone being placed on the
microphone clip.

TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit

573

34.2.4

Rx / Tx/PTT Switch
This 2-way toggle switch is used to switch between receive and transmit mode.

34.2.5

■

When set to Rx, the PTT line is switched to high impedance.

■

When set to Tx/PTT, the PTT line is pulled to ground.

Speaker / Radio / Load Switch
This 3-way toggle switch is used during receive audio tests to switch the audio
to the test unit speaker (Speaker), to the radio’s internal speaker (Radio) or to
a dummy load consisting of R1 and R2 (Load).
Note

This switch does not disconnect the radio’s internal speaker on
mobiles. If the switch is set to Speaker or Load, this simulates an
external speaker being connected in parallel to the radio’s internal
speaker.

With all settings, a low level audio signal is available for testing through
the SINAD port.
Portable

Mobile

574

■

When set to Speaker, only the speaker of the test unit is active.

■

When set to Radio, only the speaker of the portable is active.

■

When set to Load, no speaker is active. The audio signal is terminated in
the test unit dummy load.

■

When set to Speaker, the speakers of the test unit and the mobile are
both active. The speaker of the mobile cannot be disconnected.

■

When set to Radio, only the speaker of the mobile is active.

■

When set to Load, the speaker of the mobile remains active.

TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit

34.3

PCB Information

34.3.1

Parts List (PCB IPN 220-01418-02A Rev. 4)

Ref.

IPN

Description

Ref.

IPN

Description

BNC1
BNC2
C1
C2
C3
C4
PL1
PL2
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7

240-02100-11
240-02100-11
011-54100-01
011-54100-01
020-59100-06
011-54100-01
240-00010-55
240-04021-60
032-31820-01
032-31820-01
030-55120-20
030-53560-20
030-54270-20
030-52560-20
030-55100-20

Skt Coax BNC 3.5mm Pnl N/Tag
Skt Coax BNC 3.5mm Pnl N/Tag
Cap Cer AI 1n 10% T/C B 50v
Cap Cer AI 1n 10% T/C B 50v
Cap Elec Rdl 100m 16v 6.3x11
Cap Cer AI 1n 10% T/C B 50v
Plg 15w Drng W-Wrap Pnl Mtg
Skt 6w Modr Ph Vrt T-Ent
Res M/F Pwr 17x5 8e2 5% 2.5w
Res M/F Pwr 17x5 8e2 5% 2.5w
Res Flm 4x1.6 12k 5% 0.4w
Res Flm 4x1.6 560e 5% 0.4w
Res Flm 4x1.6 2k7 5% 0.4w
Res Flm 4x1.6 56e 5% 0.4w
Res Flm 4x1.6 10k 5% 0.4w

SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
TRAN

230-00010-42
230-00010-57
230-00010-03
230-00010-16
230-00010-03
054-00010-17

Sw Tgl On Off On Dpdt Ms500hb
Sw Tgl Dpdt On-On Pnl Mtg
Sw Tgl Spst Mini Pnl Mtg
Sw Tgr Spst 3-Pos Pnl Mtg
Sw Tgl Spst Mini Pnl Mtg
Xfmr Line 600 Ohm 1:1

Not part of the PCB:
SPKR
032-31820-01
250-00010-19

Res M/F Pwr 17x5 8e2 5% 2.5w
Spkr C/W Rubber Sealing Ring

34.3.2

PCB Layout

top side

IPN 220-01418-02

bottom side

TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit

575

576

TOPA-SV-024 Test Unit

Portable
Mobile

Portable

Mobile

Portable
Mobile

Portable

Portable
Mobile

Portable

Mobile

Portable

Mobile

Portable

Mobile

not fitted

MOD AUDIO / AUDIO TAP IN

not fitted

RADIO

The component values in the schematic diagram are
indicative only. Refer to the parts list for actual values
used.

not fitted

SHOULD BE DPTT

SPKR 8.2Ω
IPN 032-31820-01

not part of PCB

SPEAKER 4Ω
IPN 250-00010-19

34.3.3
Circuit Diagram

Tait General Software Licence Agreement
This legal document is an Agreement between
you (the “Licensee”) and Tait Electronics
Limited (“Tait”). By using any of the Software
or Firmware items prior-installed in the
related Tait product, included on CD or
downloaded from the Tait website,
(hereinafter referred to as “the Software or
Firmware”) you agree to be bound by the
terms of this Agreement. If you do not agree
to the terms of this Agreement, do not install
and use any of the Software or Firmware.
If you install and use any of the Software or
Firmware that will be deemed to be
acceptance of the terms of this
licence agreement.
The terms of this Agreement shall apply
subject only to any express written terms of
agreement to the contrary between Tait and
the Licensee.
Licence
TAIT GRANTS TO YOU AS LICENSEE THE NONEXCLUSIVE RIGHT TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR
FIRMWARE ON A SINGLE MACHINE PROVIDED
YOU MAY ONLY:

1. COPY THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE INTO
ANY MACHINE READABLE OR PRINTED FORM
FOR BACKUP PURPOSES IN SUPPORT OF YOUR
USE OF THE PROGRAM ON THE SINGLE MACHINE
(CERTAIN PROGRAMS, HOWEVER, MAY INCLUDE
MECHANISMS TO LIMIT OR INHIBIT COPYING,
THEY ARE MARKED “COPY PROTECTED”),
PROVIDED THE COPYRIGHT NOTICE MUST BE
REPRODUCED AND INCLUDED ON ANY SUCH
COPY OF THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE;
AND / OR

2. MERGE IT INTO ANOTHER PROGRAM FOR
YOUR USE ON THE SINGLE MACHINE (ANY
PORTION OF ANY SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE
MERGED INTO ANOTHER PROGRAM WILL
CONTINUE TO BE SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND
CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT).
THE LICENSEE MAY NOT DUPLICATE, MODIFY,
REVERSE COMPILE OR REVERSE ASSEMBLE ANY
SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE IN WHOLE OR PART.

Important Notice
THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE MAY CONTAIN
OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE COMPONENTS
(“OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS”). OPEN SOURCE
COMPONENTS ARE EXCLUDED FROM THE TERMS
OF THIS AGREEMENT EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
STATED IN THIS AGREEMENT AND ARE COVERED
BY THE TERMS OF THEIR RESPECTIVE LICENCES
WHICH MAY EXCLUDE OR LIMIT ANY
WARRANTY FROM OR LIABILITY OF THE
DEVELOPERS AND/OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OF
THE OPEN SOURCE COMPONENT FOR THE
PERFORMANCE OF THOSE OPEN SOURCE
COMPONENTS. YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY
THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF EACH SUCH
LICENCE. FOR MORE INFORMATION SEE:

http://support.taitworld.com/go/opensource
Title to Software
THIS AGREEMENT DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A
CONTRACT OF SALE IN RELATION TO THE
SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE SUPPLIED TO THE
LICENSEE. NOT WITHSTANDING THE LICENSEE
MAY OWN THE MAGNETIC OR OTHER PHYSICAL
MEDIA ON WHICH THE SOFTWARE OR
FIRMWARE WAS ORIGINALLY SUPPLIED, OR HAS
SUBSEQUENTLY BEEN RECORDED OR FIXED, IT IS
A FUNDAMENTAL TERM OF THIS AGREEMENT
THAT AT ALL TIMES TITLE AND OWNERSHIP OF
THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE, WHETHER ON
THE ORIGINAL MEDIA OR OTHERWISE, SHALL
REMAIN VESTED IN TAIT OR THIRD PARTIES
WHO HAVE GRANTED LICENCES TO TAIT.

Term and Termination
THIS LICENCE SHALL BE EFFECTIVE UNTIL
TERMINATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
PROVISIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE LICENSEE
MAY TERMINATE THIS LICENCE AT ANY TIME BY
DESTROYING ALL COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE OR
FIRMWARE AND ASSOCIATED WRITTEN
MATERIALS. THIS LICENCE WILL BE TERMINATED
AUTOMATICALLY AND WITHOUT NOTICE FROM
TAIT IN THE EVENT THAT THE LICENSEE FAILS TO
COMPLY WITH ANY TERM OR CONDITION OF
THIS AGREEMENT. THE LICENSEE AGREES TO
DESTROY ALL COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE OR
FIRMWARE AND ASSOCIATED WRITTEN
MATERIALS IN THE EVENT OF
SUCH TERMINATION.

577

Limited Warranty

Law and Jurisdiction

THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE (INCLUDING
OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS) IS SUPPLIED BY
TAIT AND ACCEPTED BY THE LICENSEE “AS IS”
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
BEING LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES AS
TO MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE LICENSEE
ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE SOFTWARE OR
FIRMWARE (INCLUDING OPEN SOURCE
COMPONENTS) IS USED BY IT IN BUSINESS AND
ACCORDINGLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY LAW NO TERMS OR WARRANTIES
WHICH ARE IMPLIED BY LEGISLATION SHALL
APPLY TO THIS AGREEMENT. TAIT DOES NOT
WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED
IN THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE (INCLUDING
OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS) WILL MEET THE
LICENSEE’S REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE
OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE
(INCLUDING OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS) WILL
BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE.

THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE SUBJECT TO AND
CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
NEW ZEALAND LAW AND DISPUTES BETWEEN
THE PARTIES CONCERNING THE PROVISIONS
HEREOF SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE NEW
ZEALAND COURTS OF LAW. PROVIDED HOWEVER
TAIT MAY AT ITS ELECTION BRING PROCEEDINGS
FOR BREACH OF THE TERMS HEREOF OR FOR
THE ENFORCEMENT OF ANY JUDGEMENT IN
RELATION TO A BREACH OF THE TERMS HEREOF
IN ANY JURISDICTION TAIT CONSIDERS FIT FOR
THE PURPOSE OF ENSURING COMPLIANCE WITH
THE TERMS HEREOF OR OBTAINING RELIEF FOR
BREACH OF THE TERMS HEREOF .

Exclusion of Liability
IN NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TAIT BE UNDER
ANY LIABILITY TO THE LICENSEE, OR ANY
OTHER PERSON WHATSOEVER, WHETHER IN
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT
(EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS
AGREEMENT), EQUITY, UNDER ANY STATUTE,
OR OTHERWISE AT LAW FOR ANY LOSSES OR
DAMAGES WHETHER GENERAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE, DIRECT, INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH ANY USE OR INABILITY OF
USING THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE
(INCLUDING OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS).
THE LICENSEE’S SOLE REMEDY AGAINST TAIT
WILL BE LIMITED TO BREACH OF CONTRACT
AND TAIT’S SOLE AND TOTAL LIABILITY FOR ANY
SUCH CLAIM SHALL BE LIMITED AT THE OPTION
OF TAIT TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF
THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE OR THE REFUND
OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE SOFTWARE
OR FIRMWARE.

No Dealings
THE LICENSEE MAY NOT SUBLICENSE, ASSIGN OR
TRANSFER THE LICENCE OR THE PROGRAM
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS
AGREEMENT. ANY ATTEMPT OTHERWISE TO
SUBLICENSE, ASSIGN OR TRANSFER ANY OF THE
RIGHTS, DUTIES OR OBLIGATIONS HEREUNDER
IS VOID.

No Other Terms
THE LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT HAS
READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTANDS IT AND
AGREES TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND
CONDITIONS. THE LICENSEE FURTHER AGREES
THAT SUBJECT ONLY TO ANY EXPRESS WRITTEN
TERMS OF AGREEMENT TO THE CONTRARY
BETWEEN TAIT AND THE LICENSEE THIS IS THE
COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE
AGREEMENT BETWEEN IT AND TAIT IN
RELATION TO THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE
WHICH SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR
AGREEMENT, ORAL OR WRITTEN AND ANY
OTHER COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE
LICENSEE AND TAIT RELATING TO THE
SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE.

General
THE LICENSEE CONFIRMS THAT IT SHALL
COMPLY WITH THE PROVISIONS OF LAW IN
RELATION TO THE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE.

578

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Modify Date                     : 2006:07:05 15:45:54+12:00
Keywords                        : MMA-00005, TM8100, TM8200, service
Create Date                     : 2006:07:05 14:23:21Z
Page Count                      : 578
Creation Date                   : 2006:07:05 14:23:21Z
Mod Date                        : 2006:07:05 15:45:54+12:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Author                          : Tait Electronics Limited
Metadata Date                   : 2006:07:05 15:45:54+12:00
Creator                         : Tait Electronics Limited
Title                           : TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : SinglePage

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

TM8100/TM8200 Service Manual TM8000/TM8100 8200 Issue 4/MMA 00005 04 TM8100 4 MMA

TM8000/TM8100-8200 Service Manual Issue 4/MMA-00005-04 TM8100-8200 Service Manual Issue 4 MMA-00005-04 TM8100-8200 Service Manual Issue 4

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation